GEORGETOWN DISTRICT HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION & …GEORGETOWN DISTRICT HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION & RENOVATIONS - PHASE 2 Mechanical Supplementary Bid Submission Form Project No. 09019 Page 2

GEORGETOWN DISTRICT HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION & RENOVATIONS - PHASE 2

MECHANICAL Index Section 15000 Project No. 09019 Page 1 Section No. Description Page Nos. MST Mechanical Supplementary Bid Submission Form 1 - 5 15001 Drawing List 1 15010 General Provisions 1 - 26 15020 Testing, Adjusting & Balancing 1 - 4 15200 Insulation - General Provisions 1 - 2 15201 Pipe Insulation 1 - 4 15202 Duct & Plenum Insulation 1 - 4 15400 Plumbing & Drainage - General Provisions 1 - 3 15401 Drainage, Waste & Vent Piping 1 - 7 15402 Plumbing Accessories 1 - 8 15403 Plumbing Fixtures 1 - 5 15404 Hot Water Storage Heaters 1 15405 Fire Extinguishers 1 - 2 15500 Sprinklers 1 - 8 15700 Pipe & Fittings - General Provisions 1 - 2 15701 Pipe & Fittings 1 - 14 15702 Piping Devices 1 - 2 15703 Hot Water Heating Devices 1 - 2 15705 Natural Gas Equipment 1 - 2 15706 Pumps 1 - 3 15707 Heating Units 1 - 2 15708 Water Treatment 1 - 2 15800 Air Distribution - General Provisions 1 - 2


MECHANICAL Index Section 15000 Project No. 09019 Page 2 Section No. Description Page Nos. 15801 Duct Construction 1 - 6 15802 Ductwork Accessories 1 - 6 15803 Vibration Isolation 1 15804 Grilles & Diffusers 1 15805 Air Filters 1 15808 Commercial Fans 1 - 4 15809 Air Terminal Units 1 15810 Roof-Mounted Package - HVAC Units 1 - 9 15811 Outdoor Air Handling Unit - DESIGNATED HRU-20 1 - 12 15812 Indoor Heat Recovery Air Handling Unit - DESIGNATED HRU-21 1 - 12 15813 Air Handling Units - DESIGNATED AHU-20 1 - 2 15900 Temperature Controls 1 - 32 15950 Refrigeration - General Provisions 1 - 3 15951 Pipe & Fittings 1 - 2 15952 Air Conditioning Equipment 1 - 22

GEORGETOWN DISTRICT HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION & RENOVATIONS - PHASE 2 Mechanical Supplementary Bid Submission Form Project No. 09019 Page 1

1.1. Submission Requirement Note that this mechanical supplementary bid submission form is to be submitted, BY FAX, by all mechanical bidders, to the offices of:

Snyder and Associates

920 Yonge Street, Suite 700, Toronto ON M4W 3C7, Ph: 416-966-5444 Fax: 416-966-4443

on the day following the close of mechanical bids at the construction bid depository of Ontario. Do not submit this Mechanical Supplementary Bid Submission Form to the Bid Depository.

1.2. Print Mechanical Contractor’s Name, Phone & Fax Name: ____________________________________________________ Phone Number: Fax Number: __________________

This completed Mechanical Supplementary Bid Submission Form is submitted in conjunction with our Bid to the Construction Bid Depository of Ontario, dated:

_________________ For School: _____________________________________ 1.3. List of Sub-Contractors

1.3.1. We, the Bidder, propose to have the following Sub-Contractors to the Mechanical

Building Services perform the Work on this project which are an integral part of this Bid.

1.3.2. We, the Bidder, confirm that we have investigated their reliability, bonding abilities where required, and competence to carry out the Work as specified. We agree that no changes to this list will be made without the express written approval of the Consultants and the Board.


1.3.3. We the Bidder confirm that the division of Work among all the subcontractors and suppliers/installers is our responsibility and we covenant that neither the Consultants, nor the Board, will be requested to act as an arbiter to establish subcontract limits between Sections or Division of Work.

Section of Work: Piping (HVAC) Name: _______________________________________ Sheet Metal Name: _______________________________________ Insulation Name: _______________________________________ Plumbing and Drainage Name: _______________________________________ Sprinklers Name: _______________________________________ Controls Name: _______________________________________ 1.4. List of Manufacturers & Suppliers

1.4.1. We, the Bidder, acknowledge that our Bid Price is based on the completed List of

Manufacturers/Suppliers below. 1.4.1.1. We agree that if no name is circled, in the “Acceptable Alternate” Column,

the name identified in the column titled BASE BID – BASIS OF SUBMISSION shall be used.

1.4.1.2. Where more than one name is indicated in the ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATE column, and we elected NOT to base our bid on the BASE BID, we have CIRCLED the one on which the Bid Price is based.

1.4.1.3. We agree that the Board reserves the right to accept or reject any of the proposed alternates listed in the “Acceptable Alternate” Column.

1.4.1.4. By circling a manufacturer/supplier from the “Acceptable Alternate” Column, we assume full responsibility for ensuring that all space, weight, connections, power and wiring requirements etc. are considered. We understand that all costs incurred for additional components, changes to service, structural and space requirements, layouts and plans, etc. are included in our Bid.


MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT LIST BASE BID ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATE

1. Plumbing Fixtures

2. Stainless Sinks

3. Plumbing Trim/Brass

4. Flush valves

5. Wash Fountain

6. Valves/Brass

7. Valves Butterfly

8. Cleanouts

9. Access Doors

10. Floor Drains

11. Fire Extinguishers/Fire Blanket

12. Emergency Eye/Face Wash

13. Thermostatic Mixing Valves

14. Grilles & Diffusers

15. Exhaust fans

16. Fire Dampers

17. Thermometers and Gauges

18. Convectors, force flows & unit heaters, wall fin

19. Pipe Labels

20. Expansion Hoses and Joints

21. Heat Recovery Air Handling Unit (indoor)

22. Heat Recovery Air Handling Unit (outdoor)

23. Make-Up Air Roof-Top Unit (outdoor)

24. Air Conditioning Units (split systems)


MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT LIST BASE BID ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATE

25. Grease Interceptors

26. Sprinklers

27. Domestic Hot Water Storage Tank

1.5. Unit Prices

1.5.1. We, the Bidder, enclose herein Unit Prices which are an integral part of the Bid. We

agree that Unit Prices shall be in effect for the duration of this Project’s Work.

1.5.2. We further agree that the Unit Prices will be used for additions and deletions and that the credit rate for deletions shall be at (80%) eighty percent.

1.6. Labour Rates

1.6.1. We, the Bidder, enclose herein the Labour Rates which are an integral part of our Bid.

We confirm that the Labour Rates shall be in effect for the duration of the Project Work. We further stipulate that the Board is not obliged to accept any Labour Rates indicated.

1.6.2. Cost of labour at the following rates shall be applied for additions or deletions to the work not covered by Unit Prices. The Labour Rates quoted below represent the net cost to the Sub-Contractor(s), exclusive of overhead and profit but including salary, and all agreed local union benefits, etc. (See allowable percentages on Overhead and Profit in Supplementary General Conditions to CCDC 2.)

Plumbing & Drainage Trade Person $ Per Hour HVAC Piping Trade Person $ Per Hour Insulation Trade Person $ ________________________ Per Hour Sheet Metal Trade Person (Shop) $ ________________________ Per Hour (Field) $ ________________________ Per Hour


1.7. Signature Of Mechanical Supplementary Bid Submission Form We are submitting this Mechanical Supplementary Bid Submission Form under a Corporate Seal as a Limited Company, or witnessed as an individual or partnership in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders.

NAME OF BIDDER ______________________________________________________ PRINT NAME OF SIGNING OFFICER _______________________________________ PRINT TITLE OF SIGNING OFFICER _______________________________________ SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNING OFFICER____________________________ DATED AT ____________________THIS ______DAY OF__________________ 2009


MECHANICAL Drawing List Section 15001 Project No. 09019 Page 1 Drawing No. Description M-0.1P2 LEGEND/ROOM INDEX AND DRAWING LIST: PHASE TWO M-0.2P2 GROUND FLOOR PLAN: GENERAL ARRANGEMENT: PHASE

TWO M-0.3P2 SECOND FLOOR PLAN: GENERAL ARRANGEMENT: PHASE

TWO M-0.4P2 ROOF PLAN: GENERAL ARRANGEMENT: PHASE TWO M-1.0P2 GROUND FLOOR PLAN: DEMOLITION: PHASE TWO M-2.0P2 ROOF PLAN: PHASE TWO M-2.1P2 GROUND FLOOR PART PLANS: UNDERGROUND PLUMBING:

PHASE TWO M-2.2P2 GROUND FLOOR PART PLANS: PLUMBING: PHASE TWO M-2.3P2 GROUND FLOOR PART PLANS: PLUMBING: PHASE TWO M-3.0P2 GROUND FLOOR PART PLANS: HVA/C: PHASE TWO

M-4.0P2 GROUND FLOOR PART PLAN: HEATING: PHASE TWO M-5.0P2 MECHANICAL PENTHOUSE: PHASE TWO M-6.0P2 GROUND FLOOR: PART PLANS: SPRINKLERS: PHASE TWO M-7.0P2 MECHANICAL DETAILS M-7.1P2 MECHANICAL DETAILS AND SCHEMATICS M-7.2P2 MECHANICAL DETAILS AND SCHEMATICS M-7.3P2 MECHANICAL DETAILS AND SCHEMATICS M-7.4P2 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES


MECHANICAL General Provisions Section 15010 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Related Instructions

.1 Conform to General Requirements, Division 1

.2 This Section 15010 shall apply to and govern all work of Division 15. 1.2 Related Work

.1 It is the intent of these specifications to furnish and install all materials and equipment as hereinafter specified and/or as shown on the drawings in such a manner as to leave each of the systems of the mechanical trades complete and in satisfactory condition.

.2 Where used, words "Section" and "Division" shall also include other Sub-

Contractors engaged on site to perform work to make building and site complete in all respects.

.3 Where used, word "supply" shall mean furnishing to site in location required or

directed complete with accessory parts.

.4 Where used, word "install" shall mean secured in place and connected up for operation as noted or directed.

.5 Where used, word "provide" shall mean supply and install as each is described

above.

.6 Where used, words "Municipality" or "Authorities", shall mean any agency that enforces the applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or code of the place of the work.

.7 Where used, word "work" shall mean all equipment, permits, materials and

labour to provide a complete mechanical installation as required and detailed in the Drawings and Specifications.

.8 Where used, word "Consultant" shall mean the project architect.

.9 Where used, words "Drawings" and "Specifications" are referred to, it means the

"Contract Documents".

.10 Where used, words "Prime Mechanical Contractor" shall mean the supervisory Mechanical Contractor of all Mechanical Sub-Contractors.


MECHANICAL General Provisions Section 15010 Project No. 09019 Page 2

.11 The terms "instructions" or "as instructed" or "where instructed" mean as instructed by the Consultant, including supplementary instruction notices; job site instruction notices; job site instructions by a field representative/ inspector appointed by the Consultant and including all comments made regarding submittal of shop drawings and samples for review.

.12 The term "exposed" means, within the line of sight of any person standing or sitting in the occupied space, unless defined otherwise in the following sections.

.13 The term "concealed" means, not exposed.

.14 The term "listed" means, that the materials or equipment are tested in accordance with applicable standards, and are approved and listed for their intended use by a testing company approved by the Authorities having jurisdiction.

.15 The term "approved", "approvals", etc., means, approved by Authorities having jurisdiction as conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents.

.16 The term "acceptable" or "acceptance", etc., means, acceptable to the Consultant as conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents.

.17 The term "submit for review" or "submit notice", etc., means, submit to the Consultant.

.18 The term "subject to review" means, work or materials laid out for review by the Consultant. Obtain instruction from the Consultant before proceeding with the work. Submit further information, shop drawings, samples etc., as specified and/or as may be reasonably requested by the Consultant.

.19 The term "accessible" used alone means, readily accessible by a person using tools as required without cutting or breaking out materials.

.20 The term "noted" means, notes on the drawings, the detail drawings and on the Schedules.

1.3 Discrepancies & Omissions .1 The specifications are to be considered as an integral part of the plans which

accompany them; neither the plans nor the specifications shall be used alone. Any item or subject omitted from one, but which is mentioned or reasonably implied in the other, shall be considered as properly and sufficiently specified, and must therefore, be provided. Notify the Consultant in wiring of any discrepancy between the drawings and the Specifications. Misinterpretations of either the plans or the specifications shall not relieve this Division of responsibility.


MECHANICAL General Provisions Section 15010 Project No. 09019 Page 3 1.4 Inspection of Premises & Site

.1 Visit the site of the building and become thoroughly familiar with all the conditions to be met in carrying out the work covered by these specifications. No extras will be allowed for failure to properly evaluate conditions which affect the scope of the work included in this Division.

1.5 Interpretation of Drawings

.1 The drawings upon which this contract is based show the arrangements, general design and extent of the piping, ductwork and other systems. These systems are suitably outlined on the drawings with regard to sizes, locations, general arrangement and installation details. The mains and connections thereto are shown more or less in diagram, except where in certain cases, the drawings may include details giving the exact locations and arrangements required. All piping and ductwork shall be concealed unless shown otherwise. The Mechanical Contract Drawings do not intend to show Architectural or Structural details.

.2 Where any parts of the system and/or pieces of equipment are located by

dimensions on the drawings, said dimensions shall be checked and verified in the field. Each Division shall make without additional charge or expense to the Owner, any necessary changes, additions or offsets to the runs to accommodate structural conditions. The Consultant shall be notified immediately and his authority secured in writing for such revisions before proceeding with the work.

.3 As the work progresses, and before installing fixtures and other fittings and

equipment which may interfere with the work of other trades, each Contractor shall consult with the Consultant and obtain detail drawings or instructions for the exact location of such equipment.

1.6 Record Drawings

.1 The Consultant will provide an extra set of whiteprints to be marked up by this Division as the job progresses, showing all changes and deviations from the plans, so that on completion of the job, the Consultant will have a record of the exact location of all piping, ductwork and equipment. These drawings shall be available during construction at all times and will be reviewed monthly by the Consultant.

.2 Record drawings shall locate all concealed shut-off valves, dampers, control valves and concealed air vents.



.3 The Consultant will provide to the Prime Mechanical Contractor the AutoCAD disk for a fee of $500 plus GST for this purpose. The Prime Mechanical Contractor will be required to sign "Transfer of Files on Electronic Media" Form in order to receive the files.

1.7 Interference Drawings .1 Before shop fabrication begins or undertaking installation work inside the

building, prepare an integrated set of mechanical interference sketches, where indicated on the drawings.

.2 These sketches shall be prepared by the Prime Mechanical Contractor with the co-operation of other trades and shall show the location or space allocated for the work of each trade.

.3 Submit two (2) copies of detailed interference sketches, showing structural members, electrical conduits, devices and all Mechanical elements to the Consultant for review and general approval before proceeding with the work.

.4 Copies of these reviewed interference drawings shall be submitted to all trades, the General Contractor, the Architect, and the Consultant, and general approval shall be obtained before the space allotment and installation.

.5 As a minimum, interference drawings shall be made for all areas of mechanical equipment rooms, duct shafts and corridor ceiling spaces.

.6 Work that has been installed before review of interference drawings, and has been determine that it is in conflict with the building, shall be removed from the site at no extra cost to the Owner. The work, approved by the Consultant, shall be installed at no extra cost to the Owner.

1.8 Standards of Material & Equipment

.1 Material and equipment are specifically described and named in this specification as base bid, alternate products and acceptable products.

.2 Where the term "acceptable products" is used, the bid may be based on any of the acceptable products.

.3 Where the "design based on" specification is used, the bid must be based on the specified equipment. The "acceptable products" shall be listed on the Tender Form and the Owner shall have the final option of accepting or rejecting alternate equipment.


MECHANICAL General Provisions Section 15010 Project No. 09019 Page 5 1.9 Manufacturers, Shop Drawings & Submittals

.1 Before fabrication of any materials and/or equipment, submit shop drawings and

data sheets covering all items of equipment listed as requiring shop drawings. Shop drawings to be submitted are listed in each section under SUBMITTALS. These will be reviewed and returned to the Contractor. Materials shall not be ordered until "accepted" review has been given.

.2 The Prime Mechanical Contractor is to consult with the Consultant on the manner in which drawings will be handled. Supply metric information for metric projects.

.3 Equipment requiring electrical wiring by Division 16 will have the electrical wiring diagrams submitted with the shop drawings. Shop drawings will not be reviewed unless wiring diagrams accompany the equipment drawings.

.4 For whiteprint-type shop drawings, eight (8) copies as required. For 8-1/2 x 11 fixture cuts, submit eight (8) copies of booklets as required.

.5 The Prime Mechanical Contractor is to keep track of the shop drawings and the subsequent equipment delivery using a Review Summary Form similar to the form shown below. This form is to be updated and presented at each job meeting until all the equipment is on the job.

.6 The shop drawings must apply to the equipment under consideration. Advertising literature and comprehensive data sheets are not acceptable.

.7 The shop drawings must contain the following information: job name, equipment tag, actual dimensions of unit and dimensioned location and size of all field connections, model, performance curves, capacity, HP, voltage and all accessories listed in the specifications and/or being provided, and the operating points of the proposed equipment. Room schedules are to be provided for multiple units.

.8 The shop drawings submitted for review must first be carefully checked by the Prime Mechanical Contractor and bear the Contractor's identification review stamp or signature. Drawings will not be considered otherwise.

.9 Shop drawings will be returned "No Comment", "Amend and Submit", or "Rejected". .1 "No Comment" Drawings shall be considered as conforming with the

design concept.

.2 "Amend & Submit" Drawings shall be considered as conforming with the design concept, including corrections as noted on drawings. These drawings shall be corrected and re-submitted for final review but such re-submission shall not hold up manufacture.



.3 "Rejected" These drawings are rejected and work shall not proceed on the manufacture of this equipment. The drawings shall be re-drawn or corrected, and re-submitted with corrections as noted on the drawings or a letter attached thereto.

.10 All shop drawings must be submitted promptly.

.11 This review by the Consultant is for the sole purpose of verifying conformance with the general design concept. This review shall not mean that the Consultant approved the detailed design inherent in the shop drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with the Contractor, and such review shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for meeting all requirements for the contract documents. The Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site, for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation and for co-ordination of the work of other interfacing trades, as well as compliance with code and inspection authorities, such as CSA, etc.

GEORGETOWN DISTRICT HIGH SCHOOL - ADDITION & RENOVATIONS - PHASE 2 MECHANICAL General Provisions Section 15010 Project No. 09019 Page 7

STATUS LEGEND 'A' - REVIEWED AND RETURNED 'B' - REJECTED, TO BE RESUBMITTED 'C' - HELD BY CONSULTANT

MECHANICAL SHOP DRAWING REVIEW SUMMARY

EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION

TARGET SUBMITTAL

DATE NAME CONTACT PHONE NO.

DATE OF DRAWINGS TO CONSULTANT

STATUS DATE

DRAWINGS RETURNED

SCHEDULED DELIVERY

DATE

Section 15201 Pipe/Duct Insulation

Section 15400 Grease Interceptor

Section 15402 Plumbing Accessories

Section 15403 Plumbing Fixtures

Section 15500 Sprinklers

Section 15705 Gas Pressure Reducing Valve

Section 15707 Heating Units

Section 15802 Fire Dampers

Section 15804 Grilles & Diffusers

Section 15808 Exhaust Fans

Section 15810 Make Up Air Unit

Section 15810 Gas/Electric Cooling Package Roof Top Unit

GEORGETOWN DISTRICT HIGH SCHOOL - ADDITION & RENOVATIONS - PHASE 2 MECHANICAL General Provisions Section 15010 Project No. 09019 Page 8

STATUS LEGEND 'A' - REVIEWED AND RETURNED 'B' - REJECTED, TO BE RESUBMITTED 'C' - HELD BY CONSULTANT

MECHANICAL SHOP DRAWING REVIEW SUMMARY

EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION

TARGET SUBMITTAL

DATE NAME CONTACT PHONE NO.

DATE OF DRAWINGS TO CONSULTANT

STATUS DATE

DRAWINGS RETURNED

SCHEDULED DELIVERY

DATE

Section 15811 Outdoor Heat Recovery Units

Section 15812 Indoor Heat Recovery Units

Section 15813 Air Handling Unit

Section 15900 Temperature Controls



1.10 Maintenance & Maintenance Manuals .1 During the one (1) year guarantee period, commencing after Substantial

Completion Letter has been issued by the Architect's Office, maintain all equipment installed as part of this Division. This is to include lubrication of bearings, cleaning of strainers, etc., except the replacement of air filters and water treatment. This agreement shall be part of the written guarantee. This work shall be carried out in the presence of the building custodian, and a letter shall be sent to the Consultant stating that this work was carried out. Three (3) maintenance inspections must be carried out by the Prime Mechanical Contractor during this one (1) year period (at three months, six months and twelve months after Substantial Completion Letter issued by the Architect). Submit written report to Owner and Consultant after each inspection.

.2 This maintenance shall continue up to the date of instruction of the Owner's

designated representatives, at which time each piece of equipment is to be lubricated and checked in the presence of the Owner's representative(s).

.3 Not later than three (3) weeks prior to application for inspection by Consultant for

Substantial Performance, submit records and maintenance manuals to Consultant.

.4 Prepare two (2) sets of "letter" sized, hard-cover, three-ring, black, maintenance

manuals, containing dimensioned certified prints of each piece of mechanical equipment and Manufacturer's recommended maintenance instructions, air balancing reports, and wiring diagrams. Tabulated at the front of this binder is to be a maintenance schedule for each piece of equipment, and lubricant to be used, and a tabulation of things to be checked at each piece of equipment. Maintenance Manuals shall be presented in ASHRAE GPC4 format.

.5 Maintenance Manuals will be requested by the Consultant shortly after the final submission of all shop drawings. Maintenance manuals must be submitted and reviewed before training of the Owner's personnel and before a final inspection will be carried out.

.6 In addition to the three (3) maintenance inspections called for in Item .1, the Prime Mechanical Contractor shall organize and attend bi-weekly site meetings with the Owner's representative to review mechanical system deficiencies. The meetings will commence after substantial completion of the project has been granted and extend for four (4) months for a total of nine (9) meetings. The Contractor will take minutes of each meeting indicating status of all mechanical deficiencies. This Contractor shall issue copies of the minutes to the General Contractor, Architect, Owner, and Mechanical Consultant after each meeting.



1.11 Electrical Wiring & Wiring Diagrams .1 All motors for equipment under this Division will be by this Division. All starters,

switches and power wiring will be provided by Division 16, except where noted. All motors, switches and equipment shall be of Canadian manufacture: Westinghouse Canada, Canadian General Electric, Allen-Bradley, Square 'D', Robins & Meyers, Lincoln, Tamper.

.2 Provide with shop drawings, a comprehensive wiring diagram for all mechanical equipment requiring review. Shop drawings will not be reviewed unless accompanied by the wiring diagrams.

.3 Refer to Division 16, 'Wiring for Mechanical Equipment' for wiring of Division 15

equipment. 1.12 Motors

.1 Single-phase motors for fans and pumps are to be capacitor start/capacitor run.

.2 Three-phase, high efficiency, motors shall be used for fans and pumps that are not part of packaged equipment where detailed in the Specifications. Motors shall meet or exceed ASHRAE Standard 90.1 (latest edition) motor high efficiency levels.

.3 Submit to the Consultant an invoice, packing slip or other certificate from the Motor Supplier identifying the motor as a high-efficiency type.

.4 All motors are to be 1800 RPM unless otherwise specified.

1.13 Access Panels & Doors .1 For Non-Fire-Rated Separation:

.1 Supply for finished ceiling or wall surfaces, Smillie, McAdams Summerlin Limited, Le Hage (Ancon Industries Incorporated) or approved equal access doors of a suitable size to provide access to plumbing cleanouts and for servicing dampers, valves and equipment which will be concealed. Minimum size for reach-in access to be 12" x 12" (300 mm x 300 mm) and 18" x 18" (450 mm x 450 mm) for man access.

.2 Door and frame to be 16 gauge prime-coated steel with concealed hinges and positive locking and self-opening screwdriver lock.

.3 Prime Mechanical Contractor shall include for the installation of all access doors supplied by Division 15. Engage and pay the respective General Trade on site to install same.



.2 Fire-Rated Separations: .1 Supply access doors in fire-rated ceiling assemblies, walls and shafts.

Access doors shall be Smillie, McAdams Summerlin Limited, Le Hage (Ancon Industries Incorporated) or approved equal ULC listed, manufactured and installed in accordance with NFPA-80.

.2 Door to be complete with 16 gauge steel frame with concealed continuous hinge and key-operated lock and self closer, double wall 20 gauge prime-coated steel door with 2" (50 mm) thick insulation.

.3 ULC rating 1-1/2 hours, temperature rise maximum 250°F (120°C) in thirty (30) minutes.

.4 Prime Mechanical Contractor shall include for the installation of all access doors supplied by Division 15. Engage and pay the respective General Trade on site to install same.

.3 Size access panel doors to provide adequate access and correspond with the type of structural and architectural finish.

.4 Ensure proper fire resistance rating of doors/panels in fire separations.

.5 Base Bid: .1 Provide the following:

.1 Type RW recessed for "SG" board in wet areas. .2 Type TM flush mount for tile and masonry. .3 Type WB flush for wall board.

.2 Materials & Finish:

.1 Galvanized bonderized steel, phosphate-dipped with baked-on

rust inhibitive grey prime finish. .2 Stainless steel with No. 4 finish in Pool, Shower, Sauna, Wet

Washrooms and Drying Areas.

.6 Alternate Products: .1 Le Hage .2 Milcor .3 Acudor



1.14 Supports

.1 For equipment suspended from the building structure, provide all structural members, platforms, brace and hanger rods as required. Method of attachment to be reviewed with the Structural Engineer before proceeding with the installation.

1.15 Flashing

.1 The Prime Mechanical Contractor shall provide flashings for the work of this Division. If not specified, a description is to be supplied for approval.

.2 Generally, all pipes and small ducts or stacks passing through the roof shall be flashed with an 18 gauge steel sleeve soldered watertight and fastened to the roof deck before the roofing is applied with a minimum of 8" (200 mm) overlap along the roof deck and extending 8" (200 mm) up the pipe or duct, sealed with a weather skirt.

.3 Vent stacks may be flashed with patented flashing cones provided with the

equipment.

.4 Where large ducts pass through roof, curbs and flashing shall be by the General Division where shown on the roofing plan. If not shown, all curbs, flashings and counter flashing are by this Division.

1.16 Painting

.1 Mechanical equipment, grilles, fans, shall be shop prime coated unless noted to be finish coated. Finish painting is specified in Division 9. Where the prime coat or finish coat has been marred, touch up the surface.

.2 Equipment exposed to the exterior weather conditions are to be shop finished with rust-resistant paint or as specified in equipment specification.

.3 Leave all work in a clean, paintable condition.

.4 All exposed structural members required for supporting piping, ductwork and equipment shall be galvanized. Where threaded rods are used, they shall be cadmium plated including washers and nuts.

.5 Paint pipe sleeves one (1) coat primer.

.6 Paint all relief and drain pipes serving Mechanical equipment, flat black.



1.17 Cutting & Patching

.1 It is the responsibility of the Prime Mechanical Contractor to install sleeves for piping and ducts, and provide frames for opening for grilles, louvres, fans and similar equipment to be built into the building as the construction progresses. If these frames and sleeves are not installed by this Division during construction, the cost of cutting openings, chases, and installing sleeves and frames will be at this Division's expense by the respective trade involved. All structural components must have the location, size and proposed method of cutting approved before proceeding.

.2 Where pipes and ducts pass through walls in existing building, for holes up to 15 in² (96 cm²), the cutting and patching is by the Prime Mechanical Contractor. For holes up to 15 in² (96 cm²), the cutting and patching is by the General Division.

.3 Holes through the existing roof shall be cut by the General Division and patched by the Roofing Contractor.

.4 General Division shall remove and reinstall all ceiling tiles as necessary for the trade to carry out the work.

.5 Should damage occur to the work of other trades and Divisions, remedial work will be done by the trade who originally installed the work, at the expense of the sub-contractor who caused the damage.

1.18 Sleeves .1 Provide pipe sleeves at points where pipes (plumbing, heating, sprinkler, gas,

etc.) pass through masonry of minimum 22 gauge thickness galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints. Where ducts pass through masonry provide suitable 18 gauge galvanized steel sleeves. Size sleeves on insulated piping or ducts to permit insulation to continue through. Where piping or ducts pass through concrete or frame construction, provide 1/8" (3 mm) thick galvanized iron sleeves. On copper pipe provide copper pipe sleeves.

.2 Use cast iron or steel pipe sleeves with annular fin continuously welded at midpoint, through foundation walls and where sleeve extends above finished floor.

.3 Provide 1/8" (3 mm) clearance all around, between sleeve and pipes or between sleeve and insulation and where piping passes below footings, provide minimum clearance of 2" (50 mm) between sleeve and pipe. Backfill up to underside of footing with concrete of same strength as footing.

.4 Terminate sleeves flush with surface of concrete and masonry and 2" (50 mm) above floors. Not applicable to concrete floors on grade.



.5 For pipes passing through roofs, use cast iron sleeves with caulking recess and flashing clamp device. Anchor sleeves in roof construction; caulk between sleeve recess and pipe; fasten roof flashing to clamp device; make watertight durable joint.

.6 Fill voids around pipes. .1 Caulk between sleeve and pipe in foundation walls and below grade

floors with oakum and cement.

.2 Where sleeves pass through walls or floors, caulk space between insulation and sleeve or between pipe and sleeve with waterproof, fire-retardant, non-hardening mastic. Seal space at each end of sleeve with waterproof, fire-retardant, non-hardening mastic.

.3 Ensure no contact between copper pipe and ferrous sleeve.

.7 Where pipes and ducts pass through fire separations (walls, floor and partitions) pack space with ULC listed and/or approved fire stopping mineral fibre insulation and seal with approved fire-retardant sealing compounding. Sealing compound to be installed to Manufacturer's specifications and detail. Fire stopping shall comply with the Ontario Building Code and approved by local Building Department. Obtain written approval from Local Building Department before commencing with work.

.8 See Section 15700.

1.19 Escutcheons & Plates

.1 Provide on exposed pipes passing through finished walls, partitions, floor and ceilings.

.2 Use chrome or nickel-plated brass, solid type with set screws for ceiling or wall

mounting.

.3 Inside diameter shall fit around finished pipe. Outside diameter shall cover sleeve.

.4 Where sleeve extends above finished floor, escutcheons or plates shall clear sleeve extension.

.5 Secure to pipe or finished surface.



1.20 Hangers & Inserts

.1 All inserts shall be Powers Fasteners or Hilti and shall be firmly secured to the framework before concrete is poured. Supply and install these inserts and be responsible for their correct locations. There shall be no flame cutting of structure unless approval is received from the Consultant.

.2 Any additional supports required from concrete floors or walls for piping or ducts shall be provided by: .1 Drilling same and using steel anchor shield and bolt .2 Toggle or expansion bolt

.3 Hangers shall be secured to concrete block by:

.1 Steel anchor shield and bolt

.2 Toggle or expansion bolt

.4 Hangers shall be secured to steel structures by: .1 Punching flanges for bolt .2 Friction lug or flange .3 'C' clamp or beam clamp .4 Tack welding as conditions require

.5 Steel deck shall not be used to support ducts, pipes, fixtures and equipment

except on written permission of the Structural Consultant.

.6 Take special care to avoid introduction of undue reaction forces into structure of building, to flanges of pumps and equipment, to expansion joints and to piping.

.7 Ensure that load on building structure does not exceed maximum mechanical loading per square foot (metre) shown on Structural drawings or as directed by the Architect. Take special care to avoid introduction of undue reaction forces into structure of building, to flanges of pumps and equipment, to expansion joints and to piping.

1.21 Testing & Adjusting .1 Test all piping systems for leaks providing gauges, materials and labour as

required. Equipment furnished as part of the permanent installation shall not be used for testing purposes. Before testing, remove all equipment which is not designed to withstand the test pressures. All piping is to be tested before covering is applied, and before backfilling or concealing.

.2 Hydrostatic Tests: All pressure pipe is to be tested as described in each Section. Test pressure shall be maintained for the times noted, during which time the pressure test shall remain constant without pumping.



.3 Gravity Piping: All gravity drainage piping shall be given a ball test and a water test, which must be supervised and inspected by the local Plumbing Inspector.

.4 All testing shall be done to the satisfaction and approval of the Consultant and the Division shall notify the Consultant forty-eight (48) hours prior to testing.

.5 Before final payment, test the operation of each system and all equipment installed, make all necessary adjustments and replacements, and demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Consultant that all equipment is operating as intended and without undue noise and vibration.

.6 All tests must be witnessed by the Owner's Authorized Representative. Failure to do so will result in a re-test.

1.22 Identification .1 Labelling: The Prime Mechanical Contractor shall identify each piece of

equipment and pipe sizes in letters of 1" (25 mm) giving the name, service and system number as directed by the Consultant. Equipment requiring such identification shall include fans and ventilating apparatus and shall be labelled with black lamacoid labels complete with 1" (25 mm) white letters. Lamacoid labels shall be secured to equipment housing. Before installation, provide an example to the Consultant for approval. Pipe labels shall comply to WHMIS and ANSI specification and shall be applied at the equipment, each horizontal or vertical change in direction, not more than 40'-0" (12,000 mm) apart in straight runs so as to be readily seen, giving service, pipe size and direction of flow. Equipment designation shall be similar to the tender set drawings and/or specifications.

.2 Tags: Identify all major manual valves and automatic valves with 1-1/2" (40 mm) brass tags with 3/4" (20 mm) black number, indicating the system and item number. Tags shall be fastened with heavy wire or chain. Valves immediately adjacent to plumbing fixtures or radiation need not be tagged.

.3 Identification Charts: Prime Mechanical Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of typewritten identification charts identifying the tag numbers, location and service of each valve, and part number. One (1) copy is to be framed in glass in the existing Mechanical Penthouse. Mount 6'-0" (1800 mm) above floor to bottom. The remaining charts are to be placed in the Maintenance manuals.

.4 Install labels similar to Seton Inc., Setmark Strap-On System, for piping systems, including pipes complete with PVC jacket.

.5 Fire Dampers: Mark each fire damper location by marking the ceiling grid with a YELLOW dot at each corner of the tile to be removed for serving the fire damper. Grand & Toy Model 14105.



.6 Circuit Balance Valves "CBV": Mark each circuit balance valve location by marking the ceiling grid with a GREEN dot at each corner of the tile to be removed for serving the valve. Grand & Toy Model 14102.

.7 Concealed Fan Equipment: Mark each location by marking the ceiling grid with two (2) BLUE dots at each corner of the tile to be removed for servicing the by-pass box. Grand & Toy Model 14103.

.8 Valves: Only normally closed valves and special valves shall be identified. Nameplate shall spell out requirement, i.e. "NORMALLY CLOSED".

.9 Control valves shall be identified as to their service.

1.23 Start-Up & Instruction .1 The Prime Mechanical Contractor shall start-up equipment and operate for a

minimum of five (5) days. During this time, adjust controls, clean strainers, replace faulty gauges and thermometers, fasten loose equipment and reduce noise.

.2 The start-up procedure shall include the completion of the enclosed Equipment Start-Up and Acceptance Check List, which shall be signed by the Mechanical foreman, the Sheet Metal foreman, and Controls foreman where applicable and Electrical foreman certifying they have verified the equipment is ready for acceptance by the Consultant and Owner. When all of the Check Lists have been signed off, the Mechanical foreman and his Sub-Contractors shall demonstrate the operation of the equipment to the Consultant and Owner for sign off acceptance. There shall be an individual Check List sheet for each individual piece of equipment.

.3 When the sign off procedure is complete, this the Prime Mechanical Contractor shall instruct the Owner's designated representative in the operation and maintenance of all equipment. The Consultant and the Board's Commissioning agent shall be present during the operation instruction.

1.24 Operate & Adjust Systems .1 Operate all systems to full capacity and verify proper, safe, efficient operation of

all parts and each complete system. Oil motors and grease bearings before operating equipment.

.2 When work is complete and systems are in operation, adjust valves, belt drives, controls and thermostats so that there is an even distribution of cooling and heating throughout. Turn over to Owner necessary keys, handles and operating devices for each system.



.3 Test for both heating and cooling days.

1.25 Charges for Extras & Credits .1 All submittals must include a detailed breakdown showing lengths, sizes,

quantities of materials, unit labour charges with labour rates, mark ups, overhead and profits with totals. Submittals that do not include a detailed breakdown cannot be reviewed.

1.26 Completion .1 Keep the premises in a clean and orderly condition during construction. All

waste and unusable materials shall be promptly removed from the site.

.2 Upon completion of this work, go over the entire installation, clean and polish all fixtures and equipment, and remove all surplus materials and rubbish of every description incidental to this work, leaving the installation neat and orderly.

.3 Before final payment is made, the following items must be completed: .1 Present to the Consultant "Maintenance Manuals" complete with air and

water balancing reports, wiring diagrams and certified equipment prints.

.2 Present to the Consultant an as-built record set of drawings and AutoCAD disk.

.3 Instruction of Owner's personnel in the maintenance and operation of all

new equipment.

.4 Present to the Consultant complete controls commissioning report.

.5 Present to the Consultant completed Equipment Start-up and Acceptance Checklist.

.6 Present to the Consultant Test Certificates and results. See Section

15401.

.7 Spare filters and frames, labelled and located where directed by the Owner.

.8 Locking wrench for wash fountains to be turned over to the Owner.

.9 Present to the Consultant start-up report for domestic hot water storage

tanks HWT-1 and HWT-2.

.10 Present to the Consultant start-up report for heat recovery unit HRU-20.



.11 Present to the Consultant, as-built drawings on CAD diskette.

.12 Present to the Consultant start-up report for make up air units MUA-20 and MUA-21.

.13 Present to the Consultant start-up report for roof top unit RTAC-20.

.14 Present to the Consultant start-up report for roof top heating ventilating unit RTHV-20.

.15 Present to the Consultant start-up report for air handling unit AHU-20 and AHU-21.

.16 Present to the Consultant start-up report for kitchen exhaust fans KEF-20, KEF-21, KEF-22 and KEF-23.

.17 Present to the Consultant split system air condition unit start-up report

.18 Operating key for exterior hose bibb to be turned over to the Owner.

.19 Maintain a set of approved drawings on site available for review by TSSA.

.20 Ensure that all welding and brazing are done by qualified operators certified by the TSSA, using appropriate procedures registered by the TSSA.

.21 Advise the Consultant at least 48 hours in advance of any scheduled TSSA inspections.

.22 Pay all permit and inspection fees.

.23 Perform the above work and other TSSA requirements in a timely manner so as not to interfere with the progress of the project.

.24 A value of 1% of the total contract price shall be withheld until points .1 to .23 are completed to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

1.27 Protection .1 Protect work from damage. Securely plug or cap open ends of conduits, pipes,

ducts or equipment to prevent entry of dirt, dust, debris, water, snow or ice. Cover all items cast into concrete floors/walls such as floor drains, cleanouts, etc., prior to pour, with heavy plastic tape or duct tape. Clean all piping, ducting, conduits and equipment inside and outside before testing.



.2 Material stored on site shall be protected from weather and kept dry and clean at all times. Take care to avoid corrosion of metal parts. Protect all bearings and motors from damage due to moisture and dust. Equipment not yet in operation shall be turned over at least at monthly intervals to prevent bearing deterioration.

1.28 Temporary or Trial Usage .1 Do not use any permanent Mechanical Systems during construction unless

specific written approval is obtained from the Architect.

.2 Temporary or trial usage of any mechanical device, machinery, apparatus, equipment or materials shall not be construed as evidence of acceptance of same and no claim for damage shall be made for injury to or breaking of any part of such work which may so be used.

.3 Where the Owner permits the use of a system the Prime Mechanical Contractor shall be in charge of and maintain all equipment in accordance with manufacturers instruction at all times the systems are in operation.

.4 The use of permanent systems shall not invalidate the guarantee or warranty.

.5 Prior to final acceptance, return all equipment to as new condition and provide supplier certification of same.

1.29 Liability .1 Each Section and Trade shall:

.1 Assume full responsibility for laying out his work and for any damage caused to other Sections or Owner by improper location or carrying out of same.

.2 Be responsible for prompt installation of work in advance of concrete pouring, ceiling installation or similar work.

.3 Protect finished and unfinished work of this Division and work of other Sections from damage due to work of this Division.

.4 Be responsible for condition of material and equipment supplied. Be responsible for protection and maintenance of work completed until termination and acceptance.

1.30 Provision for Future .1 Provide valves and piping as shown or required to extend plumbing and heating

systems in future. Valves and piping shall be arranged so extensions can be made without shutting off existing systems.



1.31 Dielectric Couplings .1 Provide wherever pipes of dissimilar metals are joined.

.2 Provide insulating unions for pipe sizes 2"Ø (50 mm) and smaller, and flanges for

pipe sizes 2-1/2" (65 mm) and larger. Brass adaptors and bronze valves will not be accepted.

.3 Provide an isolating separation wherever piping may touch dissimilar metal studs, joists, concrete, etc.

1.32 Permits & Fees .1 Pay all permit and inspection fees for hot water storage vessels that fall under

the Ministry and Consumer and Commercial Affairs - Boiler and Pressure Vessels Act.

1.33 Rigging of Equipment .1 Provide all rigging, hoisting and handling of equipment as necessary in order to

place the equipment in the designated area in the building.

.2 Direct this work by qualified people normally engaged in rigging, hoisting and handling of equipment.

1.34 Field Welding

.1 Only persons who have passed welding tests to the satisfaction of the Authorities

having jurisdiction and who are certified by them to be qualified welders, shall be permitted to do any welding on this Contract.

1.35 Rights Reserved .1 Rights are reserved to furnish any additional detail drawings which, in the

judgement of the Consultant, may be necessary to clarify the Work and such drawings shall form a part of the Contract.

1.36 Superintendence .1 Maintain at this job site, at all times, qualified personnel and supporting staff with

proven experience in erecting, supervising, testing and adjusting projects of comparable nature and complexity.



1.37 Special Cleaning .1 Vacuum clean and remove debris from the inside of fans, ducts, coils, terminal

units, etc.

.2 Comb all bent fins to proper configuration on all coils in air handling units, fan coil units, entrance heaters, etc., on finned radiation elements.

1.38 Interruption of Existing Services .1 All interruption of existing mechanical systems must be approved by and

co-ordinated with the Owner.

.2 Disruptions of normal operations will not be allowed. All interruptions shall occur after the close of normal school hours. Premium time to be included in the Tender Price.

1.39 Video Inspection of Existing Conditions .1 Before commencing any work, the Prime Mechanical Contractor shall video tape

(VHS format) as a minimum, all areas affected by new construction, for record purposes.

.2 The Contractor shall submit, three (3) labelled tapes to the Consultant before commencing any work on site, for distribution (one copy to each of the Owner, Consultant, and Contractor).

1.40 Co-Ordination .1 The Prime Mechanical Contractor is responsible for co-ordinating the mechanical

work herein to suit Project Phasing Schedule.

.2 Co-ordinate all Mechanical Work with the work of any other Divisions to avoid conflicts. Be responsible for modifying the work of this Division to accommodate space conflicts.

.3 Failure to co-ordinate will result in installed work being removed and new work put in place without cost to the Owner.

.4 The Prime Mechanical Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings and specifications for co-ordination requirements and completion dates for various portions of the project.



1.41 Cold Weather Work .1 Wherever work is performed in surrounding air temperatures below 40°F (4°C)

special approved precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to mortar, concrete or materials. All such materials used at such times shall be heated. Right is reserved to suspend work at any time should climatic conditions be deemed unsuitable for proper execution of work.

1.42 Fire Stopping .1 The Prime Mechanical Contractor is responsible for all fire stopping related to the

work of Division 15 including, but not limited to, the ductwork, piping and control wiring. Fire stopping shall be in accordance with Architectural Specifications.

1.43 Demolition

.1 The Prime Mechanical Contractor is responsible for all demolition and removal of

debris/equipment as indicated on drawings, from the site.

1.44 Project Co-Ordination .1 The Prime Mechanical Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings and

Specifications for co-ordination requirements and completion dates for various portions of the Project.

1.45 Moving, Hoisting & Scaffolding .1 The prime mechanical contractor is responsible for moving, hoisting and

demurrage for all equipment and materials to be furnished and installed under this Division. Include for the cost of dismantling and reassembling equipment, where required, to the manufacturer's approval.

1.46 Time for Completion .1 Review the general contract requirement for completion dates. Identify at the

time of tender any items which may affect the time for completion. .1 Advise the Architect and Consultant if materials and equipment involves

longer delivery times than indicated in the schedule.

.2 Monitor and expedite delivery of equipment and materials. If necessary, inspect at source of manufacture.



.3 Be responsible for failure of, or delay in, the delivery of specified equipment.

1.47 Tendering Instructions .1 Refer to Architectural Specifications for the Instructions to Bidders.

.2 The Prime Mechanical Contractor shall fax the Sub-Contractors List and

alternate equipment list to the Consultant within 24 hours of Mechanical Trade Tender Closing.

.3 The Prime Mechanical Contractor agrees to employ those subcontractors proposed in the Mechanical Form(s) of Tender and accepted by the Owner at the signing of the Contract with the General Contractor.

.4 The Owner may, for reasonable cause, object to the use of a proposed subcontractor and consequently, may require the Division 15 Contractor to employ one of the other subcontractor bidders.

.5 In the event that the Owner requires a change from a proposed subcontractor, originally proposed by the Division 15 Contractor, the Contract Price shall be adjusted by the difference in cost.

.6 The Prime Mechanical Contractor shall be not be required to employ as a subcontractor, a firm to whom he may reasonably object.

.7 Work of subcontractors named at the time of Tender or substitutions authorized by the Owner will be recognized as being in accordance with the Contract Documents and any payments will be approved by the Owner, only to such subcontractors.

1.48 Cash Allowance .1 Refer to Architectural General Requirements, Section 01-21-00, Paragraph 1.1.

Group Eight Engineering Structural • Mechanical • Electrical Consulting Engineers A Trow Global Company Tel: (905) 525-6069 Fax: (905) 528-7310 499 King Street East, Suite 200 E-Mail: [email protected] Hamilton, ON L8N 1E1 Website: group8eng.com Transfer of Files on Electronic Media

Consultant of Record ("Consultant"): Group Eight Engineering Contractor ("Contractor"): Re: Georgetown District High School Addition & Renovation Phase 2 ("Owner"): Halton District School Board The Contractor hereby acknowledges requesting from the Consultant, electronic data containing graphic (electronic) representation of Engineering Drawings as per attached list of drawings, subject to the condition that the said drawings are to be used only for information and reference in connections with the Owner's use and occupancy of the Project. The Contractor shall be responsible for checking and verifying all dimensions and details, or quantities of materials and for the co-ordination of architectural, structural, mechanical and electrical elements as required to facilitate complete and accurate fabrication and installation. Any omissions and discrepancies shall be reported to the Consultant. The Contractor hereby warrants to the Consultant that the drawings will only be used for development of shop drawings/record drawings. The drawings shall not be used for any other project or purpose either by the Contractor or others. The Contractor further warrants not to alter the electronic data or the information contained therein, in any way except for the above noted purposes, and acknowledges that such unauthorized use or alteration of the original work is protected in accordance with the Copyright Act and subject to penalties prescribed therein. The Contractor hereby acknowledges that the said electronic data contain information which may be updated or altered at any time by the Consultant, and that it is the responsibility of the Contractor to make themselves aware of these changes, in a timely manner. In the event of a conflict between the drawings issued to the Contractor and the sealed Contract Drawings, the sealed Contract Drawings shall govern. The Contractor agrees to pay the Consultant $500.00, plus 5% GST for these electronic data. The fees noted are to cover the costs of preparation of the electronic data, and disbursements related to the preparation and shipment/forwarding of the electronic data only. By paying the fees quoted, the Contractor has in no way purchased the drawings or any rights to the drawings or the information contained therein, and the Contractor may only alter the drawings for the purposes noted above. The electronic files will be provided in one of the following formats: AutoCAD rel.14 or AutoCAD 2000. The Consultant makes no representation as to the compatibility of these files with the Contractors hardware or software beyond the specified release of the referenced software. The Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify, defend and hold harmless the Consultant, and its sub-consultants from all claims, damages, losses, expenses, penalties and liabilities for any kind, including attorney's fees, arising out of, or resulting from the use of the electronic data by the Contractor, or by third party recipients of the electronic data from the Contractor. The Consultant believes that no licensing or copyright fees are due to others on account of the transfer of the electronic media, but to the extent any are, the Contractor will pay the appropriate fees and hold the Consultant harmless from such claims. Any purchase order number provided by the Contractor is for Contractor's accounting purposes only. Purchase order terms and conditions are void and are not part of this agreement. The laws of the Province of Ontario shall govern this agreement. The conditions and undertakings expressed wherein apply to partners, employees, agents, successors, assigns and legal or other representatives of the Contractor. Dated at this day of , 20 . Authorized Acceptance by Consultant Signature Print Name and Title Date By Contractor Signature Print Name and Title Date

Section 15010 EQUIPMENT START-UP AND ACCEPTANCE CHECK LIST Page 26

PROJECT: GEORGETOWN DISTRICT HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION & RENOVATIONS - PHASE 2

PROJECT NO. 09019

UNIT: LOCATION: MANUFACTURER: MOTOR MANUFACTURER: MOTOR NAMEPLATE: MODEL NO./TYPE: HORSEPOWER/kW: OVERLOAD HEATER/FUSES:

UNIT # SERIAL # SERIAL #

PRE START-UP INSPECTION NOTES: (N/A, NOT APPLICABLE) 1 POWER WIRING COMPLETE 2 CONTROL WIRING COMPLETE 6 INSTRUMENTATION INSTALLATION COMPLETE 9 CHEMICAL TREATMENT ADDED 5 BELT DRIVE TENSION ADJUSTED 7 VERIFY LUBRICATION IS COMPLETE 8 VERIFY VIBRATION ISOLATION IS COMPLETE 3 VERIFY PROPER OVERLOAD HEATER/FUSE SIZES 4 VERIFY ALIGNMENT MOTORS & DRIVES 11 VERIFY PROPER DIRECTION OF ROTATION 12 VERIFY LOCAL SAFETY & OPERATING CONTROL 13 CHECK ABNORMAL/EXCESSIVE VIBRATION 14 CHECK LEAKING PACKING GLANDS 10 TEMPORARY STICKERS, TAGS, ETC REMOVED

DESIGN: ACTUAL: VOLTAGE: PH 1: PH 1: PH 2: PH 2: PH 3: PH 3: AMPERAGE: PH 1: PH 1: PH 2: PH 2: PH 3: PH 3: COMMENTS:

CHECKED BY COMPANY DATE CHECKED BY COMPANY DATE CHECKED BY COMPANY DATE CHECKED BY COMPANY DATE ACCEPTED BY OWNER'S REP DATE ACCEPTED BY CONSULTANT DATE


MECHANICAL Testing, Adjusting & Balancing Section 15020 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Related Instructions

.1 Conform to General Provisions: Section 15010 1.2 Balancing & Testing

.1 The Testing and Balancing will be carried by the General Division as part of the Cash Allowance.

.2 This work will be tendered at a later date. 1.3 Related Work Specified Elsewhere

.1 Pipe & Fittings: Section 15700

.2 Air Distribution: Section 15800

.3 Monitoring & Control System: Section 15900

1.4 Description of Work .1 Meet with the Prime Mechanical Contractor to discuss location of all balancing

and testing devices before construction starts.

.2 Meet with the Prime Mechanical Contractor on site to review work in progress. Minimum four (4) times are required before balancing and testing commences.

.3 Conduct preliminary water and air tests.

.4 Test and balance water and air systems to design drawings and specifications.

.5 Test and adjust mechanical equipment and controls.

.6 Conduct sound level tests in new Classrooms, Drama Rooms, existing Cafetorium and where excessive noise occurs.

.7 Submit preliminary reports to the Consultant.

.8 Conduct acceptance test on site with the Consultant.

.9 Submit final report.

.10 Meet with Section 15900 to review controls before construction is complete.


MECHANICAL Testing, Adjusting & Balancing Section 15020 Project No. 09019 Page 2

.11 Visit the project three (3) times after Substantial Completion Letter has been issued by the Architect's office, to make adjustment to air and water distribution as required by the Consultant and/or Owner's Representative.

1.5 Prime Mechanical Contractor Responsibility .1 Provide to the Testing Agency a set of tender mechanical drawings,

Specifications, all Addenda and Change Orders, and shop drawings of all equipment to be tested and balanced.

.2 Supply and install all balancing devices where required by the testing agency.

.3 Provide to the testing agency a set of all approval drawings reviewed by the Consultant with wiring diagrams.

.4 The respective trades shall provide a journeyman, tools, ladders and scaffolding to assist the Balancing and Testing Agency. He shall open and replace ceilings and install additional devices such as baffles, dampers, valves, etc., as required and requested. Sheave and belt changes to be supplied and installed by Division 15 as required by the Testing Agency. Pump impeller changes/ modifications to be supplied and installed by the Prime Mechanical Contractor as required by the Testing Agency.

.5 The Monitoring & Control System Section 15900 shall check all control operation before balancing and testing is started. Assist the Balancing and Testing Agency in final adjustment of air and water systems to provide comfortable space conditions.

.6 This Division shall be in charge of the plant during tests. He shall assume responsibility for damages in the event of injury to the personnel, building or equipment, and shall bear all costs for liability, repairs and restoration in this connection.

1.6 Preliminary Tests .1 Division 15 shall operate all the equipment for a minimum of five (5) days.

Defects disclosed must be repaired and tests repeated until pronounced satisfactory by the Consultant. Lubricate all bearings; adjust and set all direct and V-belt drives for proper alignment and tension; calibrate and adjust all thermostats, thermometers linkage and dampers; operate and test all motors and speed switches for correct wiring sequences; check all overload heaters in motor starters; replace and clean all filters; flush out lines and equipment; remove and clean all strainer screens; fill all water systems and purge all air; clean the fan wheels, heating coils; fasten all loose and rattling pieces of equipment.



.2 The Testing Company shall operate and test all systems in the wide open position. Check all control valves, dampers and regulators for proper operation. Report any defects to Division 15 for adjustment.

.3 Vary the loads to illustrate start-up, sequence, normal shutdown, and simulate emergency conditions for safety shutdowns, with automatic and manual reset.

1.7 Water Systems - Heating System .1 Adjust and balance the water circulating systems to provide temperature change

and pressure drop to design.

.2 Adjust and balance each convector and heating unit using balancing valves to provide temperature change and pressure drop to design. Balancing to include both new and existing equipment.

.3 Assist the Temperature Control Contractor to check and adjust the temperature control system for proper sequence of operation.

.4 Test and record all inlet and outlet temperatures and pressures, pump RPM, Voltage and Amperage draw.

1.8 Air Systems .1 Balance and adjust all heat recovery units and new exhaust and return systems

using manometers, tachometers, thermometers, electronic flowhood, volt/ammeter as required. System volumes shall be within 5% of specified requirements for low velocity systems.

.2 Adjust and set duct branch dampers to each grille to obtain air quantities shown on the drawings. Final 10% adjustment to be made with grille or diffuser damper. Excessive air noise at the outlet will not be accepted.

.3 Set fan drives to provide air quantities and pressure specified. Sheave and belt changes to be supplied and installed by Division 15.

.4 Test and adjust air flow through coils, plenums, and filters. Record temperature change and pressure drop.

1.9 Final Tests

.1 The Testing Agency shall conduct final tests in the presence of the Consultant or his representative. Provide advance notice, in writing, that the preliminary tests have been completed and that final tests are ready.



.2 Conduct test to demonstrate that the plant actually meets the specified requirements.

1.10 Reports .1 Submit preliminary testing report upon completion of the water and air systems

before final tests.

.2 Report shall include project names, date of test, name of testing technicians, diagram of each system.

.3 Water Circulating Systems: Record each GPM, head and temperature change and pressure drop across each heating unit.

.4 Air Systems: Record each fan RPM, HP, Voltage, operating current draw, total air quantities at each fan, grille and diffuser. Record velocity and pressure drop across each coil and filter bank. Record air temperature change across each coil.

.5 Final Report: After final tests in the presence of the Consultant or his representative, the reports shall be updated to reflect final adjustments.

.6 Submit three (3) copies of the final balancing and testing report to the Consultant for review before final payment is made.

1.11 Adjustments .1 The Balancing and Testing Agency shall return three (3) times during the first

year guarantee period to make adjustments to water and air systems as required to provide comfort to the occupants.

1.12 Sound Level Testing .1 The Testing Agency shall include for testing five (5) rooms as instructed by the

Consultant.


MECHANICAL Insulation - General Provisions Section 15200 Project No. 09019 Page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Related Instructions

.1 Conform to General Provisions, Section 15010.

1.2 Installation Instructions .1 This part of the work shall be performed by a Contractor experienced in this type

of work. Supply and install insulation for all piping and equipment to reduce heat transfer, prevent condensation, afford protection for personnel and for a neat appearance.

.2 Insulation shall be Fibreglass, Manson Insulation Incorporated, Knauf or Johns Mansville.

.3 PVC fitting covers shall be Sure-Fit or Zeston 2000.

.4 Quality Assurance: Insulation materials must be manufactured at facilities certified and registered to conform to ISO 9000 Quality Standards.

.5 Submittals: At the request of the Consultant, provide product description, list of materials and thickness of material for each service or equipment. Provide location of insulation and manufacturer's installation instructions.

.6 Fire stopping of ducts and piping shall be installed by the Prime Mechanical Contractor not by the Insulating Contractor.

1.3 Description of Work .1 Supply and install insulation for the piping, duct systems and equipment:

.1 Domestic cold water piping .2 Domestic tempered water .3 Hot water heating piping .4 Horizontal drains from water closets located in ceiling spaces .5 Intake and exhaust air plenums .6 Supply air ductwork and plenums .7 Cold drain from cooling equipment .8 Rainwater leaders and hopper sumps .9 Domestic hot water and recirculating piping .10 Outdoor air duct intake


MECHANICAL Insulation - General Provisions Section 15200 Project No. 09019 Page 2

1.4 Related Work Specified Elsewhere

.1 Plumbing & Drainage: Section 15400



.4 Refrigeration: Section 15950

1.5 Guarantee .1 This Contractor shall guarantee to repair or replace all insulation that buckles,

sags, or separates from insulated surfaces under normal operating conditions, without additional cost or expense to the Owner during the one (1) year warranty period.

PARTS 2 & 3 - PRODUCTS & EXECUTION - as detailed in the following Sections: 15200 Insulation - General Conditions 15201 Pipe Insulation 15202 Duct & Plenum Insulation


MECHANICAL Pipe Insulation Section 15201 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials

.1 Insulation shall conform to ASHRAE Standard 90.1, latest edition.

.2 All piping and fittings shall be insulated with inorganic glass fibres, bonded with a thermosetting resin complete with self sealing lap, ASJ all service jacket and 3" (80 mm) wide ASJ butt strips.

.3 Domestic hot, recirculation and tempered water insulation thickness as per

following table, using insulation K factor .24 to .28 at 105°F (40.5°C) and greater.

.4 Hot water heating insulation thickness as per following table, using insulation K factor .24 to .29 at 140°F to 200°F (60°C to 93°C).

.5 Pipes complete with insulation, passing through a fire rated separation must be complete with fire stop mineral wool insulation type RXL-Safe as supplied by ROXUL Inc. Sealant shall be Fyre-Sil for vertical separations and Fyre-Sil SL for horizontal separations. Insulation shall extend a minimum 600 mm (24") beyond face, both sides of the separation.

Pipe Size 2-1/2" 1/2" to 2" and Larger (13 mm to 50 mm) (65 mm)

Domestic Cold Water, All Temperatures,

Cold Drains, Unburied Trap Seal Primer Piping 1/2" (15 mm) 1" (25 mm) Domestic Hot Water, All Temperatures 1" (25 mm) 1-1/2" (40 mm) Recirculating Domestic Tempered Water 1" (25 mm) 1-1/2" (40 mm) Rainwater Leaders & Sumps, Condensate 3/4" (20 mm) 1" (25 mm) Hot Water Heating Piping 1" (12 mm) 1-1/2" (40 mm)

2.2 Domestic Water Piping .1 Armstrong self-seal Armaflex 2000 - white colour, 1/2" (15 mm) thick self-seal

may be used on domestic water piping up to 2" (50 mm) size only.


MECHANICAL Pipe Insulation Section 15201 Project No. 09019 Page 2 2.3 Buried Piping

.1 Insulate buried hot water, cold water and heating pipes with 2” (50 mm) thick,

glass fibre complete with vapour retarder insulation wired in place with copper wire. Wrap insulated pipes together with 55 lb/100ft2 (2.7 kg/m2) building felt and seal all joints with a vapour-proof mastic. Consultant shall inspect pipe and insulation before backfilling.

2.4 Fire Safety .1 All insulation and finishes shall be treated so that maximum flame spread rating

is 25 or less and the smoke development rating is 50 or less or according to local by-laws.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Piping

.1 All insulation shall be applied over a clean, dry surface, after all pressure testing

has been carried out and reviewed by the Consultant. All insulation shall be continuous through partitions, walls and floors.

.2 Supply and install insulation shields similar to Myatt Fig. 251.

.3 DO NOT USE Armaflex 2000 insulation where electric heat tracing is required.

3.2 Domestic Water Piping, Heating Piping & Fittings .1 Pipe and fittings shall be insulated with Fibreglass insulation with ASJ jacket.

.2 The Fibreglass insulation joints shall be butted tightly. Adhere the vapour barrier

jacket lap with vapour barrier adhesive and adhere the 3" (80 mm) wide butt joint strips over all end joints with adhesive to ensure continuous vapour barrier. Insulate all fittings up to 2" (50 mm) with mitre-cut pieces of insulation and pressure-sensitive, colour-matching tape. All exposed fittings 2" (50 mm) and larger shall have Zeston pre-molded PVC insulating fittings covers.

3.3 Rainwater Leaders and Sanitary Drains .1 On rainwater leaders inside the building, the roof hopper pan at the underside of

the roof and the horizontal and vertical piping shall be insulated as per Domestic Water Piping. See Section 15201 – 3.2.


MECHANICAL Pipe Insulation Section 15201 Project No. 09019 Page 3

.2 Insulate the sanitary drains from water closets, urinals and drinking fountains concealed in ceiling spaces to vertical stack.

.3 Where electrical pipe tracing is shown on the electrical drawings, insulation shall not be applied until the pipe has been electrically traced by Division 16.

.4 Exposed storm pipe to be complete with rigid insulation and "PVC" cover.

3.4 Finish .1 All exposed insulated piping and fittings shall be finished with a fire retardant

PVC jacket. .1 PVC jacket shall be 0.020 gauge, hot rolled complete with self seal lap .2 All seams to be fused by Permaweld adhesive. .3 Provide PVC end caps for piping above 1-1/2"∅ (40 mm∅). Caulk end

fittings with silicone sealant equal to Dow Corning 999-A on piping 1-1/2"∅ (40 mm∅) or less, or Permaweld adhesive.

.4 Joints for pipe fitting connections (Tees, Wyes, etc.) shall be sealed with silicone sealant as above, or Permaweld adhesive.

.2 Zeston PVC fittings do not require jacketing.

.3 No additional finish need be applied to the concealed piping.

.4 No PVC finish shall be applied until the Consultant has inspected the insulation for type, adhesive and cracks.

.5 Pipe insulation concealed within structure, all joints and edges shall be taped with reinforced foil faced tape.

3.5 PVC Fittings Covers .1 The factory pre-molded, one-piece PVC insulated fitting covers shall have the

proper factory pre-cut Zeston insulation applied to the exposed fitting.

.2 The ends of the Zeston insulation shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edges adjacent to the pipe covering tufted and tucked in, fully insulating the pipe fitting.

.3 The one-piece PVC fitting cover is then sealed with Dow Corning 999A silicone sealant or Permaweld adhesive.

.4 Cold water shall have all seam edges of the cover sealed with Zeston vapour barrier pressure-sensitive, colour-matching tape.


MECHANICAL Pipe Insulation Section 15201 Project No. 09019 Page 4 3.6 Hangers & Hanger Rods

.1 Hanger Rods: All hanger rods protruding through insulation shall have Mac-Tac

tape applied around the rod opening in the insulation and 1" (25 mm) up the hanger rod.

.2 Hangers: Where insulation has been notched for hangers, the notch shall be filled with insulating cement and sealed around and up the hanger 1" (25 mm) with Mac-Tac tape.

.3 Hangers shall be double-nutted.

3.7 Existing Insulation Repair

.1 Where new piping connects to existing, repair and replace insulation on the existing piping as required. Tape insulation joints for a continuous vapour barrier and neat appearance.

3.8 Cold Drains From Equipment .1 Entire pipe run shall be complete with insulation and PVC cover.


MECHANICAL Duct & Plenum Insulation Section 15202 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

.1 Insulation shall conform to ASHRAE Standard 90.1-1989.

.2 Reinforced foil faced tape, adhesive and finishes shall have a UL723 rating of 25

or less flame spread and 50 or less smoke development rating, or according to local bylaws.

.3 Duct thermal insulation blanket shall be made from highly resilient, inorganic glass fibres bonded by a thermosetting resin, complete with factory applied commercial foil-skrimkraft.

.4 Duct thermal insulation board shall be made from inorganic glass fibres, preformed and bonded by a thermosetting resin, (FSK) vapour retarder.

.5 Rectangular ductwork up to 16" x 10" (400 mm x 250 mm) and round ducts (all sizes) shall be 1" (25 mm) thick, 1 lb/ft³ (16 kg/m³) density insulation blanket.

.6 Rectangular ductwork larger than 16" x 10" (400 mm x 250 mm) shall be 1-1/2" (40 mm) thick, 2.25 lb/ft³ (36 kg/m³) density insulation board.

2.2 Plenums .1 Materials:

.1 Insulation board shall be 2" (50 mm) thick, 6.0 lb/ft³ (96 kg/m³) density.

.2 Seal all breaks with Bakelite #230-06. Cover with foil-faced tape.

.3 All insulation shall be secured to flat sheet metal surface by means of welded pins or perforated base metal fasteners adhered with Bakelite #230-35 and speed washers. These shall be located on maximum 12" (300 mm) centres. When the insulation has been placed on the metal spike, the speed washers shall be attached, and the excess spike cut off flush with the washer. Corners of insulation shall be provided with a preformed, protective edge applied to insulation before canvassing. See Section 15801.

.4 On completion, surfaces shall be canvas covered with 6 oz. (.17 kg) fireproof canvas and finished with two (2) coats of Bakelite #120-09.

2.3 Exposed Ductwork Inside .1 All exposed ductwork, which requires insulation, shall be canvas covered with 6

oz. (.17 kg) canvas, using two coats Bakelite #120-09.


MECHANICAL Duct & Plenum Insulation Section 15202 Project No. 09019 Page 2

.2 Exterior insulation is not required where interior sound insulation is installed.

.3 See below.

2.4 Kitchen Exhaust Ductwork (Hood Only) Fire Proofing .1 Ductwork shall be insulated to provide a 2-hour fire resistance rating, as follows:

.2 Kitchen Exhaust grease ducts and Laundry exhaust ducts shall be wrapped with

3M FireMaster Duct Wrap consisting of a 1-1/2" (38 mm) thick non-combustible flexible fireproof blanket, fully encapsulated in a foil scrim and supplied in roll form. The wrap material shall be applied directly onto the installed ductwork strictly in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and the ULC Listing, Design No. FRD-4, Guide No. 40 U21, 'Fire Resistance Ducts', as tested to ISO Standard 6944 and ULC No. 44OE9, per 0 mm clearance of combustibles.

.3 The use of this system eliminates the requirement for a fire-rated gypsum board shaft wall enclosure or other fire rated enclosure system, such as block work.

.4 Two (2) layers of 3M Fire Master Duct Wrap shall be applied to the ductwork for both 1 and 2 hour fire-rated systems. All seams on both layers shall be overlapped 3 inches and foil taped, and the outer layer shall be banded on 10.5 inch centres, all as outlined in the manufacturer's instructions. An air space clearance is not required between the duct and adjacent combustible or non-combustible materials, as the system has a 'zero clearance' rating and complies with the requirements of the NFPA-96 Standard.

.5 All hangers, support rods, concrete anchors and fire stopping of duct penetrations through fire separations shall be in accordance with the ULC Listing and the manufacturers instructions.

.6 Supply and install required duct supports as per insulation manufacturer's recommendations.

.7 Install fire-rated access doors in ductwork at each bend in horizontal run and at each floor level for cleaning purposes as per manufacturer's installation procedures.

.8 Provide 16 gauge, double wall steel sleeve for each exhaust duct connection through wall and roof.

.9 Base Bid: 3M Fire Master Duct Wrap System as supplied by ThermoFire Systems Inc., Oakville, Ontario, Contact: Mike McClure Phone: 905-469-0063, Fax: 905-469-0065.



.10 Alternate Products: .1 Pyroscat FD Duct Wrap.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Ductwork .1 Seal all breaks with Bakelite #230-06. Cover with foil-faced tape.

.2 Board insulation shall be applied according to the manufacturer's installation

procedure using welded pins or perforated base metal fasteners adhered with Bakelite #230-35 and speed washers. These shall be located on maximum 12" (300 mm) centres with a minimum of two (2) rows per duct side. When the insulation has been placed on the metal spike, the speed washers shall be attached, and the excess spike cut off flush with the washer. Corners of insulation shall be provided with a preformed protective edge applied to insulation before canvassing. All exposed edges shall be concealed with reinforced foil faced tape. See Section 15801.

.3 Blanket insulation shall be wrapped tightly on the ductwork with all circumferential joints butted and longitudinal joints overlapped a minimum of 2" (50 mm). Adhere insulation with 4" (100 mm) strips of insulation bonding adhesive at 8" (200 mm) centres. Where faced blanket insulation is used on concealed rectangular ducts, secure insulation to the bottom of ductwork with suitable mechanical fasteners on maximum 18" (450 mm) centres. On circumferential joints the 2" (50 mm) flange on the facing shall be stapled with flare-door staples on 6" (150 mm) centres and taped with minimum 3" (80 mm) wide tape. On longitudinal joints, the overlap shall be stapled with flare-door staples on 6" (150 mm) centres and taped with minimum 3" (80 mm) wide tape. All pin penetrations or punctures in facing shall also be taped.

3.2 Extent of Duct Insulation .1 Insulate all supply air ductwork from the fan outlet to the diffuser outlet

connection as follows: .1 Exhaust and intake air plenums .2 All supply ductwork serving MUA-20, MUA-21, RTAC-20, RTHU-20,

AHU-20 and AHU-21 .3 All grille/diffuser supply air plenums, boxes or boots. .4 Supply ductwork .5 Outdoor air intake and exhaust air ducts serving HRU-21

.2 Do not insulate; except as noted otherwise:

.1 Return air ductwork



.2 Exhaust ductwork

.3 Pre-insulated flexible ducts

.4 Acoustically-lined ductwork

.5 Supply air duct located in Forum E125 and Food Court E128

3.3 Acoustic Insulation .1 By Sheet Metal Contractor, see Air Distribution, Section 15800.

3.4 Plenums .1 Insulate outdoor air plenums on warm side of sheet metal wall.


MECHANICAL - PLUMBING & DRAINAGE General Provisions Section 15400 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Related Instructions

.1 Conform to General Provisions: Section 15010 1.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere

.1 Insulation: Section 15200



.4 Electrical Services: Division 16 1.3 Description of Work

.1 Supply and installation of complete sanitary drain, waste and vent systems to serve all fixtures, floor and hub drains and equipment, as indicated on drawings.

.2 Supply and installation of all fixtures, floor and hub drains, including

miscellaneous fitments, components and accessories to complete entire installation.

.3 Supply and installation of emergency eyewash equipment.

.4 Supply and installation of hot, tempered and cold water systems to serve all

fixtures and equipment.

.5 Supply and installation of fire protection equipment, fire extinguishers and fire blankets as shown on the drawings.

.6 Connect new gas pipe service to existing gas pipe system.

.7 Supply and installation of vent stacks. Co-ordinate with General Division.

.8 Supply and installation of automatic trap seal primers.

.9 Rough-in and make all final connections to all "N.I.C." (not in contact) equipment

supplied by other Divisions. This includes but is not limited to Library, Classroom, etc. Co-ordinate all final equipment layouts and rough-in details.

.10 Supply and installation of grease interceptor complete with all accessories.

.11 Supply and installation of automatic trap seal primers complete with all accessories.


MECHANICAL - PLUMBING & DRAINAGE General Provisions Section 15400 Project No. 09019 Page 2 1.4 Submittals

.1 Submit shop drawings for the following:

.1 Plumbing Accessories (floor and hub drains, cleanouts, hose bibbs, roof drains)

.2 Grease interceptor

.3 Plumbing fixtures, faucets and trim, flush valves

.4 Trap seal priming

.5 Fire blanket

.6 Emergency eyewash and shower

.7 Trap seal primer

.8 Solenoid valve

.9 Vent flashing

.10 Fire extinguishers complete with cabinet

.11 Domestic hot water storage tank

1.5 Operate & Adjust Systems

.1 Operate all systems to full capacity and verify proper, safe, efficient operation of all parts and of each complete system.

.2 Adjust flush valves, flush tanks, valves and controls to give proper performance

and to required settings. Oil motors and grease bearings before operating equipment.

1.6 Connections for Other Sections

.1 Supply and install air, water and waste connections required for equipment of Owner or other Sections. Examine drawings and specifications and co-operate with Owner and other Sections to extent of properly locating connections required.

.2 Install special valves and controls supplied by Owner or other Sections

concerned. Wastes shall be made to hub or other drains left by this Section in accordance with Ontario Building Code (Chapter 7). Supply globe valve on each water supply, and a backflow preventer and strainer to meet Ontario Building Code (Chapter 7).

1.7 Plumbing

.1 Make water connections to all equipment requiring same. Install the shut-off valve, strainer, solenoid, and OWRC approved backflow preventer as required for these connections.


MECHANICAL - PLUMBING & DRAINAGE General Provisions Section 15400 Project No. 09019 Page 3

.2 Provide drain piping from all equipment requiring same such as pumps, ventilating apparatus and system drains, to the floor drains provided by the Plumbing Contractor. In no case will drains from equipment, relief valves, overflows, or systems be permitted to spill onto the floors or release into the space.

.3 Do not alter plumbing fixture, such as by drilling, to accept trap seal priming pipe. PARTS 2 & 3 - PRODUCTS & EXECUTION - as detailed in the following Sections: 15400 Plumbing & Drainage - General Provisions 15401 Drainage, Waste & Vent Piping 15402 Plumbing Accessories 15403 Plumbing Fixtures 15404 Hot Water Storage Heaters 15405 Fire Extinguishers


MECHANICAL - PLUMBING & DRAINAGE Drainage, Waste & Vent Piping Section 15401 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Piping Materials - Drainage, Waste & Vents

.1 Soil, Vent and Rainwater Leaders Not Buried 3" (80 mm) and Larger: .1 Class 4000 cast iron shall be certified to CSA B70 - mechanical joint.

.2 Drainage Vents and Wastes 2-1/2" (65 mm) and Smaller:

.1 Drainage copper pipe DWV shall comply with ASTM-B306-solder joints.

.3 All Buried Drainage Piping Within Building: .1 PVC pipe shall be certified to CAN/CSA B181.2 and B182.1. .2 Plastic pipe shall have a pipe stiffness equal or greater than 46 psi (320

kPa).

.4 Pressure Piping: .1 See Section 15701 for all pressure piping, valves, hanging installation

and accessories.

2.2 Potable Water Piping .1 See Section 15701 for all potable water piping, valves, hanging installation and

accessories.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Piping Installation

.1 Provide all necessary piping including fittings and unions to complete systems shown. Cut pipes true and square, ream file ends to smooth surface, all to Pipe Manufacturer's and accepted trade standards. Fittings shall be of equivalent bore as pipe, of equal strength and weight. Install piping to Manufacturer's specifications and published directions. Install piping to conform to Ontario Building Code (Chapter 7).

.2 Install buried drains at invert elevations shown. Grade as required to suit flow. Bed each length of pipe solidly throughout its full length and tamp in place. Do not support buried piping on blocks, bricks, or other materials.

.3 Install above ground piping to clear other piping, insulation, obstructions, access doors and controls. Take branches off mains with fittings and 45° and 90° elbows. Locate valves for each operation. Locate cleanouts in accessible locations to approval and to suit access.


MECHANICAL - PLUMBING & DRAINAGE Drainage, Waste & Vent Piping Section 15401 Project No. 09019 Page 2

.4 Do not use ferrous piping, fittings, bushings, nipples or plugs in copper piping. Provide dielectric bushings at connections to ferrous materials or equipment on water systems.

.5 Provide chrome plated pipes, fittings and valves where exposed in washrooms and other occupied areas.

.6 Supply and install flanges, unions or compression fittings on equipment side of shut-off valves in piping connections to equipment, tanks and fixtures so same can be disconnected for service. Flanges and unions shall be of same material as piping.

.7 Supply and install shut-off valves on water piping leading to each battery or group of two (2) or more fixtures whether or not shown. Each washroom shall be considered as a group and be valved as a unit, unless valved in two (2) or more groups. Locate for easy operation through suspended ceilings and access doors.

.8 Supply and install a shut-off valve at connection to each tank or item of equipment of system side of union or compression fittings.

.9 Supply and install compression type shut-off valves under each fixture in addition to above, and where exposed to view, of chrome plated screwdriver type.

.10 Supply and install 1/2" (15 mm) lock-shield brass hose cocks at base of each water riser, on branch mains and runouts, and at low points. Install sufficient valves to ensure complete draining of all water piping.

.11 For above ground pipe hanging installations see Section 15701.

.12 Where it is necessary to offset piping to avoid obstructions, use 45 degree elbows not 90 degree elbows.

3.2 Joints .1 Cast iron pipe to have Anthes rubber gasket mechanical joints, PC4 cold

caulking compound hub and spigot joints, caulked lead joints with oakum and soft pig lead, or Bibby Biseal. Confined spaces to be mechanical joints.

.2 Threaded pipe joints to be true and round with full cut threads, ends reamed and filed with all burrs removed iron to iron with a filler of graphite and oil.

.3 Solder joints shall be carefully cleaned with emery cloth. Use Silfos silver solder for buried piping. See Section 15700 for type of solder to be used on various piping systems.



.4 PVC joint shall be solvent weld as per manufacturer’s instructions.

3.3 Pipe Grading .1 Unless otherwise noted, drains and waste piping shall grade down in direction of

flow, as follows: .1 Up to and including 3" (80 mm) size - 1/4"/ft. (1:50). .2 4" (100 mm) and larger - 1/8"/ft. (1:100).

.2 Grade vent piping up from fixtures so it is self draining.

3.4 Expansion Provisions .1 Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction complete with swing joints,

expansion loops, and anchors as necessary. Silver solder each joint in expansion loops where used.

3.5 Sanitary Drainage System .1 Provide sanitary drainage system complete to all fixtures, floor and hub drains

shown complete with cleanouts at every change of direction.

.2 Pipes serving Science Rooms shall be glass type through the building to point of connection with existing building sanitary sewer.

3.6 Storm Drainage System .1 Provide storm drainage system complete with cleanouts in every change of

direction.

.2 Install to 3'-0" (800 mm) outside building. Co-ordinate elevations with Site Services Contractor (see Section 15300).

3.7 Tests

.1 In addition to tests required by local authorities, test piping and drains in presence of Consultant as hereinafter described.

.2 Notify the Consultant in writing at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to start of tests. Failure to do so may require test to be re-done.



.3 Ball test drains to Ontario Building Code (Chapter 7).

.4 Water test drains, storm, waste and vent piping to top of piping for not less than two (2) hours without drop in water level.

.5 Final air test drains, waste and vent piping to Ontario Building Code (Chapter 7) and smoke test to local authorities request.

.6 Pressure test water piping with 150 psi (1034 kPa) cold water for not less than four (4) hours without decrease in pressure.

.7 Pressure test priming piping with 50 psi (340 kPa) air for at least two (2) hours without decrease in pressure.

.8 Perform tests before application of pipe insulation and covering. Test buried and concealed piping before backfilling or concealing in structure. Protect equipment and parts not capable of withstanding test pressure during tests. Make leaks tight while systems are still under test. If this is impossible, remove and re-fit defective parts. Caulking of threaded joints or welds will not be permitted.

.9 After leaks have been repaired, repeat tests as often as necessary, and to ensure tightness of each system.

.10 Provide letter of test certification and result, to be included in maintenance manuals.

3.8 Venting .1 Vent fixtures and traps according to Ontario Building Code (Chapter 7) and local

regulations. Increase vents smaller than 3" (80 mm) diameter to 3" (80 mm) diameter before same passes through roof.

.2 Connect vent lines to soil and vent stacks above highest fixture or separately carry through roof. End vent stacks and vent piping 16" (400 mm) above roof or to vent flashing.

3.9 Drain Location .1 This section shall engage a firm that specializes in locating drains to locate

existing buried sanitary and storm drains. If the locator does not establish the invert, excavate where required to determine the invert before proceeding with any work. Exact locations and inverts shall be marked on whiteprints, then forwarded to the Consultant for review before proceeding with drainage work.


MECHANICAL - PLUMBING & DRAINAGE Drainage, Waste & Vent Piping Section 15401 Project No. 09019 Page 5 3.10 Fire Protection Services

.1 The Site Services Contractor will install the water services through the foundation

wall to a flanged outlet 18" (450 mm) above the floor, from which point this Contractor shall extend to the building systems.

.2 Provide approved double check valve backflow preventer assembly where indicated on drawings.

3.11 Sterilization (New Piping Only) .1 Before placing domestic hot water, cold water, tempered water and hot water

recirculation system into service, chlorinate the water piping by injection of mixture of 5% calcium hypochlorite and 95% water, thoroughly mixed from paste form to full mixture.

.2 Inject the mixture into the mains in such a manner as to ensure treatment of the entire line.

.3 Retain a dosage of 50 ppm in the line for four (4) hours, after which a residual of 5 ppm should be obtained.

.4 When a pipe line is already filled with water, inject a concentrate chlorine mixture at intervals along the pipe line. The retention period in this case shall be eight (8) hours.

.5 Operate all valves during chlorination so that they will be sterilized in the procedure. After chlorination period, flush out the lines at extremities until water tests are equal, chemically and bacteriologically to those of the source of supply.

.6 A copy of the Test Certificate for the chlorination shall be submitted to the Consultant and inserted in the Maintenance Manual.

3.12 Equipment Drains .1 Supply and install drain piping from all fan coils units, heat recovery units, relief

valves, and backflow preventers. See Section 15701 for pipe specification. Piping to be installed to spill into hub drains or funnel floor drains. Provide traps as required.


MECHANICAL - PLUMBING & DRAINAGE Drainage, Waste & Vent Piping Section 15401 Project No. 09019 Page 6 3.13 Excavation, Trenching, Backfilling & Bedding

.1 This Division shall do all excavation, trenching, backfilling and bedding in

connection with this work. Refer to the soil reports for details on rock relief, water table and soil material. Excavation is to be based on soil with random pieces up to 12" (300 mm) diameter. Foundations, large concrete pieces, slabs, rock layers and unstable soils that are not shown on the drawings or soils reports will be treated as a site condition. Blasting is not permitted, except by permission of the Consultant. Rock material is to be broken by a hydraulic ram. All trenching and excavation shall be done in strict accordance with the Occupational Health and Safety Act latest revision thereof.

.2 All excavations shall be protected with fencing, timber sheeting, bracing or shoring as required.

.3 Remove all timber and protective devices before backfilling or when the necessity of protection ceases. Keep excavated areas free of water by providing pumps, hoses, strainer, other appurtenances, power, labour and maintenance as required. All piping and equipment shall be tested, inspected and approved before backfilling.

.4 All piping and equipment shall have adequate bedding. Trenches shall be excavated 6" (150 mm) below the intended grade of the piping. The pipe bedding material shall consist of non-cohesive ballast material of which at least 50% will pass a 1/4" (8 mm) sieve and 100% will pass a 1/2" (15 mm) sieve, backfilled by hand from the centre line of the pipe to 6" (150 mm) above up to 18" (450 mm) diameter. Compact in 6" (150 mm) layers by tamping. The subgrade beneath the pipe shall be within .03 ft. (9 mm) of a straight line between joints. Bell holes shall be made at each joint to permit the joint to be properly made. Debris is to be kept out of the piping. No backfill is permitted until the test is witnessed. Bedding shall be compacted to 95% modified Proctor test.

.5 Compaction of the backfilled material shall be to 95% Proctor density. Where Proctor tests are called for, these will be paid for out of the allowance in Division 2. Proctor tests as a result of re-testing shall be paid for by this Division. Protect the pipe during backfilling and compaction so that damage or a movement of the pipe is avoided. The pipe must be protected with a minimum of 20" (500 mm) of compacted cover before backfill by mechanical means.

.6 The backfill shall be compacted by mechanical hand compaction equipment to achieve the specified density. Water may be used as an aid to compaction, but not as the sole means of compaction. Backfilling shall not be done in freezing weather, except by permission of the Consultant.



.7 Carefully backfill both sides of piping and equipment simultaneously to prevent movement or displacement. All excess materials shall be removed from the premises as directed and legally disposed of by this Division. In no case shall piping be installed over backfill.

.8 Field verify soil conditions on the site before excavation. Note soil conditions during the tendering process. Obtain and review soils report contained in the architectural specification. No extras will be allowed for additional cutting through rock/shale.


MECHANICAL - PLUMBING & DRAINAGE Plumbing Accessories Section 15402 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Cleanout Types - DESIGNATED CO

.1 Provide at the base of each vertical stack and rainwater leader, Zurn Z-1445.

.2 Provide on exposed wall areas, accessible pipe chases, and outside grade, Zurn

Z-1440.

.3 Provide on plaster walls, Zurn Z-1446-Z-VP.

.4 Provide on finished floor areas, Zurn ZN-1613, square nickel bronze access cover and frame to suit floor finish.

.5 Provide in ceramic or quarry tile floor areas, Zurn ZN-1613 square nickel bronze access cover and frame.

.6 Provide in carpeted floor areas, Zurn ZN-1602 CM round nickel bronze top and carpet marker.

.7 Provide on unfinished floor areas, Zurn Z-1616-SP with cast iron scoriated top.

.8 Provide on vinyl tile floor areas, Zurn ZN-1614 with nickel bronze top recessed for tile.

.9 Provide for terrazzo floor areas, Zurn ZN-1607-ST with nickel bronze top recessed for terrazzo.

.10 Provide for urinals, Zurn ZSS-1666-1-VP with round stainless steel access cover and neoprene plug.

.11 Cleanouts installed in water-proofed areas shall be supplied with flashing flange and clamp collar.

.12 Acceptable products:

.1 Zurn

.2 Ancon

.3 Enpoco

.4 J. R. Smith

.5 Mifab

2.2 Floor Drains .1 In finished areas, floor drains shall be cast iron body with 5" (127 mm) Type "B"

nickel bronze strainer, and trap primer connection. Zurn ZN-211BP. In waterproof membrane areas, use Zurn ZN-401BP.


MECHANICAL - PLUMBING & DRAINAGE Plumbing Accessories Section 15402 Project No. 09019 Page 2

.2 In unfinished concrete floor areas, floor drains shall be cast iron body with 5" (127 mm) Type "A" nickel bronze heavy duty strainer and trap primer connection. Zurn ZXN-211AP. In waterproof membrane areas, use ZXN-401AP.

.3 In quarry tile or ceramic tile floor areas, floor drains shall be cast iron body with 6" x 6" (150 mm x 150 mm) square nickel bronze strainer. Zurn ZXN-211-HP. In waterproof membrane areas, use Zurn ZXN-401-HP.

.4 Hub drains shall be installed next to equipment where only one (1) pipe has to relieve to drain and shall be cast iron body with 4" (100 mm) lacquered cast iron funnel and trap primer connection. Zurn ZN-211EP. In waterproof membrane areas, use Zurn ZN-401EP bucket and trap primer connection.

.5 Funnel floor drains shall be installed next to equipment where more than one (1) pipe has to relieve to drain and shall be cast iron body with 4" x 8" (100 mm x 200 mm) lacquered cast iron funnel and trap primer connection. Zurn ZN-211-FP. In waterproof membrane areas, use ZN-401-FP.

.6 Electrical Room floor drain shall be cast iron body with heavy duty nickel bronze strainer, brass backwater valve and trap primer connection. Zurn ZN-211-APX.

.7 In Sprinkler Room, floor drain shall be dura-coated cast iron body, 4" (100 mm) diameter pipe connection and wide slot grate. Trap shall be complete with primer connection. Zurn Z-576-KC-WS.

.8 Acceptable Products: .1 Zurn .2 Ancon .3 Enpoco .4 J. R. Smith .5 Mifab

2.3 Trap Seal Primers .1 Trap Seal Primers - shall be Zurn Z-1022A automatic trap primer valve. Where

more than one (1) drain is fed from common water supply, provide equalizing header. Trap seal primers shall be concealed in the wall. Provide access door for servicing.

.2 Acceptable Products: .1 Zurn .2 Precision Plumbing Products Inc.


MECHANICAL - PLUMBING & DRAINAGE Plumbing Accessories Section 15402 Project No. 09019 Page 3 2.4 Shock Absorbers

.1 At each group of fixtures supply and install shock absorber, Zurn Model Z-1700. Contractor shall guaranteed no water hammer for one (1) year. For shock absorbers concealed in walls provide access door for servicing.

.2 Acceptable Products:

.1 Zurn

.2 Ancon

.3 J. R. Smith

.4 Mifab

2.5 Backflow Preventer - DESIGNATED BFP

.1 Supply and install backflow preventer where shown on drawings and required by Code on potable water connections to equipment. Supply and install for each assembly a by-ass assembly of similar valve arrangement and pipe size.

.2 Valve shall be complete with bronze body, check seals, stainless steel trim, durable tight-seating rubber discs and bronze valve test cocks.

.3 Severe hazard connections such as cooling towers, heating systems and underground irrigation system shall have reduced pressure backflow prevention assembly "RP".

.4 Severe hazard connections such as sewage ejectors and trap seal primer shall have an air gap "AG".

.5 Moderate hazard connections such as vending machines shall have pressure vacuum breaker "PVB".

.6 Minor hazard connections such as hose bibbs, flexible shower heads, washing equipment and kitchen equipment shall have atmosphere vacuum breaker "AVB".


.1 Watts

.2 Febco

.3 Conbraco

2.6 Pipe Flashing .1 Pipe flashing for gas piping penetrating through roof shall be Thaler Industries

Model MEF-9-18 for flat roofs. For sloped roofs, adjust deck flange to ensure pipe is vertical to the ground.


MECHANICAL - PLUMBING & DRAINAGE Plumbing Accessories Section 15402 Project No. 09019 Page 4 2.7 Grease Interceptor - DESIGNATED G-INT

.1 Grease interceptors shall be Zurn, epoxy coated, steel body with removable

internal flow control, non-slip scoriated coverplate, fully recessed in floor, seepage pan, handles, drain studs, cleanout plug, treatment port and clamping collar.

.2 Interceptor Model and Size shall be as listed below: .1 Interceptor G-INT:

.1 Zurn Model Z-1172-E-HD-K: Size 1000 complete with enzyme inhibitor.

.3 Acceptable Products: .1 Zurn .2 Watts .3 J.R. Smith

2.8 Vent Flashing Stack .1 Vandalproof vent stack shall be Thaler Industries Model SJ-38 for standard roof

type complete with bitumen protection cap. The Prime Mechanical Contractor shall provide and install Co-ordinate with General Division.

2.9 Solenoid Valves - DESIGNATED SV .1 Water solenoid valves shall be Ascolectric Limited Model 8219 stainless steel

body, Buna 'N' seals and discs, general purpose enclosure, 1/60/120 Volt. Valves shall close when de-energized and be full pipe size.

.2 Solenoid valves shall be selected to suit the design water and air pressures encountered, i.e. 80 psi (550 kPa) for water and 175 (1205 kPa) for compressed air. Valve shall close when de-energized and be full pipe size.

.3 Gas solenoid valves shall be Ascolectric Limited, Model 8044A1, manual reset, 2-way solenoid valve, aluminum body, Buna 'N' disc, 1/60/120 Volt, normally closed, general purpose enclosure.

2.10 Roof Drains .1 Provide to the General Division for installation, the roof drains as listed below.

.2 Standard roof drains shall be cast iron body complete with large sump, roof

membrane waterproof flange, underdeck clamp, sump extension, roof sump



receiver, aluminum or cast iron dome strainer and vandalproof secured dome. Zurn Z-121-VP.

.3 Acceptable Products: .1 Zurn .2 Watts .3 J.R. Smith

2.11 Hose Bibbs - DESIGNATED HB .1 Outside hose bibbs shall be 3/4" (20 mm) loose key, non-freeze wall hydrants for

garden hose use, complete with vacuum breaker. .1 Encased - Zurn ZN-1305-VB - DESIGNATED HB

.2 Interior hose bibbs shall be 1/2" (15 mm) standard hose end with vacuum

breaker.

.3 For Concealed Piping Installation Walls: .1 Single - Chicago Faucet Model 293 complete with E27 - DESIGNATED

HB-1. .2 Double - Chicago Faucet Model 305-VB-5 complete with E27 -

DESIGNATED HB-2.

.4 For Exposed Piping: .1 Single - Chicago Faucet Model 287-LF complete with E27 -

DESIGNATED HB-3. .2 Double - Chicago Faucet Model 686 complete with E27 - DESIGNATED

HB-4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Cleanout Locations

.1 Supply and install cleanouts to conform to Ontario Building Code (Chapter 7).

Grease cleanout plugs and covers before installation. Open and clean each cleanout after floors are finished to ensure easy access for cleaning.

.2 Make each cleanout full size of drain up to and including 4" (100 mm) and 4" (100 mm) size for drains over 4" (100 mm). Extend buried cleanouts up to floor with "Y", 1/8 bend and recessed brass plug.

.3 Make each cleanout accessible and wherever necessary, extend branch connections to finished surfaces of walls and fit with cleanout cover and access door.



.4 Provide "Y" type line cleanout on each waste pipe and stack 2" (50 mm) size and larger extending vertically above grade floor immediately before same becomes buried.

.5 Cleanout locations shall be as per drawings. For additional cleanout locations, obtain location from Consultant on site. Do not install cleanouts in carpeted areas.

.6 Floor cleanouts shall be flush with finished floor to prevent tripping hazard.

3.2 Floor Drains .1 Install floor drains and hub drains of types noted, where shown or directed,

complete with strainer and accessories noted or required to complete installation. Set each drain to required level to approval.

.2 Trap and vent each floor and hub drain as required by the Ontario Building Code (Chapter 7). Trap seal each with 3/8" (10 mm) copper water line from nearest sanitary fixtures or by automatic trap seal primer and strainer on cold water line. Where more than one (1) drain unit is fed from common water supply, provide equalizing header.

.3 See Section 15403, Fixture Schedule for trap and vent and cold water sizing.

.4 Ensure drains are located at low point in floor. This Contractor shall perform a water test on all drains in the presence of the Consultant.

.5 Floor drains shall be flush with finished floor to prevent tripping hazard.

3.3 Backflow Preventer .1 Protect portable water distribution system against contamination due to backflow

to CAN/CSA-B64 Series 01 (latest edition).

.2 Discuss backflow preventer types with certified tester prior to installation. Provide necessary backflow preventer as required. Advise Consultant of any changes.

.3 The checking of drawings and approval of water system shall be performed by a certified tester, licensed to carry out work for Region and local Municipality.

.4 Obtain necessary certificate and turn over to Consultant prior to project completion.


MECHANICAL - PLUMBING & DRAINAGE Plumbing Accessories Section 15402 Project No. 09019 Page 7 3.4 Vent Stack Flashing

.1 Assist and co-ordinate with General Contractor to set vent stacks where required.

3.5 Trap Seal Primer Unit .1 Pipes from trap seal primer unit shall gravity feed floor drains below unit.

3.6 Water Solenoid Valves Serving Washroom Groups .1 Supply and install line size by-pass pipe complete with isolation valve (normally

closed). Supply and install on pipe serving solenoid valve, two (2) isolation valves and a strainer.

3.7 Gas Solenoid Valves .1 Valve body shall be installed horizontal to the finished floor.

3.8 Roof Drains .1 Assist Section 07510 to set roof drains of types noted, where shown or directed,

complete with strainer and accessories noted or required to complete installation. Set each drain to required level to approval.

.2 Provide necessary offsets beneath roof and run as close as possible to underside of roof.

.3 Discuss roof drain type and fitments with Roof Inspector prior to installation. Provide necessary accessories as required.

.4 Locate all roof drains at low points on the roof. In co-operation with the General Contractor, take level shots on the roof and locate the roof drains at the low point. Allow for up to 20'-0" (6000 mm) extra length adjustment for each roof drain. For all changes in location submit to Consultant for approval. If the new location requires a new location for the stack, the stack shall be adjusted to suit as part of the contract. Allow for the relocation of one stack and 20'-0" (6000 mm) of underground.


MECHANICAL - PLUMBING & DRAINAGE Plumbing Accessories Section 15402 Project No. 09019 Page 8 3.9 Hose Bibbs

.1 Install hose bibbs and valves where shown and as noted. Each exterior hose

bibb shall be complete with shut-off valve inside the building and be mounted not less than 18" (450 mm) above grade to approval. All hose bibbs shall have vacuum breakers.


MECHANICAL - PLUMBING & DRAINAGE Plumbing Fixtures Section 15403 Project No. 09019 Page 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Plumbing Fixtures

.1 All plumbing fixtures shall be of American Standard, Kohler or Crane manufacture, except where specifically noted as a special manufacture. Designations are Crane. Water closets and urinals shall be certified to CAN/CSA-B45.0. All plumbing fixtures shall be supported level and square.

.2 Urinal solenoid valve UTC shall be Base Bid: Water Matrix, Alternate Products: None.

.3 Grease Interceptors shall be Acceptable Products: Zurn, Watts and J.R. Smith.

.4 Washfountains WF shall be Base Bid: Bradley, Alternate Product: Acorn.

.5 Water Closet seats shall be Acceptable Products: Centoco, Olsonite and Bemis. Seats to have stainless steel hinge and posts.

.6 Flushometer valve shall be Base Bid: Crane, Alternate Product: None.

.7 Janitor Sink "JS" shall be Acceptable Products: Fait, Slern Williams and Zurn.

.8 Emergency Eye Wash EEW shall be Acceptable Products: Haws, Bradley.

.9 Lavatory fittings and supply shall be Acceptable Products: Cambridge Brass, Delta, Crane.

.10 Lavatory mixing valve shall be Base Bid: Powers, Alternate Product: None.

.11 Clothes washer shall be Base Bid: Symmons, Alternate Product: None.

.12 Faucets serving all stainless steel sinks shall be Base Bid: Delta/Teck, Alternate Product: Chicago Faucet, except where specifically notes as special manufacture.

.13 All fittings shall be no-lead brass alloy, chrome plated finish. Plastic fittings are not acceptable. Crane fittings are specified. Acceptable products are American Standard and Cambridge Brass, except where specifically noted as special manufacture. Fittings and trim serving Lavatory, stainless steel sinks and showers shall be certified to CAN/CSA-B125.

.14 Faucets serving lavatory shall be no-lead brass alloy, chrome plated. Plastic fittings are not acceptable. Acceptable products: Cambridge Brass, Crane, Chicago Faucet.



.15 Fittings and trim serving lavatory, stainless steel sinks and showers shall be certified to CAN/CSA-B125.

.16 Prime Mechanical Contractor shall supply and install all around, white silicone in

gap between porcelain plumbing fixture and finished wall/floor/counter top.

.17 All vitreous china fixtures are white unless specified otherwise.

.18 Provide each fixture with waste and separate trap, vent and water, as shown or required in accordance with the following schedule:

Fixture Trap Vent Cold Hot (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)

Lavatory 1-1/2" (40) 1-1/4" (32) 1/2" (15) 1/2" (15) Water Closet (FV) 3" (80) 1-1/2" (40) 1" (25) -- Sink & Lab Sink 1-1/2" (40) 1-1/4" (32) 1/2" (15) -- Floor and Hub Drain 3" (80 min.) 1-1/2" (40) 3/8" (10) -- Wash Fountain 2" (50) 1-1/2" (40) 1" (25) 1" (25) Drinking Fountain 1-1/2" (40) 1-1/4" (32) 1/2" (15) -- Hose Bibb -- -- 3/4" (20) -- Janitor Sink 1-1/2" (40) 1-1/4" (32) 1/2" (15) 1/2" 15) Note: Exposed drain pipe serving sink shall be finished chrome plate complete with

deep cup escutcheon.

.19 Water Closet - DESIGNATED WC .1 Closet - 3325 Whirlton - White .2 Seat - Olsonite No. 10CC-AM - open front less cover -

black .3 Valve - Delta Teck 81T201 complete with 1.6 GPM

(6 L) diaphragm (factory set) - Oscillating handle - Screwdriver stop - Vacuum breaker

.4 Top Spud - White - 1-1/2" (40 mm)

.20 Water Closet - DESIGNATED WCH .1 Closet - 3325 Whirlton - White .2 Seat - Olsonite No. L-246 - open front with cover - black .3 Valve - Delta Teck 81T20 complete with 1.6 GPM

(6 L) diaphragm (factory set) - Oscillating handle - Screwdriver stop bumper for seat cover - Vacuum breaker



.4 Top Spud - 1-1/2" (40 mm)

.21 Urinals - DESIGNATED U .1 Bowl - Cromwell 7397 - white .2 Fittings - Outlet

- 3/4" (20 mm) back spud - Hangers

.3 Concealed - P4513 (3 units) Pipe Assembly

.22 Urinal Solenoid Valve - DESIGNATED UTC .1 Provide Water Matrix - UTC Sentinel Model UT-CS1C

.23 Lavatory - DESIGNATED L

.1 Bowl - 1412S Harwich complete with C-1207 .2 Bowl Size - 20" x 18" (500 mm x 450 mm) .3 Faucet - Delta 23C632 .4 Trap - Delta 33T311 - 1-1/4" (32 mm) complete with

cleanout .5 Supply - Delta 47T2312 complete with deep cup

escutcheons .6 Supports - C-1211 concealed wall plate, bolted to concrete

block or stud wall cross member. .7 Drain - Delta 33T260, open grid strainer, 1-1/4" (32 mm)

tailpiece.

.24 Lavatory - DESIGNATED LH .1 Bowl - Diana 110V-white .2 Faucet - Delta Teck 21C114 .3 Tailpiece - Delta Teck 33T290 .4 Trap - Delta Teck 33T311-1-1/4" (32 mm) complete

with cleanout (tight to wall) .5 Supplies - Delta Teck 47T2312SD complete with deep cut

escutcheons .6 Mixing Valve - Powers Hydro-Guard Series e480

.25 Wash Fountain - DESIGNATED WF

.1 Fountain - Bradley Tri-Fount Model 2933-STD-LSD .2 Size - 36" (900 mm) .3 Bowl & Pedestal - Peppered white Terreon .4 Front Panel - Stainless steel complete with supreme security

screws and locking wrench



.5 Mounting Height - Standard 30" (750 mm)

.6 Mixing Valve - TMA

.7 Water Controller - Push-button metering valve AST

.26 Janitor Sink - DESIGNATED JS .1 Manufacturer - Flat .2 Type - Molded stone .3 Style - Curb style - mop service basin .4 Model - TSB3003 (150 mm drop front) .5 Size - 36" x 24" x 12" (900 mm x 600 mm x 300 mm) .6 Faucet - Chicago Faucet Model 445-897SRCXKCP

complete with E231KCP backflow preventer and 60" (1500 mm) long flexible heavy duty rubber hose complete with threaded connections.

.7 Accessories - Hose Bracket: #302 stainless steel - Bumperguard: ##-77-AA, vinyl .8 Drain Fitting - Combination dome strainer and lint basket -

#302, 16 gauge stainless steel - 3" (80 mm) IPS

.27 Emergency Eyewash - DESIGNATED EEW .1 Haws Model 7760BT complete with mixing valve, Model TWBS.EW.

.28 Drinking Fountain - DESIGNATED DF

.1 Manufacturer - Haws 1119.14 .2 Supply - 1/2" (15 mm) IPS .3 Drain - 1-1/2" (40 mm) NPT .4 Support Carrier - 6800

.29 Hose Station - DESIGNATED HS

.1 Faucet - Delta Teck 23C083 complete with 25'-0"

(8000 mm) long heavy duty rubber hose complete with spray gun and stainless steel wall hanger

.30 Mixing Valve - DESIGNATED MV .1 Mixing Valve - Powers Hydro - Guard Series e480

.31 Clothes Washer Supply - DESIGNATED CWS

.1 Manufacturer - Symmons W-602



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Plumbing Fixtures

.1 Connections to Fixtures: .1 Trap each fixture, floor and hub drain same size as outlet according to

Plumbing Code. Vent each trap as outlined above where required by Plumbing Code.

.2 Fixtures and Fittings: .1 Install plumbing fixtures shown or noted, complete with necessary fittings

and escutcheons to Manufacturer's printed direction. Set bolt caps and escutcheons in plaster of paris. Hang each fixture to Manufacturer's standards using all bolt holes.

.2 Set sink (Designated L) from floor to lip at 31" (775 mm).

.3 Set emergency eyewash (Designated EW) from floor to wall bracket at 28" (700 mm).

.4 Fill wash fountains (Designated WF) soap reservoir with manufacturer’s recommended soap.

.5 Set urinals (Designated U) from floor to lip height at 24" (610 mm). Support urinal with 24" x 6" x 1/4" (600 mm x 150 mm x 6 mm) steel backplate or unless otherwise noted.

.6 Set hose station (Designated HS) from floor to fixture at 48" (1200 mm).

.7 For location of mixing valve (Designated MV) serving various kitchen sinks/lavatories, see mechanical drawings.

.8 Provide minimum of clearance between underside of sink and top of acid neutralizing tank.

.3 At the beginning of the job, obtain from the General Division approval drawings of the millwork. Co-ordinate the installation of stainless steel sinks and lavatories with the millwork. If there is a discrepancy advise the Consultant before submitting approval drawings. Failure to do this will result in the Contractor bearing the total cost for replacing sinks that do not fit properly in counter tops.


MECHANICAL - PLUMBING & DRAINAGE Hot Water Storage Heaters Section 15404 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Hot Water Heaters - DESIGNATED HWT-1 and HWT-2

.1 Supply and install a commercial gas, glass-lined, steel tank water heater. Tank to be complete with thermostatic control, 2" (50 mm) Fibreglass insulation, digital display, digital display of temperature settings, combination temperature and pressure relief valve, 100% shut-off pilot, drain, hand-hole cleanout, faucet, direct vent complete with concentric vent diverter and gas shut-off valves. Tank shall be CGA approved. Vent, exhaust and air intake pipe to be PVC.

.2 Design is based on: A.O. Smith Cyclone Xi

Model BTH-250(A) 100 USgal (378 litres) tank capacity 250,000 BTU/hr input 288 USgal/hr (1300 litres) recovery at 100°F temperature rise 4" (100 mm) diameter PVC exhaust 4" (100 mm) diameter PVC intake


.1 Rheem/Ruud

.2 Lochinvar


MECHANICAL - PLUMBING & DRAINAGE Fire Extinguishers Section 15405 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Fire Extinguishers

.1 Supply and install fully charged National Fire Equipment Limited ABC-050 multi-purpose dry chemical fire extinguishers with a 3A-10BC rating complete with wall bracket.

.1 Designated FE

.2 Recessed models shall be as above and mounted in a Model 102R cabinet. Co-

ordinate the wall recess with General Division to install cabinet at 32" (800 mm) to bottom. Cabinets shall be complete with lexan glass. Cabinets shall be prime coated.

.1 Designated FEC

.3 Kitchen fire extinguishers shall be potassium bicarbonate type with a minimum

40B rating for extra high hazard, Model PKD-10F, 10 lb., 60 BC rating. Mount on wall bracket. .1 Designated FE-1

.4 Electrical Room and Transformer Room fire extinguishers shall be dry chemical

type with 40 BC rating, Model PKD-10F, 10 lb., 60 BC. Mount on wall bracket. .1 Designated FE-2

.5 Computer equipment rooms shall have carbon dioxide Model CD-5, 5 BC rating

fire extinguishers with wall bracket. .1 Designated HFE.

.6 Specifications are based on National Fire Equipment.


.1 Impaction Firequip Inc.

.2 C.F.H. Industries Ltd.

.3 Pyrene

.4 National Fire Equipment

.5 Wilson and Cousin

2.2 Fire Blanket - DESIGNATED FB .1 Supply and install a Battle Blaze Fire Blanket Model FB-6078.


MECHANICAL - PLUMBING & DRAINAGE Fire Extinguishers Section 15405 Project No. 09019 Page 2

.2 Blanket shall be minimum 60" x 78" (1500 mm x 1980 mm) of non-asbestos material.

.3 Fire blanket distributed by National Fire Equipment Limited.

.4 Acceptable products: .1 Flag Fire Equipment Limited .2 Battle Blaze .3 National Fire Equipment .4 Wilson and Cousin

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Fire Extinguishers & Cabinets .1 Install fire extinguisher cabinets so that top of extinguisher is maximum 60" (1500

mm) above floor, as block coursing permits.

.2 Install fire extinguisher wall bracket similarly and mount units.

3.2 Fire Blanket .1 Install fire blanket so that top if blanket is maximum 60" (1500 mm) above floor.


MECHANICAL Sprinklers Section 15500 Project No. 09019 Page 1


.1 This Section shall be tendered directly to the Mechanical Contractor. .2 Conform to General Provisions, Section 15010.

1.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere .1 Site Services: Section 15300 .2 Plumbing & Fire Protection: Section 15400 .3 Electrical Services: Division 16

1.3 Description of Work

.1 Provide wet pipe system for new addition, as shown on the Drawings.

.2 Provide all sprinkler heads, piping, supervised valves and flow switches, flow tests etc., for a complete and operating system, all to NFPA-13, latest edition. All equipment to be ULC listed.

.3 All sprinkler heads, piping to be located to suit structural conditions, electrical and mechanical work. Contractor is to co-ordinate with other trades before installation.

.4 Contractor to co-ordinate location and type of equipment to be wired by Division 16 so that fire alarm panels and wiring may be completed without extras to the Contract.

.5 Pay all fees as required for flow tests and plans examinations.

.6 The Sprinkler Contractor may wish to propose alternate arrangements, sprinkler heads and equipment to that shown. All proposed alternates must be listed on the Tender form showing the price saving. Do not proceed until notified in writing that the saving has been accepted.

.7 Provide AutoCAD Compatible disk to Consultant, indicating sprinkler system plans, including all as-built revisions. Drawings shall have flow test information, hydraulic design information, and sprinkler head manufacturer's name for each type.



1.4 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies .1 Performance of work under this Section shall be in accordance with Local or

District By-Laws and Regulations and the approval of the following: .1 Fire Department .2 Building Department .3 Owner's Insurance Company

1.5 Submittals .1 Before commencing with the Sprinkler System installation, this Division shall

submit Engineer-stamped 1/8" (1:100) scale working plans with 1/4" (1:50) sections and details and stamped copies of hydraulic calculations stamped "Reviewed by the Authorities and/or agencies having jurisdiction over the installation for approval." Submit to the Architect and Consultant for review, approved and stamped drawings before commencing installation. Any comments received from the Owners service agent shall be reviewed by the Consultant. Consultant to advise whether comments are to be incorporated into the drawings.

.2 Provide letter from Electrical Contractor confirming co-ordination of wiring for all equipment and devices.

.3 Shop drawings will be required for the following items: .1 Sprinkler heads - each type .2 Alarm valve and trim - each type, i.e. press switches, accelerators, etc. .3 Siamese connection .4 Flow switches .5 Signage .6 Excess pressure pump

1.6 Excess Pressure Pump FP (Jockey Pump) .1 ULC approved Albany or equal complete with pressure switch, check valves, etc.

Motor to be 1/3 HP, 60/1/120 Volts and wired for automatic operation.

.2 Wiring by Division 16.



1.7 Design Criteria .1 The piping system shown on the drawings shall be used as a guide for bidding

purposes only, and for location and type of sprinkler heads, zoning and equipment locations. The sprinkler mains are shown for co-ordination of other Trades.

.2 The systems shall be hydraulically calculated, designed and submitted to approving agencies by the trade responsible for the installation. Occupancies for the various areas are shown on the drawings.

.3 For the purposes of the Tender, the sprinkler system shall be sized using the flow and pressure data shown on the drawings.

.4 System shall be designed with a minimum 5 psig safety factor to allow for future pressure reductions.

.5 Sprinkler System Occupancies: LH = Light Hazard OH = Ordinary Hazard .1 All areas not listed - LH .2 Kitchen - OH Group I .3 Storage Room - OH Group I .4 Electrical Rooms - OH Group II

1.8 Items Not Included (As per plans and specification for clarification only) .1 All underground fire mains .2 All electrical power, alarm and supervisory wiring .3 All electric heat tracing and pipe insulation .4 All painting of sprinkler pipe, fittings and hangers

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Sprinkler Heads

.1 Sprinkler heads to be upright, semi-recessed or concealed Viking Micromatic

chrome type, with standard bulb rated at 135°F to 170°F (57°C to 77°C) unless otherwise required. Use higher temperature heads at heaters to NFPA standards. Sprinkler heads in finished areas shall be Viking Model A, concealed, unless shown otherwise.



.2 Sprinkler heads in areas with an 8'-0" (2440 mm) or less ceiling height, all Corridors, Washrooms, Food School and all associated Rooms, Music Room, Servery, cloud ceilings in Food Court, Vestibules and portion of Forum shall have Viking Silhouette Model A concealed sprinkler complete with white cover, unless shown otherwise.

.3 Special window sprinkler system located in Forum E125 and Classrooms E220, E221 and E222, to be Model "WS".

.4 Provide sprinkler cabinet containing sprinkler wrench and a minimum spare stock of ten (10) sprinkler heads or each type, plus an equal stock of each type of sprinkler head where ten or less of that type are used. Cabinet shall be located in the Sprinkler Room.

.5 Include in the Contract for the supply and installation of an additional thirty (30) sprinkler heads complete with 100'-0" (30 meters) of 1" (25mm) diameter piping to be used as required to suit final reflected ceiling layouts.

.6 Sprinkler heads are to be centred in ceiling tiles in BOTH DIRECTIONS unless shown on the drawings or written approval is received from the Architect.

.7 Acceptable products: .1 Reliable .2 Globe .3 Grinnell .4 Viking .5 Central .6 Victaulic

2.2 Pipe & Fittings .1 Piping to be ASTM-A-120 lightwall steel pipe Type "E" or "S", Grade B, roll,

grooved to Standard Roll Grooving Specification, complete with approved and listed mechanical couplings and fittings to NFPA standards. Victaulic couplings and fittings are acceptable. Other light wall piping, specifically listed for use in the Sprinkler systems is acceptable when used and installed as per its listing.

.2 Hangers serving pipes 3" (80 mm) diameter and smaller are to be adjustable swivel ring type. Hangers serving pipes 4" (100 mm) diameter and larger to be adjustable wrought clevis type. All hangers to be prime coat painted, zinc or cadmium plated to be installed in corrosive areas only. Hanger rods to be similar to hanger and sized to manufacturer's recommendations. DO NOT SUPPORT FROM METAL DECK.



.3 Gate valves shall be 150 psig (1034 kPa) Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC) approved, Crane or approved equal, all brass up to and including 2" (50 mm) size. Larger sizes shall be iron body, brass trimmed and of flanged O. S. & Y. type.

.4 ULC approved check valves shall be of same materials and pressures as specified for gate valves above, of the swing check type, and shall have regrinding feature.

.5 ULC approved butterfly valves and wafer check valves may be used in lieu of gate and swing check valves. Such valves shall be lug body style rated for 175 psig (1205 kPa) W.P. Valves over 2-1/2" (65 mm) diameter are to have gear operators.

.6 All valves shall have supervised ULC approved monitor switches. Monitoring switches shall have two (2) sets of contacts. Plug type switches are not acceptable.

2.3 Siamese Connections .1 Siamese connections shall be National Fire Equipment Limited Model 229 double

clapper, chrome plated with caps, heavy duty chains and ball drip. Wall plate to read "Auto Sprinkler and Standpipe Fire Department Connection". Threads to be to local authorities standards.

2.4 Alarm Check Valve .1 Alarm check valve shall be equal to Viking models as required for wet systems

complete with low pressure and alarm switches, drain connection and pressure gauges. See drawings for locations and zones controlled by the valve.


2.5 Monitor Switches .1 All shut-off valves shall be complete with ULC approved supervisory switches;

each switch to be separately annunciated, and be complete with two (2) sets of contacts.

.2 Plug-type monitoring switches are not acceptable.




2.6 Window Sprinkler Systems .1 Provide window sprinkler systems as indicated on the drawings.

.2 The window sprinkler system shall be independent of the floor system supplied

from sources identified on Drawings.

.3 The system shall be designed by the Contractor, complete with hydraulic calculations, to the requirements of NFPA 13 and to comply with ULC/ORD C253.1-99.

.4 The system is based on Tyco Sprinkler Company Model WS Window Sprinkler. Alternate system will only be accepted upon review by the Consultant.


.1 The Sprinkler Contractor will connect to the new incoming fire service into the

building as shown on the drawings. The Sprinkler Contractor shall complete a working sprinkler system from this interface connection including all supervisory switches. See schematic on drawings.

.2 Provide all necessary piping including fittings and unions to complete the systems shown. Cut pipes true and square, ream, file ends to smooth surface, all to pipe manufacturer's and accepted trade standards. Fittings shall be of equivalent bore as pipe, of equal strength and weight. Install piping to manufacturer's specifications and published directions.

.3 Install system drains to discharge to adjacent hub drains.

.4 Install zone test valves and piping to discharge to floor drain, as shown.

.5 Co-ordinate supply and installation of new fire system with Section 15406.

3.2 Tests

.1 In addition to tests required by local authorities, test piping in presence of Consultant as hereinafter described.

.2 Notify the Consultant in writing at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to start of test. Failure to do so may require tests to be re-done.

.3 Pressure test sprinkler piping with 200 psig (1380 kPa) cold water for not less than four (4) hours without decrease in pressure.



.4 Perform tests on concealed piping before concealing in structure. Protect equipment and parts not capable of withstanding test pressure during tests.

.5 Make leaks tight while systems are still under test. If this is impossible, remove and re-fit defective parts. Caulking of threaded joints or welds will not be permitted.

.6 After leaks have been repaired, repeat tests as often as necessary ensure tightness of each system.

.7 Test jockey pump, alarms and controls in presence of local Fire Department and Consultant.

.8 The Contractor is to provide two (2) copies of testing data, reports and final acceptance from the representative of the local Fire Department and submit the results to the Consultant.

3.3 Identification Signs .1 Provide each control valve, shut-off valve, drain valve and test valve with a sign.

Size of sign shall be 6" x 6" (150 mm x 150 mm) for automatic control valves and alarm valves and 2" x 6" (50 mm x 150 mm) for other valves. Inscription shall be in accordance with Canadian Underwriters' Association standards. Sign shall be made of enamelled steel with Fire Department "RED" enamel background, white enamel letters and shall be fastened in a workmanlike manner to the pipe or structure in the immediate vicinity of the valve identified.

.2 Signs chained to valves are not acceptable.

3.4 Instructions to Operator .1 Instruct Owner's Building Operator in care, maintenance and operation of

Sprinkler System and associated equipment.

.2 Provide a typewritten description of care, maintenance and operation of the systems in a three-ring binder.

3.5 Final Inspection .1 Arrange for the completed installation to be inspected by the Municipal Fire

Department and present to the Architect, four (4) copies of Certificate or Letter of Approval.



3.6 Guarantee .1 Furnish to the Owner through General Contractor and Architect, a written

guarantee covering materials and workmanship and free service as per General Conditions.

.2 Guarantee shall entail the repair and replacement of materials without charge to the Owner except, where in the opinion of the Architect, such repair or replacement was caused by improper use or lack of maintenance during the guarantee period.

3.7 As-Built Drawings .1 Provide to the Consultant an AutoCAD disk containing complete sprinkler plans,

details and schematics, updated with all as-built information and flow test results.


MECHANICAL - PIPE & FITTINGS General Provisions Section 15700 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Related Instructions


1.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere .1 Painting: Section 15010 .2 Testing, Adjusting & Balancing: Section 15020 .3 Insulation: Section 15200 .4 Plumbing & Drainage: Section 15400 .5 Air Distribution: Section 15800 .6 Monitoring & Controls System: Section 15900

1.3 Description of Work .1 Supply and installation of a hot water heating system complete with piping,

radiation, cabinet heaters and controls, where shown on the drawings.

.2 Supply and installation of new gas piping, where shown on the drawings.

1.4 Hydronic Balancing .1 This Division shall assist the selected Testing and Balancing Agency. See

Section 15020 for scope of work.

1.5 Submittals .1 Heating Units .2 Circuit Balancing Valves .3 Pumps .4 Gas Pressure Regulating Valves


MECHANICAL - PIPE & FITTINGS General Provisions Section 15700 Project No. 09019 Page 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION as detailed in the following Sections: 15700 General Provisions 15701 Pipe & Fittings 15702 Piping Devices 15703 Hot Water Heating Devices 15706 Pumps 15705 Natural Gas Equipment 15707 Heating Units


MECHANICAL - PIPE & FITTINGS Pipe & Fittings Section 15701 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Steel Pipe & Fittings

.1 Service:

.1 Hot water heating

.2 Condensate piping

.3 Maximum temperature 250°F (120°C) and 60 psig (400 kPa).

.2 Piping: Continuous welded Schedule 40 ASTM A120 for screwed piping, and ASTM-A53 for welding.

.3 Joints: .1 1/2" to 2" (15 mm to 50 mm) Class 150 MI threaded unions, Class 150

dart pattern MI threaded brass to iron ground seat.

.2 2-1/2" (65 mm) and larger Class 150 ANSI B16.5 FF flanges threaded, slip-on weld neck with John Crane Style 2160 gaskets ASA bolt size with ASTM A-107 bolts. Provide flanges for butterfly valves on piping 2-1/2" (65 mm) and larger.

.4 Valves: .1 All insulated valves shall have extended necks or shafts where the

thickness of the insulation interferes with the operating handle. All valves to have a minimum certified rating of 200 psi WOG (1380 kPa).

.2 Ball: .1 1/2" to 2" (15 mm to 50 mm) Class 150 full port bronze body,

bronze fitted screwed ends, PTFE seats and packing to 400°F (204°C), lever handle. Acceptable products: .1 Crane .2 Anvil .3 Milwaukee .4 Kitz

.3 Butterfly:

.1 2-1/2" (65 mm) and larger high performance Class 150 CI wafer type body for ANSI 150 flanges, bronze disc, stainless steel shaft, EPDM seat and insert. Lug pattern body shall be used for dead-end or isolation service. Lever handle up to 6"(150 mm), gear operator 8" (200 mm) and larger.


MECHANICAL - PIPE & FITTINGS Pipe & Fittings Section 15701 Project No. 09019 Page 2

Acceptable products: .1 Crane .2 Anvil .3 Bray .4 Keystone .5 Milwaukee .6 Kitz

.4 Check:

.1 1/2" to 2-1/2" (15 mm to 65 mm) Class 125 bronze body, screwed ends, swing disc, screw-on cap. Acceptable products: .1 Crane .2 Anvil .3 Milwaukee .4 Kitz

.2 3" (80 mm) and larger wafer-type ANSI 125 CI body, stainless

steel disc, stainless hinge and shaft, EPDM seat. Acceptable products: .1 Proquip .2 RitePro Inc. .3 Kitz

.5 Strainers:

.1 1/2" to 2" (15 mm to 50 mm) cast iron 'Y' body pattern, screwed ends and cap with brass plug, stainless steel screen with 0.125 perforations for water service. Acceptable products: .1 Sarco .2 ITT .3 Colton .4 Kitz

.2 2-1/2" (65 mm) and larger cast iron 'Y' body, flanged ends and cap with

full plug size ball valve blow-off, stainless steel screen with full plug size ball valve blow-off, stainless steel screen with 0.125" (3.2 mm) perforations for water services. Acceptable products: .1 Sarco Type .2 Colton .3 ITT



.6 All Radiators, Convectors and Coil-type Heating Units: .1 1/2" to 1-1/4" (15 mm to 32 mm) Dahl Model No. 11042.

2.2 Copper Pipe & Fittings .1 Service:

.1 All domestic water piping.

.2 Hot water heating connections to copper piping on heating equipment (maximum length 12" [300 mm]).

.3 Drains, vents, connections to drain pans, trap seal primers and equipment.

.2 Piping: .1 Plain end type "L" hard drawn copper and shall be certified to ASTM B88

(above ground). .2 Plain end type "K" soft drawn copper and shall be certified to ASTM B88

(underground)

.3 Fittings: .1 Solder end wrought copper. As an option, tee fittings may be eliminated

by using the T-Drill system for branches 1/2" to 2" (15 mm to 50 mm) for maximum run pipe diameter to 4" (100 mm). All joints must be brazed to Copper Development Association Handbook specifications using B-cup series filler metal. Soft solder joints are not permitted.

.2 Brass or bronze pipe flanges and flange fittings shall conform to ANSI B16.24.

.4 Joints: .1 All domestic hot, tempered and cold potable water piping shall be joined

using 95/5 solder containing no lead compounds (95% tin/5% antimony).

.2 Non-potable water piping shall be joined using a standard 50/50 tin/lead compound solder.



.5 Valves: .1 Ball:

.1 1/2" to 2-1/2" (15 mm to 65 mm) full port bronze body and chrome plated ball, PTFE seats, solid ball, adjustable packing solder joint ends and lever handle. Acceptable Products: .1 Crane .2 ITT .3 Victaulic .4 Kitz .5 Toyo

.2 Butterfly:

.1 3" to 12" (50 mm to 300 mm) wafer type, iron body, high performance, type 416 stainless steel stem, replaceable Buna 'N' seat, aluminum bronze disc and suitable for mounting between ANSI 125 or 150 flanges. Acceptable products: .1 Crane .2 Milwaukee .3 Bray .4 Kitz .5 Toyo

.3 Gate:

.1 1/2" to 2" (15 mm to 50 mm) bronze body, solder ends, solid wedge disc and non-rising stem. Acceptable products: .1 Crane .2 Milwaukee .3 Bray .4 Kitz .5 Toyo

.2 2-1/2" to 8" (65 mm to 200 mm) iron body, flanged O.S. & Y. gate

valve with bronze trim. Acceptable products: .1 Crane .2 Milwaukee .3 Bray .4 Kitz .5 Toyo



.4 Globe: .1 1/2" to 2" (15 mm to 50 mm) bronze body, solder ends and Teflon

disc. Acceptable products: .1 Crane .2 Milwaukee

.2 2-1/2" to 8" (65 mm to 200 mm) iron body, flanged and bronze

trim. Acceptable products: .1 Crane .2 Milwaukee .3 Kitz .4 Toyo

.6 Check:

.1 1/2" to 3" (15 mm to 80 mm) steam bronze, swing check valve and 'Y' pattern. Acceptable products: .1 Crane .2 Milwaukee .3 Kitz .4 Toyo

.7 Strainers: .1 1/2" to 3" (15 mm to 80 mm) bronze body, stainless steel screen type 304

and .125" (3.2 mm) perforations. Acceptable products: .1 Sarco BT .2 Sarco TBT .3 Colton .4 Kitz .5 Toyo

.8 Valves installed in domestic hot water recirculation pipe shall be complete with a

memory stop.

2.3 Gas Piping .1 Service: Gas



.2 Piping: Schedule 40, ASTM-A-53 steel pipe and fittings, all to CAN1-B-149.1-M91 and Ontario Regulation 826-82.

.3 Exposed Joints: .1 Up to 2" (50 mm) shall be screwed. .2 2-1/2" (65 mm) and larger shall be welded.

.4 Screwed Fittings: Malleable 150 psig (1035 kPa), unions malleable dart

pattern.

.5 Welded Fittings: ASTM-A-120 or ASTM-A-53

.6 Gasket: 1/16" (1.55 mm) leather or synthetic rubber

.7 Concealed Fittings: As for exposed

.8 Ball Valve: .1 Crane .2 Milwaukee .3 Kitz .4 Toyo

.9 Lubricated Plug Valve: De Zurick Series 400

2.4 Pumped Discharge Piping .1 Service: All pressure piping from sewage pumps to point of connection to main

drain.

.2 Piping: .1 Up to 2-1/2" pipe size shall be copper type 'L' with soldered fittings.

.2 3" size and larger shall be galvanized steel pipe with flanged or grooved

mechanical joints.

.3 Fittings: .1 Solder end wrought copper. As an option, tee fittings may be eliminated

by using the T-Drill system for branches 1/2" to 2" (15 mm to 50 mm) for maximum run pipe diameter to 4" (100 mm). All joints must be brazed to Copper Development Association Handbook specifications using B-cup series filler metal. Soft solder joints are not permitted.

.2 Brass or bronze pipe flanges and flange fittings shall conform to ANSI B16.24.



.4 Valves: .1 Ball:

.1 1/2" to 2-1/2" (15 mm to 65 mm) full port bronze body solid ball and chrome plated ball, PTFE seats, adjustable packing solder joint ends and lever handle. Acceptable Products: .1 Crane .2 Victaulic .3 Kitz .4 Anvil .5 Milwaukee

.2 Butterfly:

.1 3" to 12" (50 mm to 300 mm) wafer type, high performance, iron body, type 416 stainless steel stem, replaceable Buna 'N' seat, aluminum bronze disc and suitable for mounting between ANSI 125 or 150 flanges. Lever handle up to 6" (150 mm), gear operated 8" (200 mm) and larger provide lug body pattern. Acceptable products: .1 Crane .2 Milwaukee .3 Kitz

.3 Gate:

.1 1/2" to 2" (15 mm to 50 mm) bronze body, solder ends, solid wedge disc and non-rising stem. Acceptable products: .1 Crane .2 Milwaukee .3 Kitz

.2 2-1/2" to 8" (65 mm to 200 mm) iron body, flanged O.S. & Y. gate

valve with bronze trim. Acceptable products: .1 Crane .2 Milwaukee .3 Kitz



.4 Globe: .1 1/2" to 2" (15 mm to 50 mm) bronze body, solder ends and Teflon

disc. Acceptable products: .1 Crane .2 Milwaukee

.2 2-1/2" to 8" (65 mm to 200 mm) iron body, flanged and bronze

trim. Acceptable products: .1 Crane .2 Milwaukee .3 Kitz

.5 Check:

.1 1/2" to 3" (15 mm to 80 mm) steam bronze, swing check valve and 'Y' pattern. Acceptable products: .1 Crane .2 Milwaukee .3 Kitz


.1 Provide all necessary piping, including fittings and unions to complete systems shown. Cut pipes true and square, ream or file ends to smooth surface, all to accepted trade standards. Fittings shall be of equivalent bore as pipe of equal strength and weight.

.2 Screwed piping shall be iron-to-iron with graphite and oil filler or Teflon tape. Ends of pipe shall be reamed. Bushings shall not be used for piping reductions. Eccentric couplings shall be used in such a manner that air and condensate cannot collect.

.3 Make joints in copper piping with 95/5 tin/antimony solder with non-corrosive soldering flux. Clean, ream and thoroughly tin each joint and remove excess solder and flux.



.4 Install piping to clear other piping, lights, obstructions, access doors and controls. Take branches off mains with fittings and 45° or 90° elbows. Locate valves and special devices for easy operation. Locate valves in accessible locations to approval and to suit access.

.5 Do not use ferrous piping, fittings, bushings, nipples or plugs in copper piping.

.6 Provide flanges, unions or compression fittings on equipment side of shut-off valves in piping connections to equipment so same can be disconnected for service. Flanges and unions shall be of same material as piping.

.7 Maintain proper clearance around equipment to permit performance of service maintenance. Check final location with Consultant if different from that indicated prior to installation.

.8 Refer to manufacturer's installation drawings. Verify electrical service work with characteristics stamped on unit.

.9 Check that all openings for appurtenances and operating weight conform to shop drawings.

.10 Make reductions in hot water heating system piping so that air cannot collect in piping except at air vents.

.11 Gas piping on roof to be installed with loops or expansion joints and anchors as required to compensate for expansion.

.12 Install systems so that they can be thoroughly drained and all air eliminated.

.13 During welding or soldering procedures, provide a fire retardant cloth, mat or blanket to protect the structure, and adequate fire protection equipment at all locations where work is being done. Close off shaft or confined areas with a fire retardant mat or cloth to prevent sparks or pieces of hot metal from falling down the shaft or area way.

.14 Plug and/or cap all pipe openings/fittings during construction.

.15 DO NOT USE copper pipe connections between runtal heating units and steel pipe.

3.2 Pipe Grading .1 Piping: Heating water piping is to run level. Domestic water piping is to grade to

low points. Branch piping to heating units below the main shall be off the bottom, and off the top to units above.



.2 Equipment drain pipe to be graded down in the direction of flow 1" in 4'-0" (25 mm in 1200 mm)

3.3 Expansion .1 This Division is fully responsible for the expansion and contraction of the

pipework. Erect piping so that the strain and weight does not bear on cast connections or equipment. Piping shall be installed to allow movement through cold springing or expansion loops. Where this is not possible, expansion joints shall be used. These shall be metal hose installed in offset connections or packless bellows type in straight runs.

.2 On steel piping up to 2" (50 mm) size, use stainless steel bellows, screwed, compensator type, 150 lb (1035 Pa) design (similar for brass or copper pipe, except all-bronze construction).

.3 Piping 2-1/2" (65 mm) and larger 150 lb (1035 kPa) flanged, self-equalizing, corrugated packless, stainless steel bellows, tie rods.

.4 Select for expansion between anchor points plus 25% safety factor with 0°F (-18°C) ambient temperature and applicable fluid temperature.

.5 Flexible hose, where called for, shall be Type 'RW'.

.6 In wall fin, all runs over 40'-0" (12000 mm) shall have Flexonics Type 'L' in middle of run.

.7 Pipe anchors and guides shall be fabricated of structural steel channels, angles or plates well secured to the building structure. Cylindrical type guides to be sized for full pipe insulation.

.8 Acceptable Products: .1 Flexonics .2 Adsco .3 United Flexible


MECHANICAL - PIPE & FITTINGS Pipe & Fittings Section 15701 Project No. 09019 Page 11 3.4 Pipe Hangers

.1 All horizontal piping shall be supported at least every 10'-0" (3000 mm), except

for pipe 1-1/4" (32 mm) and smaller where 8'-0" (2400 mm) spacing is required. Pipe hangers for steel and PVC piping system shall be oversized adjustable wrought Clevis type Anvil Fig. 260, complete with insulation saddle/shield similar to Anvil Fig. 159 and Fig. 168, 6" (150 mm) long. For copper and brass piping system hangers shall be oversized adjustable Clevis type Anvil Fig. 260 complete with insulation saddle similar to Anvil Fig. 168, 6" (150 mm) long. Hanger rod shall be steel with copper nut. Clevis Hangers to be outside pipe insulation. Between the shield and pipe, install a section of high density insulation equal to foamed glass (3.75 to 5.0 lb density material) complete with continuous vapour barrier. Extend higher density insulation 2" (50 mm) beyond shield. Pipe hangers shall be secured to beams, steel joists, etc. DO NOT SUPPORT FROM METAL DECK.

.2 All vertical piping shall be supported at each floor with riser clamps, Anvil Fig. 40 welded to the pipe. Vertical branch piping shall be supported at least every 10'-0" (3000 mm) with solid post ring hangers.

.3 All hangers and rods shall be of a size and weight to safely support the piping system.

.4 For multiple pipe installation: Use Uni-Strut hangers complete with insulation protection shield. Insulation shield by Division 15200.

.5 Insulation saddle and protection shield is not required for uninsulated pipes.

.6 All hanger rods shall be rust resistant galvanized dipped.

.7 Acceptable Products: .1 Myatt .2 Anvil

3.5 Piping Tests .1 Perform tests before application of pipe covering. Test concealed piping before

concealing in structure. Protect equipment and parts not capable of withstanding test pressures during tests.

.2 Make leaks tight while systems are still under test. If this is impossible remove and re-fit defective parts. Caulking of threaded joints or welds will not be permitted.

.3 After leaks have been repaired, repeat tests as often as necessary to approval and to ensure tightness of each system.



.4 Gas pipe joints and fittings to be checked with soap and water solution during air test. See below. Disconnect system during tests. DO NOT USE OXYGEN FOR TESTING.

.5 Test piping systems to the following pressures for four (4) hours without drop in pressure or as otherwise noted. .1 Hot water heating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) .2 Domestic water: Hydrostatically to 150 psig (1035 kPa) for one hour

[OR] Air to 100 psig (690 kPa) for two hours .3 Gas: Air to 50 psig (350 kPa) for twenty-four hours

3.6 Drain Valves .1 Supply and install 3/4" (20 mm) ball valve and hose end at main low points to

drain each water type system, at pumps, coils, strainers and at each piece of equipment.

3.7 Gas Service .1 Install at each appliance and gas cock, a union, dirt leg and shut-off cock. Pipe

up completely.

.2 The complete installation is to meet the requirements of the Ontario Regulation #826/82 and CAN1-B149.1 (latest edition).

.3 Gas piping running on roof shall rest on roof supports at 8'-0" (2400 mm) O.C.

.4 Paint piping on roof and inside the building to each appliance, with two (2) coats of high visible yellow. DO NOT IDENTIFY PIPING USING THE BANDED METHOD. Vertical piping on exterior wall to be painted to match existing brick as selected by the Consultant.

.5 Before the building is turned over to the Owner, the Prime Mechanical Contractor shall compile a comprehensive list for the local Gas Company Customer Care Representative, outlining all gas-fired equipment (located in the building and on the roof), the actual number for each particular piece of equipment. This list must be completed before the building gas meter will be turned on. A sample form has been inserted, at the end of this Section, for reference only.

.6 Pipe passing through interior masonry partition and concrete floor shall be double-taped. Taping to terminate 1" (25 mm) beyond finished wall/floor and or pipe sleeve.


MECHANICAL - PIPE & FITTINGS Pipe & Fittings Section 15701 Project No. 09019 Page 13 3.8 Dirt Accumulation Under All Valves

.1 If dirt accumulates under the seat of valves (including automatic control valves)

during the first years operation, remove the collected materials under the valve seats and if the seat is damaged, replace same at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.9 Affidavit .1 Submit an affidavit verifying to the use of non-lead bearing solder in all potable

water copper piping system to the Consultant and insert in the Maintenance Manual.

3.10 Strainers

.1 Locate strainers upstream of control valves, automatic balancing valves, pumps, etc., and where shown on drawings.

.2 Strainers shall be provided with ball valves for blow down. Provide for the leaving side of the ball valve, nipples and fittings to permit blow down into a pail.

.3 Sizes: .1 3/4" to 1" - 1/2" ball valve

(20 mm to 25 mm) (15 mm)

.2 1-1/4" to 2" - 1" ball valve (32 mm to 50 mm) (25 mm)

.3 2" and larger - 1-1/2" ball valve (50 mm) (40 mm)

Pipe & Fittings Section 15701 Project No. 09019 Page 14


MECHANICAL - PIPE & FITTINGS Piping Devices Section 15702 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Thermometers & Gauges

.1 Thermometers:

.1 Trerice Series SX9 - 9" (225 mm) scale Universal angle. Locate in order to be easily read from floor.

.2 Provide thermowells for each thermometer. Thermometer scales shall be in Celsius.

.3 Acceptable products: .1 Trerice .2 Weiss .3 Winters .4 Galt

.4 Install thermometers as per piping schematic.

.2 Pressure Gauges:

.1 Trerice 600 Series - 4-1/2" (115 mm) cast aluminum complete with 872-1 snubber gauges with range for the pressure or vacuum being measured. Isolate gauge with pet cock.

.2 Acceptable products: .1 Trerice .2 Morrison .3 Winters .4 Weiss

2.2 Flexible Hose .1 Supply and install flexible hose, screwed 150 lb. (1035 kPa) design and stainless

steel hose (and braid).

.2 Flexible hose shall be type 'RW', not to exceed 12" (300 mm) in length.

.3 Base Bid: Flexonics Limited

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Pressure Gauges .1 Mount as piping schematic as shown in drawings so that gauge is easily read

while standing on the floor.


MECHANICAL - PIPE & FITTINGS Piping Devices Section 15702 Project No. 09019 Page 2

.2 Provide bronze pet cock ahead of the gauge.

3.2 Thermometers .1 Install thermometers in piping to be easily read while standing on the floor.

.2 Install a thermal conducting paste or liquid in pipe well of each thermometer.


MECHANICAL - PIPE & FITTINGS Hot Water Heating Devices Section 15703 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Air Vents

.1 Automatic air vents shall be used in exposed areas where they can be obviously seen to be leaking. In concealed areas, ceiling spaces, etc., manual vents shall be used. All automatic vents to have pet cock before vent.

.2 Air handling units and unit heaters shall have auto vents. High points in the

mains where air will accumulate shall be provided with a 3/4"∅ x 6" long (20 mm∅ x 150 mm long) air chamber and an Armstrong No. 7 automatic air vent with overflow connector and isolating pet cock.

.3 Each bottom-fed convector, continuous convector, fan coil unit and cabinet

heater shall have a manual air vent assembly consisting of a 3/4"∅ x 6" long (20 mm∅ x 150 mm long) chamber and a flexible 1/4" (6 mm) air tube to a manual vent in the end panel or front face, or a rigid iron pipe to the outlet grille with a manual slot head screw.

.4 Acceptable products: .1 Armstrong .2 Braukman

2.2 Terminal Unit Valves

.1 All radiators, fan coils, convector and coil-type heating units shall have shut-off valves on the supply branch at the unit. Valves 1-1/4" (32 mm) in diameter and larger, and for heating units without tapped ends, shall be Crane No. 440 and No. 365-1/2, or Milwaukee 148 and F-2885-M. Smaller radiator-type valves shall be Dahl No. 11042 wheel handle.

.2 Balance Valves: All radiator, convector and coil-type heating units shall have

balance valves on the return branch pipe at the unit. Balance valves to 1-1/4" (32 mm) diameter for tapped end heating unit, shall be Dahl 13013. Larger valves shall be Crane No. 7 with No. 1 disc.

.3 Drain Valves: All low points of heating units and system shall have hose bibb

type drains for draining system. 2.3 Circuit Balancing Valves - DESIGNATED CBV

.1 Supply and install for each reheat coil a circuit balancing valve where shown on the drawings.

.2 Valve shall be installed in the heating return piping.


MECHANICAL - PIPE & FITTINGS Hot Water Heating Devices Section 15703 Project No. 09019 Page 2

.3 Shop drawings shall state location, design flow rate and size to suit flow rate.

.4 Acceptable products: .1 S.A. Armstrong .2 Tour & Anderson .3 Watts

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Circuit Balancing Valves

.1 Circuit balancing valves shall be installed at least five pipe diameters downstream from any fitting and at least ten pipe diameters downstream from any pump. Two pipe diameters downstream of the CBV shall be free of any fitting.

.2 Circuit balance valve located in pipe mains, 2" (50 mm) diameter and larger, shall be complete with line size pipe by-pass complete with three (3) isolation valves. Isolation valve in by-pass pipe shall be normally closed.

3.2 Thermometers

.1 Install thermometers in piping to be easily read while standing on floor.

.2 Install a thermal conducting paste or liquid in the pipe well of each thermometer.

3.3 Pressure Gauges .1 Mount as piping schematic shown on drawing so that the gauge is easily read

while standing on the floor.

.2 Provide bronze pet cock ahead of the gauge.


MECHANICAL - PIPE & FITTINGS Natural Gas Equipment Section 15705 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Gas Pressure Reducing Valve Stations

.1 Roof Top Unit RTAC-22 - Designated GRPV-20:

.1 Gas pressure reducing regulator shall be Canadian Meter Limited Series 1200 standard regulator 5 psig reduced to 7" W.C., 200 SCFH capacity.

.2 Roof Top Unit RTAC-20 - Designated GRPV-21: .1 Gas pressure reducing regulator shall be Canadian Meter Limited Series

1200 standard regulator 5 psig reduced to 7" W.C., 540 SCFH capacity.

.3 Makeup Air Unit MUA-21 - Designated GPRV-22: .1 Gas pressure reducing regulator shall be Canadian Meter Limited Series


.4 Makeup Air Unit MUA-22 - Designated GPRV-23: .1 Gas pressure reducing regulator shall be Canadian Meter Limited Series


.5 Roof Top Unit RTAC-21 - Designated GPRV-24: .1 Gas pressure reducing regulator shall be Canadian Meter Limited Series


.6 Roof Top Unit RTHU-20 - Designated GPRV-25: .1 Gas pressure reducing regulator shall be Canadian Meter Limited Series


.7 Kitchen - Designated GPRV-26 .1 Gas pressure reducing regulator shall be Canadian Meter Limited Type


.8 Acceptable products: .1 Canadian Meter Limited .2 Spence .3 Fisher

2.2 Master Solenoid Gas Valve - DESIGNATED MSGV .1 Solenoid gas valve shall be Asco Model 8044A1, aluminum body with Buna 'N'

seals and manual reset lever, 120 Volt, 60 Hz, single phase. Valves shall close when de-energized and be full pipe size.


MECHANICAL - PIPE & FITTINGS Natural Gas Equipment Section 15705 Project No. 09019 Page 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Gas Pressure Reducing Valve Stations

.1 Label gas pipe as "5 lbs." and "7" W.C." before and after each station.


MECHANICAL - PIPE & FITTINGS Pumps Section 15706 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 General

.1 Supply and install pumps of the size, type and capacity shown in the Pump Schedule.

2.2 Horizontal In-Line Circulators - TYPE CP

.1 Service: 125 psig (862 kPa) maximum pressure, 60 psig (414 kPa) W.P., 225°F (107°C) maximum temperature hot water and glycol heating and chilled water and domestic water circulation 1" to 3" (25 mm to 80 mm) size, 1/6 HP to 1.5 HP.

.2 Fitting: Cast iron body with flanged inlet and outlet, bronze impeller with alloy

steel shaft and copper sleeve.

.3 Motor: Pump mounted 1750 RPM, drip proof, resilient mount, sleeve bearing motor.

.4 Seal: Standard carbon seal brass trim to 225°F (107°C).

.5 Special Construction: Domestic water pumps shall have bronze body, bronze

fitted construction.

.6 Design based on: Armstrong. .7 Acceptable products:

.1 I.T.T.

.2 Taco 2.3 Sewage Ejector Pumps - TYPE SEP

.1 Supply and install duplex sewage pumps to pass a minimum of 2-1/2" (65 mm) solids of the sizes and types listed below.

.2 Pumps shall be mounted in a concrete pit and shall have 3/8" (10 mm) thick

reinforced steel cover plate, 51" (1300 mm) diameter, 3" (80 mm) tapped vent connection, 11" x 15" (280 mm x 380 mm) manhole cover, and gas-tight gasket. Concrete pit by the General Division.

.3 Provide 1/8" x 3" x 3" (3 mm x 80 mm x 80 mm) angle curb frame.


MECHANICAL - PIPE & FITTINGS Pumps Section 15706 Project No. 09019 Page 2

.4 Provide a mechanical alternator complete with float, bronze rod pedestal and counterweight, so that both pumps operate on high water. Provide high water float switch remote sonic alarm.

.5 Install check valves and gate valves on the discharge from each pump.

.6 All wiring and overload protection by Division 16.


.1 Leitch

.2 Canada Pumps

.3 Darling

.4 Smart Turner

.5 Hydro-Matic PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 In-Line Circulator

.1 Install as indicated by flow arrows. Support at flanges or near unions on outlets of unit. Install with bearing lubrication points accessible. Check rotation.

.2 Ensure that pump body does not support piping or equipment. Provide

stanchions or hangers for this purpose. Refer to manufacturer's installation instructions for details.

3.2 Replacement Seals

.1 Supply and install in each of the circulating pumps and vertical in-line pumps, a new set of mechanical seals. These shall be installed after the cleaning and flushing operation but prior to the addition of the final chemical treatment.

.2 If the seals removed are in good condition, they will be turned over to the Owner.

3.3 Sump Pumps .1 Do not install pump in a sump receiving waste that exceeds 140°F (60°C) in

temperature.


MECHANICAL - PIPE & FITTINGS Pumps Section 15706 Project No. 09019 Page 3

.2 Remote sonic alarm to be outside of room, as indicated on the mechanical drawings, complete with 2" (50 mm) high red lamacoid label with the following phrase "Kitchen Sump Pump Alarm" in 1" (25 mm) high letters.


MECHANICAL - PIPE & FITTINGS Heating Units Section 15707 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Runtal Radiators - DESIGNATED A, B, etc.

.1 Supply and install sizes and types shown in the Schedule.

.2 Radiator component parts shall be low carbon steel. On either end of the

flattened tubes shall be headers provided with all necessary inlet, outlet, venting and draining connections and internal baffles to be installed where required to ensure even heating and proper output.

.3 Standard working pressure for the units shall be 85 psi (tested at 110 psi).

.4 The units shall be rated and tested in accordance with the International Standards Organization ISO 3147-3150. BTU/hr capacities have been adjusted for 65°F (18°C) Entering Air Temperature and 20% Heat Effect.

.5 Standard connections are 1/8" (6 mm) air vents and 3/4" (20 mm) NPT tapered threads.

.6 Radiator expansion shall not exceed 1/64" per foot (1 mm per meter) at 215°F (100°C).

.7 All units shall be cleaned and etched for good paint adhesion. Units shall be primed and baked at 320°F (160°C) for 20 minutes. The top coat shall be an enamel baked-on at 320°F (160°C) for 20 minutes. Colour to be selected by Architect.

.8 All mounting hardware shall be factory painted (colour selection by Architect), K11 wall brackets, K45 adjustable hold-off screws. Any strengthening of wall required to support the weight of the "wet" unit shall be by others.

.9 Supply and install for each radiator, end trim complete with extended top and end cap trim complete with extended top, two (2) brackets, Model EC-4 for support. Locate one bracket on top tube ribbon and the other on the bottom tube ribbon.

.10 Manual air vents are to be also supplied with the radiators.

.11 Grooved end pieces, fillers, inside and outside corners shall be provided at connection to hide all necessary piping to the radiator.

.12 Design based on: Runtal

.13 Acceptable products: .1 Hudevad


MECHANICAL - PIPE & FITTINGS Heating Units Section 15707 Project No. 09019 Page 2 2.2 Cabinet Heaters - DESIGNATED CA, CB, etc.

.1 Cabinet heaters shall be the sizes and types shown in the Schedule. Each unit

shall be complete with integral built-in thermostat, multi-speed motor with built-in overload protection and plug disconnect, supply and return valves (see Valves) and air vents (see Air Vents). Wall-mounted units shall have the speed control and integral thermostat behind access door. On units concealed in ceiling space, the thermostat shall be mounted remotely by the Electrical Contractor.

.2 Concealed units shall be complete with suitable hanging rods complete with spring isolators.

.3 Power wiring by Division 16.

.4 Acceptable Products: .1 McQuay .2 Eng-Air .3 Modine .4 Trane .5 Stirling .6 Sigma

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 General

.1 Each heating branch circuit shall be complete with electric temperature control valve, unions, hose bibb, drain valve, lockshield balancing valve on return pipe and wheel handle isolating valve on supply pipe. VALVES ARE NOT TO BE INSTALLED IN CEILING SPACE.

3.2 Drain Valves .1 Supply and install 3/4" (20 mm) diameter ball valve and hose end at main low

points and risers to drain each type system and each piece of equipment.

3.3 Runtal Radiators .1 Mount all Runtal radiators level.

.2 Brackets shall be fastened to the wall as outlined in General Provisions, Section

15010, under 'Inserts'.

.3 Install all vents, valves and balancing valves.


MECHANICAL - PIPE & FITTINGS Water Treatment Section 15708 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Pre-Operational Cleaning of New Heating Water Systems

.1 Flush out new piping systems after pressure test for a minimum of four (4)

hours. Isolate Runtal radiation from initial fill and flush.

.2 Fill and back flush hot water heating pipe and radiation to mains.

.3 Fill and thoroughly flush new hot water heating pipe systems with a 2" (50 mm) diameter hose, every 100'-0" (30500 mm), connected to the domestic cold water system, complete with isolation valve and backflow preventer. Provide valved connections and all hoses. Upon completion of the flush out procedure, remove backflow preventer and cap pipe.

.4 When declared clean by the Water Treatment Company, circulate cleaner similar to Dearborn No. 345 cleaner at a dosage of 100lb/1000 gallon (45kg/4500L) system water for a period of 72 hours. This is cold water cleaner and can be used at water temperatures 50°F to 150°F (10°C to 65°C).

.5 At completion of a circulating period, system shall be drained and flushed with fresh water for a period of four (4) hours. Blow down drains of all duct mounted heat coils. Blow down drains at all system low points. The flushing of each low point shall be completed by flushing first with the supply valve open, return valve closed, and then the return valve open, supply valve closed. All strainers and filters shall be opened and cleaned. Chemical Treatment Company must approve flushing test at end of the cleaning period. Cleaning shall continue until system is accepted. Provide 24 hours advance notice.

.6 Each system shall be filled with clean water to give 7.6 pH in boiler system. Supply necessary chemicals to give above pH value. Chemicals must be approved by Ontario Ministry of Environment for this use and disposal.

.7 During cleaning operation, runtal units shall be disconnected and their hose connections used to by-pass water around each unit. Operate heating boiler to maintain 95°F (35°C) system water temperature. DO NOT EXCEED 109°F (43°C).

2.2 Cleaning & Flushing .1 The Water Treatment Company will direct and supervise the entire cleaning and

flushing operation of the new system and witness the following: .1 The system is flushed of all sand, gravel, and filings before cleaner is

added.


MECHANICAL - PIPE & FITTINGS Water Treatment Section 15708 Project No. 09019 Page 2

.2 The proper strength of cleaner is added and circulated for the prescribed time.

.3 The system is thoroughly flushed again before chemicals are added.

.4 The proper dosage of chemicals is added.

.5 Cartridge filters are replaced at the proper intervals.

.6 Cabinet Heaters, radiant panels and runtal radiation are by-passed during the flushing process.

.2 Provide written confirmation to the Consultant that the above was completed. The system air vents shall not be installed until written confirmation is received.

.3 Acceptable Products: .1 Dearborn .2 Specialty Chemicals

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation

.1 Provide adequate clearance to permit performance and servicing and

maintenance of equipment.

.2 Pipe all drains and relief's to drain.

.3 Chemicals must be approved by the Ontario Ministry of the Environment for this use and disposal.

.4 Isolate new pipe system from existing pipe system when cleaning, flushing and adding chemicals.

.5 Chemicals must be approved by the Ontario Ministry of the Environment for this use and disposal.

3.2 Warranty Period .1 Provide initial review of system connection and water analysis. Recommend

treatment dosages.

.2 Provide the services of the Water Treatment Company's representative for start-up assistance to instruct personnel in the use of chemicals.

.3 Provide system review and treatment analysis, reports, charts and log sheets every 90 days during the warranty period.

.4 Provide all necessary laboratory and technical assistance.


MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION General Provisions Section 15800 Project No. 09019 Page 1


.1 Conform to General Provisions: Section 15010. 1.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere

.1 Testing, Adjusting & Balancing: Section 15020



.4 Pipe and Fittings: Section 15700

.5 Monitoring & Controls System: Section 15900

.6 Electrical Services: Division 16 1.3 Description of Work

.1 Supply and installation of ventilation systems, complete heat recovery unit, roof top units, makeup air units, heating/ventilating units, controls, filters, gauges and ductwork to form complete supply air systems. Vacuum clean interior of all fan equipment.

.2 Supply and installation of all fans, ductwork, grilles, registers and fire dampers for

all exhaust air systems.

.3 Supply and install duct sound liner as shown and/or specified.

.4 Supply and installation of kitchen exhaust ductwork and fans.

.5 Supply and installation of roof mounted louvred penthouse.

.6 Remove construction filters and replace with new filters for all fan sections.

.7 Installation of kitchen exhaust hoods.

.8 Vacuum clean interior of all new fan equipment. 1.4 Submittals

.1 Submit shop drawings for the following: .1 Fan Equipment and Accessories .2 Grilles and Diffusers .3 Exhaust Fans .4 Louvres


MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION General Provisions Section 15800 Project No. 09019 Page 2

.5 Heat Recovery Unit

.6 Air Handling Unit

.7 Roof Top Unit

.2 Before supplying and installing acoustic duct liner, this Contractor shall submit to the Consultant for review a 3'-0" x 2'-0" (900 mm x 600 mm) heavy duty job board complete with clear covering, indicating manufacturer product, adhesive acoustic liner and fastening devices that will be used for the project. Provide two job boards; one job board shall remain with the Consultant and one board shall be located in the Mechanical Contractor job site office.

.3 Before fabricating and installing ductwork, this Contractor shall submit to the Consultant for review a 6'-0" (1800 mm) section of each type of duct, indicating gauge, construction, duct sealant, fittings and square elbows complete with turning vanes that will be used for the project. After the review has been completed, the Contractor shall pick up the ductwork from the Consultant's Office and deliver it to Mechanical Contractor's job site office.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION as detailed in the following Sections: 15801 Duct Construction 15802 Ductwork Accessories 15803 Vibration Isolation 15804 Grilles & Diffusers 15805 Air Filters 15808 Commercial Fans 15809 Air Terminal Units 15810 Roof-Mounted - HVAC Units 15811 Outdoor Air Handling Unit - DESIGNATED HRU-20 15812 Indoor Heat Recovery Air Handling Unit - DESIGNATED HRU-21 15813 Air Handling Units - DESIGNATED AHU-20


MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION Duct Construction Section 15801 Project No. 09019 Page 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Rectangular Low Pressure Ductwork To 2" (500 Pa) Static

.1 Rectangular Low Pressure Ductwork: All ductwork to 2" (500 Pa) maximum

static pressure shall be fabricated to SMACNA Duct Construction Standards, Section No. 1, and as follows: .1 HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible - latest edition. .2 HVAC Duct Leakage Test Manual - latest edition.

.2 Material and Thickness: Ductwork shall be fabricated from best quality lock-

forming galvanized steel sheets as manufactured by Stelco or Dofasco, of the following thickness.

Size of Duct Gauge of In Width or Depth Sheet Steel 12" (300 mm) or less No. 26 U.S. 13" to 29" ( 325 mm to 725 mm) No. 24 U.S. 30" to 54" ( 750 mm to 1375 mm) No. 22 U.S. 55" to 84" (1400 mm to 2130 mm) No. 16 U.S.

.3 Construction: Longitudinal seams shall be made with Pittsburgh Lock or button

punch seams in all sizes. All ductwork shall be cross-broken or beaded 12" (300 mm) O.C. for rigidity. Ductwork 55" to 84" (1400 mm to 2130 mm) to be welded seams.

.4 Ducts to 18" (450 mm) shall have plain "S" slips on the long sides, and drive

cleats on the short sides, folded over to prevent air leakage. Maximum end joint spacing is 10'-0" (3000 mm).

.5 Reinforcing flange spacing is as follows:

Up through 18" (450 mm) Flanged 8'-0" (2400 mm) 19" through to 29" (475 mm through to 725 mm) Flanged 5'-0" (1500 mm) 30" through to 54" (750 mm through to 1375 mm) Flanged 4'-0" (1200 mm) 55" through to 84" (1400 mm through to 2130 mm) Flanged 3'-0" (915 mm)

.6 All bends or elbows shall be made with a radius of not less than 1-1/2 times the width of the duct. Where this is not possible, turning vanes shall be used. Vanes shall be of single vane construction with 1-1/2" (40 mm) space up to 24" (600 mm) width, and 3" (80 mm) spacing over 24" (600 mm)

.7 Branch mains shall be connected to the main duct as specified for ductwork. "T"

connection shall be made using a clinch lock.



2.2 Circular Duct Construction To 2" (500 Pa) Static

.1 Circular Low Pressure Duct Construction: All ductwork to 2" (500 Pa) maximum static pressure shall be fabricated to SMACNA Duct Construction Standard, Section No. 1 and as follows:

.2 Material and Thickness:

Ductwork shall be factory fabricated spiral conduit of the following gauges:

Up to 12" (300 mm) diameter - 28 Gauge 13" to 18" (315 mm to 450 mm) - 26 Gauge 19" to 28" (475 mm to 700 mm) - 24 Gauge 29" to 36" (725 mm to 900 mm) - 22 Gauge 37" to 52" (925 mm to 1325 mm) - 20 Gauge

.3 Die-stamped elbows are to be used to 8" (200 mm) diameter. Five-piece elbows

10" (250 mm) diameter and over.

.4 All fittings to be galvanized steel to the following gauges:

Up to 12" (300 mm) diameter - 26 Gauge 13" to 18" (325 mm to 450 mm) - 24 Gauge 19" to 28" (475 mm to 700 mm) - 22 Gauge 29" to 36" (725 mm to 900 mm) - 20 Gauge 37" to 52" (925 mm to 1325 mm) - 18 Gauge

.5 Branch take-offs to be 45° conical laterals or conical tees.

.6 Sleeve couplings to be used for pipe-to-pipe joints. Insertion length of sleeve

couplings and fitting collar shall be 2" (50 mm) for ducts up to 9" (225 mm) diameter and 4" (100 mm) for ducts 10" (250 mm) and over in diameter.

.7 Longitudinal joints shall be lapped and pressure rolled air tight. All seams, end

joints and fittings are to be sealed with duct sealer. Duct sealer to be "United" duct sealer, 3-M, Tough Bond or Duro Dyne S-2.


.1 United Sheetmetal

.2 BVA Vibro Acoustics



2.3 Kitchen Exhaust Hood Ductwork .1 Ductwork shall be 16 gauge welded carbon steel.

.2 Supply and install required duct supports and cleanouts to allow sufficient

cleaning of ductwork.

.3 Provide 16 gauge, double wall steel sleeve at roof penetration.

.4 The entire installation shall meet NFPA 96 requirements.

2.4 Hangers .1 Horizontal ductwork up to 29" (740 mm) wide shall be supported by galvanized 1"

(25 mm) 16 gauge or heavier hangers placed not over 6'-0" (1800 mm) apart, with ends turned under the duct. Secure to duct with sheet metal screws, two (2) per side, and one (1) in bottom.

.2 Horizontal ductwork 30" (760 mm) wide and over shall rest on galvanized angle iron supports or Unistrut channels, with rod hangers at 6'-0" (1800 mm) spacing, as follows:

Duct Size Rod Angle 30" to 48" 1/4" 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" (750 mm to 1200 mm) (6 mm) (40 mm x 40 mm x 3 mm) 49" to 72" 3/8" 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" (1225 mm to 1825 mm) (9 mm) (40 mm x 40 mm x 3 mm) 73" to 84" 3/8" 1-5/8" x 1-5/8" x 3/16" (1850 mm to 2130 mm) (9 mm) (45 mm x 45 mm x 5 mm)

.3 Flexible Duct shall hang as per horizontal ductwork up to 29" (740 mm) wide.

2.5 Plenum Protective Edge .1 Supply and install on all edges a pre-formed, galvanized 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" (40 mm x

40 mm) x 16 gauge, 90 degree angle protective edge.

.2 Protective edges to be installed after insulation has been applied and before canvas covering.




PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation Instructions

.1 Before installing ductwork, registers, grilles and diffusers, this Contractor shall check for interference with the work of others, so that grouped ducts, pipes and conduits will not interfere with each other, and that registers, grilles and diffusers are correctly located. See Architect's Reflected Ceiling Plans for final location of grilles, and diffusers. Prepare interference drawings as described in Section 15010, before fabricating ductwork. DO NOT USE FLEXIBLE DUCT IN ROOMS WITH NO CEILING.

.2 Install ductwork essentially as shown, in strict adherence to the ceiling heights indicated on the Architectural drawings. Architect reserves the right to vary run and shape of ducts and make offsets during the progress of the work as required, to avoid structural or other interferences.

.3 Ductwork concealed in building construction shall be installed in time so as not to cause delay to the work of other trades, and in ample time to perform tests as required. Concealed ducts shall not be built-in until approval for them has been obtained from the Consultant. Make sheet metal connections to masonry as required for air inlets and exhaust, airtight and weathertight.

.4 Prepare shop drawings, dimensions and locating wall, floor and roof slab openings in ample time to meet the building construction schedule. Field check and approve the size and locations of openings prior to placement of concrete or masonry. Openings required at a later date shall be at this Contractor's expense.

.5 Interference drawings shall be provided when the Contractor is supplying alternate equipment in lieu of the specified items in areas shown as Mechanical and Boiler Rooms, etc. He shall provide dimensioned drawings of the equipment location, showing clearances to walls, ceiling, ducts, etc., and also indicate clearances for filter and coil removal, etc.

3.2 Ductwork

.1 Supply and install ductwork and plenums shown and required to complete duct systems and put each in operating condition. Mechanical drawings indicate general location and route of ductwork to be installed. General layout of ducts may be taken from drawings, but this Section is responsible for avoiding interferences with other Sections not specifically shown on mechanical drawings. Actual measurements shall be taken at building before ductwork is fabricated.



.2 Make without additional charge, any necessary changes or additions to layout of ductwork to accommodate structural, duct, piping, ceilings, electrical or equipment conditions. Where openings in walls for ductwork have been provided by others, make full use of such openings by fabricating ductwork to fit them, or if necessary, provide offsets and transitions to suit. Location of ducts may be altered if change is made before installation is approved by the Consultant, and does not cause Owner or other Sections any extra expense.

.3 Install in ductwork where shown or required, access panels for cleaning, controls, motorized dampers, coils, filters, etc., in accordance with installation instructions supplied by Equipment Supplier.

.4 Supply and install where required to suit system balancing, Lawson-Taylor Pitot Co-ordinate location with selected balancing company. Tube openings covers in ductwork for each supply, return and exhaust system. Provide openings at all supply fan discharges and exhaust fan inlets. Locate 15 mm (1/2") Ø openings in straight duct runs to facilitate entry of pitot tube. Provide a minimum of three (3) holes per duct at each of the above locations, and at not more than 18" (450 mm) centres. Openings shall be concealed after tests by this Division.

.5 After final adjustments are made for air handling systems, lock each control device in position and visually indicate required setting. For balancing dampers, provide additional locking screw or bolt to approval.

.6 During construction, temporarily seal open ends of ductwork to exclude entry of foreign material and construction dust.

3.3 Hangers

.1 Low pressure ductwork shall have substantial hangers attached to the structure with concrete inserts to secure the ducts in place and prevent vibration. No caddy clips or plumber's tape permitted for hanging ducts. DO NOT SUPPORT FROM METAL DECK.

3.4 Quiet Operation .1 Each system has been designed to be quiet in operation, N.C. 35 maximum. It is

the responsibility of this Section to supply equipment and to install same, ductwork, etc., to ensure noise levels will be maintained to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

3.5 Outdoor/Exhaust Air Wall Plenums .1 Reinforce and brace plenums to SMACNA Duct Construction Standard.



.2 Form bottom of plenum without seams or with a minimum number of seams. Weld bottom side joints. Weld transverse joints and caulk.

.3 Slope bottom of plenum down towards louvre/block vent to allow water to drain out of plenum.

3.6 Concealed DX Units

.1 Section 15700 shall install concealed DX units.

.2 Units will be complete with duct collars.

.3 Connect ductwork to duct collars through a flexible connection.


MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION Ductwork Accessories Section 15802 Project No. 09019 Page 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Flexible Duct Connections

.1 All low pressure ductwork shall be isolated from fans with flexible connections.

Connections shall be non-asbestos fabricated from Duro Dyne 0.03" (0.8 mm) thick neoprene-coated glass fabric, minimum weight 39 oz./yd³ (1320 g/m³) and shall be fireproof.

2.2 Duct Sealing .1 All duct joints during manufacture shall be sealed with 3M high velocity sealer,

Tough Bond, or Duro Dyne S-2 high velocity sealer, and on the faces of the joints after cleats are installed.

.2 DUCT TAPE IS NOT ACCEPTABLE.

2.3 Balancing Dampers - DESIGNATED BD .1 All balancing dampers shall be TAMCO 1000 Series. Splitter dampers are not

allowed.

.2 Quadrant (Butterfly) Damper: shall have Duro Dyne quadrant style damper regulator sets of the following sizes: 10" (250 mm) Damper Cat. #KS-145 (KS-145L for Insulated Duct) 20" (500 mm) Damper Cat. #KS-195 (KS-195L for Insulated Duct) 30" (760 mm) Damper Cat. #KS-12

.3 Supply and install opposed blade dampers (DESIGNATED OBD) in ductwork where indicated on the drawings.

.4 Dampers shall be TAMCO, Series 1000, opposed blade dampers.

2.4 Access Doors .1 Low Pressure Systems:

.1 Access doors in the size range of 12" x 12" (300 mm x 300 mm) to 24" x 24" (600 mm x 600 mm) to be constructed as per SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Standards - Fifth Edition - Fig. 2-14 (Page 2-17). Door Type "C".

.2 Factory fabricated access doors equal to Ventlok stamped, hinged, insulated door with #100 latch will be accepted.



2.5 Acoustic Duct Liner .1 Liner shall be flexible, edge coated, tightly bonded, mat-faced and shall be made

from lead free inorganic glass fibres bonded by a thermosetting resin. .2 Liner shall be 1" (25 mm) thick, 1.4 lb/ft³ (22 kg/m³) density, where designated on

the drawings by diagonal hatching or where specified.

.3 Liner shall be treated so that the maximum flame spread rating is 25 or less and the smoke development is 50 or less according to local bylaws.

2.6 Fire Dampers .1 Fire Dampers shall be of a type and construction equal to Controlled Air

Manufacturing Limited and approved by the Underwriters' laboratories and NFPA Bulletin #90, latest edition. All Fire Dampers must be listed and labelled by the Underwriters' Laboratories.

.2 Square or rectangular fire dampers shall be equal to Controlled Air Type 'B'.

.3 Round fire dampers shall be equal to Controlled Air Type 'C'.

.4 Where space is restricted, Type 'A' may be used for rectangular ducts over 12" (300 mm).

.5 Acceptable Products: .1 Ruskin .2 Nailor-Hart .3 Controlled Air

2.7 Flexible Duct .1 Flexible duct shall be acoustic type complete with perforated aluminum core, 1"

(25 mm) insulation and outer mylar sleeve.

.2 The flexible duct shall be rated for a maximum working velocity of 2500 FPM (12.7 m/s) and 4" (1500 Pa) W.C. pressure and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories under their UL-181 Standards as Class I, Air Duct and shall comply with NFPA Standard No. 90A.

.3 Flexible duct shall be maximum 6'-0" (1800 mm) and minimum 3'-0" (900 mm). Install with a minimum number of bends.

.4 Connection to branch ducts shall be made with spin-in collars. Joints shall be sealed duct type and secured to the duct with metal screw-type bands. Spin-on collars shall be complete with balancing damper.



.5 Flexible ductwork sizes shall match diffuser neck size.

.6 Design based on: Flexmaster Type T/L-A (acoustic)

.7 Acceptable Products: .1 Alpha-Flex .2 Cana-Flex .3 Automation Industries

2.8 Fan Sheaves .1 Supply as requested by the Balancing Agency, replacement sheaves and fan

belts for each of the supply, return, and exhaust fans as required during the system air balancing.

.2 Replacement of sheaves and belts shall be by Division 15800 as requested by the Balancing Agency.

2.9 Backdraft Dampers .1 Supply and install backdraft dampers as supplied by Duro Dyne with angle frame

for surface mounting and channel frame for in-duct mounting. Provide access door for access to duct mounted units.

2.10 Round Spin-In Duct Collars .1 Spin-In Collar: Take-off connection from rectangular duct to round or flexible

duct for air diffusers, troffers etc.

Model 1801 (without damper) Model 1802 (with damper)

.2 Design based on: Flexmaster

.3 Acceptable Products: .1 None

2.11 Filter Gauges .1 Supply and install across filter section of new roof top units and interior air

handling units, a Dwyer Mark II Model 25 air filter gauge.



2.12 Volume Extractor .1 Supply and install volume extractor, where on drawings, similar to E.H. Price

Model AE1S.

2.13 "DX" Mixing Box Plenums .1 Supply and install mixing box plenums at the suction side of each fan coil.

Plenum to match fan coil size and be open at the back to allow recirculation for into the unit.

2.14 Lint Trap - DESIGNATED LINT .1 Supply and install lint trap where shown on drawings, similar to Reversomatic

LT200.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Flexible Connections to Fans

.1 Connections shall not be more than 4" (100 mm) long between metal parts and

installed with sufficient slack to prevent vibration transmission.

.2 Secure connections to ducts and fans by 18 gauge metal bands, 1" (25 mm) wide, secured with screws at 8" (200 mm) centres.

.3 All seams between fabric-to-fabric shall be made with adhesive and sewn.

.4 Support duct and fan to prevent strain being exerted on flexible connection.

3.2 Balancing Dampers .1 Supply and install a splitter damper in each main supply duct branch and a blade

damper ahead of each grille, register or diffuser.

.2 Quadrant arm shall be installed in direction of air.

.3 Supply and install blade dampers in main branches of all return, supply and exhaust ducts.

.4 Locate damper handles for easy access.



3.3 Access Doors .1 Provide removable access doors at each automatic damper, opposed blade

damper, humidifier manifold, heating coil (both sides), each fire damper, and in the main ducts for cleaning purposes. ACCESS DOORS ARE TO BE FULLY ACCESSIBLE.

3.4 Acoustic Duct Liner .1 Adhere the liner to the interior sides of ductwork with a minimum of 90%

coverage of an approved cold waterproof adhesive, Bakelite #230-38.

.2 In addition, use mechanical fasteners, mechanical pins, adhered clips or adhered nylon pins; spaced in accordance with the latest edition of SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards". Fastening devices shall not compress the insulation. Do not drill or punch holes through the ductwork.

.3 Insulation shall be applied with all joints in close mechanical contact and all joints and voids shall be filled with an approved waterproof fire retardant mastic. Waterproof mastic shall be applied over all anchors where they pierce the covering.

.4 The ductwork must be enlarged in these areas to maintain the same cross-sectional area shown on the plans.

.5 Protect leading edge of liner with a 1" (25 mm) metal nosing strip. Exposed fibreglass will not be accepted.

3.5 Volume Tappings .1 Drill and provide tappings in all ducts and apparatus where required for insertion

of pitot tubes, thermometers, probes or other equipment used by the Testing Company for testing purposes. These shall be provided with tightly fitting Lawson-Taylor or Duro Dyne Pitot Tube Covers.

3.6 Flexible Duct .1 Flexible duct shall be installed in room ceiling space. If the room does not have a

ceiling, rigid ductwork is to be used.



3.7 Fire Dampers .1 Supply and install fire dampers in all duct systems where the duct pierces a fire

separation or a construction of 3/4 hour or more. Verify damper size before ordering.

.2 Fire dampers shall be independently supported from the structure and not from the ductwork in accordance with manufacturer's published ULC test instructions.

.3 Fire dampers installed in drywall partitions shall be framed with drywall as per the manufacturer's published ULC test instructions.

.4 Provide access panels to fire dampers for linkage replacement.

.5 Submit details of typical fire dampers with a schedule of sizes and locations, bearing the Underwriters Stamp of Approval for record purposes. Identify fire damper location on the job by stencilling FD on access door.

.6 Include in the contract for the supply and installation in existing duct of an additional ten (10) 1-hour type B fire dampers, 24" x 12" (600 x 300) size, location to be determined by the Consultant.

.7 Obtain from the Building Department, a letter confirming that the installation of fire dampers are to local and OBC Standards.

.8 Test each damper for full closure before completion of the project.


MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION Vibration Isolation Section 15803 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Vibration Isolation

.1 The work under this Section shall be carried out by a firm specializing in vibration

and sound isolation. Isolate fans, condenser unit and ductwork to provide a minimum noise transmission into occupied areas. All vibration isolation material shall be supplied by one (1) manufacturer directly to this Trade Contractor.

.2 Supply to the Isolation Manufacturer, a copy of shop drawings showing equipment weights, isolator locations, concrete slab dimensions, anchor positions, etc. The Isolation Manufacturer shall supply installation instructions and supervision where required to obtain optimum results.

.3 On system start-up, the Isolation Manufacturer shall inspect the complete installation and report in writing to the Consultant any changes necessary to prevent short circuit transmission.

.4 All cabinet-type fan units shall be mounted or suspended on open spring mounts, having a ratio of one between horizontal and vertical constants and a minimum deflection of 1" (25 mm).

.5 Acceptable products: .1 Vibro Acoustics .2 Korfund .3 Masdom .4 Vibron

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Vibration Isolators

.1 Supply for the fan equipment, suitable vibration isolators to prevent transmission

of vibration from the equipment to the structure.

.2 Large centrifugal fans shall be mounted on a spring-supported, rigid, one-piece structural steel base complete with slide rails.


MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION Grilles & Diffusers Section 15804 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Grilles & Diffusers

.1 Supply and install grilles and diffusers of the type and size shown in the

Schedule.

.2 All grilles and diffusers are designated on the drawings according to type and CFM. The manufacturer shall check the Architectural drawings and provide the proper frame to suit ceiling or wall construction.

.3 The manufacturer shall provide a room schedule showing diffuser type, frame, CFM, and outlet velocity with his approval drawings.

.4 Grilles: Grilles shall have mounting frame and volume dampers. Dampers shall be key operated through the face. The finish shall be prime coat white enamel.

.5 Diffusers: Diffusers shall have an equalizing grid and opposed blade damper in the supply collar. Finish shall be prime coat white enamel. Trim shall be panel type, overlapping, or interlocking type, as designated and to suit the construction.

.6 Design based on: E. H. Price

.7 Acceptable products: .1 Krueger .2 Titus .3 Airvector Inc. .4 Tuttle & Bailey .5 E. H. Price

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Grilles & Diffusers

.1 Location: Note that the grilles and diffusers are to be carefully centred in the tile

or blockwork. The duct runouts and collars are to be carefully located and adjusted after the ceiling grid is installed. Abrupt offsets in the ductwork will not be accepted.

.2 Visible portions of ductwork behind grilles shall be painted flat black by this Section.

.3 Review carefully with the Architect's reflected ceiling plans and co-ordinate diffuser, and light fixtures. Advise Consultant of any interferences.

.4 Provide internally lined duct elbow on return grilles mounted in lay-in ceilings.


MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION Air Filters Section 15805 Project No. 09019 Page 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Filters

.1 All new fan units and DX units for which filters are specified shall have Farr 30/30

1" (25 mm) or 2" (50 mm) disposable, medium efficiency pleated type, clean to dirty resistance 0.17" to 0.65" (42 Pa to 160 Pa) WG at 500 FPM maximum velocity, in the correct size combinations to suit the fan cabinet with blank-off plates to ensure no by-pass air.

.2 Filter average efficiency shall be 20% for 1" (25 mm) and 2" (50 mm) to ASHRAE standard 52-68.

.3 Supply a spare carton of media pads for each fan system and DX units.

.4 Design based on: Farr

.5 Acceptable products: .1 National .2 General Air Filter .3 A.A.F. .4 Cambridge .5 Farr

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Supply for heat recovery units and DX units temporary construction filters to be replaced

by permanent filters by this Section at time of balancing and of Owner's takeover of the building.


MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION Commercial Fans Section 15808 Project No. 09019 Page 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 General

.1 Supply and install the following exhaust and recirculating fans of the size, type, model and designation as specified below and contained in the Fan Schedule. Accessories listed in the specifications apply to all fans of the same designation. Special accessories for individual fans are designated on the Fan Schedule.

.2 Sound level performance and fan curves shall be included with submittal

drawings.

.3 Suspend fans from structure through vibration isolators and connect to ductwork through flexible duct connections. Mount fan in place with backdraft dampers and gasket seals.

.4 Power wiring for fans is by Division 16.

.5 Control wiring is by Section 15900.

2.2 Cabinet Blower Fans - TYPE CBF

.1 Supply and install cabinet blower fan of size listed in the Schedule.

.2 Casing shall be enamelled steel with interior acoustic insulation, access panels on side and inlet and outlet duct connections.

.3 Blower wheel shall be forward curve statically and dynamically balanced with ball

bearings.

.4 Motor shall be 1750 RPM, 'V' belt drive with variable pitch sheave on motor. Motor shall be rubber mounted for quiet operation.

.5 Accessories shall include:

.1 Backdraft Damper

.2 Disconnect switch

.6 Acceptable Products: .1 Greenheck .2 Penn .3 C.B. & F. .4 Joy .5 Woods .6 Lau .7 Cook



2.3 Aluminum Dome Fans - TYPE ADF .1 Supply and install vertical upblast aluminum dome fan of size listed in the

Schedule on the drawings.

.2 Fans shall be manufactured of aluminum complete with standard features: .1 Centrifugal Wheel .2 'V' Belt Drive with 1750 rpm motors or direct-drive motor .3 Removable top for access to fan and motor .4 Curb Cap and Vibration Isolation .5 Factory-mounted and wired disconnect located under cover

.3 Accessories shall include:

.1 Backdraft Damper

.2 Birdguard

.3 Pre-Fabricated 450 mm high (18") Roof Curb (Sound Curb)

.4 Factory enamel painted in colour selected by Architect

.5 Disconnect switch

.4 Design based on: Cook

.5 Acceptable products: .1 Penn .2 Exit-Aire .3 Greenheck .4 Cook

2.4 Ceiling Hung Fans - DESIGNATED CHF .1 Ceiling-hung fan shall be of size listed in the Schedule, complete with downrod

and twist lock plug disconnect.

.2 Fan motor shall be variable speed, 60/1/110 Volt.

.3 Downrod shall be supplied to suit depth of joists.

.4 Accessories shall include: .1 Fan Guard - basket hinge type .2 Variable Speed Controller as indicated in the Schedule.

.5 Base Bid: Banvil.

.6 Alternate Products:

.1 Canadian Armature Works



2.5 Kitchen Exhaust Fan - DESIGNATED KEF .1 Supply and install vertical up-blast kitchen exhaust fans of size listed in the Fan

Schedule.

.2 The fan housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge spun aluminum.

.3 The fan shall be complete with a factory wired, unfused disconnect switch, prefabricated 450 mm (18") high roof curb, extended base, motor and adjustable pitch V-belt drive, outlet screen, backdraft damper, neoprene isolation pads, disconnect switch, grease drain and grease container and heat baffle.

.4 Fan shall be ULC listed and shall meet all requirements of NFPA-96.

.5 Starter and wiring by Division 16.

.6 Design based on: Penn Barry.

.7 Acceptable Products: .1 Greenheck .2 Cook

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Cabinet Blower Fans

.1 Suspend fans from structure through vibration isolators.

.2 Connect to ductwork with flexible duct connection.

.3 Starter, disconnect and power wiring by Division 16.

.4 Control wiring by Section 15900.

3.2 Aluminum Dome Fans .1 General Division shall install curbs and flashings.

.2 Mount on curb. Provide 1/4" (8 mm) between curb and fan.

.3 Starter and power wiring by Division 16.

.4 Control wiring by Division 16.



3.3 Ceiling Hung Fans .1 Mount ceiling fans centred between joists and to clear joist bridging. Bottom of

fan cage to be flush with bottom chord of joist.

.2 Electrical Division 16 will install controller and wire to receptacle located at underside of roof deck within the fan guard.

.3 Mount ceiling fans tight to suspended ceilings in other areas. Electrical Division 16 will install receptacle above ceiling within 3'-0" (900 mm) of fan and install and wire fan controller.

.4 Install wire mesh guard around fan and secure to structure. Provide auxiliary braces as required to prevent guard swaying.


MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION Air Terminal Units Section 15809 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 By-Pass Boxes - DESIGNATED BB

.1 Supply and install E.H. Price Model LGB by-pass unit as shown on the Schedule and as herein specified.

.2 Unit shall be complete with Model EHC control package.


.1 E.H. Price

.2 Titus

.3 Carnes

.4 Power wiring by Division 16. Control wiring by Section 15900.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 By-Pass Boxes

.1 Fasten securely from structure as detailed in manufacturer's literature.

.2 Ensure ceiling suspension system is clear of terminals and units clear of lights for ease of maintenance.

.3 Connect to discharge ductwork with flexible connection.

.4 Co-ordinate fully with air balancing contractor to review air volumes at each zone

damper and by-pass damper.

.5 Piping to units complete with re-heat coil by Section 15700.


MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION Roof-Mounted Package - HVAC Units Section 15810 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Gas-Fired Heating - Electric Cooling Package - DESIGNATED RTAC

.1 Supply and install package-type, combination air-cooled, condensing and gas-

fired heating units of the size and type listed in the Schedule. Units shall be CSA and CGA approved and labelled.

.2 Unit compressor to have five-year warranty.

.3 The unit shall include the following standard features: .1 Air-Cooled Condenser .2 Hermetic Compressors .3 Filter Dryers .4 Dual Pressure Control .5 Weatherproof Control Box .6 Magnetic Starters for Fan and Compressors .7 Fused Control Circuit with Built-In Overcurrent Protection .8 Crankcase Heater .9 Non-Cycling Relay .10 Head Pressure Control to 40°F (5°C) .11 Aluminized Steel Heat Exchanger with Ten-Year Guarantee .12 Two-Stage Combustion Sequence .13 Force Draft Combustion Chamber .14 Automatic Electric Ignition .15 Gas Safety Controls .16 Evaporator Fan 'V' Belt Drive .17 Variable Pitch Sheave (set at minimum pitch) .18 Insulated Cabinet .19 Filter Section complete with 2" (50 mm) Renewable Filters (see Section

15805) .20 Direct Expansion Cooling Coil .21 Weatherproof disconnect

.4 Accessories shall include the following:

.1 Economizer

.2 Low Ambient Head Pressure Control to 0°F (-18°C)

.3 Prefabricated 18" (450 mm) high insulated roof curb

.5 Design based on: McQuay

.6 Acceptable Products: .1 Trane .2 Lennox


MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION Roof-Mounted Package - HVAC Units Section 15810 Project No. 09019 Page 2

.3 Carrier

.4 McQuay

AIR HANDLING

HEAT COOL

UNIT TAG RTAC-20 EAT DB/WB COIL (°F) 50.4 / 42.5 78.6 / 65.4

MANUFACTURER Aaon LAT DB/WB COIL (°F) 93.8 / 60.9 54.2 / 54.0

MODEL RN-013 TOTAL CAP (MBH) 234 165

ELECTRICAL 575 / 3 / 60 SENS. CAP. (MBH) 234 131

MCA (AMPS) 28 GAS INPUT (MBH) 292.5 N/A

AIRFLOW (CFM) 5,000 WEIGHT (LBS) 2,100

ESP (INCHES) 1.6

MOTOR SIZE (HP) 5.0

SOUND POWER LEVELS (dB)

Octave Bands 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

UNIT SUPPLY 91 88 92 84 77 76 72 66

UNIT RETURN 84 80 82 72 68 66 60 50



AIR HANDLING

HEAT COOL

UNIT TAG RTAC-21 EAT DB/WB COIL (°F) 56.6 / 46.4 77.6 / 64.4

MANUFACTURER Aaon LAT DB/WB COIL (°F) 104.8 / 65.3 53.9 / 53.7

MODEL RN-009 TOTAL CAP (MBH) 156 93.3

ELECTRICAL 575 / 3 / 60 SENS. CAP. (MBH)

156 76.4

MCA (AMPS)

17 GAS INPUT (MBH) 195 N/A

AIRFLOW (CFM)

3000 WEIGHT (LBS) 1,900

ESP (INCHES)

1.6

MOTOR SIZE (HP)

3.0


Octave Bands 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

UNIT SUPPLY 86 86 86 81 75 72 70 65

UNIT RETURN 82 79 76 69 67 64 59 51

2.2 Indirect Gas-Fired Make-Up Air - DESIGNATED MUA

.1 General:

.1 Supply and install a direct fired roof-mounted unit. The capacity and configuration shall be as detailed on the drawings. The unit shall be CGA and ETL certified and listed to be in compliance with the current ANSI Z83.18 standard.

.2 The line burner, gas train and controls are to be in accordance with CGA requirements. Both burner and blower shall be compensated for an altitude of 800 feet (243 metres) above sea level.



.3 The unit is to be completely factory test fired to verify proper operation. The unit capacity is to be validated with an instantaneous flow meter. A complete electrical circuit analysis is to be conducted and all systems operated and measured. A combustion analyzer is to be employed while unit is operating at full capacity to verify combustion emissions. Burner combustion must be clean and odourless and no aliphatic aldahydes are to be detectable. Combustion efficiency must limit the products of combustion to a maximum of 5 ppm carbon monoxide and 0.5 ppm nitrogen dioxide.

.2 Unit Casing: .1 Unit construction is to be of industrial quality heavy gauge bonderized

G90 steel. The unit design shall incorporate a full base pan supported by an integral welded channel iron base. Bases are to be of industrial welded structural iron integrity, formed sheet metal bases are unacceptable. All structural iron base supports are to be treated with an industrial epoxy primer enriched with a rust inhibitor.

.2 To ensure the casings are airtight and weatherproof, all panels are to be caulked during assembly. All casings are to be hand fitted and secured with gasketed self-tapping Tek screws. Roof casings are to feature three-break standing seam panel design. Roof casings are to be sloped on outdoor units to prevent standing water. Sloped roofs are to be 1/4 in. per foot and feature full drain troughs.

.3 Entire unit casing and accessories are to be insulated with fibreglass insulation with hard neoprene facing. Insulation is to be 2" (50 mm) thick and secured with industrial glue and welded pin spots. Insulation is to be certified to fire and flamespread ratings as outlined by the ANSI code. The entire floor of the unit is to feature a steel liner sandwiching the insulation.

.4 Units are to be equipped with access doors to all serviceable components. Access doors are to have full-length stainless steel piano hinges. All access doors are to be equipped with an insulation liner, positive seal latches and gasketing. Access doors are to open outward on negative pressure sections and inward on positive pressure sections. All outdoor unit access doors are to be equipped with drain troughs.

.5 Units are to be finished with an industrial grade chain stop alkyd enamel paint. The medium grey finish coat is to be a minimum of 3 mm thick and provide 100% coverage.



.3 Blower/Mower Section: .1 Unit shall be supplied with AMCA rated centrifugal forward curve DWDI

statically and dynamically balanced blower. The fan shall be mounted on a heavy duty machined and polished shaft. The shafts maximum operating speed is not to exceed 75% of its first critical speed. The bearings and motor shall be mounted in the airstream. The T-frame motor shall be mounted in a motor compartment on a fully adjustable base. The bearings are to be industrial pillow block type supplied with extended grease lines. The blower is to be driven with an adjustable 1.25 s.f. V-belt drive package concealed in a belt guard. Outdoor units shall have hinged door to provide easy access to maintain and inspect motor, belts and bearings.

.4 Burner Section: .1 Each unit shall be equipped with a wide range fully modulating direct

gas-fired burner capable of 30:1 turndown. The burner shall have stainless steel combustion baffles, non-clogging gas ports, spark-ignited intermittent pilot and flame safeguard system. Burner combustion must be clean and odourless. Combustion efficiency must limit the products of combustion to a maximum of 5 ppm carbon monoxide and 0.5 ppm nitrogen dioxide. The burner profile is to be equipped with adjustable profile plates. A heat treated glass observation port shall provide a full view of flame. Hinged access door is to be provided to allow easy maintenance and inspection for burner, ignitor and flamerod.

.5 Control/Manifold Compartment: .1 Unit control enclosure to have hinged access. Terminal strip and all

wiring shall be numbered. The controls for the heater shall include: .1 Blower motor starter with ambient compensated overloads and

auxiliary contact .2 Primary to 120V control transformer .3 6000V ignition transformer .4 Control circuit breaker and service switch .5 Manual reset temperature high limit .6 Flamesafeguard relay with LED status and flamerod .7 Discharge temperature control sensor .8 Differential air proving safety switch .9 Automatic low temperature limit (optional) .10 Variable frequency drive motor complete with controller

.2 All wiring external to control enclosure shall be run in conduit. The gas

manifold shall include: .1 Main gas pressure regulator .2 High gas pressure regulator (optional)



.3 Manual shut-off and test firing valve

.4 Main gas automatic shut-off valve

.5 Auxiliary main gas automatic shut-off valve

.6 Modulating control system

.7 Pilot pressure regulator

.8 Pilot automatic shut-off valve

.9 Pilot manual shut-off valve

.10 Pilot needle valve

.11 Multiple test ports

.3 Outdoor units shall have hinged doors to provide easy access to maintain and inspect valves and controls.

.6 Unit shall be CGA approved, factory assembled, wired and tested.

.7 Accessories shall include the following: .1 Prefabricated 450 mm (18") high insulated roof curb .2 Weatherproof disconnect .3 Variable Frequency Drive "VFD" controller

.8 Design based on: ICE


.1 En Mar

.2 Engineered Air

.3 ICE

.4 Trane

2.3 Roof-Mounted, Gas-Fired Heating & Ventilating Unit - DESIGNATED RTHV .1 Supply and install gas-fired units where shown and as listed in the Schedule.

.2 Unit shall consist of:

.1 Prefabricated 18" (450 mm) high insulated roof curb supplied with unit.

.2 Inlet hood with expanded metal mesh screen.

.3 Outside air and return air dampers with gasketted blades to provide 2% or less leakage. Provide weatherproof hood over damper linkage.

.4 Filter section with 2" (50 mm) filters; see Filters Section 15805.

.5 Supply fan complete with variable pitch sheave, motor and drive (set at minimum pitch)

.6 Burner/Heater Section: Heat exchanger shall be fabricated from E3 stainless steel and be power-vented.



.7 Discharge air plenum for down discharge internally insulated with 1" (25 mm) acoustic insulation pinned and glued in place.

.8 Gas pressure regulator assembly for 5 psi (34.4 kPa) service pressure to 7" W.C. (1.74 kPa).

.3 Controls shall consist of: .1 Weatherproof disconnect, factory mounted and wired. .2 Fan starter, mounted and wired with control transformer. .3 Modulating gas burner complete with discharge air controller, night room

thermostat and guard, day room thermostat and guard. .4 Damper motor and mixed air thermostat.

.4 Design based on: Engineered Air


.1 Reznor

.2 Engineered Air

.3 McQuay

.4 Trane

AIR HANDLING

HEATING

UNIT TAG RTHV-20 EAT (°F) 46.0

MANUFACTURER Aaon LAT (°F) 90.9

MODEL RM-A04 GAS INPUT (MBH) 90.0

ELECTRICAL 575 / 3 / 60 GAS OUTPUT (MBH) 72.9

MCA (AMPS) 3 WEIGHT (LBS) 750

AIRFLOW (CFM) 1,500

ESP (INCHES) 1.35

MOTOR SIZE (HP) 1.0


Octave Bands 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

UNIT SUPPLY 68 68 75 79 74 73 66 56

UNIT RETURN 68 68 65 62 60 60 53 46


MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION Roof-Mounted Package - HVAC Units Section 15810 Project No. 09019 Page 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Gas-Fired - Electric Cooling Package - DESIGNATED RTAC

.1 Section 15810 mounts unit on prefabricated insulated roof curb. Flashing cant

strip, insulation, nailing strip and roofing by General Division. Roof openings by General Division.

.2 Gas piping installation and connection by Section 15700.

.3 Power wiring and disconnect by Division 16.


.5 Drain pan to be trapped and allowed to spill to roof; by Section 15400.

.6 Unit start-up is to be by manufacturer's Service Representative.

.7 Ductwork supplied and installed by Section 15800.

.8 Supply comprehensive wiring diagrams to Division 16. Wiring diagrams shall be specific to this project and shall be submitted with approval drawings.

3.2 Direct Gas-Fired Make-Up Air - DESIGNATED MUA .1 Division 15810 mounts unit on prefabricated roof curb. Flashing, cant strip,

insulation, nailing strip and roofing by General Division. Roof opening by General Division.

.2 Power wiring by Division 16.


.4 Gas piping installation and connection by Section 15700.

.5 Unit start-up is to be by manufacturer's Service Representative.

.6 Supply comprehensive wiring diagrams to Division 16. Wiring diagrams shall be specific to this project and shall be submitted with approval drawings.


MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION Roof-Mounted Package - HVAC Units Section 15810 Project No. 09019 Page 9 3.3 Roof-Mounted, Gas-Fired Heating & Ventilating Units - DESIGNATED RTHV

.1 Provide all wiring diagrams for external wiring with approval drawings.

.2 Provide factory-trained technician to check out wiring, check control operation,

and burner start-up on units at initial start-up. The same factory-trained personnel shall also be present for training of Owner's Representative on system take-over.

.3 Provide roof curb to General Division for mounting and flashing. Assist in the setting.

.4 Set unit on roof curb, checking to be sure gasket is installed between unit and curb.

.5 Division 16 will provide all external power wiring. Factory Representative shall check wiring before starting up unit.

.6 Section 15900 shall provide all control wiring.

.7 Start up unit and adjust to proper air flow. Test and adjust controls, clean filters or replace as necessary to clean.


MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION Outdoor Air Handling Unit - DESIGNATED HRU-20 Section 15811 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Documents

.1 Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 General Description .1 This section includes the design, controls and installation requirements for

packaged rooftop units/outdoor air handling units.

1.3 Quality Assurance .1 Unit shall be certified in accordance with UL Standard 1995/CSA C22.2 No. 236,

Safety Standard for Heating and Cooling Equipment.

.2 Unit and refrigeration system shall comply with ASHRAE 15, Safety Standard for Mechanical Refrigeration.

.3 Unit shall be certified in accordance with ANSI Z21.47b/CSA 2.3b and ANSI Z83.8/CSA 2.6, Safety Standard Gas-Fired Furnaces.

.4 Unit Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) shall be equal to or greater that prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

.5 (Unit shall comply with Chicago code requirements for an HVAC unit (with cooling and gas heat) (with cooling and electric heat) (with cooling) (with gas heat) (with electric heat) (without cooling or heating).)

.6 Unit shall be safety certified by ETL and be ETL US and ETL Canada listed. Unit nameplate shall include the ETL/ETL Canada label.

.7 Unit and components shall be designed, manufactured, and independently analyzed, rated, and certified to meet with the seismic compliance standards of the International Building Code, 2003 edition, Section 1621. If requested, unit shall be provided with Certificate of Compliance from an independent certifying Professional Engineer clearly indicating that the unit and components meet seismic design requirements.


MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION Outdoor Air Handling Unit - DESIGNATED HRU-20 Section 15811 Project No. 09019 Page 2 1.4 Submittals

.1 Product Data: Literature shall be provided that indicates dimensions, operating

and shipping weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance, filter information, factory supplied accessories, electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual with start-up requirements shall be provided.

.2 Shop Drawings: Unit drawings shall be provided that indicate assembly, unit dimensions, construction details, clearances, and connection details. Computer generated fan curves for each fan shall be submitted with specific design operation point noted. Wiring diagram shall be provided with details for both power and control systems and differentiate between factory installed and field installed wiring.

1.5 Delivery, Storage & Handling .1 Unit shall be shipped with doors bolted shut and outside air hood closed to

prevent damage during transport and thereafter while in storage awaiting installation.

.2 Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual instructions for rigging, moving, and unloading the unit at its final location shall be followed.

.3 Unit shall be stored in a clean, dry place protected from construction traffic in accordance with the Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual.

1.6 Warranty .1 Manufacturer shall provide a "parts only" warranty for a period of 12 months from

the date of equipment start-up or 18 months from the date of shipment, whichever is less. Warranty shall cover material and workmanship that prove defective, within the specified warranty period, provided manufacturer’s written instructions for installation, operation and maintenance have been followed. Warranty excludes parts associated with routine maintenance, such as belts and air filters.


MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION Outdoor Air Handling Unit - DESIGNATED HRU-20 Section 15811 Project No. 09019 Page 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Rooftop Units

.1 General Description:

.1 The Mechanical Contractor shall supply the air handling units as manufactured by Aaon as the base bid proposal as specified herein and as shown on the plans and specifications.

.2 For consideration of alternatives, cost savings must be presented adjacent to listed alternatives on the bid form at the time of closing. Contractors proposing alternatives are responsible for all costs for all trades associated with such a substitution. Contractors proposing alternatives shall also be responsible for additional costs associated with such substitutions as submitted by consulting engineers. Alternative manufacturers include McQuay, Ingenia and Engineered Air.

.3 Packaged rooftop unit shall include compressors, evaporator coils, filters, supply fans, dampers, air-cooled condenser coils, condenser fans, gas heaters, exhaust fans, energy recovery wheels, and unit controls.

.4 Unit shall be factory assembled and tested including leak testing of the coils, pressure testing of the refrigeration circuit, and run testing of the completed unit. Run test report shall be supplied with the unit in the controls compartment's literature pocket.

.5 Unit shall have decals and tags to indicate lifting and rigging, service areas and caution areas for safety and to assist service personnel.

.6 Unit components shall be labelled, including pipe stub outs, refrigeration system components and electrical and controls components.

.7 Estimated sound power levels (dB) shall be shown on the unit schedule.

.8 Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual shall be supplied within the unit.

.9 Laminated color-coded wiring diagram shall match factory installed wiring and be provided in both point-to-point and ladder form and affixed to the interior of the control compartment’s access door.

.10 Unit nameplate shall be provided in two locations on the unit, affixed to the exterior of the unit and affixed to the interior of the control compartment’s access door.


MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION Outdoor Air Handling Unit - DESIGNATED HRU-20 Section 15811 Project No. 09019 Page 4

.2 Construction: .1 All cabinet walls, access doors and roof shall be fabricated of rigid, impact

resistant, double wall, high performance composite panels with G90 galvanized steel on both sides and a closed cell polyurethane foam interior core.

.2 Foam shall have a minimum density of 2 pounds/cubic foot and shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D-1929 for a minimum flash ignition temperature of 610°F.

.3 Panel deflection shall not exceed L/240 ratio at 125% of design static pressure, maximum 8 inches of positive or negative static pressure. Deflection shall be measured at the midpoint of the panel height and width.

.4 Cabinet leakage rate shall not exceed 1% when tested at 6 inches of static pressure.

.5 Insulation shall have a minimum R-value of 13.

.6 All cabinet walls, access doors and roof shall have a thermal break with no metal path from inside to outside.

.7 Units with cooling coils shall include double sloped 304 stainless steel drain pans and a factory provided p-trap, for field installation.

.8 Roof of the air tunnel shall be sloped to provide complete drainage.

.9 Unit shall have rain break overhangs above access doors.

.10 Exterior paint finish shall be capable of withstanding at least 2,500 hours, with no visible corrosive effects, when tested in a salt spray and fog atmosphere in accordance with ASTM B 117-95 test procedure.

.11 Access to filters, dampers, cooling coils, reheat coil, heaters, supply fans, exhaust fans, return fans, energy recovery wheels, compressors, water-cooled condensers, and electrical and controls components shall be through hinged access doors with quarter turn, zinc cast, lockable handles. Full length stainless steel piano hinges shall be included on the doors.

.12 Unit shall be provided with base discharge and return air openings. All openings through the base pan of the unit shall have upturned flanges of at least 1/2 inch in height around the opening.



.13 Unit shall include lifting lugs on the top of the unit.

.14 Unit base pan shall be provided with 1/2 inch thick foam insulation

.3 Electrical: .1 Unit shall be provided with factory installed and factory wired, non-fused

disconnect switch.

.2 Unit shall be provided with factory installed and field wired 115V, 20 amp GFI outlet in the unit control panel.

.3 Unit shall be provided with manual reset low temperature limit controls which shut off the unit when the discharge temperature reaches a field adjustable setpoint.

.4 Supply Fans: .1 Unit shall include direct drive, backward curved, plenum supply fans.

.2 Blowers and motors shall be dynamically balanced and mounted on

rubber isolators.

.3 Motors shall be standard (premium) efficiency ODP with ball bearings rated for 200,000 hours service with external lubrication points.

.4 Variable frequency drives shall be factory wired and mounted in the unit. Fan motors shall be premium efficiency.

.5 Exhaust Fans (on units with heat recovery only): .1 Exhaust dampers shall be sized for 100% relief.

.2 Fans and motors shall be dynamically balanced.

.3 Motors shall be premium efficiency ODP with ball bearings rated for

200,000 hours service with external lubrication points.

.4 Access to exhaust fans shall be through double wall, hinged access doors with quarter turn handles.

.5 Unit shall include belt driven, backward curved, plenum exhaust fans.

.6 Variable frequency drives shall be factory wired and mounted in the unit.



.6 Cooling Coils: .1 Evaporator Coils:

.1 Coils shall be designed for use with R-410A refrigerant and constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes and 304 stainless steel end casings. Fin design shall be sine wave rippled.

.2 Coils shall have interlaced circuitry.

.3 Coils shall be helium leak tested.

.4 Coils shall be furnished with a factory installed thermostatic expansion valves.

.7 Refrigeration System: .1 Unit shall be factory charged with R-410A refrigerant.

.2 Compressors shall be scroll type with thermal overload protection,

independently circuited, and carry a 5 year non-prorated warranty.

.3 Compressors shall be mounted in an isolated service compartment which can be accessed without affecting unit operation. Lockable hinged compressor access doors shall be fabricated of double wall, high performance composite panels with an R-value of 13 to prevent the transmission of noise outside the cabinet.

.4 Compressors shall be isolated from the base pan with the compressor manufacturer’s recommended rubber vibration isolators, to reduce any transmission of noise from the compressors into the building area.

.5 Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with thermostatic expansion valve type refrigerant flow control.

.6 Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with automatic reset low pressure and manual reset high pressure refrigerant safety controls, Schrader type service fittings on both the high pressure and low pressure sides, and factory installed liquid line filter driers.

.7 Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with a liquid line sight glass.

.8 Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with suction and discharge compressor isolation valves.

.9 Each capacity stage shall be equipped with a 5 minute off, delay timer to prevent compressor short cycling.



.10 Each capacity stage shall be equipped with an adjustable, 20 second delay timer to prevent multiple capacity stages from starting all at once.

.8 Condensers: .1 Air-Cooled Condenser:

.1 Condenser fans shall be vertical discharge, axial flow, direct drive fans.

.2 Coils shall be designed for use with R-410A refrigerant and constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes and aluminum end casings. Fin design shall be sine wave rippled.

.3 Coils shall be designed for a minimum of 10�F of refrigerant sub-cooling.

.4 Coils shall be helium leak tested.

.9 Gas Heating: .1 Unit shall include a natural gas furnace.

.2 Stainless steel heat exchanger furnace shall carry a 25 year non-prorated

warranty.

.3 Gas furnace shall consist of stainless steel heat exchangers with multiple concavities, an induced draft blower and an electronic pressure switch to lockout the gas valve until the combustion chamber is purged and combustion airflow is established.

.4 Furnace shall include a gas ignition system consisting of an electronic igniter to a pilot system, which will be continuous when the heater is operating, but will shut off the pilot when heating is not required.

.5 Unit shall include a single gas connection and have gas supply piping entrances in the unit base for through-the-curb gas piping and in the outside cabinet wall for across the roof gas piping.

.6 Natural gas furnace shall be equipped with modulating gas valves, adjustable speed combustion blowers, stainless steel tubular heat exchangers, and electronic controller. Combustion blowers and gas valves shall be capable of modulation. Electronic controller includes a factory wired, field installed supply air temperature sensor. Sensor shall be field installed in the supply air ductwork. Supply air temperature setpoint shall be adjustable on the electronic controller within the controls compartment. Gas heating assemblies shall be capable of operating at any firing rate between 100% and 30% of their rated capacity.



.10 Filters: .1 Unit shall include 2 inch thick, pleated panel filters with an ASHRAE

efficiency of 30% and MERV rating of 8, upstream of the cooling coil.

.11 Outside Air/Economizer: .1 Options:

.1 Unit shall include 0-100% economizer consisting of a motor operated outside air damper and return air damper assembly constructed of extruded aluminum, hollow core, airfoil blades with rubber edge seals and aluminum end seals. Damper blades shall be gear driven and designed to have no more than 15 CFM of leakage per sq. ft. of damper area when subjected to 2 inches w.g. air pressure differential across the damper. Damper assembly shall be controlled by spring return enthalpy activated fully modulating actuator. Unit shall include outside air opening bird screen, outside air hood with rain lip and barometric relief dampers.

.12 Energy Recovery: .1 Where shown on the schedule unit shall contain a factory mounted and

tested energy recovery wheel(s). The energy recovery wheel(s) shall be mounted in a rigid frame containing the wheel drive motor, drive belt, wheel seals and bearings. Frame shall slide out for service and removal from the cabinet.

.2 The energy recovery component shall incorporate a rotary wheel in an insulated cassette frame complete with seals, drive motor and drive belt.

.3 Wheels shall be wound continuously with one flat and one structured layer in an ideal parallel plate geometry providing laminar flow and minimum pressure drop-to-efficiency ratios. The layers shall be effectively captured in stainless steel wheel frames or aluminum and stainless steel segment frames that provide a rigid and self-supporting matrix.

.4 Wheels shall be provided with removable energy transfer matrix. Wheel frame construction shall be a welded hub, spoke and rim assembly of stainless, plated and/or coated steel and shall be self-supporting without matrix segments in place. Segments shall be removable without the use of tools to facilitate maintenance and cleaning. Wheel bearings shall be selected to provide an L-10 life in excess of 400,000 hours. Rim shall be continuous rolled stainless steel and the wheel shall be connected to the shaft by means of taper locks.



.5 All diameter and perimeter seals shall be provided as part of the cassette assembly and shall be factory set. Drive belts of stretch urethane shall be provided for wheel rim drive without the need for external tensioners or adjustment.

.6 The energy recovery cassette shall be an Underwriters Laboratories Recognized Component for electrical and fire safety. The wheel drive motor shall be an Underwriters Laboratory Recognized Component and shall be mounted in the cassette frame and supplied with a service connector or junction box. Thermal performance shall be certified by the manufacturer in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 84, Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers and ARI Standard 1060, Rating Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment. Cassettes shall be listed in the ARI Certified Product.

.7 Unit shall include 4 inch thick, pleated panel outside air filters with an ASHRAE efficiency of 30% and MERV rating of 8, upstream of the wheel(s).

.8 Hinged service access door shall allow access to the wheel(s).

.9 Total energy recovery wheels shall be coated with silica gel desiccant permanently bonded by a process without the use of binders or adhesives, which may degrade desiccant performance. The substrate shall be lightweight polymer and shall not degrade nor require additional coatings for application in marine or coastal environments. Coated segments shall be washable with detergent or alkaline coil cleaner and water. Desiccant shall not dissolve nor deliquesce in the presence of water or high humidity.

.10 Unit shall include energy recovery wheel defrost control which includes an adjustable temperature sensor and timer wired to periodically stop the wheel rotation, which allows the warm exhaust air to defrost the wheel.

.11 Unit shall include energy recovery wheel rotation detection sensors and a set of normally open and normally closed contracts for field indication of wheel rotation.

.13 Controls: .1 Factory Installed and Factory Provided Controller:

.1 Unit controller shall be capable of controlling all features and options of the unit. Controller shall be factory installed in the unit controls compartment and factory tested.



.2 With enthalpy activated fully modulating economizer option, an outdoor air humidity sensor shall be factory installed.

.3 Controller shall have an onboard clock and calendar functions that allow for occupancy scheduling.

.4 Controller shall include non-volatile memory to retain all programmed values without the use of a battery, in the event of a power failure.

.5 Controller shall contain diagnostics to indicate controller power, communications, unit alarms and sensor failures.

.6 Controller shall be capable of standalone operation with unit configuration, setpoint adjustment, sensor status viewing and occupancy scheduling available without dependence on a building management system.

.7 Constant Volume Controller .1 Outside air temperature sensor shall be factory mounted

and wired. Supply air temperature sensor shall be factory wired for field installation in the supply air ductwork. Space temperature sensor with temperature setpoint reset and unoccupied override shall be furnished with the unit for field installation.

2.2 Curbs .1 Prefabricated 450 mm (18") high insulated roof curbs shall be fully gasketed

between the curb top and unit bottom with the curb providing full perimeter support, 18" (450 mm) high, cross structure support and air seal for the unit. Curb gasket shall be furnished within the control compartment of the rooftop unit to be mounted on the curb immediately before mounting of the rooftop unit.

.2 Solid bottom curb shall be factory assembled and fully lined with 1" (25 mm) neoprene coated fiberglass insulation and include a wood nailer strip.

2.3 Accessories shall include the following: .1 Variable Frequency Drive "VFD" controller

2.4 Design based on: Aaon


MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION Outdoor Air Handling Unit - DESIGNATED HRU-20 Section 15811 Project No. 09019 Page 11 2.5 Acceptable Products:

.1 Engineered Air

.2 Trane

.3 Aaon

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation, Operation & Maintenance .1 Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual shall be supplied with the unit.

.2 Installing contractor shall install unit, including field installed components, in

accordance with Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual instructions.

.3 Start-up and maintenance requirements shall be complied with to ensure safe and correct operation of the unit.

GEORGETOWN DISTRICT HIGH SCHOOL - ADDITION & RENOVATIONS - PHASE 2 MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION Outdoor Air Handling Unit - DESIGNATED HRU-20 Section 15811 Project No. 09019 Page 12

ENERGY RECOVERY SUMMER

ENERGY RECOVERY WINTER

AIR HANDLING

HEAT

COOL SUPPLY

EXHAUST

SUPPLY

EXHAUST

UNIT TAG HRU-20 AIRFLOW (CFM) 11,600 11,600 7,000 7,000 7,000 7,000

MANUFACTURER Aaon EAT DB/WB COIL (°F)

60.9 / 48.6 76.9 / 64.0 88.0 / 73.0 75.0 / 62.0 -5.0 / -6.0 72.0 / 55.0

MODEL RN-026 LAT DB/WB COIL (°F) 95.4 / 62.3 54.4 / 54.3 78.1 / 65.3 84.9 / 70.1 53.7 / 44.0 13.3 / 13.3

ELECTRICAL 575 / 3 / 60 TOTAL CAP (MBH) 432 327 202 558

MCA (AMPS) 70 SENS. CAP. (MBH) 432 277 76 444

FAN TAG SF-20 EF-20 GAS INPUT (MBH) 540.0 -

AIRFLOW (CFM) 11,600 11,600 WEIGHT (LBS) 7,900

ESP (INCHES) 1.3 0.3

MOTOR SIZE (HP) 15.0 3.0


Octave Bands 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

UNIT SUPPLY 91 91 93 95 91 87 82 76

UNIT RETURN 83 81 77 73 76 76 75 75


MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION Indoor Heat Recovery Air Handling Unit Section 15812 Project No. 09019 DESIGNATED HRU-21 Page 1 PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes

.1 Indoor Air Handling Units.

1.2 References .1 AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.

.2 AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.

.3 AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.

.4 AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.

.5 AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louver, Dampers, and Shutters.

.6 ARI 410 - Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.

.7 ARI 430 - Central-Station Air-Handling Units.

.8 ARI 435 - Application of Central-Station Air-Handling Units.

.9 ASTMB117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray Apparatus.

.10 NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators.

.11 NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

.12 SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

.13 UL 723 - Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

.14 UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units.

.15 UL 1995 - Standard for Heating and Cooling Equipment.

.16 UL 94 - Test for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and

Appliances.

.17 IBC 2000, 2003 - International Building Code.


MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION Indoor Heat Recovery Air Handling Unit Section 15812 Project No. 09019 DESIGNATED HRU-21 Page 2

.18 NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

.19 NFPA 5000 - Building Construction and Safety Code.

.20 ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Code.

.21 ARI Standard 1060 - Rating Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers for Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment.

.22 GSA 2003 Facilities Standard - 5.9 HVAC Systems and Components.

1.3 Submittals .1 Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required

clearances, construction details, field connection details, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Computer generated fan curves for each air handling unit shall be submitted with specific design operating point noted. A computer generated psychometric chart shall be submitted for each cooling coil with design points and final operating point clearly noted. Sound data for discharge, radiated and return positions shall be submitted by octave band for each unit. Calculations for required baserail heights to satisfy condensate trapping requirements of cooling coil shall be included.

.2 Product Data: .1 Provide literature that indicates dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings,

fan performance, finishes of materials, electrical characteristics, and connection requirements.

.2 Provide data of filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly, and filter frames.

.3 Provide manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.4 Qualifications .1 Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Air Handler products

specified in this section must show a minimum five years documented experience and complete catalogue data on total product.


MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION Indoor Heat Recovery Air Handling Unit Section 15812 Project No. 09019 DESIGNATED HRU-21 Page 3 1.5 Safety Agency Listed & Certification

.1 Air Handling units shall be cETLus safety listed to conform with UL Standard

1995 and CAN/CSA Standard C22.2 No. 236. Units shall be accepted for use in New York City by the Department of Building, MEA 342-99-E.

.2 Air handler furnished with double width, double inlet (DWDI) fans shall be certified in accordance with the central station air handling units certification program, which is based on ARI Standard 430.

.3 Air handling unit water heating & cooling coils shall be certified in accordance with the forced circulation air cooling and air heating coils certification program, which is based on ARI Standard 410.

1.6 Delivery, Storage & Handling .1 Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site.

.2 Accept products on site on factory-furnished shipping skids. Inspect for damage.

.3 Store in clean dry place and protect from construction traffic. Handle carefully to

avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 General Description .1 The Mechanical Contractor shall supply air handling units as manufactured by

McQuay International as the base bid proposal as specified herein and as shown on the plans and specifications.

.2 For consideration of alternatives, cost savings must be presented adjacent to listed alternatives on the bid form at the time of closing. Contractors proposing alternatives are responsible for all costs for all trades associated with such a substitution. Contractors proposing alternatives shall also be responsible for additional costs associated with such substitutions as submitted by consulting engineers. Alternative manufacturers include Haakon and Engineered Air.

.3 Configuration: Fabricate as detailed on prints.

.4 Performance: Conform to ARI 410 and 430 Standards. See schedules on prints.



.5 Acoustics: Sound power levels (dB) for the unit shall not exceed the specified levels shown on the unit schedule. The manufacturer shall provide the necessary sound treatment to meet these levels if required.

2.2 Unit Construction .1 Fabricate unit with heavy gauge channel posts and panels secured with

mechanical fasteners. All panels, access doors, and ship sections shall be sealed with permanently applied bulb-type gasket. Shipped loose gasketing is not allowed.

.2 Panels and access doors shall be constructed as a 2-inch nominal thick; thermal broke double wall assembly, injected with foam insulation with an R-value of not less than R-13. .1 The outer panel shall be constructed of G60 painted galvanized steel. .2 The inner liner shall be constructed of G90 galvanized steel. .3 The floor plate shall be furnished with .125 inch thick aluminum tread

plate in sections as indicated on project schedule. .4 Unit will be furnished with solid inner liners.

.3 Panel deflection shall not exceed L/240 ratio at 125% of design static pressure,

maximum 5 inches of positive or 6 inches of negative static pressure. Deflection shall be measured at the panel midpoint.

.4 The casing leakage rate shall not exceed .5 cfm per square foot of cabinet area at 5 inches of positive static pressure or 6 inches of negative static pressure (.0025 m3/s per square meter of cabinet area at 1.24 kPa static pressure).

.5 Module to module field assembly shall be accomplished with an overlapping, full perimeter internal splice joint that is sealed with bulb type gasketing on both mating modules to minimize on-site labour and meet indoor air quality standards.

.6 Access doors shall be flush mounted to cabinetry, with minimum of two six inch long stainless steel piano-type hinges, latch and full size handle assembly. Access doors shall swing outward for unit sections under negative pressure. Access doors on positive pressure sections, shall have a secondary latch to relieve pressure and prevent injury upon access.

.7 A 6-inch formed G60 galvanized steel base rail shall be provided by the unit manufacturer for structural rigidity and condensate trapping.


MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION Indoor Heat Recovery Air Handling Unit Section 15812 Project No. 09019 DESIGNATED HRU-21 Page 5 2.3 Fan Assemblies

.1 Fan assembly shall be a single width, single inlet, belt-drive type plenum fan

dynamically balanced as an assembly, as shown in schedule. Maximum fan RPM shall be below first critical fan speed. Fan assemblies shall be dynamically balanced by the manufacturer on all three planes and at all bearing supports. Copper lubrication lines shall be provided and extend from the bearings and attached with grease fittings to the fan base assembly near access door. If not supplied at the factory, contractor shall mount copper lube lines in the field. Fan and motor shall be mounted internally on a steel base. Factory mount motor on slide base that can be slid out the side of unit if removal is required. Provide access to motor, drive, and bearings through hinged access door.

.2 Fan assembly shall be a double width, double inlet, belt-drive type housed forward curved fan dynamically balanced as an assembly, as shown in schedule. Maximum fan RPM shall be below first critical fan speed. Fan assemblies shall be dynamically balanced by the manufacturer on all three planes and at all bearing supports. Copper lubrication lines shall be provided and extend from the bearings and attached with grease fittings to the fan base assembly near access door. If not supplied at the factory, contractor shall mount copper lube lines in the field. Fan and motor shall be mounted internally on a steel base. Factory mount motor on slide base that can be slid out the side of unit if removal is required. Provide access to motor, drive, and bearings through hinged access door.

.3 Fan and motor assembly shall be mounted on 2" deflection spring vibration type isolators inside cabinetry.

.4 The testing and balancing contractor, and not the unit manufacturer, shall be responsible for the selection, supply and installation of any required belts, sheaves and pulleys during testing and balancing of the air handling unit system.

2.4 Bearings, Shafts & Drives .1 Bearings: Basic load rating computed in accordance with AFBMA - ANSI

Standards. The bearings shall be designed for service with an L-50 life of 200,000 hours and shall be a heavy duty pillow block, self-aligning, grease-lubricated ball or spherical roller bearing type.

.2 Shafts shall be solid, hot rolled steel, ground and polished, keyed to shaft, and protectively coated with lubricating oil. Hollow shafts are not acceptable.



.3 V-Belt drives shall be cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed. Fixed sheaves, matched belts, and drive rated based on motor horsepower. Minimum of 2 belts shall be provided on all fans with 10 HP motors and above. Standard drive service factor minimum shall be 1.1 S.F. for 1/4 HP – 7.5 HP, 1.3 S.F. for 10 HP and larger, calculated based on fan brake horsepower.

2.5 Electrical .1 Fan motors shall be manufacturer provided and installed, Open Drip Proof,

premium efficiency (meets or exceeds EPAct requirements), 1750 RPM, single speed, 575V / 60HZ / 3P. Complete electrical characteristics for each fan motor shall be as shown in schedule.

.2 Wiring Termination: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclosed terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.

.3 Manufacturer shall provide ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Efficiency equation details for individual equipment to assist Building Engineer for calculating system compliance.

.4 All electrical connection components including starters, VFDs, disconnect switches and wiring shall be field provided by the fan manufacturer and mounted by the Mechanical Contractor for each individual supply fan, exhaust fan and energy recovery wheel.

2.6 Cooling & Heating Coils .1 Certification: Acceptable water heating and refrigerant coils shall be certified in

accordance with ARI Standard 410 and bear the ARI label. Coils exceeding the scope of the manufacturer’s certification and/or the range of ARI’s standard rating conditions will be considered provided the manufacturer is a current member of the ARI Forced Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils certification programs and that the coils have been rated in accordance with ARI Standard 410. Manufacturer must be ISO 9002 certified.



.2 Water heating coil shall be provided. Provide access to coil(s) for service and cleaning. Enclose coil headers and return bends fully within unit casing. Unit shall be provided with coil connections that extend a minimum of 5” beyond unit casing for ease of installation. Drain and vent connections shall be provided exterior to unit casing. Coil connections must be factory sealed with grommets on interior and exterior panel liners to minimize air leakage and condensation inside panel assembly. If not factory packaged, Contractor must supply all coil connection grommets and sleeves. Coils shall be removable through side and/or top panels of unit without the need to remove and disassemble the entire section from the unit. .1 Headers shall consist of seamless copper tubing to assure compatibility

with primary surface. Headers to have intruded tube holes to provide maximum brazing surface for tube to header joint, strength, and inherent flexibility. Header diameter should vary with fluid flow requirements.

.2 Fins shall have a minimum thickness of 0.0075 inch aluminum plate construction. Fins shall have full drawn collars to provide a continuous surface cover over the entire tube for maximum heat transfer. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the fins to provide a continuous primary to secondary compression bond over the entire finned length for maximum heat transfer rates. Bare copper tubes shall not be visible between fins.

.3 Coil tubes shall be 5/8 inch OD seamless copper, 0.020 inch nominal tube wall thickness, expanded into fins, brazed at joints. Soldered U-bends shall be provided to minimize the effects of erosion and premature failure having a minimum tube wall thickness of .025 inches.

.4 Coil connections shall be carbon steel, threaded connection. Connection size to be determined by manufacturer based upon the most efficient coil circuiting. Vent and drain fittings shall be furnished on the connections, exterior to the air handler. Vent connections provided at the highest point to assure proper venting. Drain connections shall be provided at the lowest point to insure complete drainage and prevent freeze-up.

.5 Coil shall be furnished as an uncased galvanized steel track to allow for thermal movement and slide into a pitched track for fluid drainage.



.3 Direct expansion refrigerant cooling coil shall be provided. Provide access to coil(s) for service and cleaning. Enclose coil headers and return bends fully within unit casing. Unit shall be provided with coil connections that extend a minimum of 3” beyond unit casing for ease of installation. Coil connections must be factory sealed with grommets on interior and exterior panel liners to minimize air leakage and condensation inside panel assembly. If not factory packaged, Contractor must supply all coil connection grommets and sleeves. Coils shall be removable through side and/or top panels of unit without the need to remove and disassemble the entire section from the unit. .1 Sweat type copper suction headers shall be provided.

.2 Fins shall have a minimum thickness of 0.0075 inch aluminum plate

construction. Fins shall have full drawn collars to provide a continuous surface cover over the entire tube for maximum heat transfer. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the fins to provide a continuous primary to secondary compression bond over the entire finned length for maximum heat transfer rates. Bare copper tubes shall not be visible between fins.

.3 Coil tubes shall be 5/8 inch OD seamless copper, 0.020 inch nominal tube wall thickness, expanded into fins on 1 1/2-inch centers, brazed at joints. Soldered U-bends shall be provided to minimize the effects of erosion and premature failure having a minimum tube wall thickness of .025 inches.

.4 Sweat type copper suction connections located at the bottom of the suction headers for gravity oil drainage. Coils shall be uniformly circuited in a counterflow manner for either single circuit, row, face, interlaced, or interlaced face split capacity reduction as shown on unit schedule. Pressure type liquid distributors used. Coils shall be tested with 315 pounds air pressure under warm water, and suitable for 250 psig working pressure.

.5 Coil casing shall be a formed channel frame of stainless steel.

.6 Provided dual sloped drain pan constructed of stainless steel.

2.7 Filters .1 Furnish flat panel filter section with 2-inch filter. Provide side loading and removal

of filters.



.2 Furnish flat filter in mixing box section with 2-inch pleated MERV 8 filter with microbial resistant Intersept coating. Provide side loading and removal of filters.

.3 Filter media shall be UL 900 listed, Class I or Class II.

.4 Filter Magnehelic gauge(s) shall be furnished and mounted by others.

2.8 Mixing Section .1 Mixing box section shall be provided with parallel low leak airfoil damper blades.

Dampers shall be hollow core galvanized steel airfoil blades, fully gasketted and have continuous vinyl seals between damper blades in a galvanized steel frame. Dampers shall have stainless steel jamb seals along end of dampers. Connecting linkage and ABS plastic end caps shall be provided when return and outside air dampers are each sized for full airflow. Return and outside air dampers of different sizes must be driven separately. Damper Leakage: Leakage rate shall be less than two tenths of one percent leakage at 2 inches static pressure differential. Leakage rate tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500.

2.9 Energy Recovery Wheel .1 Energy recovery wheel heat exchanger shall be constructed of alternate layers of

corrugated and flat aluminum sheet material. Both sides of the exchanger shall be completely smooth with less then 0.005" variation between alternate layers to allow for optimum sealing surface for brush seals. The rotor shall have smooth air channels to ensure laminar airflow for low-pressure drops. Dry particles up to 900 microns shall pass freely through the rotor without clogging the media. The rotor media shall be capable of being cleaned with low temperature steam without degrading unit performance. The rotor media must be made of aluminum that is coated to prohibit corrosion. All surfaces shall be coated with a non-migrating absorbent specifically developed for the selective transfer of water vapour. Performance shall be as scheduled and verified by manufacturer. Assuming equal sensible and latent recovery effectiveness shall not derive performance. The rotor housing shall be constructed using a heavy-duty extruded and anodized aluminum tube frame (rotors less than 42" shall have a heavy duty galvanized frame without insulation) with double wall galvanized sheet metal panels with fibreglass insulation. Adjustable brush seals must be provided along the periphery of the rotor and between the inlet and outlet air passages to effectively prevent air leakage and cross-contamination between airflows. Rotor and casing shall be reinforced to prevent deflection from differential pressures to less than 0.03 inches. All rotors shall be mounted on



sealed permanently lubricated spherical bearings. All rotors over 80" in diameter must have flanged or pillow block bearings that can be serviced or replaced without removal of the rotor from the case. The unit shall be provided with a factory set, field adjustable purge sector, as shown on unit schedule, designed to limit cross contamination at qualified appropriate design conditions to less than 0.04 percent of the exhaust air stream concentration. Independent laboratory evaluations must indicate purge sector configurations, rotor construction, gasses, air pressure differentials, rotor speeds and other phenomena that constitute “appropriate design conditions” required to limit cross-contamination and air leakage. The rotor drive system shall consist of a self-adjusting belt around the rotor perimeter driven by an AC motor with gear reduction. The variable speed drive shall be specifically designed for heat wheel applications and include: an AC inverter, soft start/stop, rotation detection w/alarm contacts, automatic self-cleaning jog cycle, and self testing capability. The speed controller shall be capable of accepting a potentiometer, VDC, or mA control signal. The temperature control system shall consist of an integral control panel with remote temperature sensors mounted in each of the four air streams to monitor exchanger performance. The control shall modulate rotor speed to (1) prevent frost build-up, (2) reduce heat recovery for economizer mode, and (3) switch to maximum heat recovery when outdoor temperature is higher than indoor temperature. A digital display keypad for monitoring temperatures and changing set points shall be included as shown on unit schedule. ARI Certification: Sensible and latent recovery effectiveness must be clearly certified by the energy recovery wheel supplier through ARI in accordance with ARI Standard 1060.

2.10 Accessories shall include the following: .1 Weatherproof disconnect switch for each fan and heat recovery wheel .2 Variable Frequency Drive "VFD" controllers

2.11 Design based on: McQuay

2.12 Acceptable Products: .1 Engineered Air .2 Trane .3 McQuay


MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION Indoor Heat Recovery Air Handling Unit Section 15812 Project No. 09019 DESIGNATED HRU-21 Page 11 PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer’s Installation & Maintenance instructions.

3.2 Environmental Requirements .1 Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is

clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.

3.3 Extra Materials .1 Provide [one, two, etc.] extra set(s) [fan belts, filters, etc.] for each unit as shown

on project schedule.

GEORGETOWN DISTRICT HIGH SCHOOL - ADDITION & RENOVATIONS - PHASE 2 MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION Indoor Heat Recovery Air Handling Unit Section 15812 Project No. 09019 DESIGNATED HRU-21 Page 12

AIR HANDLING

HEAT COOL ENERGY RECOVERY SUMMER

ENERGY RECOVERY WINTER

UNIT TAG HRU-21 TAG HC-21 CC-21 SUPPLY EXHAUST SUPPLY EXHAUST

MANUFACTURER McQuay AIRFLOW (CFM) 12,000 12,000 12,000 12,000 12,000 12,000

MODEL CAH024 EAT DB/WB (°F) 42.6 78.9 / 66.9 90.0 /7 3.0 75.0 /6 2.3 -5.0 / -6.2 72.0 / 54.1

ELECTRICAL 575 / 3 / 60 LAT DB/WB (°F) 106.1 61.8 / 58.7 78.9 / 66.9 86.1 / 69.0 51.5 / 40.1 15.5 / 15.5

FAN TAG SF-21 EF-21 TOTAL CAP (MBH) 833.2 315.2 - - - -

AIRFLOW (CFM) 12,000 12,000 SENS. CAP. (MBH) 833.2 224.9 - - - -

ESP (INCHES) 1.60 0.30 EWT / LWT (°F) 190 / 170 - - - - -

TSP (INCHES) 4.28 1.88 R410 SST (°F) - 45.0 - - - -

SPEED (RPM) 1750 1750 FLOW (GPM) 81.5 - - - - -

FAN TYPE / CLASS PLN / II PLN / I WPD (FT) 16.7 - - - - -

FAN BLADES AF AF APD (IN) 0.20 0.51 0.76 0.75 0.67 0.70

WHEEL DIA (IN) 27 27 SIZE FHxFL (IN) 39 x 82 39 X 85 - - - -

POWER INPUT (BHP) 12.27 6.57 ROWS / FPI 2 / 9 3 / 7 - - - -

MOTOR SIZE (HP) 15 10 MODEL 5WH0902B 5EJ0703C RXA 2250

SOUND POWER LEVELS (Hz)

63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

RADIATED 82 84 82 72 65 60 42 36

UNIT SUPPLY 89 91 93 88 84 82 76 71

UNIT RETURN 85 87 89 84 80 78 72 67


MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION Air Handling Units - DESIGNATED AHU-20 Section 15813 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Air Handling Unit - DESIGNATED AHU

.1 Supply and install a cabinet-type fan of size and type listed in the Schedule.

.2 In direction of air flow, the cabinet shall consist of:

.1 Mixing box, complete with fresh air and return air dampers. Dampers by Section 15900.

.2 Filter section complete with filters (see Section 15805) with access doors, both sides.

.3 Insulated heating coil section with hot water heating coil and access doors on both sides of unit.

.4 Flexible connection.

.5 Insulated fan section with blower with extended grease lines, access doors both sides and internal spring isolators. Drain pan to extend below entire fan and coil section and shall have welded seams and drain connection sides. Insulation shall be 1" (25 mm) thick, glued and pinned in place.

.6 Electric motor with adjustable base, belt guard and belts. Motor shall be mounted on the interior of the unit.

.3 Accessories shall include the following: .1 Disconnect switch

.4 Design based on: McQuay


.1 Trane

.2 Engineered Air

.3 McQuay

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Air Handling Unit - DESIGNATED AHU .1 Power wiring by Division 16.


MECHANICAL - AIR DISTRIBUTION Air Handling Units - DESIGNATED AHU-20 Section 15813 Project No. 09019 Page 2

.2 Control wiring by Division 15900.

.3 Unit start-up is to be by manufacturer's representative.

.4 Division 15 to mount unit on new steel fabricated stand. Stand to be supplied and installed by Division 15. Supply approval drawings to the Consultant for review before fabricating stand.

AIR HANDLING COILS HEATING

UNIT TAG AHU-20 MODEL 5WB0901B

MANUFACTURER MCQUAY AIRFLOW (CFM) 3,600

MODEL CAH008 EAT (°F) 52.0

ELECTRICAL 575 / 3 / 60 LAT (°F) 73.4

UNIT WEIGHT (LBS) 1,100 CAPACITY (MBH) 84.3

SUPPLY AIR (CFM) 3,600 EWT / LWT (°F) 190 / 170

ESP / TSP (INCHES) 1.00/1.87 % E. GLYCOL 0

SPEED (RPM) 1750 FLOW (USGPM) 8.40

FAN TYPE / CLASS DIDW / I WPD (FT) 0.50

FAN WHEEL DIA (IN) 12.6 APD (INCHES) 0.11

FAN BLADE TYPE FC SIZE FHxFL (IN) 27 x 36

POWER INPUT (BHP) 2.10 ROWS / FPI 1 / 9

MOTOR SIZE (HP) 3.0 CONN. SIZE......(NPT) 1.5

SOUND POWER LEVELS RE: 10−¹² WATTS 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

RADIATED 73 78 69 61 63 56 39 37

UNIT OUTLET 81 86 81 78 83 79 74 73

UNIT INLET 80 85 80 77 82 78 73 72


MECHANICAL Temperature Controls Section 15900 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Related Instructions


1.2 Related Work




.4 Electrical: Division 16

1.3 Description of Work

.1 Extend the existing Honeywell BAS system to control mechanical devices as described herein.

.2 The sequence of controls is specified as a performance specification to show the

intent of operation. This section shall provide the necessary equipment to carry out this control intent in every way.

.3 Supply and install the necessary panels to group the necessary controls for the

various operations.

.4 Co-operate and co-ordinate with the other various sub-trades and equipment manufacturers in the supply and installation of the equipment supplied by this Section.

.5 Supply and install all wiring for controls and interlocks.

.6 Design based on: Honeywell

.7 Acceptable Contractors: .1 Honeywell (Stoney Creek Branch)

1.4 Maintenance Data & Service

.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in Section 15010.

.2 Check and adjust control systems every three (3) months during first year from date of acceptance. Report in writing, results or re-settings made.


MECHANICAL Temperature Controls Section 15900 Project No. 09019 Page 2 1.5 Submittals

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010. .2 Provide valve and damper schedule indicating size, configuration, capacity and

locations. If size varies greater than 10% from specification, obtain approval from the Consultant.

.3 Provide technical literature on system components including instructions for

calibration of sensors, transmitters and receiver controllers.

.4 Provide an Operator's Manual containing instructions for system operation, to be incorporated into Maintenance Manuals.

1.6 Service & Guarantee

.1 The control system herein specified shall be free from defects in workmanship and material under normal use and service. If, within 12 months from date of acceptance by the Consultant, any of the equipment herein specified proves to be defective in workmanship or material, it shall be replaced free of charge.

.2 After completion of the original test of the installation and acceptance by the

Consultant, provide any service incidental to the proper performance of the Temperature Control System under guarantee outlined above.

.3 After completion of the installation, regulate and adjust all thermostats, control

valves, motors and other equipment, and place them in complete operating condition subject to the approval of the Consultant.

1.7 Training .1 Provide at least two (2) four-hour sessions of training for Owner's operation and

maintenance staff prior to completion. These sessions need not be consecutive.

.2 Six months after acceptance by the Owner, provide two (2) four-hour sessions of 'on-site' follow-up training.

.3 Provide four (4) copies of an accompanying Operator's Manual (Item 1.5.4) before training begins.


MECHANICAL Temperature Controls Section 15900 Project No. 09019 Page 3 1.8 Service Contract

.1 Include, at no additional cost, a preventative maintenance contract to cover

service incidental to the proper performance of the new system during the warranty period.

.2 Include for a minimum of one (1) scheduled visit per month of sufficient duration to cover the inspection and adjustment of all components as required to maintain the accepted sequence of operation.

.3 Following each inspection, provide a written report of all actions taken or other problems noted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 General

.1 Supply and install controls as indicated and as hereinafter specified. .2 Control equipment and installation shall be the product and service of one (1)

manufacturer unless otherwise specified.

2.2 New Automatic Control Valves .1 Characteristics of control valves shall be suited to the required application.

.2 Pressure rating of control valves shall be suited to the piping requirements as

listed under other sections of this Division.

.3 All valves shall be provided with stainless steel stems.

.4 Water Valves: .1 Two-way: Equal percentage characteristics, or quick openings as

indicated.

.2 Three-way mixing: Linear characteristics.

.3 Three-way diverting: Linear, or quick opening as indicated.

.5 Minimum size of radiation valves is 3/4" (20 mm).


MECHANICAL Temperature Controls Section 15900 Project No. 09019 Page 4 2.3 New Valve Actuators

.1 Electronic valve actuators shall be of the elastomer diaphragm, spring return,

piston type.

.2 Valves shall assume "fail safe" position in 'normally open' or 'normally closed' position.

.3 Actuators shall be sized to allow the control valve to shut off against normal inlet operating pressured.

2.4 Start/Stop .1 Supply and install load relays capable of switching 10 Amps at 120/1/60.

2.5 New Pressure Electric Switches .1 Pressure electric switches shall have diaphragm operated S.P.D.T. snap-acting

contacts with electrical rating suitable for applications as specified.

.2 Pressure electric switches shall withstand up to 25 psig (170 kPa) and be provided with adjustable cut-in and cut-out settings between 3 psig and 20 psig (21 kPa and 140 kPa).

2.6 Auxiliary Control Devices .1 Motorized dampers, unless otherwise specified elsewhere, shall be as follows:

.1 Damper frames shall be 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal or 1/8" extruded aluminum with reinforced corner bracing.

.2 Damper blades shall not exceed 8" in width or 48" in length. Blades are to be suitable for medium velocity performance (2,000 fpm). Blades shall be not less than 16 gauge.

.3 Damper shaft bearings shall be as recommended by manufacturer for application.

.4 All blade edges and top and bottom of the frame shall be provided with compressible seals. Side seals shall be compressible stainless steel. The blade seals shall provide for a maximum leakage rate of 10 CFM per square foot at 2.5" W.C. differential pressure.

.5 All leakage testing and pressure ratings will be based on AMCA Publication 500.


MECHANICAL Temperature Controls Section 15900 Project No. 09019 Page 5

.6 Individual damper sections shall not be larger than 48" x 60". Provide a minimum of one damper actuator per section.

.2 Control dampers shall be parallel or opposed blade type as scheduled on drawings.

.3 Electronic damper/valve actuators: .1 The actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing

circuitry to prevent damage to the actuator throughout the rotation of the actuator.

.2 Where shown, for power-failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical, spring return mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing.

.3 All rotary spring return actuators shall be capable of both clockwise or counter clockwise spring return operation. Linear actuators shall spring return to the retracted position.

.4 Proportional actuators shall accept a 0-10 VDC or 0-20 mA control signal and provide a 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA operating range.

.5 All 24 VAC/DC actuators shall operate on Class 2 wiring and shall not require more than 10 VA for AC or more than 8 W for DC applications. Actuators operating on 120 VAC or 230 VAC shall not required more than 11 VA.

.6 All non-spring return actuators shall have an external manual gear release to allow manual positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered. Spring return actuators with more than 60 in-lb. torque capacity shall have a manual crank for this purpose.

.7 All modulating actuators shall have an external, built-in switch to allow the reversing of direction of rotation.

.8 Actuators shall be provided with a conduit fitting and a minimum 1m electrical cable and shall be pre-wired to eliminate the necessity of opening the actuator housing to make electrical connections.

.9 Actuators shall be Underwriters Laboratories Standard 873 listed.

.10 Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full stroke cycles at the actuator's rated torque.

.4 Relays: .1 Control relays shall be UL listed plug-in type with dust cover. Contact

rating, configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application.



.2 Time delay relays shall be UL listed solid-state plug-in type with adjustable time delay. Delay shall be adjustable plus or minus 200% (minimum) from set-point shown on plans. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application. Provide NEMA 1 Type enclosure when not installed in local control panel.

.5 Transformers and Power Supplies: .1 Control transformers shall be UL listed, Class 2 current-limiting type, or

shall be furnished with over-current protection in both primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service.

.2 Unit output shall match the required output current and voltage requirements. Current output shall allow for a 50% safety factor. Output ripple shall be 3.0 mV maximum Peak-to-Peak. Regulation shall be 0.10% line and load combined, with 50 microsecond response time for 50% load changes. Unit shall have built-in over-voltage protection.

.3 Unit shall operate between 0°C and 50°C.

.4 Unit shall be UL recognized.

.6 Current Switches: Current-operated switches shall be self-powered, solid state with adjustable trip current. The switches shall be selected to match the current of the application and output requirements of the DDC system.

.7 Local Control Panels: .1 All indoor control cabinets shall be fully enclosed NEMA 1 Type

construction with hinged door, key-lock latch, removable sub-panels. A single key shall be common to all field panels and sub-panels.

.2 Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices pre-wired with coded-coded stranded conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or tie-wrapped. Terminals for field connections shall be UL listed for 600-volt service, individually identified per control/interlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control termination's for field connection shall be individually identified per control drawings.

.3 Provide on/off power switch with over-current protection and main air gauge for control power sources to each local panel.


MECHANICAL Temperature Controls Section 15900 Project No. 09019 Page 7 2.7 Application Specific Controllers

.1 General: Application specific controllers (ASC) are microprocessor-based DDC

controllers which through hardware or firmware design are dedicated to control a specific piece of equipment. They are not fully user programmable, but are customized for operation within the confines of the equipment they are designed to serve. .1 Each ASC shall be capable of stand-alone operation and shall continue to

provide control functions without being connected to the network.

.2 Each ASC will contain sufficient I/O capacity to control the target system.

.2 Environment: The hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. .1 Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within

NEMA 4 Type waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 40°C to 65°C (-40°F to 150°F).

.2 Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in NEMA 1 Type rated enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 0°C to 50°C (32°F to 120°F).

.3 Serviceability: Provide diagnostic LED's for power, and communications. All wiring connections shall be made to field removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable.

.4 Memory: The Application Specific Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss for at least 90 days.

.5 Immunity to Power and Noise: Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shut-down below 80%.

.6 Transformer: Power supply for the ASC must be rated at minimum of 125% of ASC power consumption, and shall be fused or current limiting type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Examination

.1 The project plans shall be thoroughly examined for control device and equipment

locations, and any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Consultant for resolution before rough-in work is started.



.2 The Contractor shall inspect the site to verify that equipment is installable as shown, and any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Consultant for resolution before rough-in work is started.

3.2 General Workmanship .1 Install equipment, piping, wiring/conduit parallel to building lines (i.e. horizontal,

vertical, and parallel to walls) wherever possible.

.2 Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.

.3 Install all equipment in readily accessible location as defined by Chapter 1 Article 100 Part A of the NEC. Control panels shall be attached to structural walls unless mounted in equipment enclosure specifically designed for that purpose. Panels shall be mounted to allow for unobstructed access for service.

.4 Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds.

.5 All equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with acceptable industry specifications and standards for performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in strict adherence to local codes and standard practices.

3.3 Wiring .1 All control and interlock wiring shall comply with the national and local electrical

codes and Division 16 of these specifications. Where the requirements of this section differ with those in Division 16, the requirements of this section shall take precedence.

.2 Where Class 2 wires are in concealed and accessible locations including ceiling return air plenums, approved cables not in raceway may be used provided that: .1 Circuits meet NEC Class 2 (current-limited) requirements. (Low-voltage

power circuits shall be sub-fused when required to meet Class 2 current-limit.)

.2 All cables shall be UL listed for application, i.e. cables used in ceiling plenums shall be UL listed specifically for that purpose.

.3 Do not install Class 2 wiring in conduit containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containing high voltage may not be used for low voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two (e.g. relays and transformers).



.4 Where class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring shall be run parallel along a surface or perpendicular to it, and bundled, using approved wire ties at no greater than 3 m (10 ft) intervals. Such bundled cable shall be fastened to the structure, using specified fasteners, at 1.5 m (5 ft) intervals or more often to achieve a neat and workmanlike result.

.5 All wire-to-device connections shall be made at a terminal blocks or terminal strip. All wire-to-wire connections shall be at a terminal block, or with a crimped connector. All wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to permit access and prevent restriction to devices and terminals.

.6 Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring shall be 120V. If only higher voltages are available, the Control System Contractor shall provide step down transformers.

.7 All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, where possible. Any required splices shall be made only within an approved junction box or other approved protective device.

.8 Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors. Maintain fire rating at all penetrations in accordance with other sections of this specification and local codes.

.9 Size of conduit and size and type of wire shall be the design responsibility of the Control System Contractor, in keeping with the manufacturer's recommendation and NEC.

.10 Control and status relays are to be located in designated enclosures only. These relays may also be located within packaged equipment control panel enclosures. These relays shall not be located within Class 1 starter enclosures.

.11 Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations for all communication and network cabling. Network or communication cabling shall be run separately from other wiring.

.12 Adhere to Division 16 requirements for installation of raceway.

.13 This Contractor shall terminate all control and/or interlock wiring and shall maintain updated (as-built) wiring diagrams with termination's identified at the job site.

.14 Flexible metal conduits and liquid-tight, flexible metal conduits shall not exceed 3' in length and shall be supported at each end. Flexible metal conduit less than 1/2" electrical trade size shall not be used. In areas exposed to moisture, including chiller and boiler rooms, liquid-tight, flexible metal conduits shall be used.


MECHANICAL Temperature Controls Section 15900 Project No. 09019 Page 10 3.4 Cable System

.1 All cabling shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Minimum cable

and unjacketed fibre bend radii as specified by cable manufacturer shall be maintained.

.2 Maximum pulling tensions as specified by the cable manufacturer shall not be exceeded during installation. Post installation residual cable tension shall be within cable manufacture's specifications.

.3 Fibre optic cabinets, hardware, and cable entering the cabinet shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. Minimum cable and unjacketed fibre bend radii as specified by cable manufacturer shall be maintained.

3.5 Installation of Sensors .1 Install sensors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

.2 Mount sensors rigidly and adequate for the environment within which the sensor

operates.

.3 Room temperature sensors shall be installed on concealed junction boxes properly supported by the wall framing.

.4 All wires attached to sensors shall be air sealed in their conduits or in the wall to stop air transmitted from other areas affecting sensor readings.

.5 Wiring for space sensors shall be concealed in building walls. EMT conduit is acceptable within mechanical and service rooms.

3.6 Actuators .1 Mount and link control damper actuators per manufacturer's instructions.

.2 To compress seals when spring return actuators are used on normally closed

dampers, power actuator to approximately 5% open position, manually close the damper, and then tighten the linkage.

.3 Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates damper smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed positions.


MECHANICAL Temperature Controls Section 15900 Project No. 09019 Page 11 3.7 Identification of Hardware & Wiring

.1 All wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels, shall be

labelled at each end within 2" of termination with a cable identifier and other descriptive information.

.2 Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument or item served.

.3 Identify control panels with minimum 1 cm letters on laminated plastic nameplates.

.4 Identify all other control components with permanent labels. Identifiers shall match record documents All plug-in components shall be labelled such that removal of the component does not remove the label.

3.8 Cleaning .1 This Contractor shall clean up all debris resulting from his or her activities daily.

The Contractor shall remove all cartons, containers, crates, etc. under his control as soon as their contents have been removed. Waste shall be collected and placed in a location designated by the Construction Manager or General Contractor.

.2 At the completion of work in any area, the Contractor shall clean all of his/her work, equipment, etc., making it free from dust, dirt and debris, etc.

.3 At the completion of work, all equipment furnished under this Section shall be checked for paint damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. Any metal cabinet or enclosure that has been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.

3.9 Protection .1 The Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by his/her work

or workers, and shall be liable for all damage thus caused.

.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for his/her work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted. The Contractor shall protect his/her work against theft or damage, and shall carefully store material and equipment received on site that is not immediately installed. The Contractor shall close all open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects.


MECHANICAL Temperature Controls Section 15900 Project No. 09019 Page 12 3.10 Field Quality Control

.1 All work, materials and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of

applicable local, state, and federal codes and ordinances as identified in Part 1 of this Section.

.2 Contractor shall continually monitor the field installation for code compliance and quality of workmanship. All visible piping and or wiring runs shall be installed parallel to building lines and properly supported.

.3 Contractor shall arrange for field inspections by local and/or state authorities having jurisdiction over the work.

3.11 Acceptance .1 The control systems will not be accepted as meeting the requirements of

Completion until all tests described in this specification have been performed to the satisfaction of both the Engineer and Owner. Any tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the Contractor may be exempt from the Completion requirements if stated as such in writing by the Owner's representative. Such tests shall then be performed as part of the warranty.

3.12 Installation of Valves & Dampers .1 All automatic control valves and temperature controller wells shall be furnished

by the Temperature Controls Manufacturer, but installed under his supervision by the Mechanical Contractor. All motorized control dampers shall be furnished by the Temperature Controls Contractor, but they shall be installed by the Sheet Metal Contractor.

3.13 Labelling .1 All temperature control equipment is to be labelled with lamacoid plates with the

designation corresponding to the job control drawing so that each piece of equipment, controllers, relays, valves, damper motors is related to the control drawings. Room sensors do not have to be labelled.

3.14 Testing

.1 This Section will assist the Air Balancing Agency with the testing of the air system by modulating controls to attain air volumes and temperature specified.


MECHANICAL Temperature Controls Section 15900 Project No. 09019 Page 13 3.15 Commissioning

.1 Check the installation of each sensor, actuator and controlled device. .2 Calibrate each sensor or thermostat.

.3 For each control loop, observe the response to upset and to change in setpoint

under full and part-load operation.

.4 Verify time clock functions, e.g. unoccupied mode setback.

.5 Verify operation of mixed air dampers in minimum outside air position, using mixed air temperature. Verify economy mode or operation.

.6 Verify alarm functions.

.7 Verify function of reset or discharge air temperature.

.8 Verify the stability of each system, adjusting the proportional band and integral reset rate as necessary. Instruct the Owner in this procedure.

.9 Record all equipment settings and setpoints.

.10 Submit complete commissioning report to the Consultant and Commissioning Agent.

.11 Demonstrate operation of all systems to Consultant and Commissioning Agent.

3.16 Thermostat Protection & Location

.1 All thermostats and sensors in unsupervised public use space shall have 7'-0" (2100 mm) mounting height with solid locking covers, locking adjustment, locking stops or heavy plastic locking covers where these features are not available.

.2 In offices and supervised or personal use space, locate thermostats at 5'-6"

(1650 mm) with face thermometers, temperature adjustment and locking stops.

SEQUENCES OF CONTROL 3.17 HRU-20 Food Court Supply

.1 Each system consists of the following:

.1 Mixing box section complete with motorized dampers. Dampers and damper actuators by unit supplier

.2 Filter section



.3 Return fan

.4 Enthalpy wheel complete with VFD and by-pass dampers. Dampers and damper operators by unit supplier

.5 Gas-fired heating section complete modulating gas valve

.6 DX cooling with 4-stages of cooling

.7 Supply Fan

.2 The sequence of controls is, as follows: .1 Occupied Mode:

.1 The fan system will go into occupied mode as scheduled at the BAS.

.2 When the unit starts, the supply and return fans start and run continuously.

.3 The unit will start and operate in 100% recirculation mode for the first 45 minutes. The enthalpy wheel will be stopped and the enthalpy by-pass dampers will be in 100% by-pass position.

.4 After the first 45 minutes of operation, the mixing box dampers open to a minimum position of 1200 CFM. Co-ordinate with the air balancing contractor to set up minimum mixing box setting. The enthalpy wheel and by-pass dampers are energized by the BAS.

.5 The minimum position of the mixing box dampers shall be overridden by a CO2 sensor to maintain a maximum CO2 level of 1000 ppm. Section 15900 shall supply, install and wire CO2 sensor where indicated on the drawings. A mixed air sensor shall override the CO2 sensor to maintain a minimum mixed air temperature of 12°C and a maximum mixed air temperature of 28°C.

.6 A space temperature sensor complete with local set point adjustment and night set back override sequences the mixing box dampers, enthalpy wheel by-pass dampers, hot water heating coil and "DX" cooling coil in sequence to maintain the following setpoints: .1 Heating: 21°C .2 Cooling: 24°C

.7 The mixed air dampers and enthalpy wheel by-pass dampers shall

be sequenced in an economizer mode to provide "free" cooling when outside air temperatures permit.



.2 Unoccupied Mode: .1 During unoccupied periods, the mixing box dampers modulate to

full recirculation position, the enthalpy wheel is Off, the enthalpy by-pass dampers modulate to full by-pass position and the fans are Off.

.2 The space sensor shall cycle the unit On-Off to maintain a night setback temperature of 15°C. When the fan is started, the heating coil valve modulates to the 100% open position.

.3 Safeties: .1 A firestat will shut down the unit upon sensing a discharge air

temperature of 50°C.

.2 A freezestat will shut down the unit on sensing a mixed air temperature of below 6°C.

.4 Provide control points per points list attached.

3.18 MUA-20 (Kitchen Make-Up Air) .1 The system consists of the following:

.1 Outside air damper complete with actuator. Damper and damper actuator

by unit supplier. .2 Filter section .3 Gas-fired heating section complete with modulating gas valve .4 Supply fan complete with VFD

.2 The sequence of control is, as follows:

.1 Occupied Mode:

.1 The fan will be started/stopped via Kitchen Hood Control Panel. Section 15900 to provide control interlock between Hood Control Panel and rooftop unit.

.2 When the fan starts, the outside air damper opens to 100%

.3 When the Kitchen Hood Control Panel indicates one (1) Hood in operation, the supply fan ramps down to provide 50% air by volume of unit air flow. The Kitchen Hood Control Panel indicates two (2) Hoods operating, the supply fan ramps up to provide 100% air by volume of unit air flow. Co-ordinate with the air balancing contractor to verify air flows.



.4 A discharge air sensor shall modulate the gas valve to maintain a discharge air temperature of 15°C.





3.19 MUA-21 (Kitchen Make-Up Air) .1 The system consists of the following:

.1 Outside air damper complete with actuator. Damper and damper actuator

by unit supplier. .2 Filter section .3 Gas-fired heating section complete with modulating gas valve .4 Supply fan complete with VFD


.1 Occupied Mode:

.1 The fan will be started/stopped via Kitchen Hood Control Panel. Section 15900 to provide control interlock between Hood Control Panel and rooftop unit.

.2 When the fan starts, the outside air damper opens to 100%

.3 When the Kitchen Hood Control Panel indicates one (1) Hood in operation, the supply fan ramps down to provide 50% air by volume of unit air flow. The Kitchen Hood Control Panel indicates two (2) Hoods operating, the supply fan ramps up to provide 100% air by volume of unit air flow. Co-ordinate with the air balancing contractor to verify air flows.

.4 A discharge air sensor shall modulate the gas valve to maintain a discharge air temperature of 15°C.

.2 Unoccupied Mode: .1 During unoccupied operation, the mixing box dampers modulate

to full recirculation mode and the fan is Off.







3.20 RTAC-21 (Forum Supply) .1 The system consists of the following:

.1 Mixing box section complete with motorized dampers. Dampers and

damper actuators by unit supplier .2 Filter Section .3 Gas-fired heating section complete with modulating gas burner .4 2-stage DX cooling .5 Supply Fan


.1 Occupied Mode:

.1 The fan system will go into the occupied mode as scheduled at the BAS.

.2 The supply fan will be started through the BAS.

.3 The fan will start and operate in a 100% recirculation mode for the first 45 minutes. After the first 45 minutes, the mixing box dampers shall modulate to 1400 CFM outside air. Co-ordinate with the air balancing contractor to confirm mixing box position.

.4 A space temperature sensor complete with setpoint adjustment and night set back override sequences the mixing box dampers, modulating gas valve and 2 stages of DX cooling, in sequence to maintain the following setpoints: .1 Heating: 21°C .2 Cooling: 23°C

.5 The mixed air dampers shall be sequenced in an economizer

mode to provide "free" cooling when outside air temperatures permit.




to full recirculation mode and the fan is Off

.2 The space temperature sensor shall cycle the unit On-Off to maintain a minimum room temperature of 15°C. When the fan is started the heating coil modulates to the 100% open position and the mixing box dampers remain in full recirculation mode.





3.21 RTHV-20 (Music Supply) .1 The system consists of the following:


damper actuators by unit supplier .2 Filter Section .3 Gas-fired heating section complete modulating gas burner .4 Supply Fan


.1 Occupied Mode:



.3 The fan will start and operate in a 100% recirculation mode for the first 45 minutes. After the first 45 minutes, the mixing box dampers shall modulate to 700 CFM outside air (by volume). Co-ordinate with the air balancing contractor to confirm mixing box position.



.4 A space temperature sensor complete with setpoint adjustment and night set back override sequences the mixing box dampers and modulating gas valve to maintain the following setpoints: .1 Heating: 21°C




to full recirculation mode and the fan is Off.

.2 The space temperature sensor shall cycle the unit On-Off to maintain a minimum room temperature of 15°C. When the fan is started the heating coil modulates to the 100% open position and the mixing box dampers remain in full recirculation mode.





3.22 RTAC-20 (Kitchen Supply) .1 The system consists of the following:


damper actuators by unit supplier .2 Filter Section .3 Gas-fired heating section complete with modulating gas valve .4 2-stage DX cooling .5 Supply Fan


.1 Occupied Mode:





.3 The fan will start and operate in a 100% recirculation mode for the first 45 minutes. After the first 45 minutes, the mixing box dampers shall modulate to 700 CFM outside air (by volume). Co-ordinate with the air balancing contractor to confirm mixing box position.

.4 A space temperature sensor complete with setpoint adjustment and night set back override sequences the mixing box dampers, modulating gas valve and two-stages of cooling, in sequence to maintain the following setpoints: .1 Heating: 21°C .2 Cooling: 23°C




to full recirculation mode and the fan is Off

.2 The space temperature sensor shall cycle the unit On-Off to maintain a minimum room temperature of 15�C. When the fan is started the heating coil modulates to the 100% open position and the mixing box dampers remain in fill recirculation mode.





3.23 KEF-20 Kitchen Hood Exhaust .1 The fan is started/stopped by the corresponding Kitchen Hood Control Panel.

When the selector switch on the Panel is manually switched to On, the fan runs continuously. When the manual switch is turned to Off, the fan shuts down.

.2 Section 15900 shall supply and install interlock wiring from the Kitchen Hood Control Panel to exhaust fan.

.3 BAS to provide fan status via current sensing relay.


MECHANICAL Temperature Controls Section 15900 Project No. 09019 Page 21 3.24 KEF-21 Kitchen Hood Exhaust

.1 The fan is started/stopped by the corresponding Kitchen Hood Control Panel.












3.27 Split System Air Conditioning Units (DX-20/CU-20) .1 Each system is complete with the following:

.1 Indoor fan coil (DX-20)

.2 Outdoor Condensing Unit (CU-20)

.3 Programmable thermostat

.2 Section 15900 shall install thermostat where indicated on the plans.

.3 Section 15900 shall supply and wire all low voltage control wiring from thermostat to fan coil and from thermostat to condensing unit.


MECHANICAL Temperature Controls Section 15900 Project No. 09019 Page 22 3.28 Hot Water Radiation (Food Court)

.1 Section 15900 shall provide a 2-way control valve to control perimeter radiation.

.2 Occupied Periods: A room sensor shall, through the BAS, modulate the control

valve to maintain a space temperature of 21°C.

.3 Unoccupied Periods: A room sensor shall, through the BAS, modulate the control valve to maintain a space temperature of 16°C.

3.29 ADF-20 - Dishwasher Hood Exhaust .1 The fan is controlled by a manual starter supplied, installed and wired by Division

16.

.2 Provide fan status via current sensing relay.

3.30 ADF-21 - Dishwashing Hood Exhaust .1 The fan is controlled by a manual starter supplied, installed and wired by Division

16.


3.31 ADF-22 (Typical) .1 The fan is controlled by the BAS as per a time-of-day (TOD) schedule.

.2 During occupied periods, the fan runs continuously.

.3 During unoccupied periods, the fan is Off.


3.32 ADF-23/24 (Typical) .1 Section 15900 supplies, installs and wires a line voltage thermostat to cycle the

fan On/Off to maintain a room temperature of 25°C.


MECHANICAL Temperature Controls Section 15900 Project No. 09019 Page 23 3.33 Split System HVAC Units (DX-21, -22, -23, -24, -25 /CU-22)

.1 The system consists of the following:

.1 Indoor heating/cooling fan coil units, designated DX-21, -22, 23, -24, -25 .2 Indoor condensing unit CU-22

.2 Each indoor unit comes complete with a programmable temperature controller.

.3 Section 15900 installs and wires each programmable temperature controller to its

respective indoor fan unit.

.4 Section 15900 installs and wires each temperature controller to outdoor condensing unit CU-22.

.5 Co-ordinate with unit manufacturer to confirm all wiring requirements.

3.34 AHU-20 (Dance Studio) .1 The system consists of the following:

.1 Supply fan .2 Mixing box dampers and operators all supplied with air handling unit. .3 Filter section .4 Heat water heating coil .5 Coil Pump CP-20

.2 The sequence of controls is, as follows:

.1 The unit is operated on a Time-Of-Day schedule as programmed at the BAS.

.2 Occupied Periods: .1 When the fan starts, the mixing box dampers modulate to provide

a minimum 600 CFM of outside air.

.2 A space sensor complete with local setpoint adjustment and night setback override, modulates the two-way heating valve control valve and mixing box dampers, in sequence to maintain a space temperature of 21°C.

.3 A discharge air sensor shall shut down unit upon sensing temperature below 10°C or above 35°C.

.3 Unoccupied Periods: .1 During unoccupied periods, the unit is Off, the outside air damper

in fully closed and the heating valve is closed.



.4 The BAS shall operate coil pump continuously at or 12°C outside air temperatures. Above 12°C outside air temperature, the pump is Off.

3.35 HRU-21 Auditorium Supply .1 Each system consists of the following:


damper actuators by unit supplier .2 Filter section .3 Return fan .4 Enthalpy wheel complete with by-pass dampers. Dampers and damper

operators by unit supplier .5 Hot Water Coil .6 DX cooling coil .7 Supply Fan .8 Remote condensing unit CU-21

.2 The sequence of controls is, as follows:

.1 Occupied Mode:

.1 The fan system will go into occupied mode as scheduled at the BAS.

.2 When the unit starts, the supply and return fans start and run continuously.

.3 The unit will start and operate in 100% recirculation mode for the first 45 minutes. The enthalpy wheel will be stopped and the enthalpy by-pass dampers will be in 100% by-pass position.

.4 After the first 45 minutes of operation, the mixing box dampers open to a minimum position of 1200 CFM. Co-ordinate with the air balancing contractor to set up minimum mixing box setting. The enthalpy wheel and by-pass dampers are energized by the BAS.

.5 The minimum position of the mixing box dampers shall be overridden by a CO2 sensor to maintain a maximum CO2 level of 1000 ppm. Section 15900 shall supply, install and wire CO2 sensor where indicated on the drawings. A mixed air sensor shall override the CO2 sensor to maintain a minimum mixed air temperature of 12°C and a maximum mixed air temperature of 28°C.



.6 A space temperature sensor complete with local set point adjustment and night set back override sequences the mixing box dampers, enthalpy wheel by-pass dampers, hot water heating coil and four stages of cooling in sequence to maintain the following setpoints: .1 Heating: 21°C .2 Cooling: 24°C

.7 The mixed air dampers and enthalpy wheel by-pass dampers shall

be sequenced in an economizer mode to provide "free" cooling when outside air temperatures permit.

.2 Unoccupied Mode: .1 During unoccupied periods, the mixing box dampers modulate to

full recirculation position, the enthalpy wheel is Off, the enthalpy by-pass dampers modulate to full by-pass position and the fans are Off.

.2 The space sensor shall cycle the unit On-Off to maintain a night setback temperature of 15°C. When the fan is started, the heating coil valve modulates to the 100% open position.


temperature of 50°C. .2 A freezestat will shut down the unit on sensing a mixed air

temperature of below 6°C.

.4 Supply and install all interlock control wiring between HRU-21 and remote condensing unit


3.36 Water Matrix Urinal System (Refer to Drawings) - One (1) Location .1 Install water solenoid valve on urinal supply pipe. Solenoid valve is supplied by

Water Matrix.

.2 Install motion sensor on ceiling. Motion sensor is supplied by Water Matrix.

.3 Supply 24 Volt control wiring from solenoid valve to Water Matrix control module.

.4 Supply 24 Volt control wiring from motion sensor to Water Matrix control module.


MECHANICAL Temperature Controls Section 15900 Project No. 09019 Page 26 3.37 By-Pass Box - BP-20

.1 The unit comes complete with a low voltage heating/cooling thermostat>

.2 Section 15900 installs and wires thermostat to unit.

3.38 CBF-20 .1 The fan is controlled by the BAS as per a time-of-day (TOD) schedule.

.2 During occupied periods, the fan runs continuously.

.3 During unoccupied periods, the fan is Off.


GEO

RG

ETO

WN

DIS

TRIC

T H

IGH

SC

HO

OL

- AD

DIT

ION

& R

ENO

VATI

ON

S - P

HA

SE 2

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L

Tem

pera

ture

Con

trol

s S

ectio

n 15

900

Pro

ject

No.

090

19

P

age

27

List

of C

ontr

ol P

oint

s A

NA

LOG

IN

BIN

AR

Y IN

A

NA

LOG

OU

T B

INA

RY

OU

T PR

OG

RA

M

Syst

em:

Poin

t Des

crip

tion

TEMPERATURE

PRESSURE

CO2

STATUS

ALARM

3-13 PSIG

4 - 20 mA

PULSE

START/STOP

20 mA/13 PSIG

P.I.

ANALOG LIM

TIME SCHED.

OPTIMAL S/S

RESET

MAINTENANCE

ALARM

OFF NORMAL

TREND LOG

FAILURE MODE

GRAPHIC

HR

U-2

0:

Mix

ing

Box

Dam

pers

(3)

X

X

X

X

X

Filte

r

X

X

X

X

Ret

urn

Fan

X

X

X

X

X

Ent

halp

y W

heel

X

X

X

X

X

By-

Pas

s D

ampe

rs (2

)

X

X

X

X

Mod

ulat

ing

Gas

Val

ve

X

X

X

X

X

DX

Coo

ling

(4-s

tage

s)

X

X

X

Sup

ply

Fan

X

X

X

X

Spa

ce T

empe

ratu

re

X

X

X

X

Spac

e C

O2

X X

X

X

Dis

char

ge A

ir X

X

X

X

GEO

RG

ETO

WN

DIS

TRIC

T H

IGH

SC

HO

OL

- AD

DIT

ION

& R

ENO

VATI

ON

S - P

HA

SE 2

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L

Tem

pera

ture

Con

trol

s S

ectio

n 15

900

Pro

ject

No.

090

19

P

age

28

List

of C

ontr

ol P

oint

s A

NA

LOG

IN

BIN

AR

Y IN

A

NA

LOG

OU

T B

INA

RY

OU

T PR

OG

RA

M

Syst

em:

Poin

t Des

crip

tion

TEMPERATURE

PRESSURE

CO2

STATUS

ALARM

3-13 PSIG

4 - 20 mA

PULSE

START/STOP

20 mA/13 PSIG

P.I.

ANALOG LIM

TIME SCHED.

OPTIMAL S/S

RESET

MAINTENANCE

ALARM

OFF NORMAL

TREND LOG

FAILURE MODE

GRAPHIC

HR

U-2

1:

Mix

ing

Box

Dam

pers

(3)

X

X

X

X

X

Filte

r

X

X

X

X

Ret

urn

Fan

X

X

X

X

X

Ent

halp

y W

heel

X

X

X

X

X

By-

Pas

s D

ampe

rs (2

)

X

X

X

X

Mod

ulat

ing

Gas

Val

ve

X

X

X

X

X

DX

Coo

ling

(4-s

tage

s)

X

X

X

Sup

ply

Fan

X

X

X

X

Spa

ce T

empe

ratu

re

X

X

X

X

Spac

e C

O2

X X

X

X

Dis

char

ge A

ir X

X

X

X

GEO

RG

ETO

WN

DIS

TRIC

T H

IGH

SC

HO

OL

- AD

DIT

ION

& R

ENO

VATI

ON

S - P

HA

SE 2

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L

Tem

pera

ture

Con

trol

s S

ectio

n 15

900

Pro

ject

No.

090

19

P

age

29

Lis

t of C

ontr

ol P

oint

s A

NA

LOG

IN

BIN

AR

Y IN

A

NA

LOG

OU

T B

INA

RY

OU

T PR

OG

RA

M

Syst

em:

Poin

t Des

crip

tion

TEMPERATURE

PRESSURE

HUMIDITY

STATUS

ALARM

3-13 PSIG

4 - 20 mA

PULSE

START/STOP

20 mA/13 PSIG

P.I.

ANALOG LIM

TIME SCHED.

OPTIMAL S/S

RESET

MAINTENANCE

ALARM

OFF NORMAL

TREND LOG

FAILURE MODE

GRAPHIC

MU

A-2

0

Out

side

Air

Dam

per

X

X

X

X

Filte

r

X

X

X

X

Mod

ulat

ing

Gas

Val

ve

X

X

X

X

X

Sup

ply

Fan

VFD

X

X

X

X

X

Dis

char

ge A

ir X

X

X

X

RTA

C-2

0

Mix

ing

Box

Dam

pers

(3)

X

X

X

X

X

Filte

r

X

X

X

X

Mod

ulat

ing

Gas

Val

ve

X

X

X

X

X

Sup

ply

Fan

X

X

X

X

X

Spac

e Te

mpe

ratu

re

X

X

X

X

X

DX

Coo

ling

(2 s

tage

s)

X

X

X

X

RTA

C-2

1

Mix

ing

Box

Dam

pers

(3)

X

X

X

X

X

Filte

r

X

X

X

X

Mod

ulat

ing

Gas

Val

ve

X

X

X

X

X

Sup

ply

Fan

X

X

X

X

X

Spac

e Te

mpe

ratu

re

X

X

X

X

X

DX

Coo

ling

(2 s

tage

s

X

X

X

X

GEO

RG

ETO

WN

DIS

TRIC

T H

IGH

SC

HO

OL

- AD

DIT

ION

& R

ENO

VATI

ON

S - P

HA

SE 2

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L

Tem

pera

ture

Con

trol

s S

ectio

n 15

900

Pro

ject

No.

090

19

P

age

30

Lis

t of C

ontr

ol P

oint

s A

NA

LOG

IN

BIN

AR

Y IN

A

NA

LOG

OU

T B

INA

RY

OU

T PR

OG

RA

M

Syst

em:

Poin

t Des

crip

tion

TEMPERATURE

PRESSURE

HUMIDITY

STATUS

ALARM

3-13 PSIG

4 - 20 mA

PULSE

START/STOP

20 mA/13 PSIG

P.I.

ANALOG LIM

TIME SCHED.

OPTIMAL S/S

RESET

MAINTENANCE

ALARM

OFF NORMAL

TREND LOG

FAILURE MODE

GRAPHIC

RTV

H-2

0

X

Mix

ing

Box

Dam

pers

(3)

X

X

X

X

Filte

r

X

X

X

X

X

Mod

ulat

ing

Has

Val

ve

X

X

X

X

Sup

ply

Fan

X

X

X

X

Spac

e Te

mpe

ratu

re

X

X

X

X

X

MU

A-2

1

Out

side

Air

Dam

per

X

X

X

X

Filte

r

X

X

X

X

Mod

ulat

ing

Gas

Val

ve

X

X

X

X

X

Sup

ply

Fan

VFD

X

X

X

X

X

Dis

char

ge A

ir X

X

X

X

GEO

RG

ETO

WN

DIS

TRIC

T H

IGH

SC

HO

OL

- AD

DIT

ION

& R

ENO

VATI

ON

S - P

HA

SE 2

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L

Tem

pera

ture

Con

trol

s S

ectio

n 15

900

Pro

ject

No.

090

19

P

age

31

Lis

t of C

ontr

ol P

oint

s A

NA

LOG

IN

BIN

AR

Y IN

A

NA

LOG

OU

T B

INA

RY

OU

T PR

OG

RA

M

Syst

em:

Poin

t Des

crip

tion

TEMPERATURE

PRESSURE

HUMIDITY

STATUS

ALARM

3-13 PSIG

4 - 20 mA

PULSE

START/STOP

20 mA/13 PSIG

P.I.

ANALOG LIM

TIME SCHED.

OPTIMAL S/S

RESET

MAINTENANCE

ALARM

OFF NORMAL

TREND LOG

FAILURE MODE

GRAPHIC

KEF

-20

X

X

X

KEF

-21

X

X

X

KEF

-22

X

X

X

KEF

-23

X

X

X

Hot

Wat

er R

adia

tion

Hot

Wat

er V

alve

X

X

X

X

X

Spa

ce T

empe

ratu

re

X

X

X

AD

F-20

X

X

X

AD

F-21

X

X

X

AD

F-22

X

X

X

X

X

AD

F-25

X

X

X

X

X

Ligh

ting

Zone

1

X

X

X

X

X

Zone

2

X

X

X

X

X

Zone

3

X

X

X

X

X

Zone

4

X

X

X

X

X

GEO

RG

ETO

WN

DIS

TRIC

T H

IGH

SC

HO

OL

- AD

DIT

ION

& R

ENO

VATI

ON

S - P

HA

SE 2

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L

Tem

pera

ture

Con

trol

s S

ectio

n 15

900

Pro

ject

No.

090

19

P

age

32

Lis

t of C

ontr

ol P

oint

s A

NA

LOG

IN

BIN

AR

Y IN

A

NA

LOG

OU

T B

INA

RY

OU

T PR

OG

RA

M

Syst

em:

Poin

t Des

crip

tion

TEMPERATURE

PRESSURE

HUMIDITY

STATUS

ALARM

3-13 PSIG

4 - 20 mA

PULSE

START/STOP

20 mA/13 PSIG

P.I.

ANALOG LIM

TIME SCHED.

OPTIMAL S/S

RESET

MAINTENANCE

ALARM

OFF NORMAL

TREND LOG

FAILURE MODE

GRAPHIC

AH

U-2

0

Sup

ply

Fan

X

X

X

X

X

Mix

ing

Box

Dam

pers

(2)

X

X

X

X

Filte

r

X

X

X

X

Hot

Wat

er C

oil V

alve

X

X

X

X

X

Coi

l Pum

p C

P-2

0

X

X

X

X

Roo

m T

empe

ratu

re

X

X

X

X


MECHANICAL - REFRIGERATION General Provisions Section 15950 Project No. 09019 Page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Instructions


1.2 Scope of Work .1 Equipment shall be supplied to meet the performance requirements shown on

the equipment plans and specifications. To comply with job site constraints and/or freight restrictions, the units shall be shipped, fully assembled, in modules, or knocked down, ready for field installation. Shipping details shall be coordinated and included with submittal drawings.

.2 Prior to shipping the units from the factory, the units may be inspected by the Consultant, Owner or a representative assigned by the Owner, and the Prime Mechanical Contractor.

.3 The Prime Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting the units upon arrival at the job-site or riggers yard. Any deficiencies and/or freight damage shall be documented to the factory within 24 hrs. Rigging, installation, sealing of modules and field start-up work shall be executed by the mechanical contractor as outlined in the project specifications.

.4 The manufacturer shall warranty the equipment, parts and labour, for a period of two (2) years commencing at the date of Substantial Completion of the project.

1.3 References .1 The design and fabrication of the units shall be in accordance with the latest

standards listed herewith: .1 ARI880 .2 ARI 410, Forced-circulation air cooling and air heating coils .3 ASHRAE 62-89, Ventilation for acceptable indoor air quality .4 ASTM A525, Steel sheet, zinc coated by hot-dip process .5 ASTM E90-90 .6 NEMA MG1, National electrical manufacturers association (Motors and

generators) .7 NFPA 70, National fire protection code .8 NFPA 90 .9 OSHA, Occupational safety and health administration .10 SMACNA, HVAC metal duct association .11 UL 900, Underwriters laboratory, (test performance of air filters quality)



.2 Equipment schedules shown on drawings and specifications.

1.4 Quality Assurance .1 The following parameters define the selection criteria and are to be as specified:

airflow rates, external static pressures, water flow rates, electrical power supply. The following parameters are to be as specified or improved upon: coil face velocity, filter velocities, internal static pressure losses, electrical power consumption, discharge/inlet and radiated sound power levels.

.2 The units shall be produced by a manufacturer whose design and processes are thoroughly documented and verifiable. The quality control program shall ensure the consistency of the product and the effectiveness of the production processes.

.3 Components must be sourced from well recognized manufacturers whose products comply with their product-specific industry standards.

.4 The Contractor shall be a licensed Refrigeration Contractor who is a registered member of the Canadian Refrigeration, Air-Conditioning Contractors' Association.

.5 Filter media shall be UL listed.

1.5 Submittal Drawings .1 The unit manufacturer shall provide submittal drawings within two (2) weeks of

award of tender, showing the arrangement of each unit, nominal dimensions, weight of each shipping module and complete technical data for all mechanical and electrical accessories provided with the air terminal units.

.2 Submit shop drawings for the following: .1 Indoor Fan Coil Units - TYPE DX .2 Indoor Condensing Units - DESIGNATED CU

1.6 Delivery, Storage & Handling .1 The units shall be thoroughly cleaned and inspected prior to shipping.

.2 The units must be handled carefully in the field to avoid damaging internal

components, cabinet walls and the exterior finish.

.3 Store the units in a dry, clean environment protected from the outdoor weather.



.4 The units must not be operated, for temporary or permanent purposes, until the official start-up is completed by the mechanical contractor and witnessed by a manufacturer's representative.

1.7 Bidding Instructions

.1 This Section will be bid directly to the Mechanical Contractor.

1.8 Related Work Specified Elsewhere






.6 Temperature Controls: Section 15900

PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION as detailed in the following Sections: 15950 Refrigeration - General Provisions 15951 Refrigeration - Pipe & Fittings 15952 Refrigeration - Air Conditioning Equipment


MECHANICAL - REFRIGERATION Pipe & Fittings Section 15951 Project No. 09019 Page 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Refrigerant Piping

.1 All materials used in the construction and installation of the Refrigeration System shall be suitable for the refrigerant used and no material shall be used that will deteriorate due to the chemical action of the refrigerant and oil. Refrigerant piping is to be type 'K' copper; fittings are drawn or machined; cast fittings are not acceptable; joints are silver soldered or brazed using a high temperature solder, equal to "Silfos".

.2 Each pressure vessel which may be shut off by stop valves from other parts of the system shall be protected by an approved pressure relief valve piped to the outdoors.

.3 Filter Dryer: On lines 3/4" (20 mm) O.D. and larger, filter drier shall be replaceable core type with non-ferrous casing with a Schraeder type valve. On lines smaller than 3/4" (30 mm) O.D., filter drier shall be a sealed type using male flare fittings. Size shall be full line size. Filter drier shall be Sporlan, Mueller or Asco.

.4 Sight Glass: A combination moisture and liquid indicator with protection cap. Sight glass shall be Also, Mueller, Sporlan or Henry. Size shall be full line size.

.5 Solenoid Valve: Full liquid line size, normally closed, direct acting type with manual opening stem and shall be completely moisture proof. Valve shall be Asco, Sporlan or Singer.

.6 Manual Shut-Off Valves: For refrigeration service with back seating construction and cap seals. Valves with hand wheels are not acceptable. For valves 3/8" through 5/8" (9.5 through 15.9 mm) size, use male flare fittings. Valves shall be Mueller or Henry. Provide service valve on each liquid and suction line at compressor. If service valves come as an integral part of the condensing unit, additional service valves are not required.

.7 Refrigerant Valves: .1 All freon refrigerant valves shall be back seating globe valves, packed or

diaphragm packless. Winged-type sealed caps are to be used. Valves are to be brass. Angle valves are preferred; check valves are to be used where required. Relief valves shall be provided where required with the vent piped to outdoors. Straight through valves shall be installed with stems horizontal to facilitate drainage.

.8 VRV Manufacturer shall provide Refnet® header and joint sections as determined by the Vendor's engineered design. Provide to Contractor for installation.


MECHANICAL - REFRIGERATION Pipe & Fittings Section 15951 Project No. 09019 Page 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Piping

.1 Refrigerant piping shall be supported on hangers as specified. Install neoprene cover around pipe to prevent vibration and wear.

.2 Install filter, dryer, sight glass and thermal expansion valve on each system.

.3 Hot gas lines to be complete with oil traps.

.4 Piping outdoors to be mounted on wood sleepers. Provide neoprene cover to eliminate vibration and wear.

.5 Insulate suction lines with 1/2" (15 mm) Armaflex II pipe insulation sealed at joints with Armstrong 520 adhesive.

.6 Piping to be tested with nitrogen to 400 psig (2760 kPa) for four (4) hours and leaks repaired before insulation is applied.


MECHANICAL - REFRIGERATION Air Conditioning Equipment Section 15952 Project No. 09019 Page 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Duct-Free Split Air-Conditioning VRV System

.1 Provide rooftop air-cooled condensing unit and remote fan coil units, factory tested prior to shipment with all components and accessories for a working installation of the sizes listed in the schedule.

.2 Indoor Units - TYPE DX: .1 Model FXFQ - 4 Way Ceiling Cassette Unit (3’x3’)

.1 General: Daikin indoor unit model FXFQ shall be a ceiling cassette fan coil unit, operable with R-410A refrigerant, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, for installation into the ceiling cavity equipped with an air panel grill. Units to be connected to indoor unit model RXYQ heat pump. It shall be a four-way air distribution type, ivory white, impact resistant with a washable decoration panel. The supply air is distributed via motorized louvers which can be horizontally and vertically adjusted from 0° to 90°. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while inhibiting changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1D71 and BRC2A71. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 28 dB(A) to 33 dB(A) at low speed measured at 1500 mm (5'-0") below the unit.

.2 Indoor Unit: .1 The Daikin indoor unit FXFQ shall be completely factory

assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, condensate drain pump, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch.

.2 Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to shipment from the factory.

.3 Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit.

.4 The 4-way supply air flow can be field modified to 3-way and 2-way airflow to accommodate various installation configurations including corner installations.



.5 Return air shall be through the concentric panel, which includes a resin net mold resistant filter.

.6 The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan and condensate pump. The condensate pump provides up to 525 mm (21") of lift.

.7 The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor.

.8 The indoor unit will be separately powered with 208~230V/1-phase/60Hz.

.9 The voltage range will be 253 volts maximum and 187 volts minimum.

.3 Unit Cabinet: .1 The cabinet shall be space saving and shall be located into

the ceiling.

.2 Three auto-swing positions shall be available to choose, which include standard, draft prevention and ceiling stain prevention.

.3 The airflow of the unit shall have the ability to shut down one or two sides allowing for simpler corner installation.

.4 The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and polyethylene insulation.

.5 Optional high efficiency air filters are available for each model unit.

.4 Fan: .1 The fan shall be direct-drive turbo fan type with statically

and dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available.

.2 The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 Volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range from 0.06 to 0.12 HP.

.3 The airflow rate shall be available in high and low settings.

.4 The fan motor shall be thermally protected.



.5 Filter: .1 The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable

long-life filter with mildew proof resin.

.2 Optional high efficiency filters shall be available.

.6 Coil .1 Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from

copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.

.2 The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance.

.3 The coil shall be a 2-row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 17 FPI design completely factory tested.

.4 The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate will be 32 mm (1-1/4") outside diameter PVC.

.5 A condensate pan shall be located under the coil.

.6 A condensate pump with a 525 mm (21") lift shall be located below the coil in the condensate pan with a built in safety alarm.

.7 A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line.

.7 Electrical: .1 A separate power supply will be required of 208/230 volts,

1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 Volts.

.2 Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet).

.3 Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote controller shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet.

.8 Control: .1 The unit shall have controls provided by Daikin to perform

input functions necessary to operate the system.



.2 The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with connection to LonWorks networks or interfacing with connection to BMS system. Consult with Daikin prior to applying controls.

.9 Accessories Available: .1 A high efficiency air filter, 65% efficiency.

.2 A high efficiency air filter, 90% efficiency.

.3 An air filter rack (which is necessary when installing high

efficiency filters supplied by Daikin).

.4 Fresh air intake and supply air duct connections.

.5 Remote "in-room" sensor kit (KRCS01-1A): The Daikin wall mounted, hard wired remote sensor kit is recommended for ceiling-embedded type fan coils, which often result in a difference between set temperature and actual temperature. The sensor for detecting the temperature can be placed away from the indoor unit (branch wiring is included in the kit).

.2 Model FXSQ - Concealed Ceiling Ducted Unit: .1 General: Daikin indoor unit model FXSQ shall be a built-in ceiling

concealed fan coil unit, operable with R-410A refrigerant, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, for installation into the ceiling cavity. The unit shall be constructed of a galvanized steel casing. It shall be available from 9,500 Btu/h to 48,000 Btu/h capacities. Model numbers are FXSQ12MVJU (09), FXSQ12MVJU, FXSQ18MVJU, FXSQ24MVJU, FXSQ30MVJU, FXSQ36MVJU and FXSQ48MVJU to be connected to outdoor unit model RXYQ / RXYMQ heat pump and REYQ / RWEYQ heat recovery model. It shall be a horizontal discharge air with horizontal return air or bottom return air configuration. All models feature a low height (11-7/8") making them applicable to ceiling pockets that tend to be shallow. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while inhibiting changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1D71 and BRC2A71. Included as standard equipment, a long-life filter that is mold resistant and a condensate drain pan and drain pump kit that pumps to 9-13/16" from the drain pipe opening. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 35 dB(A) to 43 dB(A) at low speed 5 feet below the suction grille.



.2 Indoor Unit: .1 The Daikin indoor unit FXSQ shall be completely factory

assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, condensate drain pump, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch. The unit shall have an adjustable external static pressure switch.



.4 Return air shall be through a net mold resistant filter.

.5 The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan and condensate pump. The condensate pump provides up to 9-13/16” of lift.




.9 Switch box shall be reached from the side or bottom for ease of service and maintenance.

.3 Unit Cabinet: .1 The cabinet shall be located into the ceiling and ducted to

the supply and return openings.

.2 The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and polyethylene insulation.

.3 Optional high efficiency air filters are available for each model unit.



.4 Fan: .1 The fan shall be direct-drive Sirocco type fan, statically and

dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available.

.2 The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range from 0.07 to 0.30 HP.



.5 Fan motor external static pressure:

.5 Filter: .1 The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable

long-life filter with mildew proof resin.

.6 Coil: .1 Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from



.3 The coil shall be a 3-row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 14 FPI design completely factory tested.

.4 The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate will be 1 -1/4 inch outside diameter PVC.

.5 A condensate pan shall be located under the coil.

.6 A condensate pump with a 9-13/16” lift shall be located below the coil in the condensate pan with a built in safety alarm.



1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts.



.2 Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet).

.3 Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote controller shall be a maximum distance of 1,640 feet.




.9 Accessories Available: .1 Remote "in-room" sensor kit KRCS01-1A (recommended).

.1 The Daikin wall mounted, hard wired remote sensor kit is recommended for ceiling-embedded type fan coils, which often result in a difference between set temperature and actual temperature. The sensor for detecting the temperature can be placed away from the indoor unit (branch wiring is included in the kit).



.4 Suction panel and air suction canvas.

.3 Model FXAQ - Wall Mounted Unit: .1 General: Daikin indoor unit FXAQ shall be a wall mounted fan coil

unit, operable with refrigerant R-410A, equipped with an electronic expansion valve, for installation onto a wall within a conditioned space. This compact design to be complete with finished flat black casing. Unit to be connected to indoor unit model RXYQ. Computerized PID control shall be used to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition. The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that dehumidifies while inhibiting changes in room temperature when used with Daikin remote control BRC1D71 and BRC2A71. A mildew-proof, polystyrene air filter and condensate drain pan shall be included as standard equipment. The indoor units sound pressure shall range from 32 dB(A) to 35 dB(A) at low speed measured at 1000 mm (3'-0") below and from the unit.



.2 Indoor Unit: .1 The Daikin indoor unit FXAQ shall be completely factory

assembled and tested. Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protector, flare connections, condensate drain pan, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch. The unit shall have an auto-swing louver which ensures efficient air distribution, which closes automatically when the unit stops. The remote controller shall be able to set five (5) steps of discharge angle. The front grille shall be easily removed for washing. The discharge angle shall automatically set at the same angle as the previous operation upon restart. The drain pipe can be fitted to from either left or right sides.



.4 Return air shall be through a resin net mold resistant filter.

.5 The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan.




.3 Unit Cabinet: .1 The cabinet shall be affixed to a factory supplied wall

mounting template and located in the conditioned space.

.2 The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and polyethylene insulation and colour to be flat black.

.4 Fan: .1 The fan shall be a direct-drive cross-flow fan, statically and

dynamically balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available.



.2 The fan motor shall operate on 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz with a motor output range 0.054 to 0.058 HP.



.5 Coil: .1 Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from



.3 The coil shall be a 2-row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 14 fpi design completely factory tested.

.4 The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate will be 25 mm (11/16") outside diameter PVC.


.6 A condensate pan shall be located in the unit.


1 phase, 60 hertz. The acceptable voltage range shall be 187 to 253 volts.

.2 Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 984 metres (3,280 feet).

.3 Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor unit and remote controller shall be a maximum distance of 492 metres (1,640 feet).






.8 Accessories Available: .1 Remote in-room sensor kit KRCS01-1A

.2 A condensate pump.

.3 Schedule of Indoor Units:

.1 Evaporator Unit - DESIGNATED DX-20

.1 Model: FXFQ24MVJU

.2 Capacity: .1 Cooling: 24,000 BTUh .2 Electrical: 208V/1/60


.1 Model: FXMQ36MVJU



.1 Model: FXMQ48MVJU


.4 Evaporator Unit - DESIGNATED DX-21, 22

.1 Model: FXAQ12MVJU



.1 Model: FXSQ24MVJU




2.2 Variable Refrigerant Volume (VRVIII) Air Conditioning Specifications - Heat Pump - DESIGNATED CU .1 The variable capacity, heat pump air conditioning system shall be a Daikin

Variable Refrigerant Volume Series (heat or cool model) split system as specified. The system shall consist of multiple evaporators, REFNET™ joints and headers, a two-pipe refrigeration distribution system using PID control, and Daikin VRVâ outdoor unit. The indoor unit is a direct expansion (DX), air-cooled heat pump, multi-zone air-conditioning system with variable speed driven compressors using R-410A refrigerant. The outdoor unit may connect an indoor evaporator capacity up to 200% of the outdoor condensing unit capacity. All zones are each capable of operating separately with individual temperature control.

.2 The Daikin outdoor unit shall be interconnected to indoor unit models FXFQ, FXHQ, FXSQ, FXMQ, FXLQ, FXNQ, FXOQ, FXDQ, FXZQ and FXAQ and shall range in capacity from 7,500 Btu/h to 48,000 Btu/h in accordance with Daikin’s engineering data book detailing each available indoor unit. The indoor units shall be connected to the outdoor utilizing Daikin’s REFNET™ specified piping joints and headers.

.3 Operation of the system shall permit cooling of all of the fan coil units. Each fan coil or group of fan coils shall be able to provide set temperature independently via a local remote controller, an Intelligent Controller, an Intelligent Manager or a BMS interface. The RXYQ indoor unit model numbers and the associated number of connectable indoor units per RXYQ indoor unit is indicated in the following table. Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be independently controlled.

.4 Model Number - RXYQ144PTJU: Number of Connectable Indoor Units - 6

.5 Features and Benefits: .1 Voltage Platform - Heat pump condensing units shall be available with a

208-230V/3/60 power supply.

.2 Advanced Zoning - A single system shall provide for up to 41 zones.

.3 Auto-charging - Each system shall have a refrigerant auto-charging function.

.4 Charge Checking - Each system shall have a refrigerant charge checking function.

.5 Defrost Heating - Each system shall maintain continuous heating during defrost operation.



.6 Independent Control - Each fan coil shall use a dedicated electronic expansion valve for independent control.

.7 VFD Inverter Control - Each condensing unit shall use a high efficiency, variable speed “inverter” compressor coupled with inverter fan motors for superior part load performance. Compressor capacity shall be modulated automatically to maintain a constant suction pressure, while varying the refrigerant volume for the needs of the cooling or heating loads. Indoor fan coil units shall use PID control to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition.

.8 Flexible Design: .1 Systems shall be capable of up to 540ft (640ft equivalent) of linear

piping between the condensing unit and furthest located fan coil unit.

.2 Systems shall be capable of up to 3,280ft total one-way piping in the piping network.

.3 Systems shall have a vertical (height) separation of up to 295ft between the condensing unit and the fan coil units.

.4 Systems shall be capable of 295ft from the first REFNET™ / branch point.

.5 The outdoor unit shall connect an indoor evaporator capacity up to 200% of the outdoor condensing unit capacity.

.6 Systems shall be capable of 49ft between fan coil units.

.7 Condensing units shall be supported with a fan/fan motor ESP up to 0.32" WG as standard to allow connection of discharge ductwork and to prevent discharge air short circuiting.

.9 Simple Wiring - Systems shall use 16 AWG, 2 wire, multi-stranded, non-shielded and non-polarized daisy chain control wiring.

.10 Energy Efficiency - System shall have equivalent or better performance than high efficiency air cooled or water cooled chiller systems.

.11 Outside Air - Systems shall provide outside air capability.

.12 Space Saving - Each system shall have a condensing unit module footprint as small as 3'-5/8" x 2'-6-1/8" (7.66sq ft).



.13 Advanced Diagnostics - Systems shall include a self diagnostic, auto-check function to detect a malfunction and display the type and location.

.14 Advanced Controls - Each system shall have at least one remote controller capable of controlling up to 16 fan coil units. Each system shall be capable of integrating with open protocol BACnet and LONworks building management systems.

.15 Low Sound Levels - Each system shall use indoor and outdoor units with quiet operation as low as 29 dB(A).

.6 Quality Assurance: .1 The units shall be listed by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) and bear the

cETL label.

.2 All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC).

.3 The system will be produced in an ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 facility, which are standards set by the International Standard Organization (ISO). The system shall be factory tested for safety and function.

.4 The outdoor unit will be factory charged with R410A.

.7 Delivery, Storage and Handling: .1 Unit shall be stored and handled according to the manufacturer’s

recommendations.

.8 Warranty: .1 The units shall have a manufacturer's warranty for a period of one (1)

year from date of Substantial Performance of the Contract. The units shall have a limited labour warranty for a period of one (1) year. The compressors shall have a warranty of six (6) years. During the stated period, should any part fail due to defects in material and workmanship, it shall be repaired or replaced at the discretion of Daikin AC (Americas), Inc. according to Daikin’s terms and conditions. All warranty service work shall be preformed by a Daikin factory trained service professional.

.2 Installation Requirements: The system must be installed by a Daikin factory trained contractor/dealer. The bidders shall be required to submit training certification proof with bid documents. The mechanical contractor’s installation price shall be based on the systems installation requirements. The mechanical contractor bids with complete knowledge of the HVAC system requirements. Untrained contractors who wish to bid this project may contact Airon Controls to arrange training prior to bid day.



.9 Performance: .1 The VRV III RXYQ outdoor unit shall perform as indicated below.

.2 Model Number - RXYQ144PTJU

Cooling Capacity (Btu/h) - 144,000 Power Input(Watts)13,200

.3 Performance Conditions: .1 Cooling: indoor temp. of 80°F DB, 67°F WB and outdoor temp. of

95°F DB. .2 Heating: indoor temp. of 70°F DB and outdoor temp. of 47°F DB,

43°F WB. .3 Equivalent piping length: 25ft

.4 Operating Range:

.1 The operating range in cooling will be 23°F DB ~ 110°F DB.

.2 The operating range in heating will be 0°F DB - 77°F DB / -4°F WB - 60°F WB.

.5 Refrigerant Piping: The system shall be capable of refrigerant piping up to 540 actual feet or 620 equivalent feet from the outdoor unit to the furthest indoor unit, a total combined liquid line length of 3,280 feet of piping between the condensing and fan coil units with 295 feet maximum vertical difference, without any oil traps.

.10 Indoor Unit: .1 General: The indoor unit is designed specifically for use with VRV III

series components. .1 The unit shall be factory assembled and pre-wired with all

necessary electronic and refrigerant controls. The refrigeration circuit of the condensing unit shall consist of Daikin scroll compressors, motors, fans, condenser coil, electronic expansion valves, solenoid valves, 4-way valve, distribution headers, capillaries, filters, shut off valves, oil separators, service ports and refrigerant regulator.

.2 High/low pressure gas line, liquid and suction lines must be individually insulated between the outdoor and indoor units.

.3 The unit can be wired and piped with outdoor unit access from the left, right, rear or bottom.

.4 The connection ratio of indoor units to outdoor unit shall be permitted up to 200%.

.5 Each system shall be able to support the connection of up to 41 indoor units dependant on the model of the outdoor unit.



.6 The sound pressure level standard shall be that value as listed in the Daikin engineering manual for the specified models at 3 feet from the front of the unit. The unit shall be capable of operating automatically at further reduced noise during night time.

.7 The system will automatically restart operation after a power failure and will not cause any settings to be lost, thus eliminating the need for reprogramming.

.8 The unit shall incorporate an auto-charging feature and a refrigerant charge check function.

.9 The unit shall be modular in design and should allow for side-by-side installation with minimum spacing.

.10 The following safety devices shall be included on the condensing unit; high pressure switch, control circuit fuses, crankcase heaters, fusible plug, high pressure switch, overload relay, inverter overload protector, thermal protectors for compressor and fan motors, over current protection for the inverter and anti-recycling timers.

.11 To ensure the liquid refrigerant does not flash when supplying to the various fan coil units, the circuit shall be provided with a sub-cooling feature.

.12 Oil recovery cycle shall be automatic occurring 2 hours after start of operation and then every 8 hours of operation.

.13 The unit shall be capable of heating operation at 0°F dry bulb ambient temperature without additional low ambient controls.

.2 Unit Cabinet: The unit shall be completely weatherproof and corrosion resistant. The unit shall be constructed from rust-proofed mild steel panels coated with a baked enamel finish.

.3 Fan: .1 The condensing unit shall consist of one or more propeller type,

direct-drive 750 W fan motors that have multiple speed operation via a DC (digitally commutating) inverter. Model Number - RXYQ144PTJU Fan Motor Output (W) & Quantity - 750 x 2



.2 The condensing unit fan motor shall have multiple speed operation of the DC (digitally commutating) inverter type, and be of high external static pressure and shall be factory set as standard at 0.12 in. WG. A field setting switch to a maximum 0.32 in. WG pressure is available to accommodate field applied duct for indoor mounting of condensing units.

.3 The fan shall be a vertical discharge configuration with a nominal airflow maximum range of 6,530 CFM to 14,120 CFM dependant on model specified.

.4 Nominal sound pressure levels shall be: Model Number - RXYQ144PTJU Sound Pressure Level dB(A) - 62

.5 The fan motor shall have inherent protection and permanently lubricated bearings and be mounted.

.6 The fan motor shall be provided with a fan guard to prevent contact with moving parts.

.7 Night setback control of the fan motor for low noise operation by way of automatically limiting the maximum speed shall be a standard feature. Operation sound level shall be selectable from 3 steps as shown below.

Operation Sound (dB) Night Mode Sound Pressure Level (dB)

Step 1 max. 55 Step 2 max. 50 Step 3 max. 45

.4 Condenser Coil:

.1 The condenser coil shall be manufactured from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.

.2 The heat exchanger coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and rifled bore tube design to ensure high efficiency performance.

.3 The heat exchanger on the condensing units shall be manufactured from Hi-X seamless copper tube with N-shape internal grooves mechanically bonded on to aluminum fins to an e-Pass Design.



.4 The fins are to be covered with an anti-corrosion acrylic resin and hydrophilic film type E1.

.5 The pipe plates shall be treated with powdered polyester resin for corrosion prevention. The thickness of the coating must be between 2.0 to 3.0 microns.

.5 Compressor: .1 The Daikin inverter scroll compressors shall be variable speed

(PAM inverter) controlled which is capable of changing the speed to follow the variations in total cooling and heating load as determined by the suction gas pressure as measured in the condensing unit. In addition, samplings of evaporator and condenser temperatures shall be made so that the high/low pressures detected are read every 20 seconds and calculated. With each reading, the compressor capacity (INV frequency or STD ON/OFF) shall be controlled to eliminate deviation from target value.

.2 The inverter driven compressor in each condensing unit shall be of highly efficient reluctance DC (digitally commutating), hermetically sealed scroll G-type with a maximum speed of 7,980 rpm.

.3 Neodymium magnets shall be adopted in the rotor construction to yield a higher torque and efficiency in the compressor instead of the normal ferrite magnet type. At complete stop of the compressor, the neodymium magnets will position the rotor into the optimum position for a low torque start.

.4 The capacity control range shall be as low as 6% to 100%.

.5 Each non-inverter compressor shall also be of the hermetically sealed scroll type.

.6 Each compressor shall be equipped with a crankcase heater, high pressure safety switch, and internal thermal overload protector.

.7 Oil separators shall be standard with the equipment together with an intelligent oil management system.

.8 The compressor shall be spring mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration.



.9 Units sized 8-12 ton shall contain a minimum of 2 compressors, 14-20 ton units shall contain a minimum of 4 compressors. In the event of compressor failure the remaining compressors shall continue to operate and provide heating or cooling as required at a proportionally reduced capacity. The microprocessor and associated controls shall be designed to specifically address this condition.

Tonnage Number of Compressors Compressor Types

6 2 1 inverter + 1 fixed 8 2 1 inverter + 1 fixed

10 2 1 inverter + 1 fixed 12 2 1 inverter + 1 fixed

14 4 (1 inverter + 1 fixed) x 2




.10 In the case of multiple condenser modules, conjoined operation

hours of the compressors shall be balanced by means of the Duty Cycling Function, ensuring sequential starting of each module at each start/stop cycle, completion of oil return, completion of defrost or every 8 hours.



.6 Electrical: .1 Power Supply Voltage: 208-230V/3/60

Voltage Range: 187V-253V

Model MCA MFA MSC TOCA RXYQ72PTJU 36.1 40 131 54.5 RXYQ96PTJU 36.1 50 131 54.5 RXYQ120PTJU 41.3 60 132 54.5 RXYQ144PTJU 72.2 80 - 56.8 RXYQ168PTJU 36.1 + 36.1 50 + 40 137 54.5 + 54.5 RXYQ192PTJU 41.3 + 36.1 60 + 40 138 54.5 + 54.5 RXYQ216PTJU 41.3 + 36.1 60 + 50 154 54.5 + 54.5 RXYQ240PTJU 41.3 + 41.3 60 + 60 155 54.5 + 54.5

.2 The control voltage between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be

16VDC non-shielded, stranded 2 conductor cable.

.3 The control wiring shall be a two-wire multiplex transmission system, making it possible to connect multiple indoor units to one outdoor unit with one 2-cable wire, thus simplifying the wiring operation.

.4 The control wiring lengths shall be:

Outdoor to Indoor Unit

Outdoor to Central Controller

Indoor Unit to Remote Control

Control Wiring Length

6,665 ft 3,330 ft 1,665 ft

Wire Type 16 AWG, 2 wire, non-polarity, non-shielded, stranded

.11 Basis of Design: Daikin AC (HTS Engineering)

.12 Acceptable Products: .1 Mitsubishi .2 Daikin AC (HTS Engineering)

2.3 Controls .1 Remote Controller (Auto System Address):

.1 15 # PAR21MAA (One For Each DX Unit)



.2 This controller shall be wall mounted and hard wired to the indoor fan coil units. It will be manufactured in ABS plastic with an LCD display and will be the manufacturers standard colour.

.3 The controller will be capable of altering the following functions on up to sixteen indoor fan coil units: .1 On/Off .2 Operating Mode .3 Set Point .4 Fan Speed .5 Louvre Position .6 Timer Settings .7 Test Run

.4 The controller shall also be capable of displaying the following items:

.1 On/Off .2 Operating Mode .3 Set Point .4 Return Air Temperature .5 Fan Speed .6 Louvre Position .7 Timer Settings .8 Filter .9 Fault Diagnosis .10 Test Run

.5 Control Wiring:

.1 Division 16 shall be responsible for the interconnecting control wiring between the fan coil units and CU-1 and control wiring between remote controllers, centralised control and relevant components. This work shall be co-ordinated with the electrical/controls contractor for the rooting and trunking of the cables.

.2 All control wiring is to be carried out in 2 core 16 AWG shielded cabling with colour coding and tagged with ID number at 9'-0" (3000 mm) intervals as per schematics for ease of identification and maintenance.

.3 Control wiring shall not be run next to power wiring. A minimum space of 4" (100 mm) between both control and power cables shall apply.



.6 Installation: .1 The fixing of all air conditioning equipment, installation of all refrigerant

pipe work and full commissioning shall be performed by a specialist refrigerant installer who shall be authorised to install Mitsubishi Electric VRF equipment. The installation of all internal and external units, refrigerant pipe work, inter-connecting wiring, commissioning and testing shall be carried out by an approved refrigerant systems installers.

.2 Full access shall be afforded to site during the installation stage of the project to allow them to verify that installation methods are fully in accordance with Mitsubishi requirements and that the equipment warranties will not be invalidated.

.7 Refrigerant Pipe Work: .1 Supply, install, test and commission all interconnecting refrigeration pipe

work between the condensing units and fan coil units, as indicated on the drawings.

.2 All pipe work to be carried out in refrigerant quality ACR copper tubing and complete with the appropriate headers and joints. All pipe work must be suitable for R410a.

.3 Longest possible lengths of copper pipe should be utilised to minimise joints on site.

.4 Appropriate refrigeration installation tools must be utilised. Dry nitrogen must be utilised at all times in the system during brazing.

.5 All pipe work (suction and liquid lines) to be insulated with slip on close cell elastomeric pipe insulation (as manufactured by Armaflex or equal and approved) having a wall thickness of not less than 1/2" (15 mm). Seal all joints with Armstrong 520 adhesive.

.6 After installation of pipe work, and prior to sealing of insulation joints and

starting of equipment, pipe work should be pressure tested. 44 psig test for 3 minutes minimum, then 217 psig for 3 minutes minimum, then 478 psig for 3 minutes minimum, then strength test to 600 psig check the system for leaks and deformation, then lower the pressure back to 478 psig and pressure test for 24 hours and check for leaks. Vacuumed/ dehydrated to 300 microns, and hold at that vacuum for 12 hours (minimum).

.7 Refrigerant (R410a) charge weight must be calculated, to the actual installed length of pipe work in accordance to Mitsubishi recommendations.

.8 The charging should be carried out with an appropriate charging station.



.9 Pipe work to be properly fixed and supported at a minimum of 5'-0" (1500 mm) centres or as specified by local Code and where required should be run on galvanised trays. All pipe work to be labelled with ID number (condensing units ref.) at 9'-0" (3000 mm) intervals.

.10 Joints in copper pipe shall be brazed. Brazing shall be carried out to the requirements of the local Code and as per the Canadian Copper & Brass Development Association recommendations.

.8 Condensate Pipe Work: .1 A condensate line shall be installed to each fan coil unit. This shall be

installed and insulated all as per the standard specification. Minimum size of condensate pipes to be 3/4" (20 mm) copper or plastic, insulated and pumped or by gravity from each fan coil/cassette, drains to run 1:80 min falls as indicated on drawings.

.2 Installation must be by approved Manufacturer.

.3 Provide and install split air conditioning systems as mentioned above.

.4 Secure evaporator units to the wall where shown, approximately 7'-0" (2100 mm) above the finished floor. Ensure that the units are level.

.5 Type AC&R refrigeration piping must be separately insulated (liquid line and suction line). Purge refrigeration lines with nitrogen while welding to avoid contaminants and carbonizing of the lines.

.6 Obtain final refrigerant piping and wiring diagrams from supplier

.7 Division 16 to provide all required control wiring and power wiring required for a complete installation.

.8 The refrigerant distribution circuit and piping shall be designed and selected according to the manufacturers specifications.

.9 Supervision of commissioning by Manufacturer's Representative.


ELECTRICAL Index Section 16000 Project No. 09019 Page 1 Section No. Description Page Nos. EST Electrical Supplementary Bid Submission Form 1 - 4 16001 Electrical Drawing List 1 - 2 16010 General Provisions 1 - 15 16115 Customer Owned High Voltage Substations 1 - 7 16230 Panelboards - Breaker Type 1 - 4 16240 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers 1 - 2 16245 Contactors 1 - 2 16255 Disconnect Switches - Fused & Non-Fused 1 - 2 16260 Fuses 1 - 2 16300 Basic Materials & Methods 1 16301 Conductors 1 - 2 16304 Armoured Cables 1 16310 Fastenings & Supports 1 16315 Wire & Box Connectors, 0-1000V 1 16320 Conduit 1 - 3 16347 Medium Voltage Metal Enclosed Switchgear 1 - 6 16350 Surface Raceway Systems 1 - 2 16355 Wireways & Auxiliary Gutters 1 16365 Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes & Cabinets 1 - 2 16375 Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes & Fittings 1 - 2 16380 Wiring Devices 1 - 6 16381 Occupancy & Daylight Sensor Lighting Control Devices 1 - 6 16470 Motor Starters 1 - 4


ELECTRICAL Index Section 16000 Project No. 09019 Page 2 Section No. Description Page Nos. 16512 Addition to Existing TV Distribution System 1 - 2 16516 Addition to Existing Intercom, Paging & Clock System 1 - 6 16530 Communication Raceway System 1 - 4 16540 Telecommunications Cabling System 1 - 25 16600 Fire Alarm System 1 - 12 16700 Wiring for Mechanical Equipment 1 - 15 16800 Lighting 1 - 18 16920 Addition & Modifications to Existing Security System 1 - 8 16965 Unit Equipment for Emergency Lighting 1 - 3 16995 Modular Control Panels 1 - 4

GEORGETOWN DISTRICT HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION & RENOVATIONS - PHASE 2 Electrical Supplementary Bid Submission Form Project No. 09019 Page 1

1.1. Submission Requirement Note that this electrical supplementary bid submission form is to be submitted, BY FAX, by all electrical bidders, to the offices of:

Snyder and Associates

920 Yonge Street, Suite 700, Toronto ON M4W 3C7, Ph: 416-966-5444 Fax: 416-966-4443

on the day following the close of electrical bids at the construction bid depository of Ontario. Do not submit this Electrical Supplementary Bid Submission Form to the Bid Depository.

1.2. Print Electrical Contractor’s Name, Phone & Fax Name: ____________________________________________________ Phone Number: Fax Number: __________________

This completed Electrical Supplementary Bid Submission Form is submitted in conjunction with our Bid to the Construction Bid Depository of Ontario, dated:

_________________ For School: _____________________________________ 1.3. List of Sub-Contractors

1.3.1. We, the Bidder, propose to have the following Sub-Contractors to the Electrical Building

Services perform the Work on this project which are an integral part of this Bid.

1.3.2. We, the Bidder, confirm that we have investigated their reliability, bonding abilities where required, and competence to carry out the Work as specified. We agree that no changes to this list will be made without the express written approval of the Consultants and the Board.

1.3.3. The electrical contractor shall submit to the General Division within 24 hours of Tender Closing, a list of all the sub-contractors proposed to be used by the Electrical Contractor: .1 I/We propose to use the following Sub-Contractors, the portion of the Electrical

Contract to be performed by each being as indicated (only one sub-contactor shall be listed for any such portion):


Work to be Done Sub-Contractor Supervising Personnel

$ Value of Contract

Fire Alarm System

Security System

Integrated Telephone & PA System

Computer Cabling System

1.3.4. In submitting his Bid, the Electrical Contractor:

.1 The Electrical Contractor agrees to employ those Sub-contractors proposed in the Electrical Form of Tender and Supplementary Bid Submission Form and accepted by the Halton District School Board at the signing of the Contract with the General Contractor.

.2 The Halton District School Board may, for reasonable cause, object to the use of the proposed sub-contractor and consequently, may require the Electrical Contractor to employ one of the other sub-contractor bidders.

.3 In the event the Halton District School Board requires a change form a proposed sub-contractor originally proposed by the Electrical Contractor, the Contract Price shall be adjusted by the difference in cost.

.4 The Electrical Contractor shall not be required to employ as a sub-contractor, a firm to whom he may reasonable object.

1.3.5. Attached to the Electrical Tender Form shall be a list of manufacturers proposed to be used by the Electrical Contractor.

Section Item of Equipment Manufacturer

16230 Panelboards 16255 Disconnect Switches 16380 Wiring Devices 16470 Motor Starters 16800 Light Fixtures (all Types) 16965 Unit Equipment for Emergent Lighting 16995 Modular Control Panels Drawings Hand Dryers


1.4. Unit Prices

1.4.1. We, the Bidder, enclose herein Unit Prices which are an integral part of the Bid. We agree that Unit Prices shall be in effect for the duration of this Project’s Work.

1.4.2. We further agree that the Unit Prices will be used for additions and deletions and that the credit rate for deletions shall be at (80%) eighty percent.

1.4.3. Fire Alarm System: .1 To DELETE one (1) existing conventional fire alarm device (pullstation, horn,

smoke/heat detector) complete with wiring back to fire alarm control panel: $ per device

.2 To PROVIDE one of the following additional addressable fire alarm devices complete with wiring back to fire alarm control panel and verification: .1 $ per Pullstation

.2 $ per Horn (only)

.3 $ per Horn/Strobe (combination)

.4 $ per Heat Detector

.5 $ per Smoke Detector

1.5. Labour Rates

1.5.1. We, the Bidder, enclose herein the Labour Rates which are an integral part of our Bid.

We confirm that the Labour Rates shall be in effect for the duration of the Project Work. We further stipulate that the Board is not obliged to accept any Labour Rates indicated.

1.5.2. Cost of labour at the following rates shall be applied for additions or deletions to the work not covered by Unit Prices. The Labour Rates quoted below represent the net cost to the Sub-Contractor(s), exclusive of overhead and profit but including salary, and all agreed local union benefits, etc. (See allowable percentages on Overhead and Profit in Supplementary General Conditions to CCDC 2.)

Electrical Trade Person (Labourer) $ Per Hour Electrical Foreman (Supervisory) $ Per Hour


1.6. Signature Of Electrical Supplementary Bid Submission Form We are submitting this Electrical Supplementary Bid Submission Form under a Corporate Seal as a Limited Company, or witnessed as an individual or partnership in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders.

NAME OF BIDDER ______________________________________________________ PRINT NAME OF SIGNING OFFICER _______________________________________ PRINT TITLE OF SIGNING OFFICER _______________________________________ SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNING OFFICER____________________________ DATED AT ____________________THIS ______DAY OF__________________ 2009


ELECTRICAL Drawing List Section 16001 Project No. 09019 Page 1 Drawing No. Description E0.2 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN AND LEGEND - PHASE 2 E2.1 GROUND FLOOR EAST ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN - PHASE 2 E2.2 GROUND FLOOR EAST LIGHTING PLAN - PHASE 2 E2.3 GROUND FLOOR NEW ADDITION LIGHTING PLAN - PHASE 2 E2.4 GROUND FLOOR EAST DEVICES PLAN - PHASE 2 E2.5 GROUND FLOOR NEW ADDITION DEVICES PLAN - PHASE 2 E2.6 NEW KITCHEN & SERVERY SERVICE EQUIPMENT LAYOUT -

PHASE 2 E2.7 ROOF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PLAN - PHASE 2 E2.8 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM AND ELECTRICAL DETAILS -

PHASE 2 FIRE ALARM DRAWINGS FA2.1 GROUND FLOOR EAST FIRE ALARM DEMOLITION PLAN - PHASE 2 FA2.2 GROUND FLOOR NORTH FIRE ALARM DEMOLITION PLAN - PHASE 2 FA2.3 GROUND FLOOR SOUTH & WEST FIRE ALARM DEMOLITION

PLAN - PHASE 2 FA2.4 SECOND FLOOR EAST FIRE ALARM DEMOLITION PLAN - PHASE 2 FA2.5 SECOND FLOOR NORTH FIRE ALARM DEMOLITION PLAN - PHASE 2 FA2.6 SECOND FLOOR SOUTH & WEST FIRE ALARM DEMOLITION

PLAN - PHASE 2 FA2.7 GROUND FLOOR EAST NEW FIRE ALARM DEVICES PLAN - PHASE 2


ELECTRICAL Drawing List Section 16001 Project No. 09019 Page 2 Drawing No. Description FA2.8 GROUND FLOOR NEW ADDITION NEW FIRE ALARM DEVICES

PLAN - PHASE 2

FA2.9 GROUND FLOOR NORTH NEW FIRE ALARM DEVICES PLAN - PHASE 2

FA2.10 GROUND FLOOR SOUTH & WEST NEW FIRE ALARM

DEVICES PLAN - PHASE 2 FA2.11 SECOND FLOOR EAST NEW FIRE ALARM DEVICES PLAN - PHASE 2 FA2.12 SECOND FLOOR NORTH NEW FIRE ALARM DEVICES PLAN - PHASE 2 FA2.13 SECOND FLOOR WEST NEW FIRE ALARM DEVICES PLAN -

PHASE 2


ELECTRICAL General Provisions Section 16010 Project No. 09019 Page 1


.1 Conform to General Requirements, Division 1.

1.2 Codes & Standards .1 Do complete installation in accordance with CSA C22.1-2009 except where

specified otherwise.

.2 Comply with CSA Electrical Bulletins in force at time of Tender submission, while not identified and specified by number in this Division, are to be considered as forming part of related CSA Part II standard.

.3 Do overhead and underground systems in accordance with CSA C22.3 No. 1 except where specified otherwise.

.4 Abbreviations for electrical terms: to CSA Z85.

.5 Comply also with the following codes: .1 Ontario Electrical Safety Code - 2009 .2 National Building Code .3 Ontario Regulation 350/06 (Building Code) .4 Ontario Fire Marshal Requirements .5 Local Fire Code Requirements .6 Local Hydro Utility Requirements .7 Emergency Electrical Power Supply for Buildings - CAN/CSA-C282.

1.3 Permits & Fees .1 The Consultant shall submit to the Electrical Safety Authority the necessary

number of drawings and specifications for examination and approval prior to commencement of work and pay the associated fees.

1.4 Inspection of Premises & Site .1 Visit the site of the building and become thoroughly familiar with all conditions to

be met in carrying out the work covered by these specifications. No extras will be allowed for failure to properly evaluate conditions which affect the scope of work included in this Division.



1.5 Shop Drawings, Product Data & Samples .1 Submit eight (8) copies of shop drawings, product data and/or samples where

requested and in accordance with requirements of each appropriate Section.

.2 Indicate all details, construction, finish, dimensions, weights, capacity, etc., and electrical performance characteristics of equipment etc.

.3 Where applicable include wiring, single line and schematic diagrams.

.4 Include wiring drawings or diagrams showing interconnection with work of other Sections.

.5 Stamp and sign each shop drawing to indicate that: .1 The drawing has been checked for conformance with requirements of

drawings and specifications.

.2 The equipment has been co-ordinated with other equipment to which it is attached and/or connected.

.3 Dimensions have been verified to ensure the proper installation of equipment within the available space without interference with the work of other trades.

.6 Lighting fixtures to be labelled Fixture 'A', 'B', etc. to match Specification.

.7 Shop drawings will be reviewed and return marked "No Comment", "See Remarks" or "Rejected". The drawing review does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for its accuracy or for compliance with the Contract documents.

.1 "No Comment": Drawing shall be considered as generally conforming

with the design concept.

.2 "See Remarks": Drawings shall be considered as generally conforming with the design concept including corrections as noted on drawings. These drawings shall be corrected and re-submitted for final approval, but such re-submission shall not hold up manufacture.

.3 "Rejected": These drawings are rejected and work shall not proceed on

the manufacture of this equipment. The drawings shall be re-drawn or corrected, and re-submitted with corrections as noted on the drawings or a letter attached thereto.

.8 Shop drawings which do not comply with the specified Approved Equal or Base

Bid Manufacturers and Systems will be marked "Rejected" for that reason and returned without further review.



.9 A maximum of two (2) copies of reviewed shop drawings will be returned to the General Contractor (1 copy for each of the General and Electrical Contractors). The Contractor shall be responsible for making any additional copies of the reviewed shop drawings that may be required.

1.6 As-Built Drawings & Equipment Manuals

.1 Before final acceptance is made by the Owner, comply with the following:

.2 Provide two (2) sets of "As-Built" whiteprints, showing the location of all fixtures,

equipment and wiring for same. These drawings are to incorporate all addenda and changes made during the construction period.

.3 The Consultant shall provide to the Contractor for a fee, a CD containing graphic (electronic) representation of the drawings. Complete and return the release form "Transfer of Files on Electronic Media" in order to receive and use the electronic files. (Sample of the Form is appended to this Section).

.4 Provide the School Board, and include associated costs in Tender, for electronic CADD, as-built drawings showing all changes to the Contract on a 'CD' diskette. Diskette shall be submitted at the end of the Project.

.5 Provide two (2) sets of equipment data sheets and/or Manufacturer's

maintenance manuals covering each system and its components in accordance with requirements of each appropriate Section.

.6 These sets are to be in good quality binders equal to VYN-L-Line #VL-3096-B 2", (51 mm) rings. Each binder shall include a header page with the Contractor's name, address, telephone and facsimile numbers and index page. The binder is to be divided into sections with colour coded and typed tabs clearly marked indicating the systems, etc., as follows:

.1 Tab #1 - Letters of Guarantee, Hydro Inspection Certificate, Site

plan showing dimensioned locations of all underground services and Co-ordination Study

.2 Tab #2- Panelboards, Copy of typed circuit directories, starters, contactors, disconnects, fuses, etc.

.3 Tab #3 - Intercom, Paging and Clock System, General Purpose Room Sound and Loop Systems and Telephone System

.4 Tab #4 - Computer Cabling System and Television System

.5 Tab #5 - Fire Alarm Verification Certificate and Test Report



.6 Tab #6 - Lighting Fixtures and Emergency Lighting System

.7 Tab #7 - Security System

.8 Tab #8 - Miscellaneous Systems and Items

1.7 Maintenance Materials

.1 Provide maintenance materials where requested and in accordance with requirements of appropriate Section.

.2 Manufacturer's installation, operation and maintenance instructions including the

identification of replacement parts and names and address of supplier for all components supplied under Division 16.

.3 Detailed instructions and recommended materials for cleaning, lubricating and

maintenance of components supplied under Division 15.

.4 Chart showing any necessary seasonal adjustments to electrical apparatus and the recommended minimum and maximum time intervals for intervals for inspection of all items which require routing servicing.

.5 List of lamps used throughout the project. Information base to reference wattage, voltage, ordering abbreviation and/or catalogue number.

.6 Upon completion of the project, the electrical contractor must provide the Halton

District School Board with the following information:

.7 A complete Lamp Schedule. The format of this Lamp Schedule must conform to a Halton District School Board Standard.

.8 A complete list of fuses, indicating type, size, quantity and name of the machine

motor, feeder of device protected. 1.8 Care, Operation & Start-Up

.1 Instruct operating personnel in the operation, care and maintenance of equipment.

.2 Arrange and pay for services of Manufacturer's Factory Service Engineer to

supervise start-up of installation, check, adjust, balance and calibrate components.



.3 Provide these services for such period, and for as many visits as necessary to put equipment in operation, and ensure that operating personnel are conversant with aspects of its care and operation.

1.9 Voltage Ratings .1 Operating voltages: to CSA C235.

.2 Motors, electric heating, control and distribution devices and equipment to

operate satisfactorily at 60 Hz. within normal operating limits established by above standard. Equipment to operate in extreme operating conditions established in above standard without damage to equipment.

1.10 Inspection .1 Furnish a Certificate of Acceptance from Inspection Department on completion of

work.

1.11 Materials & Equipment - Approved Equals, Base Bid, Approved Alternates, Unsolicited Alternates .1 Provide materials and equipment in accordance with Division 1.

.2 Equipment and material to be CSA certified and manufactured to standards

specified herein.

.3 Where there is no alternative to supplying equipment which is not CSA certified, obtain special approval from Inspection Department.

.4 Factory assemble control panels and component assemblies.

.5 The Specification indicates Approved Equal manufacturers (or Approved Manufacturers) for various products, materials and systems which make up the electrical work. The Tender Price shall be based on any of the "Approved Equals".

.6 The Specifications may also indicate Base Bid and Approved Alternate manufacturers for various products, materials and systems. For such cases, the Tender Price MUST be based on the "Base Bid" manufacturer/system. The net dollar addition or deduction to/from the Tender Price for each "Approved Alternate" shall be indicated on a separate form or letter attached to the Tender Form for consideration by the Consultant.



.7 Unsolicited Alternate manufacturer/systems which do not appear in the Tender Documents may also be proposed, provided the following conditions are met: .1 They appear separately in an accompanying letter attached to the Tender

Form.

.2 The net dollar deduction from the Tender Price if the alternate is accepted. This value shall reflect all costs associated with the incorporation of the alternate into the work, including any required changes in Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and other Electrical Sections and the Consultants costs of revising the design to suit.

.8 The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all "Approved Alternates" or "Unsolicited Alternate" manufacturers/systems.

1.12 Electric Motors, Equipment & Controls .1 Supplier and Installer responsibility is specified in Section 16700 or as indicated.

1.13 Finishes .1 Shop finish metal enclosure surfaces by removal of rust and scale, cleaning,

application of rust-resistant primer inside and outside, and at least two coats of finish enamel. .1 Paint outdoor electrical equipment "equipment green" finish to EEMAC

Y1-1. .2 Paint indoor switchgear and distribution enclosures light grey to EEMAC

2Y-1.

.2 Clean and touch up surfaces of shop-painted equipment scratched or marred during shipment or installation to match original paint.

.3 Clean, prime and paint exposed hangers, racks, fastenings to prevent rusting.

1.14 Equipment Identification .1 Identify electrical equipment with nameplates as follows:

.2 Nameplates:

.1 Lamacoid 1/8" (3 mm) thick plastic engraving sheet mechanically attached. Letters shall be 1/4" (6.35 mm) high for small devices such as control stations and at least 1/2" (17.5 mm) high for all other equipment. .1 Normal power - black lettering on white



.2 Essential power - white lettering on red

.2 Nameplates to Indicate: .1 Label .2 Electrical characteristics (Volts, Amps, Phase, etc.) .3 Label and location of isolating device

.3 Affix panelboard nameplates on front of panelboard trim.

.4 Nameplate text to be approved prior to manufacture.

1.15 Wiring Identification .1 Identify wiring with permanent indelible identifying markings, either numbered or

coloured plastic tapes, on both ends of phase conductors of feeders and branch circuit wiring.

.2 Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout.

.3 Colour code: to CSA C22.1.

.4 Use colour-coded wires in communication cables, matched throughout system.

1.16 Conduit & Cable Identification .1 Colour code junction and pull boxes.

.2 Code by spray painting all exterior sides and covers using colours noted in table

below.

Normal Essential (Emergency)

Up to 250V Blue Yellow Telephone Green -- Intercom/Paging/Clock System Brown -- Television System Purple -- Emergency Lighting System Orange -- Security System Grey -- Fire Alarm System Red --



1.17 Wiring Terminations .1 Lugs, terminals, screws used for termination of wiring to be suitable for either

copper and/or aluminum conductors.

1.18 Manufacturer's & CSA Labels .1 Manufacturer's nameplates and CSA labels to be visible and legible after

equipment is installed.

1.19 Warning Signs .1 Provide warning signs, as specified or to meet requirements of Inspection

Department.

1.20 Conduit Locations .1 Not all conduits are indicated on drawings. Those that are shown are in

diagrammatic form only.

1.21 Location of Outlets .1 Locate outlets in accordance with Division 1 and Drawings.

.2 Do not install outlets back-to-back in wall; allow minimum 6" (150 mm) horizontal

clearance between boxes.

.3 Change location of outlets at no extra cost or credit, providing distance does not exceed 10' (3 m), and information is given before installation.

.4 Locate light switches on latch side of doors. Locate disconnect devices in Mechanical and Elevator Machine Rooms on latch side of door.

.5 Electrical equipment and outlets shall present a balanced and symmetrical relationship to the visible surrounding of the building of which it pertains. A random application of outlets, devices or equipment is unacceptable. In the absence of specific detail on the architectural and electrical drawings, detailed information will be provided.



.6 Co-ordinate with the work of other trade section to ensure that electrical devices, switches, receptacles, loudspeakers, clocks, alarm signals, etc., are not conflict with chalkboards, tackboards, cupboards, shelving, heating units or other obstructions unless provision is made for mounting in the face of furniture and fitments.

1.22 Mounting Heights .1 Mounting height of equipment is from finished floor to centreline of equipment

unless specified or indicated otherwise.

.2 If mounting height of equipment is not indicated, verify before proceeding with installation.

.3 Install electrical equipment at the following heights, unless indicated otherwise: .1 Local switches: 48" (1200 mm).

.2 Wall receptacles:

.1 General: 18" (455 mm).

.2 Above top of continuous baseboard heater: 8" (200 mm).

.3 Above top of counters or splashback: 8" (200 mm).

.4 In Mechanical Rooms: 48" (1200 mm).

.3 Panelboards: 6' (1800 mm) to top of panel or as required by Code.

.4 Telephone and data outlets: 18" (455 mm).

.5 Wall-mounted telephone and intercom outlets: 54" (1370 mm).

.6 Fire alarm pull stations: 48" (1200 mm) to top.

.7 Fire alarm horns: 12" (300 mm) below ceiling.

.8 Television outlets: 18" (455 mm).

.9 Wall-mounted speakers: 7' (2100 mm).

.10 Wall-mounted speakers with call-in switch: 54" (1370 mm).

.11 Clocks: 12" (300 mm) below ceiling.

.12 For special or additional mounting heights, see drawings.

1.23 Protection .1 Protect exposed live equipment during construction for safety of personnel.

.2 Shield and mark live parts 'LIVE 120 VOLTS', or with appropriate voltage.

.3 Arrange for installation of temporary doors for rooms containing electrical

distribution equipment. Keep these doors locked except when under direct supervision of Electrician.



1.24 Load Balance .1 Measure phase current to panelboards with normal loads (lighting) operating at

time of acceptance. Adjust branch circuit connections as required to obtain best balance of current between phases and record changes and update panel directories.

.2 Measure phase voltages at loads and adjust transformer taps to within 2% of rated voltage of equipment.

.3 Submit, at completion of work, a report listing phase and neutral currents on panelboards, dry-core transformers and motor control centres, operating under normal load. State hour and date on which each load was measured, and voltage at time of test.

1.25 Roof & Wall Openings .1 Holes through exterior walls and roof to be flashed and made weatherproof.

Co-ordinate with General Contractor.

1.26 Fireproofing .1 Where cables or conduits pass through floors and fire-rated walls, pack space

between wiring and sleeve full with approved rated fire stops and seal with caulking compound conforming to CGSB 19-GP-9Ma.

1.27 Tests .1 Conduct and pay for tests specified in appropriate Sections.

1.28 Insulation Resistance Testing .1 Megger circuits, feeders and equipment up to 350V with a 500V instrument.

.2 Megger 350-600V circuits, feeders and equipment with a 1000V instrument.

.3 Check resistance to ground before energizing.

1.29 Co-Ordination of Protective Devices .1 Ensure circuit protective devices such as overcurrent trips, relays, fuses, are

installed to values and settings as indicated or as per Co-Ordination Study.



1.30 Cleaning .1 Do final cleaning in accordance with Division 1. .2 At time of final cleaning, clean lighting reflectors, lenses, and other lighting

surfaces that have been exposed to construction dust and dirt.

1.31 Access Panels .1 Provide access panels in ceilings, walls, etc. as required.

.2 Access panels shall be prime coated steel with hinged door.

1.32 Guarantee .1 Provide guarantees and warranties in accordance with Division 1.

.2 Provide extended warranties as specified in appropriate Section for the following

equipment: .1 See Section 16800 - Lighting for fixture ballast and lamp warranty.

1.33 Cutting & Patching .1 Provide all cutting, patching and making good necessary for this installation.

When necessary that this be done by others, engage competent tradesmen to carry out this work and include all costs for same in Contract.

1.34 Extras & Credits .1 Extras and credits shall be in accordance with Division 1.

.2 Quotations for extras and credits shall include complete breakdowns of the

following: .1 Quantity of each material item. .2 Unit cost of each material item. .3 Labour unit cost (in hours) per unit of material for each material item. .4 Labour cost rate in dollars per hour.



1.35 Equipment Interference Drawings .1 Prior to fabrication and/or installation, wherever a multiple of equipment and

materials of various trades will occur in ceiling spaces, and in or on walls, prepare detail drawings supplementary to the Contract drawings, locating all work within the space allocated or indicating the minimum space required to prevent interferences, to allow proper installation of all equipment and to provide accessibility for future maintenance of this equipment.

1.36 Excavation & Backfill

.1 Unless otherwise noted in Division 2, provide all excavation and backfill required for the electrical work.

.2 Protect excavation with timber sheeting, bracing or shoring as required. Provide

adequate temporary cross-overs for pedestrian and vehicular traffic, including guard rails, lamps and flags as directed.

.3 Excavate so that cable duct or concrete duct bank is supported on a solid bed of

undisturbed earth. Where trenches are excavated too deep, provide granular backfill to bring trench bottom to the required level.

.4 Remove all timber and protective devices before backfilling or when the

necessity of protection ceases. Keep excavated areas free of water by providing pumps, hoses, strainers, other appurtenances, power, labour and maintenance as required.

.5 Backfill trenches with clean excavated material free from waste materials, debris,

rubbish, frozen portions, muskeg, organic or cohesive matter and rocks larger than 4" (100 mm) in diameter. If a sufficient quantity of material is not available from excavation, use imported fill having the same characteristics.

.6 Where trenches run under paved areas backfill with Granular 'A', M.T.C.

.7 Machine tamp all backfill. .8 Restore to its original condition, all pavement, curbs, walks, walls, sodding,

shrubs etc. removed or damaged in connection with his work, unless otherwise directed by the Consultant.

.9 Remove all surplus excavated material from site unless directed otherwise.

1.37 Grounding .1 Ground all equipment in accordance with Code requirements and as indicated.



.2 Grounding conductors: Copper, insulated (green); size per Code.

.3 Grounding lugs, connectors: approved grounding type.

.4 All ground conductors #8AWG or smaller shall be run in EMT.

.5 All receptacles and permanently wired equipment are to be grounded with green insulated ground conductors, originating from panelboard. Metallic raceways, rigid metal conduit. EMT, cable armour, and M.I. cable sheaths shall NOT be used for grounding.

.6 Ground wire must be installed in all conduits.

1.38 Identified Conductors (Neutrals) .1 Provide one (1) identified, grounded neutral conductor for each set of branch

circuits requiring use of same provided the neutral is not shared by more than three (3) branch circuits and each of the three (3) branch circuits is connected to a different phase (A, B, or C).

.2 Neutral conductors shall be connected to the same distribution point (panelboard, splitter) as the related branch circuit wire.

1.39 Bonding .1 The Electrical Subcontractor is required to furnish a 50% Performance Bond and

a 50% Labour and Material Payment Bond covering their respective subcontracts. These Bonds shall be assigned jointly to the Board and the General Contractor. The General Contractor must submit the Electrical Agreement to Bond at the time of Tender.

1.40 Cash Allowances .1 For details and cash values, refer to Architectural Specification Section 01 21 00,

Item 1.1.

.2 The Electrical Contractor shall include in his Tender Price the following Cash Allowances: .1 Security System: For miscellaneous upgrades to the existing system

hardware and software to accommodate new door contacts, or motion sensors as required by Halton District School Board.



.2 Fire Alarm System: For miscellaneous devices in hidden or missed confined spaces (i.e. unforeseen site conditions) which are to be replaced with new addressable devices.

.3 Computer System: For miscellaneous upgrades to the existing system hardware and head end equipment to accommodate new computer drops, rack equipment or fibre optic revisions as required by Halton District School Board, IT Department.

.4 Testing: Ground Potential Rise (GPR) analysis covering entire existing medium and high voltage systems up to the 44 kV Hydro pole and do the required modifications.

.5 Stage Lighting: Remote dimming control panel for stage lighting remote control lighting and dimming system console and wiring. Remote panel to be located in Control Room E122E

Group Eight Engineering Structural • Mechanical • Electrical Consulting Engineers A Trow Global Company Tel: (905) 525-6069 Fax: (905) 528-7310 499 King Street East, Suite 200 E-Mail: [email protected] Hamilton, ON L8N 1E1 Website: group8eng.com Transfer of Files on Electronic Media Consultant of Record ("Consultant"): Group Eight Engineering Contractor ("Contractor"): Re: Georgetown High School Addition & Renovations- Phase 2 ("Owner"): Halton District School Board The Contractor hereby acknowledges requesting from the Consultant, electronic data containing graphic (electronic) representation of Engineering Drawings as per attached list of drawings, subject to the condition that the said drawings are to be used only for information and reference in connections with the Owner's use and occupancy of the Project. The Contractor shall be responsible for checking and verifying all dimensions and details, or quantities of materials and for the co-ordination of architectural, structural, mechanical and electrical elements as required to facilitate complete and accurate fabrication and installation. Any omissions and discrepancies shall be reported to the Consultant. The Contractor hereby warrants to the Consultant that the drawings will only be used for development of shop drawings/record drawings. The drawings shall not be used for any other project or purpose either by the Contractor or others. The Contractor further warrants not to alter the electronic data or the information contained therein, in any way except for the above noted purposes, and acknowledges that such unauthorized use or alteration of the original work is protected in accordance with the Copyright Act and subject to penalties prescribed therein. The Contractor hereby acknowledges that the said electronic data contain information which may be updated or altered at any time by the Consultant, and that it is the responsibility of the Contractor to make themselves aware of these changes, in a timely manner. In the event of a conflict between the drawings issued to the Contractor and the sealed Contract Drawings, the sealed Contract Drawings shall govern. The Contractor agrees to pay the Consultant $250.00, plus 5% GST for these electronic data. The fees noted are to cover the costs of preparation of the electronic data, and disbursements related to the preparation and shipment/forwarding of the electronic data only. By paying the fees quoted, the Contractor has in no way purchased the drawings or any rights to the drawings or the information contained therein, and the Contractor may only alter the drawings for the purposes noted above. The electronic files will be provided in one of the following formats: AutoCAD rel.14 or AutoCAD 2000. The Consultant makes no representation as to the compatibility of these files with the Contractors hardware or software beyond the specified release of the referenced software. The Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify, defend and hold harmless the Consultant, and its sub-consultants from all claims, damages, losses, expenses, penalties and liabilities for any kind, including attorney's fees, arising out of, or resulting from the use of the electronic data by the Contractor, or by third party recipients of the electronic data from the Contractor. The Consultant believes that no licensing or copyright fees are due to others on account of the transfer of the electronic media, but to the extent any are, the Contractor will pay the appropriate fees and hold the Consultant harmless from such claims. Any purchase order number provided by the Contractor is for Contractor's accounting purposes only. Purchase order terms and conditions are void and are not part of this agreement. The laws of the Province of Ontario shall govern this agreement. The conditions and undertakings expressed wherein apply to partners, employees, agents, successors, assigns and legal or other representatives of the Contractor. Dated at this day of , 20 . Authorized Acceptance by Consultant Signature Print Name and Title Date By Contractor Signature Print Name and Title Date


ELECTRICAL Customer Owned High Voltage Substations Section 16115 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope of Work

.1 Electrical Contractor shall include in tender price to supply and installation of a

new distribution section to the existing outdoor medium voltage (5 kV) metal enclosed switchgear, medium voltage distribution system and entire low voltage distribution system as shown on plans.

.2 Electrical Contractor shall include in tender price to engage S & C Electric company for all required on-site modifications to existing outdoor medium voltage metal enclosed switchgear and provide all required labels, and test reports as specified in other sections of this specification.

.3 Electrical Contractor shall include in tender price for ESA site inspections, Halton Hills Hydro charges, permits and fees and all other co-ordination works with the owner, consultants and authorities.

.4 Electrical Contractor shall include in tender price to supply, install test and commission 5 kV medium voltage cable as shown on drawing.

.5 Electrical Contractor shall include in Cash Allowance to conduct a Ground Potential Rise (GPR) analysis covering entire existing medium and high voltage systems up to the 44 kV Hydro pole and do the required modifications.

.6 Electrical Contractor shall include in tender price all the charges for Consultant and the Owner to witness factory tests for medium voltage metal enclosed switchgear.

.7 Electrical Contractor shall include in tender price to submit all inspection reports for final Consultant approval.

.8 Electrical Contractor shall include in tender price to supply electronic copies of as-built drawings.

.9 Electrical Contractor shall include in tender price charges for power shut-down(s) by Halton Hills Hydro.

.10 Electrical Contractor shall include in tender price to supply and install integral load break switch, medium voltage transformer and 600 Volt distribution Panel in new Electrical Room as shown on plans.

.11 Electrical Contractor shall include in tender price to extend and supply power to the space heater in new bay of the medium voltage switchgear.


ELECTRICAL Customer Owned High Voltage Substations Section 16115 Project No. 09019 Page 2 1.2 Submittals

.1 Manufacture of Equipment - Drawing Approval: Manufacture of equipment

should not start until all drawings and information have been reviewed by Group Eight Engineering and Halton Hills Hydro.

.2 Inspection of Equipment Prior to Shipment: Group Eight Engineering and Halton Hills Hydro reserve the right to inspect the completed equipment at the manufacturer's plant prior to shipment.

.3 Compliance with Requirements: When the installation of the switchgear has been completed, the customer shall utilize a qualified testing agency and subject the switchgear to a Dielectric Strength Test. The voltage applied shall be 75% of the factory test voltage in accordance with clause 8.6.1 of CSA Standard C22.2 No. 31 "Switchgear Assemblies". Group Eight Engineering and Halton Hills Hydro shall witness the testing of the switchgear by the qualified testing agency during normal working hours. Notice of witness testing date shall be submitted to Group Eight Engineering and Halton Hills Hydro at least 2 weeks in advance. A test report certified by a Professional Engineer shall be submitted for approval before the energization of switchgear.

.4 Additional Dielectric Strength Tests: Should the switchgear fail to pass the Dielectric Strength Test, the Customer shall make the necessary modifications and a further dielectric test shall be performed.

.5 Dual Locks: A u-bolt dual locking facility is required on the operating handle of the incoming switchgear to allow locking in the open or closed position. Either Halton Hills Hydro or the Customer can open the lock. The Customer must consult Halton Hills Hydro before any closing operations.

.6 Pre-Service Inspection Report and Final Connection: A pre-service inspection report shall be submitted to Group Eight Engineering and Halton Hills Hydro for approval prior to final connection of supply to Customer substation. Group Eight Engineering and Halton Hills Hydro reserve the right to carry out additional inspections. A Connection Authorization from the Electrical Safety Authority (ESA) is required prior to final supply connection. The pre-service inspection report shall include the following items and shall have a conclusion on whether or not the substation is satisfactory for energization. .1 As Constructed Drawings:

.1 The pre-service inspection contractor shall have a Professional Engineer certify that the Customer's installation was completed in accordance with the original drawings that were reviewed by Group Eight Engineering and return a set each of these drawings to Group Eight Engineering and Halton Hills Hydro to keep on file as "As Constructed" drawings. The drawings to be certified must be original, photocopies are not acceptable.


ELECTRICAL Customer Owned High Voltage Substations Section 16115 Project No. 09019 Page 3

.2 Cable Tests Requirements: .1 The following cable tests shall be certified by a Professional

Engineer: .1 Medium Voltage Cable Test Requirements.

.2 DC Hi-pot test shall be carried out as shown on

attachment.

1.3 Drawings & Information Required for Review .1 Protective Device Co-Ordination and Arc Flash Study: Provide a complete

short circuit study, protective device interrupting capacity evaluation, arc flash and protective device co-ordination study for the entire electrical distribution systems up to and including: .1 44 kV fuse .2 Medium Voltage distribution system .3 Low voltage new and existing distribution systems

1.4 Outdoor Substation Requirements .1 The Electrical Contractor shall not make any changes to the fence and gates.

Electrical Contractor shall check whether the following requirements are satisfied before the installation of new switchgear.

.2 Fence & Gates: .1 Guarding of Electrical Equipment:

.1 All outdoor substations shall be surrounded by guarding fence and gates in accordance with OESC Rule 26-302 to 26-324 and Section 8.6.

.2 Height of Fence: .1 The fence, excluding barbed wire, shall not be less than 1.8m

high.

.3 Barbed Wire: .1 The fence shall be topped with not less than three strands of

barbed wire.

.4 Gates: .1 Gates shall preferably open outwardly but, if it is necessary that

they open inwardly, they shall not come into contact with the frame or enclosure of any electrical equipment when fully opened; a clear passageway at least 0.9 m wide and 2.2 m high shall be maintained to ensure safe egress.



.2 Double gates with center stops shall be used where the width of opening exceeds 1.5 m.

.3 All gates shall have security provision for accepting both Customer and Halton Hills Hydro padlocks; also, "High-Voltage Warning" signs shall be affixed to them.

.5 Grounding: Substation grounding shall meet the requirements of Ontario Electrical Safety Code, 36-300 to 36-312.

.3 Safe Working Space: .1 Safe working space in vicinity of service entrance equipment including

metering shall be in accordance with the Ontario Electrical Safety Code Rule 2-308 and shall include the following: .1 Working Space About Equipment:

.1 A minimum working space of 1.0m with secure footing shall be provided and maintained about electrical equipment such as switchboards, panel boards, control panels and motor control centres which are enclosed in metal, except that working space is not required behind such equipment where there are no renewable parts such as fuses or switches on the back and where all connections are accessible from locations other than the back.

.2 The space referred to in .1 above shall be in addition to the space required for the operation of draw-out type equipment in either the connected, test, or fully disconnected position and shall be sufficient for the opening of enclosure doors and hinged panels to at least 90°.

.3 Working space with secure footing not less than that specified in Table 56 of Ontario Electrical Safety Code - Minimum Working Space About Electrical Equipment Having Exposed Live Parts, shall be provided and maintained about electrical equipment such as switchboards, control panels and motor control centres having exposed live parts.

.4 The minimum headroom of working space about switchboards or motor control centres where bare live parts are exposed at any time shall be 2.2 m.



.2 Minimum Space Requirement: .1 A minimum of 1.5 m shall be provided in front of all doors

giving access to switchgear components and where Halton Hills Hydro is required to work.

.3 Side or Rear Access Panels: .1 Where removable side or rear access panels are required,

a minimum working space of 0.9 m with 2.2 m clear headroom shall be maintained.

.4 Aisle Space: .1 A clear passageway at least 0.9 m wide and 2.2 m high

shall be maintained as an exit route from all service entrance equipment. This headroom must also be maintained in the working space in the vicinity of the service entrance equipment.

.5 Blocking of Exit Route: .1 Where the compartment hinged doors or draw-out

components would block the exit route then a clear minimum space of 0.6 m must be maintained from the edge of the access door or components in the fully open position.

.6 Accessibility for Maintenance: .1 Passageways and working space around electrical

equipment shall not be used for storage and shall be kept clear of obstruction and so arranged as to give authorized persons ready access to all parts requiring attention in accordance with Ontario Electrical Safety Code Rule 2-312.

.7 Access to Substation by Halton Hills Hydro: .1 Immediate access to the substation must be provided on a

24-hour basis for Halton Hills Hydro personnel. A door equipped with a Halton Hills Hydro lock, giving direct access to the substation from the outside (e.g. street) shall be provided where practicable. Alternatively, the doors along the route leading to the substation must be equipped with Halton Hills Hydro locks. Entrance and exit requirements must satisfy OESC Section 2-310.

.8 Single Line Diagram: .1 The Contractor shall provide and post mount the revised,

complete single line diagrams of good quality print on a wall in both Electrical Rooms for reference.

Customer Owned High Voltage Substations Section 16115 Project No. 09019 Page 6

Customer Owned High Voltage Substations Section 16115 Project No. 09019 Page 7


ELECTRICAL Panelboards - Breaker Type Section 16230 Project No. 09019 Page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Shop Drawings .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 16010.

.2 Drawings to include electrical detail of panel, branch breaker type, quantity,

ampacity and enclosure dimension.

1.2 Plant Assembly .1 Install circuit breakers in panelboards before shipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Panelboards

.1 Panelboards: to CSA C22.2 No. 29. Loadcentres are not acceptable.

.2 Panelboards to be product of one manufacturer.

.3 Enclosures: CSA Type (2).

.4 250V Panelboards: Bus and breakers rated for minimum 10 kA RMS

symmetrical interrupting capacity or as indicated on drawings.

.5 Sequence phase bussing with odd-numbered breakers on left and even on right, with each breaker identified by permanent number identification as to circuit number.

.6 Panelboards: Mains, number of circuits and number and size of branch circuit breakers as indicated.

.7 Two keys for each panelboard and key panelboards alike.

.8 Copper bus with full-size neutral. Mains suitable for bolt-on breakers i.e. shipped to site, drilled and tapped at each circuit position ready for breaker installation.

.9 Finish trim and door baked grey enamel. Use same finish on surface panel tubs.

.10 Double stack panels with two hinged locking doors for panelboards with over 42 single pole circuit positions.

.11 Isolated neutral bus and isolated ground bus, as indicated.



.12 Surface mounted panels shall be provided with sprinkler proof hoods.

.13 Recessed panels to be maximum 4-1/2" deep.

.14 Hinged locking doors.

2.2 Science Lab Panels .1 Oversized tub and trim.

.2 Integral "ON" indicator neon pilot light (green).

.3 Mechanically held contactor above complete with key lock "close" pushbutton

and conventional "open" pushbutton located at approximately 1800 mm (6") above the floor.

.4 Remote positioned flush enclosure mushroom head pushbutton "Stop" complete with nameplate at each exit door and at location closest to major equipment.

.5 "Power Off for Emergency Use Only" pushbutton 2 PST so activation of pushbutton will initiate a sealed in alarm. Adjustable volume horn (Edwards 340A) and adjacent positioned "reset" button. Keyed access to energize the panelboard (key removable) and normal de-energizing by the integral "open" pushbutton or by the mushroom head pushbutton. The activation of the mushroom head pushbutton will initiate an alarm.

.6 Control features as indicated on typical control schematics.

2.3 IER Rated Design

.1 120/208V Panelboards: Breakers in Panels DP-2 shall be IER rated such that sub-panels fed from this panel can use standard 10 kA rated breakers.

.2 Proof of IER Rated Design: .1 Successful bidder of Panelboards shall indicate on the Panel Shop

Drawings that the complete system is CSA approved for IER rating.

.2 All Panels shall be labelled and marked on accordance with CSA Standards and Westinghouse IER Application Handbook 20-1773 (Rev. C).

2.4 Breakers

.1 Breakers to Section 16240.



.2 Lock-on devices for: .1 Fire Alarm .2 Clock Outlets .3 Exit and Night Light Circuits .4 All Computer Receptacle Circuits .5 Telephone System .6 Intercom/Paging System .7 Master Clock System .8 Security System .9 Hearing Impaired Loop System .10 Gymnasium/Stage Sound System .11 Computer System .12 Emergency Lighting System .13 Other systems as indicated in the drawings

2.5 Panelboard Identification

.1 Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16010.

.2 Nameplate for each panelboard.

.3 Nameplate for each circuit in distribution panelboards.

.4 Three (3) complete circuit directories with typewritten legend showing location by

final room number and load (lighting, receptacles, equipment) of each circuit.

2.6 Approved Equal Manufacturers .1 GE General Electric .2 Square 'D' Company .3 Eaton Cutler-Hammer Canada Ltd. .4 Siemens Canada

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation .1 Locate panelboards flush mounted as indicated and mount securely, plumb true

and square, to adjoining surfaces. Where panels are grouped, mounted so that tops of all panels are same height.

.2 Install surface-mounted panelboards on plywood backboards. Where practical, group panelboards on common backboard.



.3 Mount panelboards to height given in Section 16010 or as indicated.

.4 Connect loads to circuits as indicated.

.5 Connect neutral conductors to common neutral bus with respective neutral identified.

.6 In corridors where panels are grouped, top of panels to be mounted at the same height.


ELECTRICAL Moulded Case Circuit Breakers Section 16240 Project No. 09019 Page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Product Data .1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 16010.

.2 Include time-current characteristic curves for breakers with ampacity of 225A and

over or with interrupting capacity of 22,000 symmetrical (RMS) and over at system voltage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Breakers - General .1 Bolt-on moulded case circuit breaker, full module (i.e. 1" minimum width), quick-

make, quick-break type, for manual and automatic operation with temperature compensation for 40°C ambient.

.2 Common-trip breakers with single handle for multi-pole applications.

.3 Magnetic instantaneous trip elements in circuit breakers, to operate only when the value of current reaches setting. Trip settings on breakers with adjustable trips to range from 3 to 10 times current rating.

.4 Circuit breakers with interchangeable trips as indicated.

.5 Ground fault circuit interrupter breakers as indicated.

.6 Switching duty type breakers marked 'SWD' for 15A and 20A breakers used for switching H.I.D. and fluorescent luminaires.

2.2 Thermal Magnetic Breakers .1 Moulded case circuit breaker to operate automatically by means of thermal and

magnetic tripping devices to provide inverse time current tripping under overload conditions and instantaneous magnetic tripping for short circuit protection.

2.3 Solid State Trip Breakers .1 Breakers with ratings of 200A and over shall be complete with solid state trip

units and field adjustable rating plug.


ELECTRICAL Moulded Case Circuit Breakers Section 16240 Project No. 09019 Page 2

.2 Moulded case circuit breaker to operate by means of a solid-state trip unit with associated current monitors and self-powered shunt trip to provide inverse time current trip under overload condition, and long time, short time, instantaneous tripping for phase and ground fault short circuit protection as indicated.

2.4 Enclosure .1 Enclosures for individually mounted breakers in service areas shall be EEMAC

sprinkler-proof type.

2.5 Optional Features .1 Incorporate the following features as indicated:

.1 Shunt trip .2 Auxiliary switch .3 Motor operated mechanism .4 Under voltage release .5 On/Off locking device .6 Duty switching breakers

2.6 Approved Equal Manufacturers .1 Eaton Cutler-Hammer Canada Ltd. .2 FPL .3 Siemens Canada .4 Square 'D' Company

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation .1 Install circuit breakers as indicated.


ELECTRICAL Contactors Section 16245 Project No. 09019 Page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Work Specified Elsewhere .1 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers: Section 16240 .2 Fused Disconnects: Section 16255

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Contactors .1 Contactors to CSA C22.2 No. 14 and EEMAC No. ICS.

.2 Electrically-held, controlled by pilot devices as indicated and rated for type of

load controlled. Half size contactors not acceptable.

.3 Combination-type contactors (full voltage combination magnetic starter less overloads) shall be complete with a breaker (disconnect).

.4 Two N.O. and two N.C. auxiliary contacts unless otherwise indicated.

.5 Mount in CSA enclosure one (1) unless otherwise indicated.

.6 Include control devices in cover of type indicated on drawings.

.7 Control Transformer: Single phase, dry-type with primary voltage indicated and 120 Volt secondary complete with secondary fuse, all installed in contactor enclosure. Size for control circuit load plus 20% spare.

.8 Include the following options in cover: .1 Indicating Lamp (Red) .2 Stop/Start Pushbutton .3 Hand/Off/Auto Selector Switch .4 On/Off Selector Switch

2.2 Equipment Identification .1 Lamacoid nameplates in accordance with Section 16010 indicating name of load

controlled.


ELECTRICAL Contactors Section 16245 Project No. 09019 Page 2

2.3 Approved Equal Manufacturers .1 Westinghouse Canada Inc. .2 Klockner & Moeller .3 Square 'D' Company Ltd. .4 Allen-Bradley Canada Co. .5 Siemens Canada Ltd. .6 Eaton Cutler Hammer Canada Ltd. .7 Canadian General Electric

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation .1 Install contactors and connect auxiliary control devices as indicated.


ELECTRICAL Disconnect Switches - Fused & Non-Fused Section 16255 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Product Data

.1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 16010. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Equipment

.1 Enclosed manual air break switches in non-hazardous locations: To CSA C22.2 No. 4.

.2 Fuseholder assemblies to CSA C22.2 No. 39.

.3 Fusible and non-fusible disconnect switches as indicated.

.4 Provision for padlocking in on/off switch position by three locks.

.5 Mechanically-interlocked door to prevent opening when handle in "ON" position.

.6 Fuses as indicated in accordance with Section 16260.

.7 Fuseholders in each switch suitable without adaptors, for type of fuse as

indicated.

.8 Quick-make, quick-break action.

.9 On/Off switch position indication on switch enclosure cover.

.10 CSA Enclosure 1 unless noted otherwise. .11 Electrical auxiliary interlock contacts for all elevator disconnect switches.

Confirm with elevator supplier whether contacts are to be normally open or normally closed.

.12 Horsepower rating.

.13 Dual element motor protection pulse capability.

.14 Code fuse rejection feature.

2.2 Equipment Identification

.1 Indicate name of load controlled as required in Section 16010.


ELECTRICAL Disconnect Switches - Fused & Non-Fused Section 16255 Project No. 09019 Page 2 2.3 Manufacturers

.1 Base Bid: Square 'D' Company

.2 Alternate Equipment:

.1 Federal Pioneer Limited

.2 Siemens

.3 Canadian General Electrical

.4 Eaton Cutler-Hammer

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation .1 Install disconnect switches complete with fuses as indicated.

.2 Applications shall be limited to the following:

.1 Motorized equipment .2 Code conforming disconnect devices .3 Small splitter distribution


ELECTRICAL Fuses Section 16260 Project No. 09019 Page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Spare Fuses .1 Provide three (3) spare fuses of each type and size installed up to and including

600A.

.2 Provide three (3) spare fuses of each type and size installed above 600A.

1.2 Delivery & Storage .1 Ship fuses in original containers.

.2 Store fuses in original containers in moisture-free location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Fuses - General .1 HRC Fuses: To CSA C22.2, No. 106-M1985 to have interrupting capability of

200,000A symmetrical.

.2 Fuses: Product of one manufacturer.

2.2 Fuse Types .1 Ratings of 1 to 600 Amperes: CSA HRCI-J (non time delay).

.2 Ratings of 601 to 6000 Amperes: CSA HRC-L (non time delay).

.3 Time delay fuses (where indicated on drawings) shall carry 500% of rated current

for 10 seconds minimum and be clearly labelled "Time Delay". .1 1-600A: HRCI-J (time delay) .2 601-6000A: HRC-L (time delay)

2.3 Approved Manufacturers .1 Bussman Manufacturing .2 Gould-Shawmut Company .3 Federal Pioneer


ELECTRICAL Fuses Section 16260 Project No. 09019 Page 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation .1 Install fuses in mounting devices immediately before energizing circuits.

.2 Ensure correct fuses fitted to physically-matched mounting devices.

.3 Ensure correct fuses to assigned electrical circuit.


ELECTRICAL Basic Materials & Methods Section 16300 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General Requirements

.1 Conform to General Provisions, Section 16010 PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTION as detailed in the following Sections: Section Index 16301 Conductors 16304 Armoured Cables 16310 Fastenings & Supports 16315 Wire & Box Connectors, 0-1000V 16320 Conduit 16330 Busways 16347 Medium-Voltage Metal Enclosed Switchgear 16350 Surface Raceway Systems 16355 Wireways & Auxiliary Gutters 16365 Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes & Cabinets 16375 Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes & Fittings 16380 Wiring Devices 16381 Occupancy & Daylight Sensor Lighting Control Devices


ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS Conductors Section 16301 Project No. 09019 Page 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Conductors .1 All conductors shall be copper unless indicated otherwise.

.2 Conductors #10 AWG and smaller shall be solid. Conductors #8 and larger shall

be stranded.

.3 Conductors shall be sized #12 AWG minimum, except for control circuits where #14 AWG minimum size is permitted. Feeder sizes as indicated.

.4 Size conductors for a 2% maximum voltage drop from overcurrent device to farthest outlet.

.5 Conductor insulation rated for 600V minimum unless stated otherwise, -40°C rating for outdoor wiring.

.6 Conductor types: .1 TW75, TWU to CSA #C22.2 No. 75 .2 RW90, RWU90 (XLPE) to CSA #C22.2 No. 38 .3 THHN/T90 to CSA #C22.2 No. 75 .4 TEW (105°C), GTF (125°C) to CSA #C22.2 No. 127

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Uses

.1 Branch Circuit Wiring (#12, #10 AWG):

.1 THHN/T90, RW90 (XLPE) - inside building. .2 TWU, RWU90 (XLPE) - conductors in rigid PVC conduit outside building. .3 Use #12AWG for: 120V, 15A-1P circuit runs up to 18 m (60'). .4 Use #12AWG for: 347V, 15A-1P circuit runs up to 50 m (165') .5 Use #10AWG for circuit runs whose total length is in excess of those

stated above.

Note: Distances are actual conductor lengths from overcurrent device to farthest outlet.

.2 Branch Circuit Wiring and Feeders (#8 AWG and Larger):

.1 RW90 (XLPE) - inside building. .2 RWU90 (XLPE) - conductors in rigid PVC conduit outside building.


ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS Conductors Section 16301 Project No. 09019 Page 2

.3 Motor Control Circuits: .1 RW90 (XLPE), or THHN/T90.

.4 Wiring running through lighting fixtures or raceways that form a part of fixtures or

that run between remotely mounted H.I.D. lamp ballasts and lighting units: TEW (105°C) or GTF (125°C).

.5 Fire Alarm System Wiring: .1 RW90, or THHN/T90.

3.2 Installation .1 Install wiring, as follows:

.1 In conduit systems in accordance with Section 16320. .2 In surface raceways in accordance with Section 16350. .3 In wireways and auxiliary gutters in accordance with Section 16355. .4 Exposed in ceiling space above drop ceilings for communication systems

wiring. Wiring shall be FT6 rated. .1 Run wiring in EMT from wall-mounted outlet to ceiling space and

then run exposed.

.2 Neatly and tightly support exposed conductors/cables from ceiling structure above dropped ceiling using plastic cable clips. Run parallel to walls and/or across steel structure.


ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS Armoured Cables Section 16304 Project No. 09019 Page 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Armoured Cables .1 To CSA C22.2, No. 51

.2 Type AC90, RW90, XLPE, copper conductors, sizes as indicated complete with

separate ground wire.

.3 Armour: Interlocking type fabricated from aluminum strip.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation .1 Cable is restricted to and permitted for use only in the following cases:

.1 Light fixture connections to a maximum of 5' (1500 mm).

.2 Terminate cables in accordance with Section 16315.


ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS Fastenings & Supports Section 16310 Project No. 09019 Page 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Support Channels .1 U-shape, size 41 mm x 41 mm, 2.5 mm thick or as required. Surface-mounted,

suspended or set in poured concrete walls and ceilings as required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation .1 Secure equipment to masonry, tile and plaster surfaces with lead anchors or

nylon shields.

.2 Secure equipment to poured concrete with expandable inserts.

.3 Secure equipment to hollow masonry walls or suspended ceilings with toggle bolts.

.4 Lighting fixture installation and support methods: to Section 16800.

.5 Support equipment, conduit or cables using clips, spring-loaded bolts, cable clamps designed as accessories to basic channel members.

.6 Fasten exposed conduit or cables to building construction or support system using straps.

.7 Support suspended cables or conduits with threaded rods, spring clips and hangers as required.

.8 Use channels for surface mounting of two or more conduits.

.9 Provide approved corrosion-resistant type brackets, frames, hangers and clamps as required to support conduits and cable runs.

.10 Do not use supports or equipment installed for other trades for conduit or cable support except with written permission of other trade.

.11 Install fastenings and supports as required for each type of equipment cables and conduits, and in accordance with Manufacturer's installation recommendations.


ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS Wire & Box Connectors, 0-1000V Section 16315 Project No. 09019 Page 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Wire & Box Connectors

.1 To CSA C22.2, Nos. 18 and 65.

.2 Pressure type wire connectors with current carrying parts sized to fit conductors as required.

.3 Bushing stud connectors as required.

.4 Clamps or connectors for cables and conduit as required.


ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS Conduit Section 16320 Project No. 09019 Page 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Conduits .1 Rigid, galvanized steel threaded conduit to CSA C22.2, No. 45, size as indicated.

Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4".

.2 Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) with couplings and expanded ends as required, to CSA C22.2, No. 83, size as indicated. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4".

.3 Rigid PVC (unplasticized) conduit for exposed, above ground work, to CSA C22.2, No. 211.2, size as indicated. Minimum conduit size shall be 1".

.4 Rigid PVC conduit, Type DB2 for direct burial or masonry and concrete embedment, to CSA C22.2, No. 211.1, size as indicated.

.5 Flexible metal conduit and liquid-tight flexible metal conduit to CSA C22.2, No. 56.

.6 EMT conduit fittings, i.e. connectors, couplings, to CSA C22.2, No. 18, zinc-plated all steel construction. All connectors and couplings to be set screw type, i.e. concrete tight. For conduit work exposed to weather or wet locations, connectors and couplings to be compression type, i.e. raintight complete with all steel locknuts. All connectors to be complete with insulated bushings.

.7 Weatherproof, waterproof expansion fittings for rigid conduit as required.

.8 Expansion couplings complete with bonding jumper and clamps for all conduits crossing building expansion joints.

.9 Conduit pipe straps to be all steel; one hole straps for conduits 2" (50 mm) or smaller; two hole straps for conduits larger than 2" (50 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation .1 Install conduits to conserve headroom in exposed locations and cause minimum

interference in spaces through which they pass. Do not obstruct ceiling access openings.



.2 Conceal conduits above finished ceilings, below floors or in walls except in Mechanical and Electrical Service Rooms and in unfinished areas. Consider all areas finished unless indicated otherwise.

.3 Conduit sizes shall conform to Electrical Safety Code. Where sizes are indicated and they exceed Code, they shall not be reduced. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4".

.4 Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT) for all wiring unless noted otherwise.

.5 Use rigid, galvanized steel, threaded conduit where conduit is subject to mechanical injury.

.6 Use rigid PVC conduit. Type DB2 underground as indicated. Provide separate ground wire.

.7 Flexible metal conduit complete with separate ground wire is permitted for use for horizontal wiring runs in wood or steel partitions.

.8 Use liquid-tight, flexible metal conduit complete with separate ground wire for final connection to motors.

.9 Install nylon fish wire in empty conduits and terminate under screw leaving 12" (305 mm) slack. Tag fish wire identifying system.

.10 Run 2-1" (25 mm) spare conduits up to ceiling space from each flush panel. Terminate these conduits in 6" x 6" x 4" (152 mm x 152 mm x 102 mm) junction boxes in ceiling space.

.11 A ground wire must be installed in all conduits.

3.2 Surface Conduits .1 Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

.2 Run conduits in flanged portion of structural steel.

.3 Group conduits wherever possible on suspended or surface channels.

.4 Do not pass conduits through structural members except as indicated.

.5 Do not locate conduits less than 3" (75 mm) parallel to steam or hot water lines

with a minimum of 1" (25 mm) at cross-overs.



.6 Do not pass conduits through exit stair shafts unless it is non-combustible and it serves electrical equipment within the stairwell.

3.3 Conduits in Poured Concrete .1 Conduits shall not be used in poured concrete unless specifically indicated on

drawings.

.2 Locate to suit reinforcing steel. Install in centre 1/2 of slab.

.3 Protect conduits from damage where they stub out of concrete.

.4 Install sleeves where conduits pass through slab or wall.

.5 Where conduits pass through waterproof membrane, provide oversized sleeve before membrane is installed. Use cold mastic between sleeve and conduit.

.6 Encase conduits completely in concrete.

3.4 Conduits in Poured Slabs-on-Grade .1 Conduits shall not be used in poured slabs unless specifically indicated on

drawings.

.2 Run conduits 1" (25 mm) and larger below slab.

3.5 Conduits Underground .1 Slope conduits to provide drainage.

.2 Waterproof joints (PVC excepted) with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

3.6 Workmanship .1 Any conduit or cable which is not, in the opinion of the Consultant, installed as

good workmanship would call for, shall be taken out and replaced with no charge to the Contract price.


ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS Medium-Voltage Metal Enclosed Switchgear Section 16347 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope

.1 The Contractor shall furnish and install the equipment as specified herein and as

shown on the contract drawings.

1.2 Related Sections .1 General Provisions: Section 16010 .2 Basic Materials & Methods: Section 16300

1.3 References .1 The medium-voltage metal-enclosed switchgear and all components shall be

designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards, as follows: .1 CSA C22.2 No. 193-M1989 (Interrupter Switch) .2 CSA 22.2 No. 31, M1989 (Switchgear Assemblies) .3 EEMAC G8-2, 1972 (Switchgear Assemblies) .4 ANSI C37.20.3, 1987 (Switchgear Assemblies)

1.4 Submittals - For Review .1 The following information shall be submitted to the Electrical Consultant:

.1 Master drawing index .2 Front view elevation .3 Floor plan .4 Top view .5 Single line .6 Schematic diagram .7 Nameplate schedule .8 Component list .9 Conduit entry/exit locations .10 Assembly ratings including:

.1 Short-circuit rating

.2 Voltage

.3 Continuous current

.4 Basic Impulse level


ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS Medium-Voltage Metal Enclosed Switchgear Section 16347 Project No. 09019 Page 2

.11 Major component ratings including: .1 Voltage .2 Continuous current .3 Interrupting ratings

.12 Cable terminal sizes.

.2 Where applicable the following additional information shall be submitted to the

Electrical Consultant: .1 Busway connection .2 Connection details between close-coupled assemblies .3 Composite floor plan of close-coupled assemblies .4 Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations.

.3 Submit ten (10) copies of the above information.

.4 The following product information shall be submitted:

.1 Descriptive bulletins

.2 Product data sheets.

1.5 Submittals - For Closeout .1 The following information shall be submitted for record purposes:

.1 Final as-built drawings and information for items listed above .2 Wiring diagrams .3 Certified production test reports .4 Installation information including equipment anchorage provisions .5 Seismic certification.

.2 Submit ten (10) copies of the above information.

1.6 Qualifications .1 The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major

components within the assembly.

.2 For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9000, 9001 or 9002 certified.

.3 The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement.


ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS Medium-Voltage Metal Enclosed Switchgear Section 16347 Project No. 09019 Page 3 1.7 Delivery, Storage & Handling

.1 Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment.

.2 Each switchgear assembly shall be split into shipping groups for handling as indicated on the drawings or as the manufacturer's limitations dictate. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail or ship. Shipping groups shall be bolted to skids. Accessories shall be packaged and shipped separately. Each switchgear shipping group shall be equipped with lifting eyes for handling solely by crane.

1.8 Operation & Maintenance Manuals .1 Ten (10) copies of the equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be

provided.

.2 Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information: .1 Instruction books and/or instruction leaflets .2 Recommended renewal parts list .3 Drawings and information listed above.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturers .1 S&C Electric (for outdoor substation) .2 Cutler-Hammer (for indoor unit substation)

2.2 Ratings - Switchgear, Switch & Circuit Breaker .1 The assembly rating shall be as follows:

.1 Voltage - Maximum 4.76 kV

- Nominal 4.16 kV .2 B.I.L. 60 kV .3 Short Circuit Ratings 17,200 Amp (sym) 125 MVA .4 Fault Closing 40,000 Amp (asym) .5 Corona Extinction Voltage to Ground 3.5 kV RMS .6 High Potential Test (one minute at 60 Hz) 19 kV .7 Main Bus (copper) 600 Amp


ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS Medium-Voltage Metal Enclosed Switchgear Section 16347 Project No. 09019 Page 4 2.3 Construction

.1 The metal-enclosed switchgear assembly shall consist of completely metal-

enclosed vertical sections each containing a non-fused load interrupter switch and a medium voltage fuse. Where shown, furnish additional vertical sections containing load interrupter switches and fuses or miscellaneous auxiliary apparatus of the number, rating and type noted on the drawings or specified herein.

.2 The following features shall be supplied on every vertical section containing a three-pole, two-position open-closed switch and vacuum circuit breaker: .1 A high-impact viewing window that permits full view of the position of all

three switch blades through the closed door.

.2 On vertical sections, the door shall be interlocked with the switch so that: .1 The switch must be opened before the door can be opened .2 The door must be closed before the switch can be closed.

.3 A grounded metal barrier in front of every switch to prevent inadvertent

contact with any live part, yet allow for a full-view inspection on the switch blade position.

.4 Provision for padlocking the switch in the open or closed position.

.5 Permanent OPEN-CLOSED switch position indicators.

.3 Vertical section construction shall be of the universal frame type using die-formed and bolted parts. All enclosing covers and doors shall be fabricated from steel whose thickness shall be equal to or greater than those specified in ANSI/IEEE C37.20.3. To facilitate installation and maintenance of cables and bus in each vertical section, a removable top cover and a rear door latched closed by tamper resistant pad-lockable latches] shall be provided.

.4 Each vertical section containing a switch shall have a single, full length, flanged front door and shall be equipped with two rotary latch type pad-lockable handles. Provision shall be made for operating the switch and storing the removable handle without opening the full length door. A nameplate shall be mounted on the front door of each vertical section.

2.4 Bus .1 All buses shall be silver-plated copper.

.2 A neutral bus shall be provided when indicated on the drawings.


ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS Medium-Voltage Metal Enclosed Switchgear Section 16347 Project No. 09019 Page 5 2.5 Wiring/Terminations

.1 One terminal pad per phase shall be provided for attaching Contractor supplied

cable terminal lugs for a maximum of two conductors per phase of the sizes indicated on the drawings. Sufficient space shall be supplied for Contractor supplied electrical stress relief termination devices.

2.6 Outdoor Enclosures .1 Each outdoor vertical section shall have a weatherproof roof. All external

openings shall be screened to prevent the entrance of small animals and barriered to inhibit the entrance of snow, sand, etc. A minimum of one (1) 250 Watt, 120 Volt space heater shall be provided in each vertical section. Power for the space heater(s) shall be furnished as indicated on the drawings. The design shall be non-walk-in type.

2.7 Nameplates .1 A nameplate shall be mounted on the front door of each switch vertical section in

accordance with the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Factory Testing .1 The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the switchgear. All

tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of ANSI and NEMA standards. .1 Factory setting of contact gap .2 One (1) minute dielectric test per ANSI standards .3 Final inspections and quality checks

.2 The following production test shall be performed on the circuit breaker housing:

.1 One (1) minute dielectric test per ANSI standards on primary and

secondary circuits .2 Operation of wiring, relays and other devices verified by an operational

sequence test .3 Final inspection and quality check.

.3 The manufacturer shall provide three (3) certified copies of factory test reports.


ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS Medium-Voltage Metal Enclosed Switchgear Section 16347 Project No. 09019 Page 6

.4 Factory tests as outlined above shall be witnessed by the owner's representative. .1 The manufacturer shall notify the owner two (2) weeks prior to the date

the tests are to be performed.

.2 The manufacturer shall include the cost of transportation and lodging for up to three (3) owner's representatives. The cost of meals and incidental expenses shall be the owner's responsibility.

3.2 Installation .1 The Contractor shall engage the manufacturer for all field modifications and the

entire installation shall be per the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.3 Field Adjustments .1 The relays shall be set in the field by:

.1 A qualified representative of the manufacturer, retained by the Contractor in accordance with settings designated in a coordination study of the system as required elsewhere in the contract documents.

3.4 Manufacturer's Certification .1 A qualified factory-trained manufacturer's representative shall certify in writing

that the equipment has been installed, adjusted and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

.2 The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification.

3.5 Training .1 The Contractor shall provide a training session for up to three (3) owner's

representative(s) for one (1) normal workday at a jobsite location determined by the owner.

.2 The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative and consist of instruction on the assembly of switches, circuit breaker(s), protective devices, and other major components.


ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS Surface Raceway Systems Section 16350 Project No. 09019 Page 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Surface Raceway System (Wiring Pulled In) .1 To CSA C22.2, No. 62.

.2 One-piece steel assembly free of sharp edges manufactured so that wiring is

pulled into raceway.

.3 Corners, pull boxes, elbows, tees, two-piece assembly to facilitate site wiring.

.4 Cross-section dimensions as indicated.

.5 Finish: Buff enamel.

.6 Necessary switch, receptacle, extension boxes, adapters and utility fittings required for complete installation.

.7 Approved Equal Manufacturers: .1 Wiremold (Nepco) .2 H. K. Porter Co. Ltd.

2.2 Surface Raceway System (Wiring Laid In) .1 To CSA C22.2. No. 62.

.2 Two-piece steel assembly manufactured as lay-in type raceway.

.3 Cross-section dimensions as indicated.

.4 Finish: Buff enamel.

.5 Elbows, tees, couplings and hanger fittings as required for a complete system.

.6 Approved Equal Manufacturers

.1 Wiremold (Nepco)

.2 H. K. Porter Co. Ltd.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation .1 Install raceways as indicated, before installation of wiring. Install covers for

raceways and fittings after installation of wiring.


ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS Surface Raceway Systems Section 16350 Project No. 09019 Page 2

.2 Install supports, elbows, tees, connectors, fittings, bushings, adaptors as required and as indicated.

.3 Keep number of elbows, offsets, connections to minimum.

.4 Use wiring with mechanical protection in channel raceways.

.5 Install barriers in raceways where different voltage systems are indicated.


ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS Wireways & Auxiliary Gutters Section 16355 Project No. 09019 Page 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Wireways .1 To CSA C22.2 No. 26.

.2 Sheet Steel with hinged (bolted) cover to give uninterrupted access.

.3 Cross-section dimensions: 2-1/2" (63 mm) square and 4" (100 mm) square

and 6" (150 mm) square, as indicated.

.4 Finish: baked grey enamel.

.5 Elbows, tees, couplings and hanger fittings manufactured as accessories to wireway supplied for a complete system.

.6 Approved Manufacturers .1 Square 'D' Company .2 Bel Incorporated .3 W.C. Pursley Limited

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation .1 Install wireways and auxiliary gutters as indicated.

.2 Keep number of elbows, offsets, connections to a minimum.

.3 Install supports, elbows, tees, connectors, fittings.

.4 Install barriers where required.

.5 Install gutter to full length of equipment.


ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes & Cabinets Section 16365 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Splitters

.1 To CSA C22.2, No. 76.

.2 Sheet metal enclosure, welded corners and formed hinged cover suitable for

locking in closed position.

.3 Main and branch lugs or connection bars as required to match required size and number of incoming and outgoing conductors as indicated.

.4 At least three spare terminals on each set of lugs in splitters less than 400A.

2.2 Junction & Pull Boxes .1 Welded steel construction wire screw-on flat covers for surface mounting.

.2 Covers with 1" (25 mm) minimum extension all around, for flush-mounted pull

and junction boxes.

2.3 Cabinets .1 Type E: Sheet steel, hinged door and return flange overlapping sides, handle,

lock and catch, for surface mounting.

.2 Type T: Sheet steel cabinet with hinged door, latch, lock, 2 keys, containing [3/4" (19 mm) plywood] [sheet steel] backboard for surface (flush) mounting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Splitter Installation .1 Install splitters as indicated and mount plumb, true and square to the building

lines.

.2 Extend splitters full length of equipment arrangement except where indicated otherwise.


ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes & Cabinets Section 16365 Project No. 09019 Page 2 3.2 Junction, Pull Boxes & Cabinets Installation

.1 Install pull boxes in conduit runs so as not to exceed 30 m of conduit run or the

equivalent of two (2) 90° bends between pull boxes.

.2 Install junction and pull boxes in inconspicuous but accessible locations, i.e. Mechanical, Electrical or Janitor's Rooms, accessible ceiling spaces.

.3 Provide lockable ceiling access panels if boxes are installed in inaccessible ceiling spaces.

.4 Co-ordinate locations of boxes with other trades so as not to restrict access to or obstruct equipment installed by either division or restrict access to or obstruct box.

3.3 Identification .1 Install lamacoid nameplates indicating system name voltage and phase in

accordance with Section 16010.


ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes & Fittings Section 16375 Project No. 09019 Page 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Outlet & Conduit Boxes .1 All lighting fixtures, receptacles and other wiring devices for any conduit system

shown shall be provided with an outlet box.

.2 Outlet boxes installed outside building and/or in damp locations, shall be "FS" weatherproof type; if in direct contact with the ground, they shall be made of cast aluminum alloy.

.3 All areas shall be considered finished areas unless indicated otherwise.

.4 Boxes in damp locations shall be installed flush in wall and shall be of die-cast aluminum with threaded hubs.

.5 Where boxes are surface mounted, such boxes shall be cast "FS" feraloy or aluminum type boxes.

.6 All flush outlet boxes shall be manufactured of galvanized steel unless specified otherwise, and shall be sized for the number of wires entering box as required by Code.

.7 4" (102 mm) octagon or square outlet boxes or larger, complete with fittings for lighting fixtures and as required for special devices.

.8 Wall outlet boxes shall be: .1 No. 1104 Series, flush mounted in drywall partitions. .2 MBS Series masonry boxes (galvanized steel) flush mounted in masonry

walls (block walls).

.9 Gang boxes shall be used at locations where devices are grouped. Provide barriers as required.

.10 Blank coverplates for boxes without wiring devices.

.11 Floor boxes shall be fully adjustable, flush, floor, cast iron, shallow or deep to suit.


ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes & Fittings Section 16375 Project No. 09019 Page 2

2.2 Service Fittings .1 Pedestal type 'high tension' receptacle fitting made of 2-piece stainless steel (die-

cast aluminum) with brushed aluminum (satin aluminum) housing finish for one single (one duplex) (two duplex) receptacles as indicated. Bottom plate with two knockouts for centred or offset installation.

.2 Pedestal type 'low tension' fitting made of 2-piece stainless steel (die cast aluminum) with brushed aluminum (satin aluminum) housing finish to accommodate one (two) amphenol jack connectors as indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Outlet & Conduit Boxes .1 Support boxes independently of connecting conduits.

.2 Fill boxes with paper, sponges or foam or similar approved material to prevent

entry of construction material.

.3 For flush installations mount outlets flush with finished wall using plaster rings to permit wall finish to come within 1/4" (6 mm) of opening.

.4 For flush installation in exposed concrete block, cut openings to provide a close fit to boxes and covers so that edges of openings are not visible after installation of plates.

.5 Provide correct size of openings in boxes for conduit, mineral insulated and armoured cable connections. Reducing washers not allowed.


ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS Wiring Devices Section 16380 Project No. 09019 Page 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Wiring Devices .1 Supply and install wiring devices as indicated complete with coverplates.

.2 Switches: Manually operated, general purpose, AC, specification grade, totally

enclosed body, rated 120V as noted, 20 amperes minimum or as required by circuit complete with brown toggle.

.3 Switches of one manufacturer throughout project.

.4 Approved Manufacturers - Switches: 120V .1 Single Pole - Arrow Hart #1991

- Leviton #1221 - Pass & Seymour #20AC1 - Hubbell #1221

.2 Three-Way - Arrow Hart #1993 - Leviton #1223 - Pass & Seymour #20AC3 - Hubbell #1223

.3 Four-Way - Arrow Hart #1994 - Leviton #1224 - Pass & Seymour #20AC4 - Hubbell #1224

.4 Double Pole - Arrow Hart #1992 - Leviton #1222 - Pass & Seymour #20AC2 - Hubbell #1222

.5 Dimmer Switches: Lutron (Nova) #N-600, #N-1000, #N-1500 as required.

.6 Receptacles: 3 wire, U-ground type, premium specification grade complete with screw-type terminals, double wipe contacts, riveted ground contacts, break-off links for split receptacles and brown moulded housing.

.7 Receptacles of one manufacturer throughout project.

.8 Other receptacles with ampacity and voltage as indicated.

.9 Approved Manufacturers - Receptacles:



.1 15A, 125V, - Arrow Hart #5261AH (5-15R) Single - Leviton #5261 - Hubbell #5261 - Pass & Seymour #5261

.2 15A, 125V, - Arrow Hart #5262AH (5-15R) Duplex - Leviton #5262 - Hubbell #5262 - Pass & Seymour #5262

.3 20A, 125V, - Arrow Hart #5361AH (5-20R) Single - Leviton #5361 - Hubbell #6331 - Pass & Seymour #5361

.4 20A, 125V, - Arrow Hart #5392AH

(5-20R) Duplex - Leviton #5362 - Hubbell #5392 - Pass & Seymour #5362

.5 30A, 125V, - Arrow Hart #5716N (5-30R) Single - Leviton #5371 - Hubbell #9308 - Pass & Seymour #5920

.6 15A, 125V, - Arrow Hart #GF5242AH (5-15R) GFCI Duplex - Leviton #6599 - Hubbell #GF-5252 - Pass & Seymour #1591

.7 15A, 125V, (5-15R) - Arrow Hart #IG5262AH Isolated Ground - Leviton #5262-IG Duplex - Hubbell #IG-5262 - Pass & Seymour #IG6200

.8 30A, 125/250V, - Arrow Hart #5744N (14-30R) - Leviton #278/801 - Hubbell #9430 - Pass & Seymour #5744

.9 50A, 125/250V, - Arrow Hart #5754AN (14-50R) - Leviton #279/801 - Hubbell #9450 - Pass & Seymour #5754



.10 Clock Hanger Outlets: .1 15A, 125V, 3 wire, U-ground type, single recessed receptacles complete

with stainless steel coverplate, fitted with a hook hanger.

.2 Approved Equal Manufacturers: .1 Arrow Hart #5708 .2 Leviton #5261-CH .3 Pass & Seymour #2123

.11 Exterior Lighting Control:

.1 Provide 4-pole contactor 30 Amp, Photo-electric outdoor sensor and 7-day 24-hour time switch control, 3 circuit. Model Tork T900 series complete with Model 2101 photocell or approved equal.

.12 Hand Dryers: .1 Installation in existing walls - recessed mounted Nova No. 4 Model 0712.

Installation in existing walls - surface mounted Nova No. 4 Model 0412. White unit, 20 Amp, 120 Volt, 1∅, 1800 Watt complete with fixed nozzle and heavy duty vandal-resistant grille. Mount 3'-8" (1.16m) A.F.F. to bottom of unit. Panelboard 20A-1P breaker to be GFI ground fault type.

.13 Typical Computer Lab V4000 Wiremold: For each 18'-0" length of wiremold per respective room this electrical contractor to provide the following: .1 Electrical receptacles should be in top V4000 channel and horizontal.

.2 ACO (Amp Communications Outlet) dual port data jack is installed in the

bottom of every alternate plate. Electrical data plate part #CV4048BF-OL. Three (3) additional CV4048 plates (for a total of six) to be installed for future data outlets with knockouts intact. Therefore there will be a total of six (6) CV4048BF-OL plates, three with ACO jacks and three with knockouts.

.3 Electrical Wiring: Three (3) receptacles per circuit or as indicated on drawings. All circuits to have separate neutral. Each circuit conductor and its neutral must be twisted a minimum of three times per foot in V4000.

.4 Third circuit shown on plan to be spare unless noted otherwise.

.5 Mount wiremold raceway 900 A.F.F. to top of V4000 raceway.

.14 Service Floor Monument (Recessed): 20A, 125V, grounded, complete with two (2) RJ45 data jacks, stainless steel cover. Walker #S265 Series.

.15 Coverplates: .1 Coverplates for wiring devices.



.2 Coverplates from one manufacturer throughout project.

.3 Sheet steel utility box cover for wiring devices installed in surface-mounted utility boxes.

.4 Stainless steel, brushed, 0.040" (1 mm) thick coverplates for wiring devices mounted in a flush-mounted outlet box.

.5 Exact fitting sheet metal (cast) coverplates for wiring devices mounted in surface-mounted FS or FD type conduit boxes.

.6 Weatherproof double lift spring-loaded cast aluminum coverplates, complete with gaskets weatherproof receptacles as indicated.

2.2 Indoor Service Poles .1 General: Provide indoor service pole system to extend branch circuit wiring and

data network, voice, video and other communication cabling to points of use shown on the Drawings. System shall consist of pole multi-outlet assemblies, and appropriate fittings and accessories as required for a complete assembly. Provide the following: .1 Trade Reference: Tele-Power Pole Multi-Outlet Assembly by The

Wiremold Company. .2 Material: Aluminum with clear anodized finish. .3 Length(s): As required by project conditions, including:

[Select from the following manufactured sizes] .1 10 feet 2 inches .2 10 feet 5 inches .3 12 feet 5 inches .4 12 feet 8 inches .5 15 feet 2 inches .6 15 feet 5 inches

.2 Classification and Use: Tele-Power Poles shall be suitable for use in dry

interior locations, only as covered in Articles 353 and 352 Part A of the National Electrical Code, as adopted by the National Fire Protection Association and as approved by the American National Standards Institute. The Tele-Power Poles shall be UL Listed under File Nos. E15191 Guide PVGT, E53857 Guide PVUR, E41751 Guide RJPR, and E169069 Guide ZTFR; also CUL Listed in the above files, or are CSA Certified in File LR350.

.3 First Compartment: One compartment shall be factory wired with two duplex styles 20A, 125v NEMA 5-20R grounding-type specification grade receptacles and matching pole color and finish.



.4 Second Compartment: Suitable for field installation of telephone or data network cabling. Provide removable cover section at compartment bottom to assemble and mount communications connectors. Section shall be removable without dismantling or removing the Tele-Power Pole after installation. The cover section shall have six knockouts for modular voice-data jacks (RJ-type) and a rectangular knockout for a modular furniture outlet. A mouse hole knockout with furnished grommet shall be included for straight through communication cable access.

.5 Harness: Single circuit (2 conductor plus ground) with #12 AWG solid type THHN conductors, factory assembled to the receptacles. Six inch long leads shall be furnished for termination to the overhead wiring system. An 8 inch removable cover section shall be provided at top of power compartment to facilitate hard wiring of the pole wire harness.

.6 Fittings: Provide entrance end fittings for the top of the electrical channel,

ceiling trim plate, pole-mounting bracket, carpet gripper pad, and adhesive pad. For air handling spaces, an entrance end fitting shall be furnished for the communications channel.

.7 Add-On Device Covers and Compartments: Tele-Power Pole shall be UL listed for field modifications, changes and additions of receptacles, devices and circuits. Field installed power device covers shall be available to add duplex, single 1.40 inch and 1.59 inch and rectangular-type receptacles. Covers shall match color and finish of pole. Add on communications covers shall be available to mount workstation device faceplates, inserts, and specialty mounting bezels. Where indicated, provide connectivity outlets and modular inserts by Ortronics or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation .1 Switches:

.1 Install single throw switches with handle in "UP" position when switch closed.

.2 Install switches in gang-type outlet box when more than one switch is required in one location.

.3 Mount toggle switches at height specified in Section 16010 or as indicated.



.2 Receptacles: .1 Install receptacles in gang-type outlet box when more than one receptacle

is required in one location.

.2 Mount receptacles vertically at height specified in Section 16010 or as indicated.

.3 Where split receptacle has one portion switched, mount vertically and switch upper portion.

.3 Coverplates: .1 Protect stainless steel coverplate finish with paper or plastic film until

painting and other work is finished.

.2 Install suitable common coverplates where wiring devices are grouped.

.3 Do not use coverplates meant for flush outlet boxes on surface-mounted boxes.


ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS Occupancy & Daylight Sensor Lighting Control Devices Section 16381 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Conform to general provisions, Section 16010.

1.2 Related Work .1 Basic Material & Methods: Section 16300 .2 Wiring Devices: Section 16380

1.3 Submittals .1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data on each control device listed herein.

.2 Shop Drawings: Submit dimension drawings of each control device listed herein.

.3 Wiring Diagrams: Submit project specific wiring diagrams applicable to the

lighting control schematics shown on drawing E1-00-08.

1.4 Acceptable Manufacturer's .1 The control devices specified herein are based on one manufacturer as noted in

the product descriptions.

.2 Proposed devices may differ from those specified herein provided that product data sheets are submitted to the Consultant for evaluation and approval.

.3 Approved Equals: .1 Wattstopper .2 Hubbell .3 Sensor Switch .4 Douglas .5 Leviton

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 General

.1 Product descriptions noted herein are generic and all products described may not necessarily be used on this project. Make reference to drawings and ensure all products supplied under this contract conform to these specifications.


ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS Occupancy & Daylight Sensor Lighting Control Devices Section 16381 Project No. 09019 Page 2 2.2 Occupancy Sensors (OS)

.1 Line Voltage Passive Infra-Red PIR Type:

.1 Ceiling mounted or wall mounted as indicated on plans.

.2 Rating .1 1200 - 1500 Watt for fluorescent and/or HID load @347V .2 800 Watt for halogen and/or incandescent load @120V

.3 Viewing Angle: 110° maximum

.4 Viewing Area per sensor: 40 ft x 40 ft (12 m x 12 m)

.5 LED indicator light

.6 Time Delay: Automatic or Fixed at 5, 10, 15, 20 or 30 minute intervals

.7 Sensitivity adjustment: Automatic or manual adjustment

.8 CUL listed

.9 Five (5) year Warranty

.10 Wattstopper #CI-355 or approved equal

.2 Low Voltage PIR Type:

.1 Same as above except rated for 24VDC/VAC

.2 Wattstopper #CI-300 or approved equal

.3 Line Voltage Dual Technology (DT) Type: .1 Dual Technology: Combined passive infra-red and ultrasonic technology

.2 Rating:

.1 1200 - 1500 Watt for fluorescent and/or HID load @ 347V

.2 800 Watt for halogen and/or incandescent load @ 120V

.3 Viewing Angle: 110° maximum.

.4 Viewing Area per sensor: 40 ft x 40 ft (12 m x 12 m)


.6 Time Delay: Automatic or Fixed at 5, 10, 15, 20 or 30 minute intervals

.7 Sensitivity adjustment: Automatic or manual adjustment


ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS Occupancy & Daylight Sensor Lighting Control Devices Section 16381 Project No. 09019 Page 3

.8 Ceiling Mounted

.9 CUL listed


.11 Wattstopper #DT-355 or approved equal

.4 Low Voltage Dual Technology (DT) Type: .1 Same as above except rated for 24VDC/VAC

.2 Wattstopper #DT-300 or approved equal

2.3 Occupancy Sensor/Wall Switch Combination .1 Dual Technology (DT) type

.2 Suitable for use with 120VAC lighting systems.

.3 Rating: 800 Watt for fluorescent and/or HID load at 120V.

.4 CUL listed.

.5 Colour: Confirm at submittal stage.

.6 Five (5) year Warranty.

.7 Wattstopper DW-100 Series or approved equal

2.4 Daylight Sensors .1 Outdoor - Low Voltage On/Off Type:

.1 On/Off Deadband Range: 1 - 1400 foot-candles

.2 On Setpoint Range: 1 - 850 fc


.4 Input Power: 12 - 24 VDC, 7 mA typical

.5 Output Power: 12 - 24 VDC, 120 mA maximum

.6 Viewing Angle: 100° maximum.



.7 Fail to On

.8 Surface canopy mount or stanchion mount as indicated on plans.

.9 CUL listed for outdoor applications


.11 Douglass WPS-5527 or approved equal

.2 Indoor - Low Voltage Dimming Type: .1 Dimming Range: 0.2 VDC to 10 VDC output voltage

.2 Current Consumption: 30 mA at 24 VDC

.3 Setpoint Range: 20 - 60 fc

.4 Sensor Leads: Grey & violet to ballast; red and black to 24 VDC

.5 Viewing Range: 100° maximum .6 Set up remote control (one per project)

.7 CUL listed


.9 Wattstopper #LS-301 or approved equal

2.5 Control Power Packs & Relay Packs .1 Power Pack - Standard (PP):

.1 Input Voltage: 120V

.2 Output Voltage: 24 VDC

.3 Load Ratings: .1 Ballast Load (120V): 20A .2 Incandescent Load (120V): 13A

.4 CUL listed


.6 Wattstopper #B120E-P (120VAC), or approved equal



.2 Intelligent (Dimming Type) Power Pack (IP): .1 Input Voltage: 120V

.2 Relay Outputs:

.1 2 to 20A at 120V

.2 2 - 1A at 24 VDC

.3 NEMA 1 enclosure suitable for use in plenum ceilings

.4 Output voltage: 150 mA at 24 VDC complete with automatic overload protection.

.5 CUL listed


.7 Wattstopper LC-100 or approved equal

.3 Auxiliary Relay Packs (AP): .1 Auxiliary relay packs shall have dry contacts capable of switching 13 Amp

incandescent, 1 HP @ 120VAC, 60 Hz.; 15 Amp ballast @347 VAC, 60 Hz; 15 Amp ballast, 1 HP @120 VAC, 60 Hz.

.2 Auxiliary relay packs shall contain no transformer power supply and shall switch 120 VAC, 347 VAC or low voltage.

.3 Auxiliary relay packs shall have low voltage teflon coated leads, rated for 300 Volts, suitable for use in plenum applications.

.4 Wattstopper S120/277/347E-P or approved equal

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Occupancy Sensors .1 Recessed Ceiling Mount: Flush mount in ceiling through 2" (51 mm) round O.D.

hole.

.2 Surface Ceiling Mount: Install using appropriate bracket and single gang outlet box.

.3 DO NOT install sensors within: .1 12" (300 mm) of fluorescent ballasts. .2 12" (300 mm) of HVAC ducts.



.3 24" (600 mm) of incandescent fixtures.

.4 24" (600 mm) of HVAC diffusers.

.5 48" (1200 mm) of concentrated or reflected light sources.

3.2 Power Packs .1 Mount in nearest accessible ceiling space or as otherwise noted on plans.

3.3 Testing .1 Test operation of occupancy sensors/daylight sensors/power packs in accordance

with the Manufacturer's recommendations.


ELECTRICAL Motor Starters Section 16470 Project No. 09019 Page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Submittals .1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 16010.

.2 Indicate the following:

.1 Mounting method and dimensions

.2 Starter size and type

.3 Layout of identified internal and front panel components

.4 Enclosure types

.5 Wiring diagram for each type of starter

.6 Interconnection diagrams

1.2 Operation & Maintenance Data .1 Provide data for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in Section

16010.

.2 Include operation and maintenance data for each type and style of starter.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Standards .1 Starters: to CSA C22.2, No. 14, EEMAC E14-1.

.2 IEC Rated Starters:

.1 To IEC 292 and 947-2.

.2 Sizes used shall be equivalent to NEMA/EEMAC starter sizes and shall not be less than Size 1. IEC Starter sizes "in between" NEMA/EEMAC Starter sizes are not acceptable.

2.2 Manual Motor Starters .1 Manual motor starters of size, type, rating, and enclosure type as indicated and

suitable for the motor load to be controlled, with components as follows: .1 Switching mechanism, quick-make and break.

.2 Overload heater in each phase, manual reset, trip indicating handle.

.3 Heavy duty type, labelled toggle switch, unless indicated otherwise.



.4 Indicating Light: Heavy duty type, red.

.5 Locking tab to permit padlocking in "ON" or "OFF" position.

2.3 Full Voltage Magnetic Starters .1 Magnetic and combination magnetic starters minimum size 1. Type, rating and

enclosure type as indicated with components as follows: .1 Control transformer.

.2 Contactor solenoid operated, rapid action type.

.3 Motor overload protective device in each phase, manually reset from front

with door closed.

.4 Power and control terminals.

.5 Wiring and schematic diagram inside starter enclosure in visible location.

.6 Identify each wire and terminal for external connections, within starter, with permanent number marking identical to diagram.

.2 Combination-type starters to include circuit breaker with operating lever on outside of enclosure to control disconnect and provision for: .1 Locking in "OFF" position with up to three (3) padlocks.

.2 Locking in "ON" position.

.3 Independent locking of enclosure door.

.4 Provision for preventing switching to "ON" position while enclosure door is

open.

.3 Accessories: Pushbuttons and selector switches: Heavy duty type and labelled as indicated. Hand-Off-Auto (HOA) switches shall be 3-position maintained contact operators. Test-Off-Auto (TOA) switches shall be 3-position with Off and Auto contacts maintained and Test contacts spring return (Test to Off). .1 Indicating Lights: Heavy duty type - red colour unless indicated

otherwise.

.2 Two N/O and two N/C auxiliary contacts unless otherwise indicated.



2.4 Control Transformer .1 Single phase, dry-type, control transformer with primary voltage indicated and

120 Volt secondary, complete with secondary fuse, all installed in starter enclosure.

.2 Size control transformer for control circuit load plus 20% spare capacity.

2.5 Finishes .1 Apply finishes to enclosure in accordance with Section 16010.

2.6 Equipment Identification .1 Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16010.

2.7 Acceptable Manufacturers .1 Westinghouse Canada Ltd. .2 Klockner & Moeller .3 Square "D" Company Ltd. .4 Allen-Bradley Canada Company .5 Siemens Canada Ltd. .6 Cutler Hammer Canada Ltd. .7 Canadian General Electric

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation .1 Install starters, connect power and control wiring as indicated.

.2 Ensure correct fuses and overload device elements installed. Overload devices

shall be rated or selected to trip in accordance with Code requirements using motor nameplate ratings as the basis for selection.

3.2 Tests .1 Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010 and Manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Operate switches, contactors to verify correct functioning.



.3 Perform starting and stopping sequences of contactors and relays.

.4 Check that sequence controls, interlocking with other separate related starters, equipment, control devices, operate as indicated.


ELECTRICAL Addition to Existing TV Distribution System Section 16512 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Related Work

.1 General Provisions: Section 16010

.2 Basic Materials & Methods: Section 16300

1.2 Scope of Work .1 Provide additional outlets as indicated on plans, complete with all cabling as well

as all necessary equipment and cabling to update existing system as required to accept additional outlets. Co-ordinate all requirements with system manufacturer.

.2 Supply and install all conduit, junction boxes, panel boxes and outlet receptacle boxes as shown on the drawings.

.3 Supply and installation of all co-axial cables, amplification, and distribution system.

.4 All cable connections shall be made by the T.V. System Supplier.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Splitters .1 Distribution splitters and tap-off units shall be Lindsay LDS-102, LDS-103 and

DC8.

2.2 T.V. Outlets .1 The television outlets shall be single gang, complete with stainless steel covers

complete with screw-type television co-axial jacks as recommended by T.V. System Supplier.

2.3 Harness Assemblies .1 Provide harness assembly for each outlet.


ELECTRICAL Addition to Existing TV Distribution System Section 16512 Project No. 09019 Page 2 2.4 Co-Axial Cable

.1 The co-axial cables shall be a nominal 75 ohm Comm-scope RG-6U foam cable

free of discontinuities within VHF and UHF frequency bands 54 to 216 MHz and 470 to 890 MHz respectively.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Wiring .1 Install all conduits, boxes, panel and outlets.

.2 All wiring shall be FT6 rated.

.3 All wiring to run in concealed conduit.

3.2 Tests .1 Engage the System Supplier to sweep completed system and to test the signal

strength at each outlet and submit a test report to the Engineer. Where the signal strength appears insufficient, the System Supplier shall correct the deficiency to the Owner's satisfaction.

.2 All charges not covered by System Supplier to be included in total Tender Price. Confirm with system supplier.


ELECTRICAL Addition to Existing Intercom, Paging & Clock System Section 16516 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Work

.1 General Provisions: Section 16010 .2 Basic Materials & Methods: Section 16300

1.2 Scope of Work .1 Existing Intercom & Paging System and Clock System are Dukane PA System

and Lathem clock system LTRA-384.

.2 New devices to be added and connected to existing Intercom, Paging & Clock Systems. This Electrical Contractor shall supply and install all appropriately sized back boxes in the control panels, walls or ceilings, etc., to accommodate the PA units, clocks and all backboxes for all call speakers, call switches or handsets, clocks and related devices. Terminate conduits from wall mounted back boxes in above accessible ceiling space.

.3 Co-ordinate with system manufacturer and provide all necessary equipment and wiring to support new devices, as recommended by system manufacturer.

.4 The Electrical Contractor shall afford the Board's separate contractors all necessary co-operation for their installations.

.5 Provide equipment with required power supply receptacles.

.6 See legend on Drawing E-1 for speaker types.

1.3 Guarantee .1 The System Supplier shall guarantee the system, all functions and components,

for a period of one (1) year from the date of the final completion.

1.4 Co-Ordination .1 Verify and co-ordinate the details of the entire system with the Supplier before

commencing installation.


ELECTRICAL Addition to Existing Intercom, Paging & Clock System Section 16516 Project No. 09019 Page 2 1.5 Construction Drawings

.1 The System Supplier shall, prior to installation, provide to the Electrical

Contractor and Engineer, construction drawings indicating all conduit, wiring and type of boxes, etc., to be supplied and installed by Electrical Contractor.

1.6 Maintenance Data .1 Submit data for incorporation under Tab #3 into operation and maintenance

manuals in accordance with Section 16010.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Note: The following is a general specification for equipment used by the Halton School Board. Provide only the equipment that is required for this project. 2.1 Gymnasium Clocks

.1 The Gymnasium clocks shall be Dukane model 24SS15RF, analog type.

.2 The clock shall be flush mounted with a 15" (380 mm) face.

.3 The clock shall have a plastic bubble guard cover.

2.2 Outdoor Bells .1 Dukane model 23P810FB, 10" (250 mm) bell with back box and cast aluminum

grill complete for weatherproof installation.

2.3 Indoor Bells .1 General Purpose Room: Dukane model 23P806F, 6" (150 mm) complete with

steel grill, flush mounted.


ELECTRICAL Addition to Existing Intercom, Paging & Clock System Section 16516 Project No. 09019 Page 3 2.4 Loudspeakers & Associated Equipment

.1 Loudspeakers:

.1 Type 1: Flush mounted wall speaker in special modular control panel (see detail drawing 16995-1) shall consist of a McBride model #8LS821-19 speaker complete with a matching transformer McBride model #MCT7025 and also a separately mounted call-in switch McBride model #MCSW-1. Speaker baffle provided by Modular Control Panel Supplier. Also included shall be space provisions for a future DTMF telephone ITT model 3400 mounted in panel.

.2 Type 2: Flush mounted speaker comprised of McBride Type MC25SQ baffle complete with built-in MCSW-1 call-in switch, MC20E backbox, 8LS821-19 Speaker, MC7025 transformer, mounted so call switch is 1200 mm A.F.F.

.3 Type 3: Flush ceiling speakers shall be a McBride model #8LS821-19 speaker complete with a matching transformer McBride model #MCT7025, flush round back box McBride model #MC10E, one pair of support rails McBride model #MC100, and a round speaker baffle McBride model #MC11.

.4 Type 3A: Similar to Type 3, except baffle type McBride MC20E and interlocked with panic button in Washroom.

.5 Type 5: Horn Speaker TOA Type TC-101TA.

.6 Handset complete with call-in switch - Type PCS821

.7 Type 6: Exterior weatherproof horn speaker for two-way communications. Provide wire guard cage (black).

.8 Type 7: Recessed ceiling mounted speaker complete with talk back feature. Interconnect for dedicated zone initiated by emergency/handicap pull cord device.

.9 Type 8: Similar to Type 3, except complete with remote volume control.

.2 Associated Equipment: .1 Type 1: Combination Jacks for administrative console pre-amp unit and

TV signal cable connections. See drawings.

.2 Type 2: Administrative Control Console.

.3 Type 3: AM/FM Tuner, Cassette Pre-Amp Unit. See Item above under this Section.


ELECTRICAL Addition to Existing Intercom, Paging & Clock System Section 16516 Project No. 09019 Page 4

.4 Microphone Outlet: Switchcraft J3FS - in flush single gang box with stainless steel plate.

.5 Projector Outlet: Suitable jack in flush single gang box with stainless steel plate.

.6 Type 6: Exterior horn.

.7 Type 7: Recessed ceiling mounted speaker complete with hands free mic and interconnected to wall mounted emergency pull cord alarm device.

.8 Intercom Telephone Handset: Shall be equal to, or better than ITT Cat. No. 3400, mounted in Modular Control Panel. See Section 16995.

2.5 Wiring .1 All wiring shall be of Provo manufacture and shall be FT6 rated. Use home run

two twisted pair #22 AWG for speakers with call-in switch, one twisted pair #18 AWG for paging speakers.

.2 Clock System: Wire all clocks and program bells using #14 AWG wiring run in concealed conduit.

2.6 AM/FM Reception .1 Provide suitable equipment in the system so that the T.V. coaxial cable in the

building can be used for AM/FM reception.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation

.1 Intercom/Paging System:

.1 Mount speakers in modular control panels, flush mounted into walls, ceilings or surface mount, as indicated.

.2 Mount and wire all miscellaneous jacks and equipment as indicated.

.3 Run wiring in concealed conduit into corridor ceiling space then in common cable tray as indicated.

.2 Clock/Program Bell System: .1 Mount clocks into modular control panels, on walls and ceiling at locations

indicated.


ELECTRICAL Addition to Existing Intercom, Paging & Clock System Section 16516 Project No. 09019 Page 5

.2 Flush mount indoor and outdoor bells as indicated.

.3 Wire digital clocks to three circuits with equal number of clocks on each circuit in rack.

.4 Wire analog 24SS Series clocks to separate circuit in rack.

.5 Wire each General Purpose Room program bell to separate circuit in cabinet.

.6 Interconnect all outdoor program bells to separate circuit in power supply unit in rack.

.7 Provide quantity of wiring as required to operate system and as directed by system supplier. Run in concealed conduits to equipment wall cabinet.

3.2 Wiring

.1 All intercom/paging system wiring is to run concealed and must be run in EMT.

into corridor ceiling space and then cable tray.

.2 Type of wiring is to be as recommended by System Manufacturer, not the system supplier, and is to be installed and connected by the System Supplier.

.3 All clock and program bell wiring to run in separate conduit system. No wiring for this system is to run in cable tray.

3.3 Testing .1 All lines shall be tested for continuity, ground and shorts. An impedance test

shall be done on each and every speaker and a report shall be submitted to the Engineer.

.2 The Supplier shall test the system to ensure proper operation and make any changes or corrections to the system if any defects occur at no cost to the owner.

.3 The Contractor shall include in his Tender price, all costs required for the Suppliers Technician's visit and testing.


ELECTRICAL Addition to Existing Intercom, Paging & Clock System Section 16516 Project No. 09019 Page 6 3.4 Operation Instructions

.1 Engage the System Supplier to provide adequate instructions in the total

operation of the Intercom and Sound Systems to all persons assigned by the Owner. These instructions shall be to the Owners satisfaction.

.2 Provide two (2) copies of complete operating manuals of each system installed.


ELECTRICAL Communication Raceway System Section 16530 Project No. 09019 Page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Work .1 General Provisions: Section 16010 .2 Basic Materials & Methods: Section 16300 .3 Modifications to Existing T.V. Distribution System: Section 16512 .4 Modifications to Existing Intercom, Paging & Clock System: Section 16516 .5 Telecommunications Cabling System: Section 16540 .6 Security System: Section 16920

1.2 Scope of Work .1 Provide new outlets, backboxes, empty conduits, J-Hooks, pull boxes, sleeves,

stubs-up through floors, ceiling or walls, fish wires, T-cabinets, plywood backboards and service poles.

.2 Provide a complete empty raceway system or path for all communications wires and cables to be pulled from source to termination destination.

1.3 Provisions for Computer Cabling System, Telephone & P.A. System .1 The Telecommunications System (see Section 16540) and the Intercom, Paging

and Clock System (see Section 16516) form part of this Contract. Make provisions for the installation and connection of all telephone and data communications cables and related prewired jack outlets.

1.4 Telephone/PA System (Provision) .1 The Telephone and P.A. System form part of this Contract.

.2 Provide required equipment power supply receptacles and required backboards.

.3 The Electrical Contractor shall supply and install appropriately sized back boxes

in walls to accommodate Telephone units. Terminate conduits from wall mounted back boxes in above accessible ceiling space.

.4 A final Telephone/PA System list of outlets and jack quantities and locations will be formally issued after Tender Close by the Consultant and School Board.

.5 Provide 2" (50 mm) conduit sleeves between each Classroom and between each corridor wall (as shown on Plans) for telephone and PA wiring.



.6 Provide handset compatible with existing telephone system where indicated on drawings.

.7 Provide PA call switch compatible with existing PA system, where indicated on drawings.

1.5 Computer Systems Provision .1 The Computer System forms part of this Contract.

.2 Provide required equipment power supply receptacles and required backboards. .3 The Electrical Contractor shall supply and install appropriately sized back boxes

in walls to accommodate computer units. Terminate conduits from wall mounted back boxes in above ceiling space.

.4 A final computer system list of outlets and jack quantities and locations will be formally issued after Tender Close by the Consultant and School Board.

.5 Provide 2" (50 mm) conduit sleeves between each classroom and between each corridor wall (as shown on Plans) for computer wiring.

1.6 Computer Raceway System (Wiremold) .1 The Computer Wiremold shall be metal, Wiremold Designer Series 4000 and

shall be wired for all power devices and roughed-in for all computer devices, wired and installed by others.

.2 The Wiremold V-4000 surface metal raceway system shall be of required length per plans, complete with receptacle and computer covers, power and data dividers and all necessary accessories (for corner fittings, feed-in points, etc.) for a complete system.

.3 Mount raceway above desk height 785 mm (2'-7") AFF to underside of raceway). Co-ordinate layout with General Contractor to avoid interference.

1.7 Intrusion Alarm System Provisions .1 The security system form part of this Contract, see Section 16920. Make

provisions for the Security system, as follows: .1 Rough-in for motion/infrared detectors. .2 Rough-in for motion sensors in designated areas. .3 Rough-in for door contacts as designated exit doors.



.2 The Electrical Contractor shall install all of the necessary back-boxes in ceiling, control panels and walls with appropriate conduit, easily accessible by the Security Contractor. The Electrical Contractor shall co-operate with the security contractor in the installation of the system.

.3 Co-ordinate the work with the Consultant and Security System supplier and obtain the exact location of equipment, conduit sizes and outlet box requirements from the system supplier prior to roughing-in.

.4 Wiring provided by the system supplier shall be FT-6 plenum rated. All conduit stubs shall be terminated in the corridor accessible ceiling space.

.5 Provide a system of empty conduit and outlet boxes and coverplates for the Security System.

.6 Conduit shall be minimum 20 mm EMT complete with fish wires. There shall not be more than two (2) 90° bends in any run of conduit and pull boxes shall be provided in runs in excess of 30 m or where more than two (2) 90° bends are required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Outlet boxes to be standard, single gang boxes, with single gang plaster ring, as required.

2.2 Blank stainless steel plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation .1 Install outlet boxes so that coverplates are vertical and even with adjacent

outlets.

.2 Conduits to individual outlets to be 3/4" (19 mm) EMT.

.3 Provide junction and pull boxes as required.

.4 All communication cables in accessible ceiling spaces to be neatly bundled and supported from ceiling/walls using J-hooks at minimum 4' intervals.



3.2 Identification .1 All cables shall be tagged and labelled at 50'-0" intervals.


ELECTRICAL Telecommunications Cabling System Section 16540 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Related Work



.3 Communication Raceway System: Section 16530

1.2 Approved Manufacturers .1 Approved Installing Contractors:

.1 Ozz Infrastructure Solutions 20 Floral Parkway Concord ON L4K 4R1 Ph: 905-669-6223

.2 Bell Calling and WLAN Solutions 21 Canniff Street Floor S-3 Toronto ON M5V 3G1 Contact: Roger Vachon Ph: 416-981-0820

.3 Marcomm Integrated Business Solutions 163 Buttermill Ave. Unit 3 Concord ON L4K 3X8 Contact: Rick Boyd Ph: 905-695-1700

.2 The Approved Contractors have the following qualifications: .1 Are a corporate member of BICSI in good standing .2 Employ at least one (1) RCDD .3 Have a minimum 5 years experience in the installation of Structured

Cabling Systems. .4 Are a Hubbell-ClearBit certified installer in good standing

.3 Successful Structured Cabling Supplier shall:

.1 Have the design reviewed by their RCDD who assumes full responsibility for the compliance of the installation with the latest BICSI design and installation standards of the Structured Cabling System.

.2 Assign a competent Foreperson and Project Manager within three (3) working days of being notified of successful tender. The Foreperson and Project Manager shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in running similar projects.


ELECTRICAL Telecommunications Cabling System Section 16540 Project No. 09019 Page 2 1.3 Scope of Work

.1 Furnish labour, materials and equipment necessary for a complete

Communications Structured Cabling System.

.2 This Tender includes Category 3 voice cabling, Category 5e data cabling and wireless network access points.

.3 The School has two (2) Telecommunications Closets, one (1) on the Ground Floor (Room E104A) and one (1) on the Second Floor (Room E204).

.4 The School will be divided into halves. All data cables in the north half will run to the main Telecommunications Closet on the Ground Floor. All data cables in the south half will run to the Telecommunications Closet on the Second Floor. All voice cables will run directly to the existing main telephone board.

.5 Horizontal data cables shall be terminated in Cat. 5e jacks at the workstation end and in Cat. 5e patch panels at the Communications Closet end.

.6 Data backbone shall consist of one (1) 12 strand, multimode fibre optic cable and six (6) Cat. 5e copper cables.

.7 Patch panels shall be mounted in one (1) floor mounted rack in the Ground Floor Closet complete with two (2) vertical cable managers and one (1) horizontal cable manager for every patch panel supplied. In the Second Floor Closet, patch panels shall be mounted in a 48" wall mounted cabinet, complete with built-in vertical cable managers. Supply and install one (1) horizontal cable manager for each patch panel supplied.

.8 Horizontal voice cables shall be terminated in Cat. 3 jacks at the workstation end and in BIX1A4 punch down blocks in the Main Telephone Room. Punch down blocks shall be mounted in BIX10A mounts complete with designation strips and labels.

.9 Fibre-Optic backbone shall be terminated in SC connectors mounted in 19" rack mountable, fibre patch panels of port density required to accommodate all strands.

.10 A cable hanger system has been provided in the Corridors for all voice and data cables. Outlet boxes and conduits will be provided at each outlet location (by others). Conduits extend from the outlet box to the Corridor and terminate adjacent to the cable hanger system.

.11 Additional conduits have been provided to complement the conduit hanger system. Refer to attached riser diagram.


ELECTRICAL Telecommunications Cabling System Section 16540 Project No. 09019 Page 3

.12 Supply and install the following, as outlined in the Drawings and Specifications: .1 Voice and data structured cabling system

.2 Fibre and copper data backbone cabling

.3 Supply only of one (1) patch cord for every data drop installed. Patch

cords will be installed by the Board at the rack end. The length of the patch cord shall be as follows: .1 50% 4 ft. long .2 50% 6 ft. long

.4 Supply only of one (1) line cord for every data drop installed. Line chords

will be installed by the Board at the workstation end. The length of the line cords shall be 10 feet.

.5 Supply only of four (4) duplex multi-mode SC-SC fibre optic patch cords as specified herein.

.6 Supply, install and configure a Wireless Network as specified. Access Points shall be installed in the ceiling space adjacent to existing power and data outlets. Each Access Point shall be complete with one (1) PCMCIA card. All costs associated with the Wireless Network shall be identified as a separate price on the Tender Form.

1.4 Codes & Standards .1 ANSI/TIA/EIA - 568-B, Telecommunications Cabling Standard .2 ANSI/TIA/EIA - 569, Pathway and Spaces .3 ISO - 11801, Generic Cabling for Customer Premises .4 BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual .5 CSA T530, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunication Pathways and

Spaces (ANSI/TIA/EIA 569-A) .6 CSA T528, Administration Standard for the Telecommunication Pathways and

Spaces (ANSI/TIA/EIA 606) .7 CSA T527, Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for

Telecommunications (ANSI/TIA/EIA 607) .8 CSA C22.1, Canadian Electric Code Part 1 - Ontario Electrical Safety Code .9 CSA C22.2 No. 214, Communications Cables .10 CSA C22,2, No. 232-M, Fibre Optic Cables .11 OBC, Ontario Building Code


ELECTRICAL Telecommunications Cabling System Section 16540 Project No. 09019 Page 4 1.5 Tender Submission

.1 The supplier will be responsible for the supply and installation of all components

required for a complete Cat. 3 voice and Cat. 5e data structure cabling system, whether or not specifically shown.

.2 The supplier will be responsible for the supply and installation of all components and configuration of wireless access points at the locations described in the Tender Documents.

.3 No claims will be considered for additional costs for items implied and necessary for a complete standard installation.

.4 The supplier shall submit the following documents: .1 Proof of current training and certification by the specified manufacturer

(Hubbell and Avaya) .2 Proof of RCDD on staff. RCDD will be responsible for quality control and

certification of the project. .3 Resumes of designated Project Manager and Foreperson.

1.6 Project Schedule .1 The supplier shall review the scheduling requirements upon award of the

Contract. Adhere to the construction schedule put into practice by the General Contractor.

.2 The Supplier shall identify in his Price submission, any specific tasks that the Owner must perform in order for the Contractor to adhere to the Construction Schedule.

1.7 Shop Drawings .1 Conform to Section 16010.

.2 Submit project specific shop drawings for materials and equipment supplied for

this project. Include Manufacturer, dimensions, appearance and specifications.

.3 Submit shop drawings for equipment including, but not limited to, the following: .1 Jacks .2 Copper Cable .3 Faceplates .4 Patch panels .5 Racks .6 Cable Managers .7 Patch cords



.8 Fibre optic cable

.9 Fibre optic patch panels

.10 Fibre optic patch cords

.11 Fibre optic connectors

.12 Wireless access points

.13 Wireless access cards

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Note: The following is a general specification for equipment used by the Halton District School

Board. Provide only the equipment that is required for this project.

2.1 General .1 Material and equipment shall be new and conform to grade, Standards and

quality specified.

2.2 Copper Products .1 Category 5e Cable:

.1 Cable shall be 4-pair, 24 AWG solid bare annealed copper conductors.

.2 The jacket shall be printed with TRU-MARK 1000' to 0' marking system, FT6.

.3 Cable shall be suitable for use indoors, in risers or plenums, and for horizontal applications.

.4 Category marking shall be printed every one foot.

.5 Cable shall be independently verified to comply with TIA/EIA 568-B.2 or TIA/EIA 568-A-5.

.6 Cable shall be packaged in order to protect the cable.

.7 Cable shall be ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2 and ISO 11801 Category 5e compliant.

.8 Attenuation shall be measured in accordance with TIA/EIA 568B.2 and shall be a maximum of 22.0 dB @ 100 MHz.

.9 Cable shall exhibit positive PSCAR above 200 MHz.

.10 Cable shall be tested and characterized to 350 MHz.



.11 Cable shall be UL listed.

.12 Cable manufacturer shall be ISO 9002 certified.

.13 Cable shall exhibit the following transmission characteristics:

Frequency MHz

NEXT dB ELFEXT dB Attenuation dB

Return Loss

1.0 70 64 2.0 20.0 4.0 61 52 4.1 23.0

10.0 55 44 6.5 25.0 16.0 52 40 8.2 25.0 20.0 50 38 9.3 25.0

31.25 47 34 11.7 23.6 62.5 43 28 17.0 21.5

100.0 40 24 22.0 20.1 .14 Approved Manufacturers:

.1 General Cable Platinum PLUS 6131278 (CMP).

.2 Category 3 Cable: .1 Cable shall be 4-pair, 24 AWG solid bare annealed copper conductors.

.2 Insulation shall be flame retardant PVC and jacket shall be PVDF

fluoropolymer. Overall cable rating shall be FT6.

.3 Cable shall exhibit the following transmission characteristics:

Frequency Mhz Attenuation dB PS Next (dB) 1.0 2.6 41.0 4.0 5.6 32.0 8.0 8.5 27.0

10.0 9.7 26.0 16.0 13.1 23.0

.4 Approved Manufacturer:

.1 General Cable Part No. 2131245 (CMP).

.3 Faceplates: .1 Faceplates shall be UL Listed and CSA Certified

.2 Faceplates shall be constructed of high impact, 94 V-0 rated

thermoplastic.



.3 Faceplates shall be 2.75"W x 4.5"H (69.8 mm x 114.3 mm) for single gang and 4.5" x 4.5" (114.3 x 114.3 mm) for double gang.

.4 Faceplates shall be available to mount one, two, three, four or six jacks in a single gang, or six or nine jacks in a double gang configuration.

.5 Two and three-port faceplates shall be available with thermal ink transfer stencilled port indications for voice and data; or voice, data1, data 2.

.6 Faceplates shall have plastic covers over the mounting screws that can be replaced with a clear plastic window over a printable paper insert.

.7 Faceplates shall be available in Office White, Telco Ivory, Grey, White and Electrical Ivory.

.8 Approved Manufacture: Hubbell Premise Wiring Part Numbers: IFP1-1OW, IFP1-2OW, IFP1-4OW (single gang) or IFP2-6OW (double gang).

.4 Category 5e Modular Jacks: .1 Jacks shall be 8-position, un-keyed.

.2 Each jack shall be an individually constructed unit and shall snap mount

into an industry standard keystone opening (0.760" x 0.580").

.3 Jack housing shall be high impact 94 VO rated thermoplastic.

.4 Jacks shall have an operating temperature range of -10°C (14°F) to 60°C (140°F).

.5 Jacks shall utilize two-sided printed circuit board technology.

.6 Jack housing shall have fully encased and protected printed circuit boards and IDC fields.

.7 Modular jack contact shall accept a minimum of 2500 plug insertions without degradation of electrical or mechanical performance.

.8 Contacts shall maintain a minimum vertical deflection force of 110 grams.

.9 Modular jack contacts shall be formed flat for increased surface area contact with mated plugs. These contacts shall be arranged on the PC board in two (2) staggered arrays of four (4) to maximize contact spacing and minimize cross-talk.

.10 Modular jack contacts shall be constructed of Beryllium copper for maximum spring force and resilience.



.11 Contact plating shall be a minimum of 50 micro inches of gold in the contact area over 50 micro inches of nickel.

.12 Jack termination shall be industry standard 110 insulation displacement contact, integral to the jack housing, laid out in two (2) arrays of four (4) contacts, positioned at angles to minimize the bending of terminated cables.

.13 Jacks shall utilize a paired down punch sequence. Cable pairs shall be maintained up to the IDC, terminating all conductors adjacent to its pair mate to better maintain pair characteristics designed by the cable manufacturer.

.14 110 insulation displacement contacts shall utilize tin lead plated (60% tin/40% lead) phosphor bronze.

.15 Jacks shall terminate 22-26 AWG stranded or solid conductors.

.16 Jacks shall terminate insulated conductors with outside diameters up to 0.050".

.17 Jacks shall be compatible with signal conductor 110 impact termination tools.

.18 Jacks shall include grey translucent wire retention stuffer caps to hold terminated wires in place while allowing conductors to be viewed in the IDC housing. Suffer caps may also be used for wire termination with parallel jaw pliers.

.19 Jacks shall be compatible with EIA/TIA 606 colour code labelling and accept snap on icons for identification or designation of applications.

.20 Jacks shall have dust covers available to protect the jack opening and

internal elements during installation until the jack is in use.

.21 Jacks shall be designed for 100 Ohm UTP cable termination.

.22 Jacks shall be UL verified for TIA/EIA Component compliant Category 5e electrical performance.

.23 Jacks shall be UL Listed 1863 and CSA certified.

.24 Jacks shall be manufactured by an ISO 9002 Registered Manufacturer.



.25 Jacks shall exhibit values which exceed the following in a channel performance (ga) based on a worst case in a 4-conductor model verified at TEL Laboratories:

Frequency

MHz Attenuation

dB PSNEXT

dB NEXT dB ELFEXT

dB PSELFEXT

dB Return

Loss dB 10 6 55.6 57.7 45.5 43.6 28.7

62.5 15 41.8 44.8 33.1 29.4 20.7 100 18.3 37 40.3 27 25.4 18.5 155 23.7 33.9 36.7 22.7 22 16.6 250 31.3 30.7 33.4 21.4 17.6 16.2

.26 Jacks shall exhibit a propagation delay of less than 5 ns.

.27 Jacks shall exhibit a delay skew of less than 1.25 ns.

.28 Approved Manufacturer: Hubbell Premise Wiring Part Numbers:

Xcelerator HXJ5EOW.

.5 Category 3 Jacks - UTP: .1 Jacks shall be 8-position, un-keyed.

.2 Each jack shall be an individually constructed unit and shall snap mount

in an industry standard keystone opening (0.760" x 0.580").

.3 Jack housing shall be high impact 94 VO rated thermoplastic.

.4 Jacks shall have an operating temperature range of -10°C (14°F) to 60°C (140°F) in conformance with ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-A.

.5 Jacks shall utilize two-sided printed circuit board technology.

.6 Jack housing shall have fully encased and protected printed circuit boards and IDC fields.

.7 Modular jack contact shall accept a minimum of 2500 plug insertions without degradation of electrical or mechanical performance.

.8 Contacts shall maintain a minimum vertical deflection force of 110 grams.

.9 Modular jack contact shall be formed flat for increased surface area contact with mated plugs. These contacts shall be arranged on the PC board in one (1) linear array of eight (8) contacts 0.050" on centre.



.10 Modular jack contacts shall be constructed of Beryllium copper for maximum spring force and resilience.

.11 Contact plating shall be a minimum of 50 micro inches of gold in the contact area over 50 micro inches of nickel compliant with FCC part 68.5.

.12 Jack termination shall be 110 IDC, integral to the jack housing, laid out in two (2) arrays of four (4) contacts

.13 Jack shall utilize a paired punch down sequence. Cable pairs shall be maintained up to the IDC, terminating all conductors adjacent to its pair mate to better maintain pair characteristics designed by the cable manufacturer.

.14 Jacks shall utilize tin lead plated (10% tin/40% lead) phosphor bronze 110 Insulation displacement contacts.

.15 Jacks shall terminate 22-26 AWG stranded or solid conductors.

.16 Jacks shall terminate insulated conductors with outside diameters up to 0.050".

.17 Jacks shall be compatible with single conductor 110 impact termination tools.

.18 Jacks shall include translucent wire retention stuffer caps to hold terminated wires in place while allowing conductors to be viewed in the IDC housing. Stuffer caps may also be used for wire termination with parallel jaw pliers.

.19 Jacks shall be compatible with EIA/TIA 606 colour code labelling and accept snap on icons for identification or designation of applications.

.20 Jacks shall be available in 11 colours for identification or designation of applications at the workstation or closet.

.21 Jacks shall be dual labelled for T586A and T586B wiring.

.22 Jacks shall have an attached colour-coded wiring instruction label.

.23 Jacks shall have dust covers available to protect the jack opening and internal elements during installation until the jack is in use.

.24 Jacks shall be designed for 100 Ohm UTP cable termination.

.25 Jacks shall be UL verified for TIA/EIA 368A Category 3 electrical performance.



.26 Jacks shall be UL Listed 1863 and CSA certified.

.27 Jacks shall be manufactured by an ISO 9002 Certified Manufacturer.

.28 Jacks shall additionally be Category 3 component compliant in conformance with the most current ratified version of TIA document SP-4195, or ANSI/TIA/EIA 268-A (whichever is most current).

.29 Jacks shall exhibit a NEXT values which exceed the following:

Frequency MHz NEXT dB 1.0 58.0 4.0 46.0 8.0 40.0

10.0 38.0 16.0 34.0

.30 Approved Manufacturer: Hubbell Premise Wiring: HXJ3B

.6 Patch Panels - UTP:

.1 Category 5e Panels: .1 Panels shall be black anodized 0.090 inch aluminum in 24 and 48

port configurations.

.2 Panels shall accommodate 24 ports for each rack mount space or 'U' (1U = 44.5 mm [1.75"]).

.3 Panels shall be manufactured with a rolled-edge at top and bottom for stiffness.

.4 Panels shall be made of 8-port adapter modules removable by detaching three screws.

.5 Panels shall have modular jacks employing staggered array contacts with a flat "hairpin" design made of Beryllium copper with a minimum 50 micro-inch gold plating on contact surfaces over 50 - 100 micro inch of nickel compliant with FCC part 68.

.6 Panels shall be available in both T568A and T568B wiring schemes.

.7 Panels shall be equipped with 110-style terminations made of fire retardant UL 94V0 rated thermoplastic and tin lead solder plated IDC.



.8 Panel circuit boards shall be fully enclosed front and rear for physical protection.

.9 Panels shall have port identification numbers on both the front and rear of the panel. The port identification numbers on the panel front shall be located so as to minimize obstruction by patch cords.

.10 Panels shall have an optional rear cable support bar for strain relief which shall clip to the rear of the patch panel.

.11 The front panel shall have two (2) raised panel identification label fields to accept 1/2" label inserts.

.12 The panels shall have self-adhesive, clear label holders and white designation labels provided with the panel for each 8-port adaptor.

.13 Panels shall have wiring identification and colour code and maintain a paired punch down sequence that does not require the overlapping of cable pairs.

.14 Panels shall terminate 22-26 AWG solid conductor, maximum insulated outside conductor diameter of 0.050".

.15 Panels shall be ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-A and ISO/IEC 11801 Category 5e compliant.

.16 Panels shall be UL Verified for TIA/EIA Category 5e performance.

.17 Panels shall be UL Listed 1863 and CSA Certified.

.18 Panels shall be manufactured by an ISO 9002 Certified Manufacture.

.19 Panels shall exhibit a components NEXT Loss of al least the following: Frequency

MHz NEXT dB FEXT dB Attenuation dB

1.0 81.7 82.0 0.01 4.0 70.9 69.6 0.01 8.0 68.8 64.1 0.01

10.0 67.3 62.1 0.01 16.0 63.4 58.1 0.02 20.0 61.5 56.1 0.02



Frequency MHz NEXT dB FEXT dB Attenuation

dB 25.0 59.7 54.2 0.03

31.25 57.8 52.2 0.03 62.5 51.9 45.1 0.05

100.0 47.1 38.9 0.09

.20 Approved Manufacturer: Hubbell Premise Wiring Part Number P5E24A19E and P5E48A19E.

.7 Voice Terminations - BIX: .1 All voice cables shall be terminated in the Main Telephone Room in

BIX1A4 connectors mounted in BIX10A mounts. Supply and install all necessary accessories, designation strips, labels, D-rings, etc., for a complete installation.

.8 Patch Cords - UTP: .1 Copper patch cords shall be 100% tested to Category 5e ANSI/TIA/EIA

568-A-4 specifications.

.2 Cord wiring shall be compatible with T568A and T568B wiring standards.

.3 Patch cords shall have yellow jacket.

.4 Acceptable Manufacturer: Hubbell Part No. PC5ESY04, PC5ESY06 and PC5ESY10.

2.3 Fibre Products .1 Fibre Optic Cable:

.1 Fibre Optic cable shall be 12 strand Multimode Fibre 62.5/125 µm plenum rated.

.2 Fibre Optic cable shall be G300 graded to meet the bandwidth requirements and exceed the attenuation specification per TIA/EIA 568-B.3 and ISO 11801.

.3 Each fibre shall be tight buffer to a diameter of 900 µm.

.4 Fibre optic cable shall be suitable for indoor applications and suitable for operation at temperatures between 0°C and 70°C.

.5 The maximum attenuation shall be 3.5/1.0 dB/km @ 850/1300 nm.

.6 Bandwidth shall be 220/500 MHz-km @ 850.1300 nm respectively.



.7 Gigabit Ethernet distances 300 metres @ 850 nm and 550 metres @ 1300 nm.

.8 Approved Manufacturer: General Cable Part No. CG121PNU.

.2 Patch Panels - Optical Fibre: .1 Panels shall be constructed of cold rolled 16 ga. steel with a black powder

paint finish and provide for fully enclosed fibre patching and termination.

.2 Panels shall have a removable smoked Plexiglas front cover with optional lock kit. Panel shall have an removable top and rear cover. Panels shall come with rack mounting brackets that allow it to be mounted on a 19" or 23" rack.

.3 Panel shall have an adapter tray that accepts 6 - six-pack adapter plates with SC multi-mode adapters. The panel adapter tray shall be removable from the front of the panel by sliding the tray forward. Panel shall have built-in patch cable management incorporated into the front of the adapter tray.

.4 Panel adaptor tray shall have a splice tray mounting stud incorporated into the base for mounting of mechanical or fusion splice trays, Adapter tray shall have cable management anchor points and come with cable anchors allowing for the maintenance of the incoming cable with the proper minimum bend radius.

.5 Approved Manufacture: Hubbell Premise Wiring Part Number: FCR350SP36 complete with SPSCD3 adapter plates.

.3 Fibre Optic Connectors: .1 Fibre Optic connectors shall be SC style multi-mode and have the

following specifications: .1 Anaerobic quick-cure or epoxy heat-cure. .2 Operating/Storage temperature between -40°C and 80°C for

epoxy/polish and -20°C and 70°C for anaerobic/polish. .3 Mating durability, minimum 1000 matings .4 Cable retention of 25 lb. minimum .5 Compliant with TIA/EIA 568-B.3. .6 Accepts cable jacket diameters from 900 micron and 2.5 mm to

3 mm.

.2 Acceptable Manufacture: Hubbell Part No. FCSCMC12

.4 Fibre Optic Adaptors: .1 Fibre Optic Adaptors shall be SC duplex multimode/single mode with

phosphor bronze sleeves, blue housing.



.2 Fibre Optic Adaptors shall have the following specifications: .1 Operating/Storage temperature between -40°C and 80°C.

.2 Mating durability: minimum 1000 matings.

.3 MM/SM mated pair insertion loss of less than 0.60 dB (0.25 dB

typical)

.4 Compliant with TIA/EIA 368-B.3

.3 Acceptable Manufacture: Hubbell Panel No. FASCMPB6.

.5 Patch Cords - Optical Fibre: .1 Fibre patch cords shall be simplex multi-mode, SC-SC, 62.5/125 and

3 metres in length.

.2 Approved Manufacture: Hubbell DFPCSCSCC3MM.

2.4 Labels .1 Labels shall be mechanically printed. Hand written labels are not acceptable.

.2 Supply and install self-laminated labels at both ends of each cable.

.3 Supply and install labels at each outlet location. Labels shall be affixed to the

faceplate on the space provided by the Manufacturer.

.4 Label all ports at the patch panels and voice field (BIX).

.5 All voice and data outlet shall be labelled, as follows: .1 V-001 shall indicate voice outlet #1 .2 DA-001 shall indicated data outlet in Hub 'A', Port #1 .3 DB-001 shall indicated data outlet in Hub 'B', Port #1

2.5 Racks & Cabinets .1 Racks:

.1 Racks shall be UL listed and be of aluminum construction with a black polyurethane or mil finish. They shall have a 15" base depth. Rack base shall be pre-drilled for securing rack to the floor. Racks shall have 12/24 mounting screws included in the package.

.2 Rack rails shall be spaced for 19" mounting rail-to-rail and shall be of a U-shaped construction with 12/24 pre-tapped holes in the EIA-310-D standard hole pattern on both the front and rear.



.3 Approved Manufacturer: Hubbell Premise Wiring HPW84RR19

.2 Vertical Cable Management Channels: .1 The vertical cable management channel shall be comprised of three (3)

components: Vertical Channels, Steadfast gates and covers.

.2 The overall depth of the cable management channels shall be 10".

.3 The vertical channel shall be comprised of two (2) half-height sections of a fabricated "Z" profile (Z-frame).

.4 The Z-frame shall be fabricated of 14 gauge cold rolled steel.

.5 The surface finish shall be powder coat black or metallic silver as required to match equipment racks.

.6 The Z-frame shall have 4" diameter front to rear cable pass through holes.

.7 The Z-frame shall have a minimum of twelve (12) sets of cable tie off points along its face for securing cable bundles running vertically.

.8 The Z-frame shall have formed hooks in its side, allowing the channel to be easily fastened to the vertical upright of a rack of Hubbell manufacture.

.9 Gates shall be provided to retain cable within the envelope of the vertical channel.

.10 Gates shall fasten to the Z-frame without the use of fasteners.

.11 The gates shall have rolled edges to maintain bend radius of cable.

.12 The gates shall have reinforcing ribs along the forward surface.

.13 Covers shall be fabricated from 20 ga. cold rolled steel.

.14 Covers shall not be fabricated from a polycarbonate, acrylic or other flammable material.

.15 Decorative covers shall clip to gates without the use of fasteners.

.16 Approved Manufacturer: Hubbell Premise Wiring Part Number VC76X, 6" channel width.

.3 Horizontal Cable Management Channels: .1 The horizontal duct style cable management channel shall be steel in

construction.



.2 The duct cover shall be hinged at the bottom, allowing it to snap open or closed. There shall be no fasteners required for installation of the cover and the cover shall be keyed for easy removal by rocking the cover to a horizontal position and sliding to the side. The duct cover shall not be removable unless the cover is in the horizontal position.

.3 The horizontal channel shall be comprised of two pieces, the cable management panel and hinged cover. The horizontal channel shall be 2U with 3-channel depths available for patch cords.

.4 The horizontal channels shall be manufactured of 1/4" steel rod for rigidity. Flat steel channel rings shall not be acceptable.

.5 The horizontal channel base shall have six (6) pass-through holes to allow patch cords to connect at the rear at the hubs.

.6 The pass-through holes shall be rolled edge design to prevent cable chafing. Rubber or plastic grommets shall not be used.

.7 The horizontal channel shall provide for a rear cable organizer. The rear cable organizer shall clip to the rear of the panel without the use of tools or additional fasteners. The rear cable organizer shall provide for the attachment of a cable channel equal to the channel cover used on the front.

.8 Provide vertical rings and transition spools to manage patch cords as they exit the horizontal channel.

.9 Approved Manufacture: Hubbell Premise Wiring Part Number HC219CE3N, 2U Horizontal duct style channel/hinged cover 3.5" deep.

.4 Cabinets: .1 Wall mounted cabinets shall be 16 gauge cold rolled steel, formed and

welded construction. The cabinet body sides shall have clusters of rectangular perforations to accommodate adequate ventilation for the enclosed equipment. The top and bottom of the cabinet body shall also have a circular cut with a removable cover plate for mounting of an optional 250 CFM cooling fan. The cabinet shall be symmetrical in design to allow front and rear doors to open both left or right.



.2 The rear door shall consists of 16 gauge cold rolled steel, formed and welded construction with a double bent flange along the door's entire perimeter. There shall be two (2) pairs of wall mounting holes located at the upper and lower surface of the door, spaced at 16" on centre for mounting to studded wall construction. The top and bottom edges of the rear door shall each have three (3) hole cut-outs (3" in diameter) with removable plastic covers, along with two (2) double ring knock out holes for 1.12" or 0.88" through hole openings. The rear door shall be symmetrical in design to allow for reverse mounting. The door shall be locking with a unique key to operate the rear door only.

.3 The front door shall be made of 16 gauge cold rolled steel, formed and welded construction with a double bent flange along the door's entire perimeter. The door shall be available with a framed window, with 0.125" thick acrylic panel secured to a reinforced steel frame. The door shall be locking, with a unique operator's key, which operates the front door only.

.4 The wall cabinet shall be pre-configured for 19" mounting with #12-24 tapped holes, 5/8", 5/8", 1/2" EIA standard hole pattern. The 19" mounting rails shall be constructed of 11 gauge cold rolled steel. Mounting rails shall also be fully adjustable from front to back of the cabinet.

.5 The entire cabinet shall be finished with a durable polyurethane powder coat, medium texture, and be available in black or office white.

.6 Weight: Load capacity of the cabinet shall be 150 lbs.

.7 Approved Manufacturer: Hubbell Premise Wiring MCC 48.

2.6 Wireless Access (Separate Price)

.1 The Communications Contractor shall supply and install twelve (12) Wireless

Access Points at each school. Each access point shall be supplied with a Silver PCMCIA card. Access points shall be installed in the ceiling space and at designated locations. 120V receptacles will be provided by the Electrical Contractor. The Communications contractor shall supply and install one (1) Cat. 5e data drip adjacent to each Access Point as part of this Contract. The locations of the Access Points are, as follows: .1 Ground Floor:

.1 Grid lines E-10

.2 Grid lines C-8

.3 Grid lines C-5

.4 Grid lines F-3



.5 Grid lines H-5

.6 Grid lines J-8

.2 Second Floor: .1 At same grid locations as on Ground Floor.

.2 Wireless Access points shall be Avaya High Performance Wireless Access Point

Model AP-3. .1 Features:

.1 5 GHz migration platform

.2 Extended MIB's and taps

.3 TFTP kernel upload

.4 Access Control Table and Radius Authentication

.5 Link integrity

.6 Static MAC filtering

.7 Protocol filtering

.8 DHCP support (client and server)

.9 Telnet/CLI (embedded in the box)

.10 Wireless Distribution Centre

.11 SpctraLink VolP Support

.12 802.1x support (auto key management, certificate authorization)

.13 Load balancing

.14 Spanning Tree Protocol

.15 Multi/Broadcast storm filtering

.2 Interface: .1 Ethernet Interface: 10/100 base- Ethernet (RJ-45) .2 Wireless Interface: 1 CardBus Slot for radio NIC .3 RS-232: Unit configuration

.3 Hardware Specifications:

.1 Processor: Intel SA110-233 Mhz

.2 Memory: 16 MB SDRAM, 8 MB Flash

.4 Physical Specifications: .1 Dimensions: 50 mm x 185 mm x 261 mm (2.0" x 7.3" x 10.2") .2 Weight: 1.75 kg (3.86 lbs)

.5 Environmental Specifications:

.1 Operating Temperature: 0°C to 40°C

.2 Operating Humidity: 95% (non-condensing)

.3 Operating Pressure: 740 - 1050 hPa

.4 Storage Temperature: -10°C to 50°C

.5 Storage Humidity: 95% (non-condensing)

.6 Power Supply: Autosensing 100/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 0.2A



.7 Mechanical Specification: .1 Modular design .2 Plastic cover .3 Metal mounting plate that allows for placement on a wall, ceiling or

table

.8 LED's: Four (4) LED's, indicating, as follows: .1 Power .2 Ethernet LAN Activity .3 Wireless Activity Slot A .4 Wireless Activity Slot B

.3 PC cards shall be Avaya Gold PCMCIA wireless cards with the following

specifications: .1 Frequency Band: 2400 - 2483.5 MHz .2 Number of Selectable Sub-Channels: USA (FCC) 11 .3 Modulation Technique: Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (CCK,

DQPSK, DBPSK) .4 Spreading: 11-chip Barker sequence .5 Bit Error Rate: Better than 10-5 .6 Media Access Protocol: CSMA/CA (Collision Avoidance) with ACK .7 Interface: PC card, ISA, PCI .8 Dimensions: 117.8 mm x 53.95 mm x 8.7 mm (PC Card) .9 Receiver Sensitivity dBm: -82@11Mbit/s .10 Delay Speed (at FER of <1%): 65 ns .11 Output Power: 15 dBm .12 Power Consumption:

.1 Doze Mode: 9 mA

.2 Receiver Mode: 185 mA

.3 Transmit Mode: 285 mA

.13 Temperature Range (operational): 0-55°C, 95% Humidity (non-condensing)

.14 Compatibility: Novell Client 3.x & 4.x, Windows 95/98/2000 and NT (NDIS MJiniport Driver), Apple, Winders CE

.15 Standards: IEEE 802.11b

.16 Warranty: three (3) years

2.7 Communication System Hangers .1 Hangers where noted shall be complete with the following features:

.1 Be approximately 150 mm (6”) high by 80 mm (3-1/4”) protrusion.

.2 Be constructed from 5 mm (3/16”) x 20 mm (3/4”) flat steel bar and formed to resemble the letter “G”.



.3 Seven (7) 6 mm (1/4”) diameter mounting holes are to be provided around the hanger perimeter.

.4 Matt black finish.

.5 Suitable for wall or suspended mounting.

.6 Base Bid: EMF Cat #H-533-S Contact: Electron Metal Fabricators Inc. 1215 Montee de Liease Montreal, Quebec H4S 1J7 Ph: 514-333-8064, Fx: 514-331-0793

.7 Approved Alternate: .1 Wiremold Cat #GH030406

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation .1 Faceplates:

.1 Jacks and/or connectors shall be terminated to the appropriate cable and inserted in the correct orientation into the faceplate prior to the mounting of the faceplate.

.2 Cable stack shall be stored behind the faceplate is such a way that allows the minimum bend radius of the cables to be maintained as per the following: .1 Fibre Optic Cable: minimum of 3 foot (1 m) stack with a minimum

bend radius of 1.18 inches (30 mm). .2 UTP Cable: minimum of 1 foot (.3 m) stack with a minimum bend

radius of four (4) times the cable diameter .3 Care shall taken when mounting the faceplate to avoid crimping or

kinking the cables.

.3 Faceplates shall be securely mounted to a surface mounted housing, as recessed box or box eliminator bracket.

.4 Faceplates shall be labelled with the appropriate port designations as per the EIA/TIA 606 Standards.



.2 Category 3 and 5e Jacks - UTP: .1 Jacks shall be installed to provide minimal signal impairment by

preserving wire pair twists as closely as possible to the point of mechanical termination. The amount of untwisting in a pair as a result of termination to the jack IDC shall be no greater than 0.5 inches (13 mm).

.2 Jacks shall be installed according to manufacturer's instructions and properly mounted in plates, frames, housings or other appropriate mounting device.

.3 Jacks shall be installed such that cables terminate to the jacks maintain a minimum bend radius of four (4) times the cable diameter into the IDC contacts. Cables shall be terminated on jacks such that there is no tension on the conductors in the termination contacts.

.3 Category 5e Cable: .1 Cable shall be installed to provide minimal signal impairment by

preserving wire pair twists as closely as possible to the point of mechanical termination. The amount of untwisting in a pair as a result of termination shall be no greater than 0.5 inches (13 mm).

.2 Cables shall be installed according to the manufacturer's instructions.

.3 Cables shall be installed such that cables maintain a minimum bend radius of four (4) times the cable diameter. Cables shall be terminated in such a way that there is no tension on the conductors in the termination contacts.

.4 Cables shall be properly labelled on front and back with the cable number and port connections for each port.

.5 Cables shall be installed in one (1) continuous length unless specified in the Contract Documents.

.6 Adhere to TIA Standard requirements regarding pulling tension and allowable lubricants.

.7 The Contractor shall assume the responsibility for any difficulties or damage to the cable during placement.

.8 Contractor shall provide Owner with all installed cable measurements.

.9 Firestop all openings where cable is installed through a fire rated separation.


ELECTRICAL Telecommunications Cabling System Section 16540 Project No. 09019 Page 23 3.2 Testing

.1 The Communications Contractor shall perform a full Cat. 5e test for every data

drop installed. Testers to be used shall be Microtest Omniscanner or Fluke DSP 4000.

.2 Upon completion of testing, the Consultant may require the Contractor to perform random tests of up to 30% of the cables. A penalty of $500.00 will be deducted from the Contract amount for each cable that fails the test.

.3 All tests shall be in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA 568B.1, Section 11, Cabling Transmission Performance and Test Requirements.

.4 Category 5e Field Test Parameters shall be: .1 Wiremap .2 Insertion Loss .3 Equal-level far end cross talk (ELFEXT) .4 Power sum Equal-level far end cross talk (PSELFEXT) .5 Propagation delay .6 Length .7 Near end cross talk (NEXT) .8 Power sum near end cross talk (NEXT) .9 Return loss .10 Delay skew

.5 Category 3 voice cables shall be tested for:

.1 Continuity

.2 Shorts

.3 Opens

.4 Grounds

.5 Correct polarity

.6 Length

.6 Jacks shall be tested as part of the installed horizontal cabling system.

.7 Using an approved Level IIe tester for Category 5e channel compliance, Category 5e jacks shall be tested as part of the channel for: .1 Length .2 DC continuity .3 NEXT .4 PSNEXT .5 Attenuation .6 Return Loss .7 ELFEXT .8 PSELFEXT



.8 Using an approved Level II tester for Category 3 channel compliance, Category 3 jacks shall be tested as part of the channel for: .1 Length .2 DC continuity .3 NEXT .4 Attenuation

.9 A "Pass" indication shall be obtained for all link or channel tests when tested

using the appropriate level tester for the appropriate Category.

.10 Testers shall be correctly set to test the type and manufacturer of the horizontal cables used in the link or channel tested, including the correct NVP.

.11 Testing of fibre optic backbone cables shall be completed in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA 568B.1. Section 11.3, Optical Fiber Transmission Performance and Test Requirements.

.12 Link attenuation shall be calculated as: Link Attenuation = cable attenuation + connector insertion loss + splice insertion loss.

.13 SPLICING OF CABLES WILL NOT BE PERMITTED FOR ANY REASON.

3.3 Test Results .1 Test results shall be submitted in electronic form. Electronic reports shall be

submitted on CD, formatted in a Windows based database (Microsoft Excel is acceptable). All electronic reports must be accompanied by a certificate signed by an Authorized Representative of the Company, warranting the truth and accuracy of the electronic report.

.2 The test result documentation shall be submitted to the Consultant no later than ten (10) working days following the completion of the installation.

3.4 As-Built Drawings


.2 This Contractor shall maintain an updated copy of as-built drawing on site at all

times.

.3 At the end of the project, this Contractor shall obtain AutoCAD files with the Consultant and update them with the work performed by this Section. This shall provide one (1) electronic copy of updated as-built drawings and three (3) sets of prints.



.4 As-built drawings shall be submitted to the Consultant no later than 10 working days following the completion of the installation.

3.5 Warranty .1 The Communications Cabling Contractor will be required to provide a (twenty-

five) 25 year Manufacturer's Extended Component Warranty and an Application Assurance Warranty for the entire communications cabling system. Warranty shall be in effect from the date of Substantial Completion, as certified by Consultant.

.2 The Communications Cabling Contractor shall provide certification number within two (2) weeks of award of the Contract.

.3 The Communications Cabling Contractor shall provide a Letter of Certification within two (2) weeks of Substantial Completion. The document shall include the following: .1 Verification of the performance of the installed system .2 Manufacturer's Certification Number .3 Identification of the installation by location and project number.


ELECTRICAL Fire Alarm System Section 16600 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Work

.1 General Provisions: Section 16010 .2 Basic Materials & Methods: Section 16300 .3 Wiring for Mechanical Equipment: Section 16700

1.2 Submittals .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 16010.

.1 Include the following details: .1 A complete description of the system operation .2 A complete description of each system component

.2 Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

.1 Provide Data to be incorporated into the maintenance manual specified herein including the following: .1 Operation and maintenance instructions for the complete Fire

Alarm system to permit its effective operation and maintenance .2 Technical data and illustrated parts lists with part numbers .3 A copy of the final reviewed shop drawings

1.3 Scope of Work .1 Division 16 shall disconnect at source, make safe and remove in its entirety the

existing Mircom 1000 Series fire alarm system.

.2 Division 16 shall ensure and maintain the integrity of the existing Fire Alarm System in such a way that its demolition is staged to provide fire alarm protection in areas of the facility during installation of new fire alarm system.

.3 Division 16 shall supply and install all equipment and accessories in order to provide a complete electrically supervised non-coded, zoned, fully addressable Fire Alarm System based on the Mircom FX-2000 Analog Fire Alarm Control Panel as described herein and as shown on the drawings.

.4 On completion of the installation, the manufacturers representative shall check the system proper operation and issue a Verification Certificate

.5 The installing contractor shall retain an independent qualified contractor to verify the system on completion of the installation.

.6 The complete installation shall conform to the applicable sections of Local, Provincial Building Codes and all other applicable codes and standards.


ELECTRICAL Fire Alarm System Section 16600 Project No. 09019 Page 2 1.4 Acceptable Manufacturers

.1 Proposed systems may differ from that specified herein and indicated on the

Drawings provided that complete documentation of the system is submitted to the Consultant for evaluation and approval ten (10) working days prior to Tender closing. This Division shall assume all changes in costs that may flow from the design changes proposed.

1.5 Codes & Standards .1 System Control Unit: CAN/ULC-S527.

.2 System Installation: CAN/ULC-S524.

.3 System Verification: CAN/ULC-S537.

.4 Inspection & Testing: ULC-S536.

.5 Audible Signal Appliances Standard ULC-S525.

.6 Visual Indicating Devices, ULC-S526

.7 Manual Actuated Signalling Boxes Standard, ULC-528.

.8 Smoke Detectors Standard, ULC-S529.

.9 Heat Actuated Fire Detectors Standard, CAN/ULC-S530.

.10 NBC-2005, OBC-2006: National and Ontario Building Codes

.11 All components supplied under this contract shall be CSA and/or ULC approved

and labelled and acceptable to all authorities having jurisdiction.

1.6 System Operation .1 The system shall be designed as a supervised fully addressable, zoned,

non-coded, annunciated, single stage, local Fire Alarm System.

.2 While the Fire Alarm System is being powered by normal AC power, the "POWER ON" indicator shall be energized as long as the system is free from supervised fault.

.3 Operation of any alarm initiating device (including sprinkler flow switches) shall: .1 Cause an alarm to lock into the system. .2 Indicate the initiating zone in the control panel and remote annunciator.


ELECTRICAL Fire Alarm System Section 16600 Project No. 09019 Page 3

.3 Sound signal on all audible signal appliances continuously.

.4 Cause the auxiliary contacts to activate on all relays for fan shutdown and elevator homing.

.5 Alert the central monitoring station or local Fire Department.

.4 Operation of any standpipe (sprinkler) system supervisory devices shall: .1 Cause a trouble alarm to lock into the system. .2 Indicate the supervisory zone on the control panel and remote

annunciator. .3 Sound all audible trouble signals at the control panel and remote

annunciator. .4 Alert the central monitoring station or local Fire Department.

.5 The signals shall be automatically silenced after they have sounded for five

minutes.

.6 Signals shall be capable of being manually silenced only at the control panel after the signals have sounded for at least one minute after the initial alarm. When signals are manually silenced, a fire alarm "SIGNALS SILENCED" indicator shall illuminate, the trouble signal shall pulse, and the trouble indicator shall flash.

.7 When all initiating and supervisory devices have been restored to their normal condition, the Fire Alarm System shall be reset by pressing a reset button in the control panel.

.8 Any open or short circuit condition in any field wiring shall: .1 Cause a trouble alarm to lock into the system. .2 Indicate the trouble zone, illuminate a "System Trouble" indicator, and

sound the trouble alarm at the control panel, and at the remote annunciator.

.9 Any ground fault condition in any field wiring shall: .1 Cause a trouble alarm to lock into the system. .2 Illuminate "System Trouble" and "Ground Fault" indicators, and sound the

trouble alarm at the control panel and at the remote annunciator.

.10 A subsequent alarm or trouble from another initiating, supervisory or signal circuit on the system shall re-activate the respective alarm or trouble sequence.

.11 In addition to the above, the following conditions shall also initiate the trouble sequence: .1 Loss of main power (AC or DC) .2 Standby power system trouble (battery, battery charger) .3 Remote annunciator trouble .4 Open in wiring to central monitoring station .5 Central monitoring station disconnected .6 Removal of any control panel modules



.12 The control panel shall provide an interface between the operator, the remote initiating devices, the audible signal appliances and the auxiliary output circuits.

.13 The Fire Alarm common control shall provide the following operator system indicators and controls: .1 Primary power on LED .2 Secondary power on LED .3 Alarm .4 System on Standby LED .5 Standby trouble LED .6 Ground fault LED .7 Remote annunciator trouble LED .8 System trouble LED .9 System trouble silence switch. The system shall provide a subsequent

trouble feature, to resound the trouble signal, if silenced. .10 Alarm signal silence switch and alarm signals silenced LED (amber)

illuminates when the alarm signals are silenced automatically or manually. The system shall provide a subsequent alarm feature to resound the alarm signals, if silenced.

.11 Fire Department/common contact disconnected LED(amber) disconnect switch and alert/activated LED (red).

.12 Lamp test switch

.13 System reset switch

.14 The system shall provide an "Automatic/Manual switch" to select the mode of operation of the auxiliary circuits. An alarm on the system in the "Automatic" mode shall cause the auxiliary relays to operate as specified. An alarm on the system in the "Manual" mode shall inhibit the programmed operation of the auxiliary relays. Each relay circuit shall be provided with a manual on/off selector switch to provide the operator with exclusive control of the programmed auxiliary circuit(s). Each auxiliary relay shall be provided with a circuit status indicator. .1 All auxiliary relays shall be programmed to be by-passed by the "Fire

Department/common contact disconnect" switch.

.2 All auxiliary relays shall be by-passed by the "Common auxiliary relay by-pass" switch.

.3 The system shall include a customer connect module complete with IC alarm contact and IC trouble contact and also provide a contact operation to transmit an alarm signal to the central monitoring station.


ELECTRICAL Fire Alarm System Section 16600 Project No. 09019 Page 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Fire Alarm Control Panel

.1 System Control Unit:

.1 The system control unit shall be a fully addressable Mircom Series FX-2000, programmed for single stage operation. The control unit shall contain the microprocessor system operating software and non-volatile programmed memory. The unit shall be used to process all system information. Locate the new panel at the location of the existing panel-to be removed at the appropriate time.

.2 The system control shall contain four (4) analog loop base. Loop wiring shall be via a twisted, non-shielded pair with wire gauge to be determined by the following: Max. 40 ohms loop resistance and Max. of 0.5uf capacitance. Each loop shall be capable of communicating with up to 99 addressable sensor devices and 99 monitor output devices(198 points per loop). Provide a separate power circuit and disconnect switch or breaker-clearly identified as required- for the 110 VAC primary power source, fuse - breaker 15A. Locate in close proximity to the control panel.

.3 Store all system functionality and job specific data in non-volatile memory. System is to survive a complete power failure intact.

.4 System control unit shall be capable of supporting up to sixteen (16) conventional hardwired adder modules (any combination of signal. Detection or relay modules) and/or fifteen (15) analog loops.

.5 Provide a LCD Display Module of membrane style construction with a 4 line by 20 character Liquid Crystal Display. Use supertwist LCD technology and backlighting for high contrast visual clarity. In normal mode display the time, date, system condition and user definable message.

.6 Battery back up: Perform required battery calculation and size the batteries to support the system for 24 hours in standby mode and in full alarm mode for 2 hours. Batteries may be housed within the control panel or in a separate enclosure mounted adjacent to the control panel.



.7 Provide visual indicators for the following common control functions: AC Power, alarm, supervisory, monitor, trouble, disable, and ground fault. Provide common control keys and visual indicators for reset, alarm, signal silence, trouble silence, fire drill and two custom programmable key/indicators. Provide an ACTIVE GRAPHIC annunciator complete with the required number of LED indicators positioned in to each zone as outlined on the colour coded architectural building layout. Provide key operated switches for remote operation of the panel as outlined above, along with common system status indicator LED's. Ensure that this complete assembly is fully approved and excepted by the AHJ before proceeding to manufacture.

2.2 Expansion Modules .1 The ALC-198S Single Analog loop Controller Module provides an additional

analog loop to the FX-2000 consisting of 99 Analog Sensors and 99 Addressable Modules. Total of 4 required.

.2 The ALC-396S Dual Analog loop Controller Module provides an additional two (2) analog loops to the FX-2000 consisting of 99 Analog Sensors and 99 Addressable Module

.3 The ALC-H16 Hardwired loop controller module allows the FX-2000 to support an additional sixteen (16) conventional hardwired adder modules. The hardwired modules are explained herein. Use only if supporting non addressable devices.

2.3 Detection Devices .1 General: Setting a device shall be by a physical means. Use of rotary dial

switches shall be used to set the address of each device. Devices that use electronic or binary addressing or require the use of special programmers will not be accepted.

.2 Addressable Manual Station: The addressable Manual Station shall be a Mircom series MS-400AD. The series 400 shall be constructed of red finished aluminum with rotary switches at the back to set the device address. Reset of the station shall be accomplished via a 1/8" screwdriver inserted from the front. Model MS-401AD single stage, single action shall be used for standard applications. For systems requiring an additional alarm contact (non-addressable) within the pull station (i.e. for door release or other type of auxiliary function) models MS-405AD (single stage with additional N.O. switch) or MS-407AD (single stage with additional N.C. switch) shall be used as appropriate.



.3 Addressable Heat Detectors: .1 The heat detector shall be a Mircom model MIX-5251RA.

.2 The unit will have rotary switches for setting the device address.

.3 The unit shall contain a dual thermistor sensing circuit to ensure rapid

response to ensure activation after the required 15 degree F per minute temperature rise.

.4 The detector sensing area shall permit 50 foot spacing (2500 ft² ) between units in open area applications. The unit shall mount on a standard model MIX-B210LPA addressable device base.

.4 Smoke detectors: .1 The smoke detector shall be one of the models listed below as required

and as specified on the project plans

.2 Model MIX-1551BA addressable smoke detector, uses the ionization principle for smoke detection. The unit shall be capable of communicating its status (i.e. alarm, dirty sensor) and adjust its parameters (under control of the FX-2000 panel) to meet various environmental conditions. The detector contains the rotary switches for address setting and shall mount on one of the bases listed below (as required for the particular project or as specified in the plans).

.3 Model MIX-2551BA addressable smoke detector, uses the photo-electric principle for smoke detection. As described above, the unit shall be capable of communicating and controlling its status. The unit shall contain rotary switches for address setting and shall mount on one of the bases listed below as specified on the plans.

.4 Addressable bases (for use with plug-in type smoke detectors described above): .1 Model MIX-B210LPA standard addressable base

.2 Model B224RBA addressable base with relay

.3 Model B224BIA addressable base with isolator (see description of

M500X fault module following, for details of isolator operation)

.5 Addressable Duct Smoke Detectors: .1 Model MIX-DH200PLA intelligent photoelectric duct smoke detector

.2 Model MIX-DH200RPLA intelligent photoelectric duct smoke detector with

2 Form C relay contacts



.3 Sampling tubes shall be the ST series available in 1.5, 3, 5, or 10 foot lengths. as required

.6 Beam Smoke Detectors: .1 Model Beam 1224(S) Series

.2 Complete with alarm, normal, trouble, indicators, test/reset features,

alignment aid, protective cages on both beam detector and reflector.

.3 Beam detector to be mounted within high gymnasium ceiling, between structural steel beams and trusses, in such a was that beam is protected against nuisance trips from flying objects during normal gymnasium activities.

.7 Addressable Point Modules: .1 MIX-M500MA Monitor Module:

.1 Monitor module MIX-M500MA shall be used when one or more normally open (N.O.) conventional initiating devices is required to be addressable

.2 One address per MIX-M500MA, (regardless of the number of devices connected to it). The devices shall wire to the unit in a Class B or Class A configuration.

.3 The MIX-M500MA shall connect to the FX-2000 system via the address loop as any other addressable device, with the address set via the rotary switches on the unit and it shall mount on a standard 4 inch square electrical box.

.2 MIX-M502MA Monitor Module: .1 Monitor module MIX-502MA shall be similar to above but shall

allow the use of 2-wire smoke detectors (not addressable type) within the conventional device circuit. Use only to support non addressable devices.

.2 This will require an additional 2 wires from the FX-2000 panel or remote power supply for device power).

.3 MIX-M501MA Monitor Module: .1 Monitor module MIX-M501MA shall perform the identical function

of the MIX-M500MA but in a Class B device configuration only.

.2 The compact size of the MIX-M501MA shall allow the unit to be mounted within virtually any size electrical box..



.4 MIX-M500RA Intelligent Output Relay Module: .1 Output module MIX-M500RA shall be used if an addressable field

relay (form C contact) is required.

.2 The unit shall be capable of being programmed to operate under specified alarm and/or trouble conditions within the FX-2000 panel.

.3 The MIX-M500RA shall contain rotary switches for addressing and shall mount on a standard 4 inch square electrical box.

.5 MIX-M500SA Intelligent Supervised Output Module:

.6 M500X Fault Isolator Module: .1 Fault isolator module M500X (also referred to as an isolator

module) shall be used where required by code and indicated on the plans.

.2 On the address loop, the fault isolator shall provide isolation of short-circuited sections of the address loop, preventing the entire loop from becoming inoperable and allowing address devices and modules in the non affected sections to continue to function properly.

.3 The M500X shall mount on a standard 4 inch square electrical box. Note that the fault isolation function described here shall also be contained within the B524BIA smoke detector base described previously.

.7 End-of-Line Devices: .1 One-watt type resistors mounted within outlet boxes separate from

those for other devices at the locations indicated. Provide on the coverplate for each such device on approved nameplate, engraved "END-OF-LINE RESISTOR" or with an approved symbol. Provide red lamacoid plate with white 6 mm letters identifying zone. Applicable to all signal circuits.

2.4 Fire Alarm Audio/Visual Signals .1 Mircom-MT Series 241575W-FR, Red colour, 75 cd suitable for wall or ceiling

mount complete with universal mounting plate


ELECTRICAL Fire Alarm System Section 16600 Project No. 09019 Page 10 2.5 Fire Alarm Audible Signals

.1 Use EXISTING signalling devices and associated wiring as specified on the

plans

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation .1 Installation in accordance with CAN/ULC-S524.

.2 Detectors shall be ceiling mounted unless indicated otherwise, and shall not be

installed on sides or underside of beams, joints, ducts, open-web steel joints or any structure etc., projecting below actual ceiling level.

.3 Remote annunciator shall be located 1800 mm AFF to top of tub.

.4 Air duct detectors shall be installed, as follows: .1 Accessible for maintenance .2 In main supply duct, downstream of any mixing boxes, filters and fans. .3 At the mid-point of a straight section of duct, a minimum of 3 times the

duct width from any bend.

Installation shall be co-ordinated with Division 15. .5 Audible signal appliances shall be alternately connected to each of the signal

circuits on the floor i.e. consecutive or neighbouring signal appliances shall not be on the same signal circuit.

.6 Confirm mounting details of visual signal appliances before ordering.

.7 Install end-of-line in accessible locations and label accordingly.

3.2 Wiring .1 System wiring shall be reviewed with Manufacturer prior to installation.

.2 All wiring shall be installed to conform with the requirements of the Canadian

Electrical Code, Part I; Ontario Hydro Supplement Electrical Safety Code and Ontario Building Code.

.3 Wiring shall be sized in accordance with Class 2 requirements, but shall be protected from mechanical injury or other injurious conditions, such as moisture, excessive heat, or corrosive action, in accordance with Class 1 requirements.



.4 Conductor shall be solid copper. The minimum size of any conductor shall be: .1 For alarm receiving circuits #14 AWG. In no case shall the wire

resistance in these circuits exceed 50 ohms. .2 Temperature rating of cable shall be 90°C.

.5 Provide terminal cabinets, complete with terminal blocks for wiring convenience

at various junction points in the system where recommended by the manufacturer.

.6 All conductors shall be cut at each station, detector and signalling device and connections shall be made in the approved manner to ensure proper supervision of the wiring, using four screws

3.3 Initiating & Supervisory Zones .1 Install and connect initiating devices and circuits to suit new initiating alarm

zones as shown on Plans.

.2 Install and connect supervisory devices and circuits to suit new supervisory zones as shown on Plans.

3.4 Verification of Fire Alarm Equipment .1 The Manufacturer shall make an inspection of the new Fire Alarm System.

.2 The inspection shall comprise an examination for the following:

.1 That the type of equipment installed is as designated by the Specifications.

.2 That the wiring connections to all equipment components show that the installer observed ULC and CSA requirements.

.3 That the Manufacturer's equipment has been installed in accordance with their recommendations, and that all signalling devices, have been operated or tested to verify their operation.

.4 That the supervisory wiring of those items of equipment connected to a supervised circuit is operating, and that the governmental regulations, if any, concerning such supervisory wiring, have been met to the satisfaction of inspection officials.

.5 The inspection and verification shall conform to CAN/ULC-S537.



.6 Check the presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices. Record dBA levels of tones and report all readings measuring below 65 dBA or above 100 BA, when measured 3 metres from device.

.3 The Manufacturer shall supply to the Electrical Contractor, reasonable amounts of technical assistance with respect to any changes necessary for the work to conform to Points 1 to 6 above.

.4 Provide electricians as designated and required by the Manufacturer during the period of inspection.

3.5 Inspection Certificate .1 On completion of the inspection and when all of the above conditions have been

complied with, the Manufacturer shall issue to the Consultant, the following: .1 A copy of the Inspecting Technician's report showing locations of each

device and certifying the test results of each device.

.2 A Certificate of Verification confirming that the inspection has been completed and showing the conditions upon which such inspection and certification have been rendered.

.3 Proof of Liability Insurance for the inspection.

3.6 Inspection Costs .1 Include all costs related to this inspection and verification.

3.7 System Demonstration & Training .1 Provide full demonstration of system operation by Manufacturer's technical

representative to local Fire Prevention Bureau, Owner and Consultant.

.2 Provide training for Owner and Owner's representative in system operation and maintenance.

3.8 The Halton District School Board will, after the One year warranty period, be reviewing the placement of a Service Contract. Accordingly, as a condition of the Division 16 Scope of Work, there is a requirement that the Fire Alarm Supplier wishing to quote on this project, place a letter on file that the labour charges common to such arranged Service Contracts be no different from the labour charge now common to such contracts or proposals for the servicing and maintenance of the Halton District School Board's present fire alarm systems.


ELECTRICAL Wiring for Mechanical Equipment Section 16700 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Work

.1 General Provisions: Section 15010 .2 General Provisions: Section 16010 .3 Disconnect Switches: Section 16255 .4 Basic Materials & Methods: Section 16300 .5 Motor Starters: Section 16470 .6 Fire Alarm Systems: Section 16600

1.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere .1 Other Divisions supplying motor-driven equipment shall supply and install all

necessary motors with such equipment. All internal control wiring in such equipment shall be factory installed, or shall be supplied and installed by those supplying the equipment.

1.3 Scope of Work .1 This Division is responsible for the following:

.1 Supply and installation of all starters, disconnect switches, pushbutton stations, splitter troughs, junction boxes and time switches, etc., as listed on attached Mechanical Equipment Wiring Schedule.

.2 Installation and wiring of all separately mounted thermostats, motor controllers and control units which are supplied by Division 15.

.3 Supply and installation of all motor control centres, unless noted otherwise.

.4 Supply and installation of all power wiring and conduits from the distribution panel through the starter and disconnect switch onto the motor (or equipment).

.5 Supply and installation of all control wiring only from remote switches or pushbutton stations to control starters.

.6 Supply and installation of all wiring to provide interlocking between starters complete with necessary double voltage relays.

.7 Supply and installation of transient (surge) suppressors on holding coils of magnetic starters, relays, etc., where indicated for protection to solid state equipment that is sensitive to surges, spikes, etc.


ELECTRICAL Wiring for Mechanical Equipment Section 16700 Project No. 09019 Page 2

.8 Supply and installation of 120V power to Field Processing Units (FPU) is as specified, all wiring, conduits, equipment and connections for Energy Management System is by Section 15900.

1.4 Installation Details .1 Where two or more starters, disconnects or controllers etc., are to be mounted

together, except where MCC's are indicated, install the above equipment on a 3/4" (20 mm) thick, painted plywood board.

.2 Provide suitable connection blocks or connection buses for all splitter troughs to accommodate all wiring in the trough.

.3 For all interlocking between starters, provide double voltage relays and wire through same.

.4 Protect thermostats which are installed under this Division until final temperature balancing by Division 15.

.5 Test and energize all motors only under direction of the Division supplying the equipment.

.6 Refer to attached Mechanical Equipment Wiring Schedule for all details of equipment.

.7 Refer to Division 15 drawings and specifications during tendering and construction to ensure entire mechanical equipment wiring scope of work is understood.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Starters .1 See Section 16470 - Motor Starters.

2.2 Disconnects .1 See Section 16255, Disconnect Switches - Fused & Non-Fused.


ELECTRICAL Wiring for Mechanical Equipment Section 16700 Project No. 09019 Page 3 2.3 Time Switches

.1 Time switches are to be seven-day, 24 hours of Tork, Paragon of Intermatic

manufacture and all are to have a reserve spring to provide for at least ten (10) hours of time switch operation following power failure.

.2 All time switches supplied for this project are to be of one manufacturer.

2.4 Motor Connections .1 Liquid-tight flexible metal Sealtite conduit with T & B steel connectors is to be

used for final connections to all motors and all loads greater than 500 Watts. Kellems Sealtite Conduit Grips are to be provided at both ends of the Sealtite conduit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation .1 Install and wire all starters, disconnects, timers and miscellaneous controls for

motor-driven equipment as listed in attached Mechanical Equipment Wiring Schedule and as listed on the Division 15 drawings and specifications.

.2 All starters in finished areas to be flush mounted.

3.2 Mounting of Disconnect Switches .1 Disconnect switches are to be installed adjacent to the associated motor or

equipment. Where this switch cannot be installed on the equipment, supply and install a suitable angle iron bracket supported from the floor.

3.3 Wiring .1 All power wiring to all mechanical equipment listed on the attached Schedule and

shown on drawings is the responsibility of this Division.

.2 The responsibility for supply, installation and wiring of control devices is as stated in the attached legend and Mechanical Equipment Wiring Schedule.


ELECTRICAL Wiring for Mechanical Equipment Section 16700 Project No. 09019 Page 4 3.4 Wiring Diagrams

.1 The information shown in this Specification and on the drawings is for quoting

purposes only. Division 15 shall provide for installation purposes, detailed wiring diagrams for all equipment supplied by them. No rough-in of conduit, etc. shall be carried out until complete information is obtained.

.2 Review preliminary wiring diagrams submitted by Division 15. Communicate all questions and comments in an expedient manner to assist Division 15 in preparation of diagrams.

3.5 Mechanical Equipment Start-Up .1 Prior to start-up, check all wiring, fuse sizes, overloads, interlocks, etc., and verify

that installation is correct. Make revisions as required.

.2 Submit information regarding the installation to Division 15 as required in order to enable then to complete the associated "Equipment Start-Up and Acceptance Check List".

.3 Co-operate with Division 15 in completing the form and sign said form in the space provided. Refer to Section 15010, Start-Up and Instruction.

.4 Be present and provide assistance when equipment is started up by Division 15.

3.6 Mechanical Equipment Wiring Schedule .1 The mechanical equipment to be wired is as indicated on the attached equipment

schedule, and as shown on the Drawings.

.2 The designations (D15) and (D16) appear adjacent items throughout the equipment schedule. These designation indicate variations in the supply, installation and wiring of items.

.3 Where the designation (D15) appears in the schedule, the item adjacent is supplied and installed by Division 15. Division 16 wires the item.

.4 Where the designation (D16) appears in the schedule, the item adjacent is supplied by Division 15. Division 16 installs and wires the item.

.5 Where items appear on the schedule which have no such designation adjacent, the item is supplied, installed and wired completely by Division 16.


ELECTRICAL Wiring for Mechanical Equipment Section 16700 Project No. 09019 Page 5

.6 The term FPU (field processor unit) is used in the schedule to indicate interfacing or interlocking requirements between the Monitoring and Control system (MCS) and the electrical power and starter control systems of mechanical equipment.

.7 Where FPU/SS appears on the schedule for equipment controlled by magnetic or combination starters, ensure appropriate terminals are provided in the starter control circuit, so Division 15 can wire in remote start/stop contacts.

.8 Where the term FPU/SS appears on the schedule for equipment controlled by manual starters, provide a DVR and connect the DVR coil in parallel with the manual starter/load combination. Further provide and wire a junction box adjacent to the DVR so that Division 15 can wire in remote start/stop contacts in series with the DVR coil (to switch coil). Wire the DVR output contacts in series with manual starter and load (to switch load).

.9 Where the term FPU/ST appears on the schedule for equipment controlled by magnetic or combination starters, provide starter auxiliary contacts. Division 15 shall wire in to auxiliary contacts.

.10 Where the term FPU/ST appears on the schedule for equipment controlled by manual starter, provide a DVR complete with 2 NO and 2 NC contacts, and connect the coil in parallel with the load. Division 15 shall wire in and connect to DVR contacts.

.11 Where current sensing relays (CSR) are indicated in the schedule, Division 15 shall provide solid state current sensing relays. Install and wire the relays. Provide suitable junction boxes adjacent the starter for mounting the relays if required and for terminating relay wiring for connection by Division 15 to the MCS.


ELECTRICAL Wiring for Mechanical Equipment Section 16700 Project No. 09019 Page 6 LEGEND FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING SCHEDULE AM - Actuator Motor APS - Air Proving Switch AST - Aquastat BAS or MCS or EMCS - Building Automation System BIC - Built In Control C1 - EEMAC-1 Type Disc. Switch C2 - EEMAC-2 Type Disc. Switch C3R - EEMAC-3R Type Disc. Switch C4 - EEMAC-4 Type Disc. Switch C12 - EEMAC-12 Type Disc. Switch COMB - Combination Magnetic Starter CP - Control Panel CSR - Current Sensing Relay CT - Control Transformer CWSV - Cold Water Solenoid Valve (D15) - Item adjacent is supplied and installed by

Division 15. Division 16 wires item. (D16) - Item adjacent is supplied by Division 15. Division 16 installs and wires item. DM - Damper Motor DMSW - Damper Motor Switch DVR - Double Voltage Relay FA - Fire Alarm System Connection FL - Float Switch FPU - Field Processor Unit by Div. 15900* FPU/SS - Start/Stop Control Output from FPU* FPU/ST - Motor Running Status Input to FPU* FS - Flow Switch GSV - Gas Solenoid Valve HOA - Hand/Off/Auto Switch in Starter Cover HUM - Humidistat HWSV - Hot Water Solenoid Valve IRS - Infrared Sensor KMSW - Key Operated Momentary Contact Switch KSW/PL - Key Switch (15A, 120V, SPST, Lock type c/w pilot light) LS - Level Switch * See "Mechanical Equipment Wiring

Schedule" Clause in Spec. Section 16700.

LWCO - Low Water Cut Off MAG - Magnetic Starter MAN - Manual Starter MCA - Minimum Circuit Amps MCC - Motor Control Centre MOCP - Maximum Over Current Protection MVS - Monitored Valve Switch ODT - Off Delay Timer PB - Pushbutton On/Off Switch in Starter Cover PL - Pilot Light in Starter Cover PLG - Plug PS - Pressure Switch RPB - Remote Start/Stop Pushbutton RPL - Remote Pilot Light SD - Smoke Detector (Duct Type) SS - Speed Switch SLS - Selector Switch and Pilot Light & PL SV - Solenoid Valve SW - HP rated toggle switch T - Thermostat or Temperature Sensing Unit TC - Temperature Controller TI - Timer (Interval) T7 - Timer (7-day) TRS - Thermostat Reversing Switch TS - Transient (surge) Suppressor across Starter Coil TOA - Test/Off/Auto Switch in Cover (Spring Return Test to Off) VM - Valve Motor

GEO

RG

ETO

WN

DIS

TRIC

T H

IGH

SC

HO

OL

- AD

DIT

ION

& R

ENO

VATI

ON

S - P

HA

SE 2

ELEC

TRIC

AL

Wiri

ng fo

r Mec

hani

cal E

quip

men

t Se

ctio

n 16

700

Proj

ect N

o. 0

9019

Page

7

WIR

ING

FO

R M

ECH

ANIC

AL E

QU

IPM

ENT

SCH

EDU

LE

EQU

IPM

ENT

MO

TOR

ST

AR

TER

ST

AR

TER

DEV

ICES

D

ISC

R

EMA

RK

S

DES

IGN

ATIO

N

USE

R

OO

M

HP

VOLT

S/Ø

R

OO

M

TYPE

R

EMO

TE

CO

NTR

OL

DEV

ICE

REM

OTE

EN

ERG

IZED

B

Y ST

AR

TER

TY

PE

INTE

RLO

CK

S

HR

U-2

0 H

EAT

REC

OVE

RY

UN

IT

(OU

TDO

OR

)

RO

OF

66 F

LA

28 M

CA

35 M

OC

P 57

5/3

BIC

BA

S

D15

Si

ngle

poi

nt c

onne

ctio

n an

d VF

D M

otor

RTA

C-2

0 R

OO

FTO

P A/

C U

NIT

RO

OF

26 F

LA

17.0

MC

A 20

.0 M

OC

P 57

5/3

CO

MB

HO

A PL

BAS

D

15

CU

-20

OU

TDO

OR

C

ON

DEN

SIN

G U

NIT

RO

OF

27 M

CA

30 M

OC

P 20

8/23

0/1

C

3R

Inte

rlock

uni

t with

DX-

20 b

y Se

ctio

n 15

900

RTH

V-20

H

EATI

NG

/ VE

NTI

LATI

NG

RO

OF

1.0

SUPP

LY

3.0

MC

A 15

.0 M

OC

P 57

5/3

BIC

BA

S

D15

DX-

20

IND

OO

R C

OO

LIN

G

UN

IT

E129

1.

3 M

CA

15 M

OC

P 20

8/1

C

1

Inte

rlock

uni

t with

CU

-20

by S

ectio

n 15

900

CU

-22

CO

ND

ENSI

NG

UN

IT

EXIS

TIN

G

MEC

H

PEN

THO

USE

28

.6 M

CA

80 M

OC

P 20

8/3

BIC

C

1 In

terlo

ck u

nit w

ith D

X-21

, -22

, -23

, -24

by

Sect

ion

1590

0.

GEO

RG

ETO

WN

DIS

TRIC

T H

IGH

SC

HO

OL

- AD

DIT

ION

& R

ENO

VATI

ON

S - P

HA

SE 2

ELEC

TRIC

AL

Wiri

ng fo

r Mec

hani

cal E

quip

men

t Se

ctio

n 16

700

Proj

ect N

o. 0

9019

Page

8

WIR

ING

FO

R M

ECH

ANIC

AL E

QU

IPM

ENT

SCH

EDU

LE

EQU

IPM

ENT

MO

TOR

ST

AR

TER

ST

AR

TER

DEV

ICES

D

ISC

R

EMA

RK

S

DES

IGN

ATIO

N

USE

R

OO

M

HP

VOLT

S/Ø

R

OO

M

TYPE

R

EMO

TE

CO

NTR

OL

DEV

ICE

REM

OTE

EN

ERG

IZED

B

Y ST

AR

TER

TY

PE

INTE

RLO

CK

S

RTA

C-2

1 R

OO

FTO

P A/

C U

NIT

RO

OF

16 F

LA

17.0

MC

A 20

.0 M

OC

P 57

5/3

CO

MB

HO

A PL

BAS

D

15

HR

U-2

1 H

EAT

REC

OVE

RY

UN

IT (I

ND

OO

R)

SUPP

LY F

AN

MEC

H R

M

15

575/

3

BIC

BAS

C

1

(D15

) In

terlo

ckin

g w

ith C

U-2

1 by

Sec

tion

1590

0.

Sing

le p

oint

con

nect

ion

and

VFD

Mot

or

HR

U-2

1 H

EAT

REC

OVE

RY

UN

IT (I

ND

OO

R)

RET

UR

N F

AN

MEC

H R

M

7.5

57

5/3

C

1

(D15

) In

terlo

ckin

g w

ith C

U-2

1 by

Sec

tion

1590

0.

HR

U-2

1 H

EAT

REC

OVE

RY

UN

IT (I

ND

OO

R)

ENTH

ALPY

W

HEE

L

MEC

H R

M

1.0

115/

1

C

1

(D15

) In

terlo

ckin

g w

ith C

U-2

1 by

Sec

tion

1590

0.

CU

-21

OU

TDO

OR

C

ON

DEN

SIN

G U

NIT

RO

OF

50 M

CA

70 M

OC

P 57

5/3

C

3R

Inte

rlock

ed w

ith H

RU

-21.

AHU

-20

AIR

HAN

DLI

NG

UN

IT

MEC

H R

OO

M

3.0

3.1

MC

A 15

MO

CP

575/

3

CO

MB

HO

A PL

BAS

C

1

GEO

RG

ETO

WN

DIS

TRIC

T H

IGH

SC

HO

OL

- AD

DIT

ION

& R

ENO

VATI

ON

S - P

HA

SE 2

ELEC

TRIC

AL

Wiri

ng fo

r Mec

hani

cal E

quip

men

t Se

ctio

n 16

700

Proj

ect N

o. 0

9019

Page

9

WIR

ING

FO

R M

ECH

ANIC

AL E

QU

IPM

ENT

SCH

EDU

LE

EQU

IPM

ENT

MO

TOR

ST

AR

TER

ST

AR

TER

DEV

ICES

D

ISC

R

EMA

RK

S

DES

IGN

ATIO

N

USE

R

OO

M

HP

VOLT

S/Ø

R

OO

M

TYPE

R

EMO

TE

CO

NTR

OL

DEV

ICE

REM

OTE

EN

ERG

IZED

B

Y ST

AR

TER

TY

PE

INTE

RLO

CK

S

DX-

21

IND

OO

R C

OO

LIN

G

UN

IT

E122

A 0.

4 M

CA

15 M

OC

P 20

8-23

0/1

C

1 In

terlo

cked

with

CU

-22

by S

ectio

n 15

900.

DX-

22

IND

OO

R C

OO

LIN

G

UN

IT

E122

B 0.

4 M

CA

15 M

OC

P 20

8-23

0/1

C

1 In

terlo

cked

with

CU

-22

by S

ectio

n 15

900.

DX-

23

IND

OO

R C

OO

LIN

G

UN

IT

E121

1.

4 M

CA

15 M

OC

P 20

8-23

0/1

C

1 In

terlo

cked

with

CU

-22

by S

ectio

n 15

900.

DX-

24

IND

OO

R C

OO

LIN

G

UN

IT

E121

1.

8 M

CA

15 M

OC

P 20

8-23

0/1

C

1 In

terlo

cked

with

CU

-22

by S

ectio

n 15

900.

DX-

25

IND

OO

R C

OO

LIN

G

UN

IT

E121

2.

4 M

CA

15 M

OC

P 20

8-23

0/1

C

1 In

terlo

cked

with

CU

-22

by S

ectio

n 15

900.

GEO

RG

ETO

WN

DIS

TRIC

T H

IGH

SC

HO

OL

- AD

DIT

ION

& R

ENO

VATI

ON

S - P

HA

SE 2

ELEC

TRIC

AL

Wiri

ng fo

r Mec

hani

cal E

quip

men

t Se

ctio

n 16

700

Proj

ect N

o. 0

9019

Page

10

WIR

ING

FO

R M

ECH

ANIC

AL E

QU

IPM

ENT

SCH

EDU

LE

EQU

IPM

ENT

MO

TOR

ST

AR

TER

ST

AR

TER

DEV

ICES

D

ISC

R

EMA

RK

S

DES

IGN

ATIO

N

USE

R

OO

M

HP

VOLT

S/Ø

R

OO

M

TYPE

R

EMO

TE

CO

NTR

OL

DEV

ICE

REM

OTE

EN

ERG

IZED

B

Y ST

AR

TER

TY

PE

INTE

RLO

CK

S

MU

A-20

M

AKE

UP

AIR

UN

IT

RO

OF

5 7.0

MC

A 15

MO

CP

575/

3

BIC

KEF-

20 &

-21

D15

In

terlo

ck w

ith K

EF-2

0 an

d KE

F-21

by

Sect

ion

1590

0, c

ompl

ete

with

VF

D c

ontro

ller a

nd c

ompa

tible

con

trolle

r.

MU

A-21

M

AKE

UP

AIR

UN

IT

RO

OF

7.5

10.0

MC

A 15

MO

CP

575/

3

BIC

KEF-

22 &

-23

D15

In

terlo

ck w

ith K

EF-2

2 an

d KE

F-23

by

Sect

ion

1590

0, c

ompl

ete

with

VF

D c

ontro

ller a

nd c

ompa

tible

con

trolle

r.

KEF-

20

EXH

AUST

FAN

KI

TCH

EN H

OO

D

RO

OF

3.0

575/

3

CO

MB

HO

A PL

D15

In

terlo

ck w

ith M

UA-

20, c

ompl

ete

with

VFD

con

trolle

r and

com

patib

le

cont

rolle

r.

KEF-

21

EXH

AUST

FAN

KI

TCH

EN H

OO

D

RO

OF

5.0

575/

3

CO

MB

HO

A PL

D15

In

terlo

ck w

ith M

UA-

20, c

ompl

ete

with

VFD

con

trolle

r and

com

patib

le

cont

rolle

r.

KEF-

22

EXH

AUST

FAN

KI

TCH

EN H

OO

D

RO

OF

3.0

575/

3

CO

MB

HO

A PL

D15

In

terlo

ck w

ith M

UA-

21, c

ompl

ete

with

VFD

con

trolle

r and

com

patib

le

cont

rolle

r.

KEF-

23

EXH

AUST

FAN

KI

TCH

EN H

OO

D

RO

OF

5.0

575/

3

CO

MB

HO

A PL

D15

In

terlo

ck w

ith M

UA-

21, c

ompl

ete

with

VFD

con

trolle

r and

com

patib

le

cont

rolle

r.

GEO

RG

ETO

WN

DIS

TRIC

T H

IGH

SC

HO

OL

- AD

DIT

ION

& R

ENO

VATI

ON

S - P

HA

SE 2

ELEC

TRIC

AL

Wiri

ng fo

r Mec

hani

cal E

quip

men

t Se

ctio

n 16

700

Proj

ect N

o. 0

9019

Page

11

WIR

ING

FO

R M

ECH

ANIC

AL E

QU

IPM

ENT

SCH

EDU

LE

EQU

IPM

ENT

MO

TOR

ST

AR

TER

ST

AR

TER

DEV

ICES

D

ISC

R

EMA

RK

S

DES

IGN

ATIO

N

USE

R

OO

M

HP

VOLT

S/Ø

R

OO

M

TYPE

R

EMO

TE

CO

NTR

OL

DEV

ICE

REM

OTE

EN

ERG

IZED

B

Y ST

AR

TER

TY

PE

INTE

RLO

CK

S

ADF-

20

EXH

AUST

FAN

VA

POU

R H

OO

D

DIS

HW

ASH

ER

RO

OF

0.33

20

8/1

MAN

PL

D15

ADF-

21

EXH

AUST

FAN

VA

POU

R H

OO

D

DIS

HW

ASH

ER

RO

OF

1/3

208/

1

MAN

PL

D15

ADF-

22

EXH

AUST

FAN

BO

Y'S

WAS

HR

OO

M

RO

OF

1/3

115/

1

MAN

PL

D15

ADF-

23

EXH

AUST

FAN

EL

ECTR

ICAL

RO

OM

RO

OF

1/3

208/

1

MAN

PL

D15

ADF-

24

EXH

AUST

FAN

SP

RIN

KLER

RO

OM

RO

OF

1/4

115/

1

MAN

PL

D15

CBF

-20

EXH

AUST

FAN

G

IRL'

S W

ASH

RO

OM

EXIS

TIN

G

MEC

H P

H

344W

11

5/1

MAN

PL

D15

GEO

RG

ETO

WN

DIS

TRIC

T H

IGH

SC

HO

OL

- AD

DIT

ION

& R

ENO

VATI

ON

S - P

HA

SE 2

ELEC

TRIC

AL

Wiri

ng fo

r Mec

hani

cal E

quip

men

t Se

ctio

n 16

700

Proj

ect N

o. 0

9019

Page

12

W

IRIN

G F

OR

MEC

HAN

ICAL

EQ

UIP

MEN

T SC

HED

ULE

EQU

IPM

ENT

MO

TOR

ST

AR

TER

ST

AR

TER

DEV

ICES

D

ISC

R

EMA

RK

S

DES

IGN

ATIO

N

USE

R

OO

M

HP

VOLT

S/Ø

R

OO

M

TYPE

R

EMO

TE

CO

NTR

OL

DEV

ICE

REM

OTE

EN

ERG

IZED

B

Y ST

AR

TER

TY

PE

INTE

RLO

CK

S

CH

F-20

C

EILI

NG

FAN

E-

128

40W

11

5/1

PL

UG

Pr

ovid

e re

cept

acle

at c

eilin

g le

vel.

CH

F-21

C

EILI

NG

FAN

E-

128

40W

11

5/1

PL

UG

Pr

ovid

e re

cept

acle

at c

eilin

g le

vel.

CH

F-22

C

EILI

NG

FAN

E-

128

40W

11

5/1

PL

UG

Pr

ovid

e re

cept

acle

at c

eilin

g le

vel.

CH

F-23

C

EILI

NG

FAN

E-

125

40W

11

5/1

PL

UG

Pr

ovid

e re

cept

acle

at c

eilin

g le

vel.

CH

F-24

C

EILI

NG

FAN

E-

125

40W

11

5/1

PL

UG

Pr

ovid

e re

cept

acle

at c

eilin

g le

vel.

CH

F-25

C

EILI

NG

FAN

E-

125

40W

11

5/1

PL

UG

Pr

ovid

e re

cept

acle

at c

eilin

g le

vel.

GEO

RG

ETO

WN

DIS

TRIC

T H

IGH

SC

HO

OL

- AD

DIT

ION

& R

ENO

VATI

ON

S - P

HA

SE 2

ELEC

TRIC

AL

Wiri

ng fo

r Mec

hani

cal E

quip

men

t Se

ctio

n 16

700

Proj

ect N

o. 0

9019

Page

13

WIR

ING

FO

R M

ECH

ANIC

AL E

QU

IPM

ENT

SCH

EDU

LE

EQU

IPM

ENT

MO

TOR

ST

AR

TER

ST

AR

TER

DEV

ICES

D

ISC

R

EMA

RK

S

DES

IGN

ATIO

N

USE

R

OO

M

HP

VOLT

S/Ø

R

OO

M

TYPE

R

EMO

TE

CO

NTR

OL

DEV

ICE

REM

OTE

EN

ERG

IZED

B

Y ST

AR

TER

TY

PE

INTE

RLO

CK

S

CA

CAB

INET

HEA

TER

E125

A 13

5W

120/

1

BIC

CB

CAB

INET

HEA

TER

E125

B 13

5W

120/

1

BIC

CC

C

ABIN

ET H

EATE

R

E130

B 13

5W

120/

1

BIC

BP-2

0 BY

-PAS

S BO

X

E130

A 12

0/1

BIC

Wire

to te

rmin

al b

lock

s on

con

trol p

anel

.

BF-2

0 BO

OST

ER F

AN

E130

F 50

W

120/

1

BIC

C

1 In

terc

onne

ct w

ith

Wire

thro

ugh

AMP

Con

trol R

ecep

tacl

e su

pplie

d by

Div

isio

n 15

and

in

stal

led

by D

ivis

ion

16.

GEO

RG

ETO

WN

DIS

TRIC

T H

IGH

SC

HO

OL

- AD

DIT

ION

& R

ENO

VATI

ON

S - P

HA

SE 2

ELEC

TRIC

AL

Wiri

ng fo

r Mec

hani

cal E

quip

men

t Se

ctio

n 16

700

Proj

ect N

o. 0

9019

Page

14

WIR

ING

FO

R M

ECH

ANIC

AL E

QU

IPM

ENT

SCH

EDU

LE

EQU

IPM

ENT

MO

TOR

ST

AR

TER

ST

AR

TER

DEV

ICES

D

ISC

R

EMA

RK

S

DES

IGN

ATIO

N

USE

R

OO

M

HP

VOLT

S/Ø

R

OO

M

TYPE

R

EMO

TE

CO

NTR

OL

DEV

ICE

REM

OTE

EN

ERG

IZED

B

Y ST

AR

TER

TY

PE

INTE

RLO

CK

S

CP-

20

CIR

CU

LATI

NG

PU

MP

MEC

H P

H

112

120/

1

C

1

CP-

21

CIR

CU

LATI

NG

PU

MP

NEW

MEC

H R

M

BAC

K ST

AGE

1/6

120/

1

C

1

CP-

22

CIR

CU

LATI

NG

PU

MP

E131

1/

4

120/

1

C

1

PP-2

0 EX

CES

S PR

ESSU

RE

PUM

P

SPR

INKL

ER R

M

1/3

120/

1

SEP-

20

SEW

AGE

EJEC

TOR

PU

MP

E131

1/

2 57

5/3

BIC

D

15

Wire

575

/3 c

ircui

t thr

ough

con

trol p

anel

to m

otor

term

inal

s.

SEP-

21

SEW

AGE

EJEC

TOR

PU

MP

1/2

575/

3

BIC

D

15

Wire

575

/3 c

ircui

t thr

ough

con

trol p

anel

to m

otor

term

inal

s.

GEO

RG

ETO

WN

DIS

TRIC

T H

IGH

SC

HO

OL

- AD

DIT

ION

& R

ENO

VATI

ON

S - P

HA

SE 2

ELEC

TRIC

AL

Wiri

ng fo

r Mec

hani

cal E

quip

men

t Se

ctio

n 16

700

Proj

ect N

o. 0

9019

Page

15

WIR

ING

FO

R M

ECH

ANIC

AL E

QU

IPM

ENT

SCH

EDU

LE

EQU

IPM

ENT

MO

TOR

ST

AR

TER

ST

AR

TER

DEV

ICES

D

ISC

R

EMA

RK

S

DES

IGN

ATIO

N

USE

R

OO

M

HP

VOLT

S/Ø

R

OO

M

TYPE

R

EMO

TE

CO

NTR

OL

DEV

ICE

REM

OTE

EN

ERG

IZED

B

Y ST

AR

TER

TY

PE

INTE

RLO

CK

S

HW

T-20

H

OT

WAT

ER T

ANK

E131

12

0/1

BIC

Wire

120

V/1∅

to te

rmin

als

on u

nit.

HW

T-21

H

OT

WAT

ER T

ANK

E131

12

0/1

BIC

Wire

120

V/1∅

to te

rmin

als

on u

nit.

UTC

W

ATER

MAT

RIX

C

ON

TRO

L PA

NEL

E131

12

0/1

BIC

Wire

120

V/1∅

to c

ontro

l uni

ts.

MSG

V M

ASTE

R S

OLE

NO

ID

GAS

VAL

VE

E130

12

0/1


ELECTRICAL Lighting Section 16800 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 Related Work .1 General Provisions: Section 16010 .2 Basic Materials & Methods: Section 16300

1.3 Work Specified Elsewhere .1 Related work in other Sections is as follows.

.2 Division 9, cutting of ceiling and installation of plaster rings or trims.

.3 Fire proofing of all recessed light fixtures in fire rated ceilings will be supplied and

installed by General Contractor.

1.4 Scope of Work .1 The work of Division 16 shall include the supply and installation of all lighting

fixtures, lamps and accessories, together with the necessary co-ordination with other Divisions to provide a complete and operable lighting system.

1.5 Shop Drawings .1 Shop drawings, as specified under Section 16010, shall be supplied for all

lighting fixtures supplied under this Contract.

.2 Shop drawings shall include lamp specifications provided by an approved lamp manufacturer.

1.6 Fixture Catalogue References .1 The fixture catalogue numbers listed do not include all required accessories to

provide a complete installation of the fixtures as intended or as described.

.2 The description of each fixture should be carefully read prior to quoting and the Tender price shall include all such necessary accessories and characteristics.


ELECTRICAL Lighting Section 16800 Project No. 09019 Page 2

.3 No extras will be allowed for the Supplier or Contractor failing to provide such accessories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 General

.1 Product descriptions noted herein are generic and all products described may not necessarily be used on this project. Make reference to drawings & fixture descriptions and ensure all products supplied under this contract conform to these specifications.

2.2 Ballasts .1 Linear Fluorescent:

.1 General: .1 All linear fluorescent fixtures shall be equipped with electronic

ballasts. Verify the operating voltage of each fixture with Supplier at Tender and include any additional transformers that may be required.

.2 Ballasts shall bear a "CSA Approved" label.

.3 Ballasts shall be complete with non-resetting type thermal

protection as defined by CSA Standard C22.2

.4 All ballasts shall meet Class 'A' Sound Levels.

.5 All ballasts shall meet the Specifications and Requirements of the Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL) and Certified Ballast Manufacturer's Association (CBMA).

.6 Ballasts shall be free of polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB's).

.7 Ballasts shall carry a minimum 3 year guarantee.

.2 120V Standard ON/OFF:

.1 T8 ballasts shall be instant start type and operate lamps in accordance with ANSI C82.1.

.2 T5HO ballasts shall be Programmed Rapid Start and operate lamps in accordance with ANSI C82.1.

.3 Transient & Surge Immunity to: ANSI C62.41 & C62.45.



.4 Electromagnetic and Radio Frequency Interference (EMI & RFI) emissions to: FCC (CFR47) Part 18, Subpart C, Class A. For areas sensitive to EMI: FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class B.

.5 Starting Temperature: Shall be capable of starting lamps in indoor applications with ambient temperatures 10°C or greater.

.6 Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): 10% Maximum (summarizing 2nd through 39th harmonic).

.7 Power factor ≥ 0.95

.8 Ballast Factor: .1 Instant Start ≥ 0.85 .2 Programmed Rapid Start Ballasts ≥ 1.0

.9 Ballast Efficacy Factor (BEF) - Instant Start:

.1 1-lamp ≥ 3.11

.2 2-lamp ≥ 1.58

.3 3-lamp ≥ 1.05

.4 4-lamp ≥ 0.80

.10 Ballast Efficacy Factor (BEF) - Programmed Rapid Start: .1 1-lamp ≥ 2.84 .2 2-lamp ≥ 1.47 .3 3-lamp ≥ 1.00 .4 4-lamp ≥ 0.75

.11 Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 maximum.

.12 Ballast Operating Frequency Range: 20 kHz - 33kHz or ≥ 40 kHz

with no modulation of the secondary waveform amplitude with any 60 Hz component or harmonic thereof.

.13 Failure Mode: Should any lamp in a multi-lamp system fail, the remaining lamps must be extinguished (series operation) or be operated with the ballast THD and power factor not exceeding 32% and 0.85 respectively (parallel operation).

.14 Approved Equals - Instant Start: .1 Osram Sylvania Quicktronic Series .2 Advance Optanium Series .3 Universal Lighting Technologies TRIAD HPL Series



.15 Approved Equals - Programmed Rapid Start: .1 Osram Sylvania Quicktronic Professional .2 Advance Centium Series .3 Universal Lighting Technologies AccuStart5 Series

.3 120V Dimming:

.1 Provide electronic dimming ballasts by supplier with at least 19 years experience with electronic dimming ballasts and dimming controls.

.2 Manufacturer shall have ISO 9001 quality certification and factory employed service engineers.

.3 Manufacturer shall take sole responsibility for ballasts and dimming controls.

.4 Ballasts shall be UL listed, Class P thermally protected and meet ANSI C62.41 or IEEE 587, category A for surge protection.

.5 Dimming range of ballasts shall be as noted in fixture descriptions. .6 Light level output shall be continuous, smooth and flicker free over

the entire dimming range.

.7 Ballast shall have: .1 Power factor > 0.95 .2 Ballast factor = 1.0 - 0.01 .3 Total harmonic distortion < 10%

.8 Ballast shall be inaudible in a 27 dB ambient throughout the

dimming range.

.9 Ballasts must comply with FCC Part 18 regulations and shall not interfere with other, properly installed, electrical equipment.

.10 Ballasts shall have a minimum starting temperature of 10°C.

.11 Ballasts shall have protected control wire input that is not damaged by miss-wire.

.12 Ballast current inrush shall not exceed three Amps at 277 Volts or 7 Amps at 120 Volts to avoid nuisance circuit breaker trips and control contact malfunctions.

.13 Lead length from ballast to lamp socket shall not exceed 7'-0" for T8 or 3'-0" for T5HO lamps.



.14 Approved Equals: .1 Osram/Sylvania Quicktronic High Efficiency Powersense

Series. .2 Osram/Sylvania Quicktronic Professional Helios Series .3 Advance Mark 7 0-10V Series .4 Advance Mark 10 Powerline Series .5 Universal Lighting Technologies Duper Dim Series .6 Osram Sylvania Quicktronic Professional Prostart Series

.2 Compact Fluorescent Ballasts: .1 All compact fluorescent fixtures shall be equipped with 120V electronic

ballasts.

.2 Ballast Factor ≥ 1.0

.3 All ballasts shall have end-of-life detection and shut-down circuitry.

.4 Ballast output frequency to the lamps should be above 42 kHz to minimize interference with infrared controls.

.5 Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 20%.

.6 Power Factor: Greater than 96% for all lamps with the exception of those for 24W to 55W long length twin lamps which shall have a power factor greater than 88%.

.7 Minimum Starting Temperature: -18°C.

.8 Ballast Lamp Current Crest Factor: Less than 1.7.

.9 Ballasts shall operate from a nominal line voltage, ±10%, 60 Hz.

.10 Ballasts shall have an audible noise rating of Class A or better.

.11 Approved Manufacturers: .1 Universal Lighting Technologies Triad Series .2 Advance Smartmate Series .3 Osram Sylvania Quicktronic CF Series

.3 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Ballasts:

.1 All HID fixtures shall be equipped with 120V electronic or magnetic ballasts as noted in the fixture schedule.

.2 Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 15%



.3 Ballasts for use outside the building shall provide reliable starting down to -30°C.

.4 HID ballasts shall meet the requirements of the Electrical Testing Laboratories and Certified Ballast Manufacturer's Association.

.5 HID lamps shall be guaranteed for a period of 12 months from the date of Substantial Performance. Labour for replacing lamps shall be included in the guarantee.

.6 Approved Manufacturers: .1 Canadian General Electric .2 Osram Sylvania .3 Philips

2.3 Lamps

.1 Linear Fluorescent: .1 Average Rated Life ≥ 24,000 hours. .2 Minimum Lumen Ratings:

.1 T8 lamps (at 25°C):

.1 4' - 3100 initial, 2900 mean

.2 3' - 2200 initial, 2090 mean

.3 2' - 1400 initial, 1300 mean

.2 T5HO lamps (at 25°C): .1 4' - 4450 initial, 4138 mean .2 3' - 3100 initial, 2883 mean .3 2' - 1750 initial, 1627 mean

.3 Colour Rendering Index (CRI) ≥ 85 .4 Correlated Colour Temperature to match existing. .5 All lamps shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the date of

Substantial Performance. Labour to replace lamps shall also be included in the guarantee.

.6 Approved Equals: .1 4' T8:

.1 Philips Advantage Alto ADV841/ALTO

.2 GE Ecolux High Lumen XL/SPX41/HL/ECO

.3 Osram Sylvania Octron 841/XPS/ECO



.2 2' & 3' T8: .1 Philips Plus TL841/PLUS/ALTO .2 GE Ecolux Extra Life XL/SPX41/ECO .3 Osram Sylvania Octron 841/XPS/ECO

.3 T5HO:

.1 Philips SILHOUETTE High Output 841/HO

.2 GE Startcoat Ecolux 841/ECO

.3 Sylvania Pentron High Output 841/HO

.2 Compact Fluorescent: .1 Compact fluorescent lamps shall be 4-pin triple tube type unless noted

otherwise in fixture schedule. .2 Average Rated Life ≥ 12,000 hours

.3 Colour Rendering Index ≥ 82

.4 Correlated Colour Temperature to match existing.

.5 All lamps shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the date of

Substantial Performance. Labour to replace lamps shall also be included in the guarantee.

.6 Approved Manufacturers:

.1 Osram Sylvania

.2 Canadian General Electric

.3 Philips

.3 Halogen & LED: .1 Halogen MR lamps shall have an I.R. Coated reflector and be rated for a

minimum lamp life of 4,000 hours.

.2 Halogen PAR lamps shall be rated for a minimum lamp life of 3,000 hours and have an infrared conserving reflector and beam angle as specified in the luminaire description.

.3 Lamps for exit lights shall be LED type and provide a minimum of 50,000 hours of life.

.4 LED (Light Emitting Diode) Systems: LED Systems may be considered for specialty applications. These systems shall be warranted by the luminaire manufacturer as a complete system, comprised of LED's, Drivers and Fixtures.



.5 All halogen lamps and LED's shall be guaranteed for a period of 90 days from the date of Substantial Performance. Labour for replacing lamps shall be included in the guarantee.

.6 Refer to fixture designations below for detailed lamp characteristics (i.e. size, beam spread, etc.).

.7 Approved Manufacturers: .1 Osram Sylvania .2 Canadian General Electric .3 Philips

.4 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamps:

.1 Low Wattage (20 to 150 Watt) HID Lamps: Energy conserving miniature bi-pin T4.5 or T6 with Colour Temperature of 3000K, colour rendering index of 82 (minimum) and 12,000 hour rated life, unless stated otherwise in fixture schedule.

.2 High Wattage (250 to 400 Watt) HID Lamps: Pulse start reduced colour

shift ED17 or ED28 clear lamps with colour temperature of no more than 4,000K, colour rendering index of 65 (minimum), and minimum 15,000 hour rated life, unless stated otherwise in fixture schedule.

.3 Approved Manufacturers:

.1 Osram Sylvania

.2 Canadian General Electric

.3 Philips

2.4 General Lighting Fixture Requirements .1 Quality: Install only lighting fixtures which are structurally well designed and

constructed and which use new parts and materials of highest commercial grade available.

.2 Matching Lamps and Ballasts: Lamps and ballasts shall be of the same manufacturer for any given luminaire used on this project.

.3 Matching Ceiling and Fixture Finishes: Before ordering fixtures verify the finish of exposed ceiling support members & metal tiles and paint to match ceiling colour. For recessed fixtures, trim finishes shall be selected during shop drawing review.

.4 Manufacturer's Operational Tests: .1 Test fixture for acceptance of lamp made to maximum tolerance as

required in A.N.A. Standards as listed in Section 16.



.2 Test fixtures with rated lamps for starting and operation.

.3 Check wiring for agreement with design circuit.

.4 Test for short circuits and improper grounds.

.5 Commercially Listed Fixtures: Lighting fixtures shall be of the types, sizes, ratings, etc. shown in the Fixture Schedule and notes therein or as shown on Drawings.

.6 Delivery: Assemble completely all fixtures at the Manufacturer's plant and deliver to the project site in original cartons. Ensure that a dry and protected space is available for proper storage before delivery of production fixtures.

2.5 Hangers & Fittings .1 General:

.1 Support fixtures as shown on the drawings, level, plumb and true with the structure and other equipment, and in a horizontal or vertical position as intended.

.2 Surface mounted fixture housings shall be rigidly installed and adjusted to give a neat flush fit to the surface on which it is mounted.

.3 All hangers, supports, fastenings or accessory fittings shall be protected against corrosion. Care shall be taken during the installation to assure that insulation and corrosion protection is not damaged.

.2 Supports: .1 Self-alignment ball joint hangers shall be used for rod suspended fixtures,

and ceiling canopies shall be fitted tightly to the ceiling without restricting the alignment of the hanger.

.2 Support fixtures by hangers and mounting arrangements which will not cause the fixture frame, housing, sides or lens frame to be distorted; or prevent complete alignment of several fixtures in a row.

.3 Mounting methods for fixtures on or in suspended ceilings are to be as follows: .1 Where lighting fixtures are surface mounted on suspended

ceilings or are mounted below suspended ceilings, or recessed into suspended ceilings, these fixtures are to be supported independently of the ceiling using #12 jack chain hangers. Each chain is to be secured separately to the structure above so that no weight falls on the ceiling suspension system.



.2 Secure surface mounted equipment with twist clip fasteners to inverted tee bar ceilings and independently support clips using jack chain to structure above.

.3 In no case will reinforcement of the ceiling suspension system be considered to be adequate support for the lighting fixtures.

.4 Where cross member supports are required above the ceiling to provide support points, these are to be steel channels or angles.

.5 Toggle bolts of the snap-on or spring-in type are not to be used through drywall, tile and similar type ceilings.

.3 Suspension Length: .1 The suspension length for all suspended types of lighting fixtures, as

listed in the Fixture Schedule, shall be the overall length from the underside of the ceiling to the highest point of the fixture body, reflector, or glassware in its hanging position.

.2 The length of the stems or chain hangers of suspended fluorescent lighting fixtures shall be adjusted to hang all fixture bodies in the same room level and in the same horizontal plane, unless specifically required to be otherwise on the electrical drawings.

.4 Chain Hangers: .1 Where fixtures are specified to be chain hung, the chain used shall be No.

4 Tensile bright zinc coated with a strength of 181 kg. Attachments shall be made using No. 105 "S" hooks. Wires running down chain to fixture shall be run in flexible conduit and shall be attached to chain with "Plasklip" cable clips.

2.6 Fixture Construction

.1 All interior fixtures shall comply with CSA Standard C22.2 No. 9, latest edition,

complete with accessories and components, complying with relevant CSA standards applicable to accessory or component.

.2 Fixture lens, where specified, shall be flat and in hinged metal frame unless otherwise specified, made from clear acrylic lenses and shall be 100% virgin acrylic minimum 3.2 mm (.125").



.3 Unless otherwise indicated, lighting fixture bodies shall be minimum 20 gauge, cold rolled prime steel of rigid construction with knockout, as required. Fixture rigidity shall permit any suspension method without sag. Fluorescent fixtures shall be suitable for either individual or continuous mounting. Fixture sockets shall apply continuous holding pressure on lamps. All metal edges are to be smoothly finished.

.4 Fixtures shall be finished in baked white enamel (or other colour if specified or requested by the Architect), which shall resist chipping, corrosion and discolouration. Before finishing all metal shall be chemically degreased and neutralized. Finish shall be not less than two coats of enamel, sprayed on and baked.

.5 The finishing paint shall cover all metal edges. Reflecting surfaces shall be white with an average reflectance of not less than 85%.

.6 All fixtures shall be CSA approved and/or approved by the Inspection Department of Ontario Hydro.

.7 All fixture types shall be designed with adequate heat sinks to dissipate the

generated heat in order to prevent ballast and lamps from overheating with the resulting decrease in their rated life expectancy and/or light output.

.8 Fixtures shall be designed so that minimum task required for lamp or ballast requirement.

.9 All feed-in wiring to H.I.D. fixtures shall be rated 105°C minimum.

2.7 Light Fixtures

Outdoor Lighting

.1 See Drawing E0.2. Indoor Lighting .2 Type A1:

.1 2'x4' x 4.5" high recessed specification grade linear fluorescent luminaire complete with 2F32T8 lamps, 1-120V instant start electronic ballast, 20 gauge steel housing & door frame (painted after fabrication) and 1/8" thick K12 pattern acrylic lens.



.2 Approved Equals: .1 Lithonia GT8 series .2 Metalux GR8 series .3 Pioneer TB24 series .4 Visioneering MRCTB series .5 Day-Brite TG8 series

.3 Type A2:

.1 Same as type 'A1' except 3F32T8 and 2-120V electronic ballasts wired for dual circuit switching.

.4 Type A2a:

.1 Same as type 'A2' except center lamp wired to emergency inverter ballast, out-board lamps wired to 1-120V instant start electronic ballast.

.5 Type A3:

.1 Same as type 'A1' except 1'x4' and 1F32T8.

.6 Type A3a: .1 Same as type 'A3' except complete with emergency inverter ballast and

drywall flange kit.

.7 Type A3b: .1 Same as type 'A3' except complete with drywall flange kit.

.8 Type A4: .1 Same as type 'A3' except 2F32T8 lamps.

.9 Type A4a: .1 Same as type 'A4' except complete with emergency inverter ballast.

.10 Type A4b:

.1 Same as type 'A4' except emergency inverter ballast and drywall flange kit.

.11 Type A5: .1 Vanity Light, 1220 mm long x 152 mm high, cloud line wall bracket,

complete with 2-32 Watt, T8 fluorescent lamps and 120 Volt electronic ballast. Lens is smooth opal acrylic, individually mounted.

.2 Approved equals are: .1 Thomas DayBrite CLDW Cloudline Bracket .2 CFI CCW Series - Cloud Bracket 48" .3 Lithonia 11892 Series Vanity Wall Bracket (48")



.12 Type B1: .1 1'x4' x 6" deep (maximum) recessed luminaire complete with 1F32T8

lamp, 120V electronic ballast, white painted 20 gauge steel housing, smooth matte white asymmetric reflector and white perforated metal diffuser backed with white acrylic lens.

.2 Approved Equals: .1 Lithonia AV-ASY series .2 Day-Brite AVA series .3 Lightolier QVS-AD series .4 Metalux RDI-ASY series

.13 Type B2: .1 2'x4' x 6" deep (maximum) recessed luminaire complete with 2F32T8

lamps, 1-120V electronic ballast, white painted 20 gauge steel housing, smooth matte white symmetrical reflector and white perforated metal diffuser backed with white acrylic lens.

.2 Approved Equals: .1 Lithonia 2AV series .2 Day-Brite 2AV series .3 Lightolier QVS series .4 Metalux RDI series

.14 Type B2a:

.1 Same as type 'B2' except complete with emergency inverter ballast.

.15 Type B3: .1 Same as type 'B2' except complete with 3F32T8 lamps and 2-120V

electronic ballasts wired for dual circuit switching.

.16 Type B4: .1 Same as type 'B2' except 2'x2' and complete with 2F17T8 lamps and

120V emergency inverter ballast.

.17 Type C1: .1 6" dia. wide beam compact fluorescent down light complete with 1-26W

horizontal triple tube lamp, 120V electronic ballast, clear semi-specular reflector and white trim.

.2 Approved Equals: .1 Calculite 8031 series .2 Gotham 6" AF series .3 Portfolio C6 series .4 Other approved equal - submit data sheet.

.18 Type C1a:

.1 Same as type 'C1' except complete with 1-32W triple tube lamp.



.19 Type C2: .1 6" dia. compact fluorescent shower light complete with 1-18W triple tube

lamp, 120V electronic ballast, clear fresnel lens and white trim. .2 Approved Equals:

.1 Lytecaster 1126WH series

.2 Lithonia 6L3/4-L7XF series

.3 Halo H280E/73PS series

.4 Other approved equal - submit data sheet.

.20 Type C2a: .1 Same as type 'C2' except complete with 2-18W quad tube lamps.

.21 Type D1:

.1 6" dia. x 8.5" high recessed wide flood soffit light complete with 1-70W, 3000K clear CMH lamp, 1-120V -30°C rated constant wattage ballast, clear semi-specular reflector and white trim.

.2 Approved Equals: .1 Amerlux SVA II series .2 Other approved equal - submit data sheet.

.22 Type E1:

.1 Existing 2-lamp, 1'x4' recessed linear fluorescent luminaire to be reused in new layout. Fixture shall be cleaned, re-lamped and reinstalled complete with new 1/8" K12 pattern acrylic lens once all other interior renovations are complete.

.23 Type E2:

.1 Existing 2-lamp, 4' long surface mounted linear fluorescent luminaire to be reused in new layout. Fixture shall be cleaned and re-lamped once all other interior renovations are complete.

.24 Type E3: .1 Existing 1-lamp, 4' long surface mounted linear fluorescent strip light

complete with asymmetric reflector to be reused in new layout. Fixture shall be cleaned and re-lamped once all other interior renovations are complete.

.25 Type E4:

.1 Existing 3-lamp, 2' x 4' recessed linear fluorescent luminaire to be reused in new layout. Fixture shall be cleaned, re-lamped and reinstalled complete with new 1/8" K12 pattern acrylic lens once all other interior renovations are complete.



.26 Type F1: .1 ~4.8" wide x 4' long suspended linear fluorescent wrap type fixture

complete with 1F32T8 lamp, 120V electronic ballast, white painted 20 gauge steel housing, internal prismatic/external fluted (for clean ability) clear injection molded acrylic lens and 18" long rigid stem & canopy kit.

.2 Approved Equals: .1 Holophane HW series .2 Other approved equal - submit data sheet.

.27 Type F1a:

.1 Same as type 'F1' except complete with complete with emergency inverter ballast.

.28 Type F2: .1 Same as type 'F1' except 8' long (tandem wired).

.29 Type F2a:

.1 Same as type 'F2' except complete with emergency inverter ballast. .30 Type F3:

.1 Same as type 'F1' except ~8.6" wide with 2F32T8 lamps.

.31 Type F3a: .1 Same as type 'F3' except 8' long (tandem wired) with 4F32T8 lamps.

.32 Type G1:

.1 4' long x 9-1/4" wide x 2-5/8" high suspended, fully direct luminaire complete with 2F32T8 lamps, 1-120V electronic dimming ballast, solid white louver and white housing. Architect to confirm finish during shop drawing review. Provide stem suspension and mounting support accessories suitable for exposed structure type installation - see detail on drawing E2.10.

.2 Approved Equals: .1 Ledalite Thrive series. .2 Other approved equal - submit data sheet.

.33 Type G2:

.1 Same as type 'G1' except 8' long, 4F32T8 lamps and 1-120V electronic ballast.

.34 Type G2a: .1 Same as type 'G2' except complete with 2-120V electronic dimming

ballast and 2-120V remote mounted (see detail on drawing E2.10) emergency inverter ballast.



.35 Type G2b: .1 Same as type 'G2a' except surface mounted and complete with 2-F32T8

lamps, 120V instant start electronic ballast and 2-120V remote mounted emergency inverter ballast.

.36 Type H1: .1 7.5" dia. x 25" high up/down cylindrical wall mounted luminaire complete

with 1-32W triple tube lamp up, 1-70W, 3000K T6 CMH lamp down, 120V electronic ballasts wired for separate up and down control and forward throw down optic.

.2 Provide suitable support bracket and mounting hardware to secure fixture to a 250 mm dia. structural steel column. Finish bracket and fixture the same. Architect to select finish during shop drawing review.

.3 Base Bid: Gardco 302 series.

.37 Type J1: .1 4' long narrow strip light complete with 1F32T8 lamp, 120V electronic

ballast and white painted housing.

.2 Approved Equals: .1 Metalux SNF series. .2 Lithonia S series. .3 Thomas N series.

.38 Type J2:

.1 Same as type 'J1' except 8' long with 2F32T8 lamps (tandem wired).

.39 Type K1: .1 12' long wall mounted direct/indirect luminaire complete with 6F32T8

lamps, 2-120V electronic ballasts (one for up component and one for down component), 120V remote mounted emergency inverter ballast wired to operate down component, white radial contoured baffle and white finish. Architect to confirm finish selection during shop drawing review.

.2 Approved Equals: .1 Neo-Ray 302-DIW series. .2 Other approved equal - submit data sheet.

.40 Type L1:

.1 4' long x 4" wide x 4" deep (maximum overall height) recessed linear fluorescent luminaire complete with 2F32T8 lamps, 1-120V electronic ballast, white opal acrylic lens and plaster frame kit.

.2 Approved Equals: .1 Metalumen FS4R Series. .2 Other approved equal - submit data sheet.

.41 Type L2:

.1 Same as type 'L1' except surface ceiling mounted.



.42 Type X: .1 Existing exit sign to remain or be reused as noted on plans.

.43 Type X1: .1 Single face, universal mount, high impact thermoplastic, 12 VDC, LED

exit sign complete with white housing, red letters and snap out chevrons. Chevron direction indicated on plan.

.2 Approved Equals: .1 Aimlite EXPT series .2 Emergi-lite PRE series .3 Stanpro SLEXP series .4 Beghelli Esco series .5 Other approved equal - submit data sheet.

.44 Type X2:

.1 Same as type 'X1' except double face.

.45 Type X3: .1 120 VAC/12 VDC 5 Watt (maximum) edge-lit LED exit sign complete with

red letters and mirrored faceplate (single face). Mounting bracket shall be fastened to the bottom of the sign so that the fixture may be mounted on top of a horizontal curtain wall mullion. Refer to detail on drawing E2.10.

.2 Approved Equals: .1 Lumacell LER23 series. .2 Other approved equal - submit data sheet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

.1 Installation of all lighting equipment shall comply with the relevant Sections of this

Specification and the Ontario Electrical Safety Code.

.2 Recessed or semi-recessed fixture shall be wired with BX90 or R90 wire in flexible steel conduit to adjacent outlet boxes placed above the finished ceiling, within reach of the fixture holes. Check the ceiling construction prior to ordering the fixtures to ensure that the fixture mounting is suitable and acceptable to the Engineer.

.3 Recessed or semi-recessed fixtures in dropped ceilings, shall be supported by chain hangers fastened securely to the structural ceiling; not supported by the tees of the dropped ceiling.



.4 Plaster frames and rings shall be provided for fixtures recessed in plaster ceilings under this Section. The installation of plaster rings shall be done by others (Division 9) under the supervision of Division 16. Contractor to ensure that they are located correctly. All costs for installation by Division 16.

.5 All outlet boxes for ceiling-mounted light fixtures are to be flush mounted unless otherwise noted. Where outlet boxes for lighting fixtures are specified to be surface mounted in finished areas on precast ceilings, use deep canopies to cover outlet box. In finished areas, canopies are to be neatly notched to provide for entry of wiring.

.6 At the completion of construction and acceptance of work, all lighting fixtures shall be clean, complete with all necessary accessories and provided with the required operating lamp(s).

.7 Fixtures shown on continuous rows or broken lines shall be carefully aligned so that all rows appear as straight lines. Crooked lines or misplaced fixtures will not be accepted and such poor workmanship shall be corrected.

.8 Fixtures as shown on the electrical drawings are approximate locations only. Installation of fixtures shall be in accordance with reflected ceiling plans, details and/or field instructions issued by the Architect.

.9 Lighting fixtures in service areas, and Mechanical and Electrical Rooms shall be

installed after the mechanical and electrical equipment is in place. The fixtures shall be located on site to clear all obstructions and suspended on chain hangers. Rigid mount in air plenum rooms to the approval of the Engineer.

.10 Check the latest ceiling finishes in all areas where recessed fixtures are being installed to ensure that the fixtures which are ordered for these areas are purchased with suitable ceiling trim for the particular ceiling finish. Fixtures which are sent to the site with wrong ceiling trim or flanges shall be replaced with fixtures having the correct trims, without additional cost.


ELECTRICAL Addition & Modifications to Existing Security System Section 16920 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Related Work



.3 Communication Raceway System: Section 16530

1.2 Work Included .1 The existing system is a SureGuard security panel and keypad located in the

Ground Floor Mechanical Room which shall be reused and modified to suit the new renovations and addition. Contractor to field verify make/model of existing system. All new security devices shall be compatible with existing system within the School.

1.3 Examination of Site & Documentation .1 Prior to submitting tender, carefully examine conditions at the site which could

affect this work.

.2 Refer to Room Finish Schedules to determine finished, partially finished and unfinished areas of the building.

.3 Ensure that materials and equipment are delivered to the site at the proper time

and in such assemblies and sized so as to enter into the building and to be removed into the space where they are to be located without difficulty. Be responsible for any cutting and patching involved in getting assemblies into place.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Note: The following is a general specification for equipment used by the Halton School Board.

Provide only the equipment that is required for this project. 2.1 Security System

.1 Provide a complete, functional security system. The existing security system control panel shall remain and be reused unless noted otherwise.


ELECTRICAL Addition & Modifications to Existing Security System Section 16920 Project No. 09019 Page 2

.2 The base security system panel shall have a capacity of 16 hardwired zones and the ability to accommodate up to 128 addressable devices or zones fully supervised and programmable. The panel shall be complete with battery charger, auxiliary power for security detection devices, integrated, supervised digital alarm communicator, supervised bell/siren output and two (2) general purpose programmable outputs which can be programmed as general purpose outputs.

.3 System Operation: Initiation of alarm from any of the door contacts, motion

detectors or alarm monitored points shall cause:

.1 An audible alarm at the control panel, remote sirens and activating strobe lights (if applicable).

.2 The school area alarm power can be turned on or off from multiple key switch locations. The indicators of the key switch shall be: .1 Green Light: System ON .2 Red Light: Motion Detected (NOT to be noted as ready light)

.4 System Communication Bus: The system shall be complete with a standard,

non-shielded, 4-conductor station wire bus for powering and communicating with remote hardwired system expansion modules and devices. For connection of various system modules, communication us wire runs (#18 AWG) of up to 3500 ft (1066m) shall be standard, and the system shall allow for an additional 3500 ft. (1066m) of communication bus wire for each communication bus expander added (max 16).

.5 Use Codes: The system shall provide for 1500 user codes.

.6 Partitions: The system shall be programmable for up to eight (8) fully independent partitions.

.7 Ground Fault: The system shall include an integral ground fault detector, which shall detect a single ground fault on any extended conductor in the system.

.8 Supervision: Each zone in the system shall be supervised. The base panel and any remote panel with its own AC input shall be supervised for AC loss. Batteries for the base panel and all remote panels shall be supervised for low power and shall be short-circuit protected. Each addressable device and each wireless input device shall be supervised for low voltage and for its presence. The communications bus shall be supervised for low voltage and the presence of each enrolled module and keypad. Digital alarm communicators shall be supervised for telephone line trouble and failure to communicate.

.9 False Alarm Prevention: The system shall include the following false alarm prevention features: .1 Audible exit delay, audible exit fault .2 Arm/disarm bell squawk



.3 Urgency on entry delay

.4 TLM trouble and low battery trouble transmission delay

.5 Swinger shutdown programmable by zone

.6 Transmission delay by zone

.7 Police Code (cross zone) transmission

.8 Opening after Alarm transmission

.9 Recent close code transmission

.10 AC fail

.11 Arming/disarming from outside the protected space using access control or wireless key

.10 System Event Buffer: The system shall have a 3,000 event buffer. All events shall be printable from the system printer. The 2,800 most recent events shall be viewable on the LCD system keypad. All events shall be viewable by upload/ download to a PC.

.11 System Software: The base panel shall come complete with the software necessary to implement every system feature and to allow for the addition of every expansion of functional module without changes or addition to the basic software.

.12 System Programming: .1 The system shall be sully programmable from the LCD keypads and shall

allow event buffer viewing at the keypads.

.2 Separate PC-based upload/download software shall allow programming and operation from a directly connected local computer, or from a remote computer via telephone line or TCP/IP/ LAN/Wan communications. Remote access shall be controlled by the Owner to prevent unauthorized access.

.3 All system programming shall be maintained in non-volatile memory so that programming information is retained even if all AC and battery power is removed.

.13 Central Station Reporting: The system shall provide high speed 10 bps and 20 bps 1400/2300 Hz handshake, Contact ID and SIA reporting formats and shall be capable of being programmed to call up to three (3) telephone numbers. The system shall be capable of reporting all alarms, troubles, and system status information by combinations of all communication methods installed including: digital communicator, DVACS and Cellemetry.


ELECTRICAL Addition & Modifications to Existing Security System Section 16920 Project No. 09019 Page 4 2.2 System Expansion

.1 System Keypads: The system shall accommodate up to sixteen (16) LCD

keypads, which are powered from the base panel via the four-wire communication bus. LCD keypads shall have a display capacity of at least 32 alpha-numeric characters with adjustable brightness and contract. Keys shall be backlit for low light ease of use. Keypads shall include individual “Armed”, “Ready”, and “Trouble” indicators, three (3) keypad- activated alarm keys and five (5) programmable function keys.

.2 Panel Zone Expansion: The panel shall be expandable to a maximum 128 zone by adding standard hardwired 8 and/or 16 zone modules to the communications bus, in order to allow the used of conventional devices supervised by use of double end-of-line resistors.

2.3 Dual Technology Microwave/PIR Detectors

.1 Digital technology detector shall be Intellisense DT-400T type sensor, micro-controller Dual-Tec motion sensor with k-band technology.

.2 Detectors shall be supplied with interchangeable lenses for specific installation

location.

.3 Digital Technology detectors shall be provided in all non-corridor areas and Classrooms.

2.4 Dual Technology Microcontroller Detectors

.1 Detectors shall be Intellisense DT-700T dual microwave type with k-band pattern shaping microwave.

.2 Detectors shall be supplied with interchangeable lens suitable for specific

installation location (i.e. long range (narrow coverage) for corridors up to 200 feet and wide angle (wide coverage) for room locations) or degrees ceiling mount,

.3 These detectors shall be centrally powered by the control panel power supply or

with additional central power supplies to be located in electrical closets as determined by the size and power consumption of the system. Security protection shall be provided as shown on drawings and as detailed on the schedule of protection.

.4 Detectors shall be installed in Corridors.


ELECTRICAL Addition & Modifications to Existing Security System Section 16920 Project No. 09019 Page 5 2.5 Door Contacts

.1 The door contacts shall be concealed magnetic switches, ¾” diameter recess type, Sentrol Model #1078c Series where specified and shall be installed on all exterior doors where possible. Where surface contacts are required (i.e. for roof hatch), they shall be Sentrol Model #1085T Series.

2.6 Temperature Sensors .1 Temperature Sensors shall be Intellisense T-1000 type with automatic response,

adjustable temperature settings, calibrated remote temperature probe, local high and low alarm LED’s and three (3) digit display. Temperature sensor shall be located in Main Sprinkler Room and two (2) units per floor. See Drawings for locations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation .1 Install the complete security system as indicated and in accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Surface mount motion detectors where shown. Secure the baseplate of each detector to a flush outlet box and connect the wiring. When decorating work is complete, adjust detector sensitivity as required and snap detectors into place. Mount detectors at 300 mm below ceiling and 25 mm above floor in areas without ceiling.

.3 Be responsible for co-ordinating all aspects of the system which is being supplied.

.4 Provide all required end-of-line resistors to supervise wiring.

.5 Confirm exact locations of all components prior to roughing-in.

.6 Provide the door supplier with all pertinent information regarding hole sizes and

locations of holes to be drilled in the doors and frames to accommodate door contacts.

.7 This electrical contractor to provide EMT conduit with #22 AWG wiring from fire alarm panel to the security panel for connection of fire alarm and trouble outputs.



.8 This electrical contractor to provide EMT conduit with #22 AWG wire from the control panel to telephone equipment backboard for system monitoring via schedule 3A data channel using DVACS technology to a ULC listed monitoring station.

3.2 Wiring .1 All wiring shall be FT6 Plenum rated to conform to the requirements of the

Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1 and applicable Provincial Codes.

.2 Wiring shall be sized in accordance with Class 2 requirements, but shall be protected from mechanical injury or other injurious conditions such as moisture, excessive heat or corrosive action in accordance with Class 1 requirements. Conductors shall be solid copper.

.3 Wiring type shall be to manufacturer/supplier recommendations, but shall generally be 4-conductor, #22 cable, supplied and installed by Barrie Communications (tel 905-564-7026).

.4 All cable connections to switches, equipment, etc., shall be installed using crimp-on type lugs.

3.3 System Testing & Verification .1 When the security system is complete, make a complete inspection of all

installed equipment including each and every component such as motion detectors, door contacts, control equipment, etc. with a competent and qualified member of the system manufacturer's personnel to ensure the following:

.1 That the system is complete in accordance with the contract documents.

The system is installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and all other governing requirement.

.2 That the regulations concerning the supervision of components have

been adhered to and are properly wired and supervised.

.2 Perform any changes necessary as a result of sub-paragraphs 1 and 2 above in accordance with the system manufacturer's directions.

.3 Provide a copy of the inspecting technician's report showing location of each device and certifying the test results of each device, shall be forwarded to the Engineer and Owner.



.4 All cost for testing, verification, connection to Bell F1, F2 subset and the designated ULC Central Monitoring Station, attendance of the designated alarm monitoring company technician and demonstration of the system shall be included in the tender price.

.5 The installation shall include a one (1) year warranty for all material and labour

effective from the date of commissioning and acceptance.

.6 A certificate of letter of verification shall be provided on completion of the installation, commissioning and acceptance and shall be posed at the Control Equipment of left with the Head Caretaker to display prominently.

.7 Requirements:

.1 When testing, verification and certification procedures specified above are complete and upon receipt of the inspection report, arrange for the system manufacturer to visit the site and demonstrate proper operation and maintenance of the security system to designated members of the Owner's staff and designated alarm monitoring company technician.

.2 Confirm the exact location of all system components with the Architect

prior to roughing-in.

.3 Quantities for components shall be as per the floor plans.

.4 Be responsible for ensuring that the nomenclature of annunciators identification nameplates, are verified with the Owner's and authorities and that the necessary approvals have been obtained prior to ordering.

.8 Include in the contract the sum of $1,500.00 to conduct a system testing and

inspection by the owner's representative. 3.4 Instructions to Operators

.1 Perform a final test of all circuits in the presence of the Owners Maintenance supervisor, (security) and instruct the caretaker on the operation of the various equipment.

.2 Arrange with the maintenance supervisor (security) the time and date for

performing these tests.

.3 All final testing must be performed after normal school hours.


ELECTRICAL Addition & Modifications to Existing Security System Section 16920 Project No. 09019 Page 8 3.5 Standard Identification

.1 Clearly identify main pull or junction boxes (excluding obvious outlet boxes) by painting the outside of the covers. Paint colours shall be in accordance with the following schedule:

.1 Security: GREEN

.2 In addition to painting miscellaneous signal boxes clearly identify the specific

system in which the box is installed.


ELECTRICAL Unit Equipment for Emergency Lighting Section 16965 Project No. 09019 Page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Instructions .1 Conform to General Provisions, Section 16010.

1.2 Related Work .1 General Provisions: Section 16010 .2 Basic Materials & Methods: Section 16300

1.3 Submittals .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 16010.

1.4 Warranty .1 Battery: 5 years (prorated) .2 Charger: 5 years

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Battery Units - General Requirements .1 Equipment: to CSA C22.2 No. 141.

.2 Battery Units shall be capable of supplying the wattage indicated, for a minimum

of 30 minutes to 91% end voltage, and for 90 minutes to automatic cut-off.

.3 Supply Voltage: 120 VAC.

.4 Output Voltage: 12 VDC.

.5 Battery: sealed, maintenance free, shall operate a minimum of 10 years entirely unattended.

.6 Charger: Solid state, automatic type.

.7 Solid state transfer.

.8 Signal Lights: for 'AC power ON' and 'High Charge'.



.9 Lamp Heads: Two lamps integral in unit and remote adjustable mounting, swivel type, complete with lamps as specified and listed in Fixture Schedule in this section.

.10 Cabinet: Suitable for direct or shelf mounting to wall and complete with knockouts for conduit.

.11 Auxiliary Equipment: .1 Press-to-Test Switch .2 Fused Protection .3 Ready Disconnect Switch and Light .4 Shelf Bracket .5 Cord and Plug Connection for AC.

2.2 Wiring of Remote Heads .1 All wiring shall be RW90, #10 AWG (minimum) for each circuit and run in conduit.

Wiring sizes in accordance with Manufacturers recommendations for distances required.

2.3 Manufacturers .1 Approved Manufacturers:

.1 Lumacell

.2 Dual-Lite

.3 Emergi-Lite

.4 Aimlite

.2 The equipment listed below is of Lumacell Manufacture and is used only to establish a standard of quality.

2.4 Battery Units .1 Lumacell Cat. No. RGS Series (or equal):

.1 BU-1: 144W @ 0.5 hours

.2 BU-2: 360W @ 0.5 hours

2.5 Remote Emergency Lighting Fixtures .1 Supply and install emergency lighting fixtures and lamps as specified below.



.2 All emergency fixtures in Mechanical/Electrical Rooms to be complete with wire guard. .1 Fixture Type 'Y1': Surface mounted, remote emergency lighting head

complete with 1-12V, 20W narrow flood MR16 lamp and white finish. Manufacturer to match BU-1.

.2 Fixture Type 'Y2': Same as type 'Y1' except double head unit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation .1 Mount battery units and heads at 7' (2100 mm) or as indicated.

.2 Provide 120V, 15A, single receptacle on dedicated circuit adjacent to battery unit.

.3 Install unit equipment and remote mounted fixtures as indicated. Provide 12"

(300 mm) minimum clear space in front of unit enclosure face equipped with any controls or switches.

.4 Direct heads as indicated.

3.2 Testing & Verification .1 When the installation of the battery units, remote emergency lights and

associated wiring has been completed, retain the services of a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer to test the complete installation and operation of the system.

.2 Following completion of the test, obtain a letter from the manufacturer/supplier,

stating that the battery units and associated lights have been completely checked and are operating satisfactorily.

.3 Submit three (3) copies of letter to the Architect.


ELECTRICAL Modular Control Panels Section 16995 Project No. 09019 Page 1 PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Work



.3 Mechanical Specification: Division 15

1.2 Submittals .1 Provide Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 16010.

.2 Shop Drawings to clearly indicate all materials supplied by this Section,

installation methods and all cut-outs as required.

.3 Drawings to show all reinforcing as required to support equipment by Others.

1.3 Sample Control Panel .1 One typical sample of control panel to be submitted to job site for Architect's

approval. Panel to be complete with clock, speaker, call switch, light switch (120V), receptacle, T.V. outlet, thermostat, telephone space, etc.

1.4 Maintenance Data .1 Submit data for incorporation under Tab #8 into operation and maintenance

manuals in accordance with Section 16010.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

.1 Provide modular control panels as detailed on the drawings and specified herein as manufactured by Interspec Systems Limited, Rosemount, Ontario 705-435-0294, and represented by Patry Products, Scarborough, Ontario, 416-763-0398, Fax: 416-267-4954. Specified manufacturer's products establish minimum standards and shall be base bid. Approved Alternate: Wolfe Works, Ph: 905-226-1015.


ELECTRICAL Modular Control Panels Section 16995 Project No. 09019 Page 2

.2 Modular control panels shall be constructed of structurally sound 6063 T5 alloy satin anodized aluminum frame. 0.80 mm thick; with high pressure plastic laminate faced panels of lightweight particle core and .050 mm thick plastic laminate backing sheet. Plastic laminate colour as selected by the Architect from Arborite or Formica, furniture finish, from manufacturers standard colour range. Complete assembly to meet flame spread ratings in areas used.

.3 Units to be completed with backboxes fabricated from heavy gauge stain coat

steel with suitable barriers and continuous knockouts. Satin anodized face plates shall be prepunched to accept detailed components.

.4 All panels shall be vandal resistant and removable with special tools for service access.

.5 Fabricate units in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings with extruded aluminum frames and solid plastic laminated face panels.

.6 Panels to be removable from aluminum frames.

.7 Front panels to have colour finish selected by Architect.

.8 Panel to include a special recessed compartment to house the telephone handset.

.9 Panels to have all openings, mounting hardware, etc. for services as required for installation of mechanical and electrical services by Division 15 and 16.

.10 Unit to be full height from 4" off floor 4" above ceiling grid.

.11 Provide necessary supports on side of frame for 120 Volt BX cable so it does not run over speaker and cause sound interference.

2.2 Modular Panel Schedule

.1 For panel layout refer to drawings.

.2 For Modular Control Panel Schedules, see end of this Section.

.3 Division 16 to job site measure before ordering panels.


ELECTRICAL Modular Control Panels Section 16995 Project No. 09019 Page 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

.1 Division 16 to install units in accordance with manufacturers recommendations

and reviewed Shop Drawings complete with all frames, cutouts, face panels etc. to provide a complete installation.

3.2 Co-Ordination .1 It is Division 16 responsibility to co-ordinate complete installation of all

mechanical, electrical and miscellaneous services in all control panels. Components within control panels will vary from room to room.

Modular Control Panels Section 16995 Project No. 09019 Page 4